Mdrs 155

Digital Microwave Radio
Systems
MDRS 155 S
Operating Manual (OM)
Release 5.1
05PHA00145AAF
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
Marconi Communications GmbH
D-71520 Backnang
Telefon (07191) 13-0 Telefax (07191) 13-3212
http://www.marconi.com
Copyright 2005 by Marconi Communications GmbH
(hierin bezeichnet als Marconi)
Änderungen vorbehalten • Gedruckt in Deutschland
Marconi, Marconi Communications, das Marconi Logo,

MDRS, MDMS und ServiceOn Access sind
eingetragene Markenzeichen
von Marconi Communications GmbH.
Windows ist ein eingetragenes Markenzeichen der
Microsoft Corporation, Redmond.

D-71520 Backnang
Telephone +49 (7191) 13-0 Telefax +49 (7191) 13-3212
(herein referred to as Marconi)
Specifications subject to change • Printed in Germany
Marconi, Marconi Communications, the Marconi logo,

MDRS, MDMS and ServiceOn Access are
trademarks of
Marconi Communications GmbH.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation,
Redmond.
Operating Manual Review Note
Review Note
OM version Register Reason for update

Date of issue
05PHA00145AAF
Review Note Operating Manual
This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.
05PHA00145AAF
Operating Manual Register Contents
Contents
Register Titel
1 Description 05PHA00150AAK
Release 5.1
Version:
ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
2 Mounting Instructions 05PHA00151AAM

Release 5.1
Version:
ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
3 Commissioning 05PHA00152AAP
Instructions Release 5.1
Version:
ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
4 OSPF Functions and 05PHA00153AAR

Commands Release 5.1
Version:
ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
05PHA00145AAF
Register Contents Operating Manual
05PHA00145AAF
Systems
MDRS 155 S
Description
Release 5.1
05PHA00150AAK
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
D-71520 Backnang
Telefon (07191) 13-0 Telefax (07191) 13-3212

eingetragene Markenzeichen von

D-71520 Backnang

MDRS, MDMS and ServiceOn Access are trademarks of
Redmond.
05PHA00150AAK MDRS 155 S Description
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Contents
Contents
Contents................................................................................................... I
Figures ..................................................................................................VII
Abbreviations ........................................................................................XI
System Family and Equipment Designations...................................XIII
1 New Generation of Microwave Radio Systems ...........................1-1

1.1 SDH Digital Microwave Radio Systems from Marconi Communications GmbH........... 1-1
1.2 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) ............................................................................... 1-2
1.3 MDRS 155 S Digital Microwave Radio Systems of the new generation ......................... 1-3
1.4 Special features of MDRS 155 S ......................................................................................... 1-4
1.5 Frequency bands available ................................................................................................. 1-5
2 Short Description ...........................................................................2-1

2.1 System components............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Antennas............................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.1 Antenna types ................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.2.1.1 Lens antennas ......................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.1.2 Parabolic antennas.................................................................................................. 2-6
2.2.1.3 Shell antennas......................................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.2 Antenna gain................................................................................................................. 2-10
2.3 Outdoor Units ..................................................................................................................... 2-20
2.3.1 Transmit direction ......................................................................................................... 2-20
2.3.2 Receive direction .......................................................................................................... 2-20
2.3.3 Outdoor Unit power supply ........................................................................................... 2-20
2.3.4 Cable branching network .............................................................................................. 2-20
2.3.5 Signalling, monitoring and configuration....................................................................... 2-21
2.3.6 Filter boxes/ RF filters................................................................................................... 2-21
2.3.6.1 Replacing the channel filter in systems with ODU LEX......................................... 2-22
2.3.7 Mechanical design of the Outdoor Units....................................................................... 2-24
2.3.7.1 ODU S ................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.3.7.2 ODU L (no license for use in Germany) ................................................................ 2-27
2.3.7.3 ODU LX ................................................................................................................. 2-29
2.4 Indoor Unit .......................................................................................................................... 2-32
2.4.1 Versions ........................................................................................................................ 2-33
2.4.2 IDU modules ................................................................................................................. 2-33
2.4.2.1 Mainboard and backplane ..................................................................................... 2-34
2.4.2.2 Power supply (PS)................................................................................................. 2-35
2.4.2.3 Fan module (FAN) ................................................................................................. 2-35
2.4.2.4 EOW (optional) ...................................................................................................... 2-35
2.4.3 Indoor Unit (IDU) interfaces .......................................................................................... 2-36
2.4.4 Signalling, monitoring and configuration....................................................................... 2-37
2.4.5 Views of the Indoor Unit (IDU) ...................................................................................... 2-38
3 Configurations................................................................................3-1
3.1 General.................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 Operating modes ............................................................................................................ 3-1
Marconi I
MDRS 155 S Description 05PHA00150AAK
Contents Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
3.1.2 2xSTM-1 features ........................................................................................................... 3-2

3.1.3 4xSTM-1 features ........................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.4 6xSTM-1 features (only ODU S)..................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Utilization of the frequency pattern.................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1 Co-polar connection (to one polarization)....................................................................... 3-3
3.2.2 Cross-polar connection (using two polarizations)........................................................... 3-5
3.3 Terminal and repeater station............................................................................................. 3-5
3.4 System configurations with ODU S.................................................................................... 3-6
3.4.1 Outdoor Unit with broadband filter (with filter box BB).................................................... 3-8
3.4.1.1 1+0 configuration ..................................................................................................... 3-8
3.4.1.2 2+0 configuration ..................................................................................................... 3-9
3.4.1.3 4+0 configuration ................................................................................................... 3-11
3.4.2 Outdoor Unit with channel filter (filter box BU).............................................................. 3-13
3.4.2.1 1+0 configuration with channel filter ...................................................................... 3-15
3.4.2.2 2+0 configuration - Connection with channel filter................................................. 3-16
3.4.2.3 4+0 configuration with channel filters and dual-polar operation ............................ 3-18
3.4.2.4 6+0 configuration (optionally 4+2 with DPU-STM-4) ............................................. 3-19
3.5 System configurations with ODU L (no license for use in Germany)........................... 3-20
3.5.1 1+0 configuration .......................................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.2 2+0 configuration .......................................................................................................... 3-20
3.5.3 4+0 configuration .......................................................................................................... 3-22
3.6 System configurations with ODU LX ............................................................................... 3-23
3.6.1 1+0 configuration .......................................................................................................... 3-23
3.6.2 2+0 configuration .......................................................................................................... 3-23
3.6.3 4+0 configuration ......................................................................................................... 3-25
3.7 Protection switching with MDRS 155 S ........................................................................... 3-26
3.7.1 Configuration options (overview) .................................................................................. 3-28
3.7.2 Equipment protection configuration with RF switch (only ODU S) ............................... 3-29
3.7.2.1 Signal flow ............................................................................................................. 3-29
3.7.2.2 System diagram..................................................................................................... 3-30
3.7.3 Equipment protection configuration with RF coupler .................................................... 3-31
3.7.3.1 Signal flow ............................................................................................................. 3-31
3.7.3.2 System diagram..................................................................................................... 3-32
3.7.4 Equipment protection configuration with RF switch and line switch (only ODU S)....... 3-34
3.7.4.1 Signal flow ............................................................................................................. 3-34
3.7.5 Equipment protection configuration with RF coupler and line switch ........................... 3-37
3.7.5.1 Signal flow ............................................................................................................. 3-37
3.7.5.2 System diagram..................................................................................................... 3-39
3.7.6 Line protection configuration......................................................................................... 3-40
3.7.6.1 Signal flow ............................................................................................................. 3-40
3.7.6.2 System diagram (cross-polar connection) ............................................................. 3-41
3.7.6.3 System diagram (connection to one polarization) ................................................. 3-41
3.7.7 Line protection configuration with line switch................................................................ 3-42
3.7.7.1 Signal flow ............................................................................................................. 3-42
3.8 Diversity .............................................................................................................................. 3-44
3.8.1 Space diversity.............................................................................................................. 3-44
3.8.2 1+1 space diversity ....................................................................................................... 3-44
3.8.3 Frequency diversity....................................................................................................... 3-44
4 Local Maintenance Terminal......................................................... 4-1

4.1 Direct connection to the LMT interface ............................................................................. 4-2
4.2 LAN/WAN connection via TCP/IP ....................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.1 IP address information for MDRS 155 S......................................................................... 4-4
4.2.2 IP address information for the LMT ................................................................................ 4-4
4.2.3 Protocol stack of the TCP/IP connection ........................................................................ 4-4
II Marconi
4.3 Modem link ........................................................................................................................... 4-5
5 MDRS 155 S System in the Data Communication Network ........5-1

5.1 Integration into a TMN ......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Introduction to the SISA network .................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.3 Network element addressing in the SISA network ......................................................... 5-3
5.1.4 Basic information on protocols........................................................................................ 5-4
5.1.5 SISA protocols ................................................................................................................ 5-5
5.1.5.1 User protocol (AWP01)............................................................................................ 5-5
5.1.5.2 Switching protocol (VMP01) .................................................................................... 5-6
5.1.6 Connection of MDRS 155 S to the ServiceOn Access System...................................... 5-7
5.1.7 Protocol stack of interfaces............................................................................................. 5-8
5.1.7.1 QD2 interface .......................................................................................................... 5-8
5.1.7.2 OSI protocol stack ................................................................................................... 5-9
5.1.7.3 TCP/IP protocol stack............................................................................................ 5-10
5.1.7.4 Routing functionality .............................................................................................. 5-10
5.1.7.5 Multi-protocol stack................................................................................................ 5-11
5.2 DCN operating modes ....................................................................................................... 5-12
5.2.1 Connection to an OSI network...................................................................................... 5-12
5.2.2 Connection to a QD2 network....................................................................................... 5-13
5.2.2.1 MDRS 155 S used as Slave without SISA concentrator function ......................... 5-13
5.2.2.2 MDRS 155 S used as Slave with SISA concentrator function .............................. 5-14
5.2.3 Connection to an IP network......................................................................................... 5-15
5.2.3.1 Connection to an IP network without SISA concentrator function......................... 5-15
5.2.3.2 Connection to an IP network with SISA concentrator function.............................. 5-16
5.2.4 Overview of DCN operating modes .............................................................................. 5-17
5.3 Addresses for setting up a connection to ServiceOn Access ...................................... 5-18
5.3.1 Addresses for setting up a direct QD2 connection ....................................................... 5-18
5.3.2 Addresses for OSI transport ......................................................................................... 5-18
5.3.2.1 TSAP addresses.................................................................................................... 5-18
5.3.2.2 NSAP addresses ................................................................................................... 5-18
5.3.2.3 SISA-V Gateway address...................................................................................... 5-21
5.3.2.4 Internet addresses................................................................................................. 5-22
5.3.3 Ethernet address .......................................................................................................... 5-22
5.3.4 Summary of address settings ....................................................................................... 5-23
6 Technical Characteristics (Typical Values) .................................6-1

6.1 MDRS 155 S systems – with ODU S ................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 MDRS 155/ ... –128 MLQAM CS and KS systems......................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 MDRS 155/ ... –16 MLQAM systems CS and KS........................................................... 6-2
6.2 MDRS 155 S systems – with ODU L (no license for use in Germany) ............................ 6-4
6.2.1 MDRS 155/ ... –128 MLQAM LS systems ...................................................................... 6-4
6.3 MDRS 155 S systems – with ODU LX................................................................................. 6-6
6.3.1 MDRS 155/ ... –128 MLQAM EXS and KXS systems .................................................... 6-6
6.3.2 MDRS 155/ ... –128 MLQAM MXS systems................................................................... 6-8
6.3.3 MDRS 155/ ... –16 MLQAM MXS systems..................................................................... 6-9
6.4 MDRS 155 S systems – with ODU S Mexico................................................................... 6-10
6.4.1 MDRS 155/ ... –128 MLQAM CS/MX systems ............................................................. 6-10
6.5 MDRS 155 S systems – with ODU S Brazil ...................................................................... 6-12
6.5.1 MDRS 155/ ... –16 MLQAM CS/BR systems................................................................ 6-12
6.6 Start-up delay of the Tx amplifier ..................................................................................... 6-14
6.7 Signal delay time between the transmitter and receiver ............................................... 6-14
6.8 Branching loss ................................................................................................................... 6-15
Marconi III
6.8.1 Systems with ODU S .................................................................................................... 6-15

6.8.1.1 128 MLQAM........................................................................................................... 6-15
6.8.1.2 16 MLQAM............................................................................................................. 6-15
6.8.1.3 RF coupler ............................................................................................................. 6-15
6.8.2 Systems with ODU L (no license for use in Germany) ................................................. 6-15
6.8.2.1 RF coupler ............................................................................................................. 6-15
6.8.3 Systems with ODU LX .................................................................................................. 6-15
6.8.3.1 RF coupler ............................................................................................................. 6-15
6.9 Indoor Unit - Outdoor Unit connecting cables ................................................................ 6-16
6.10 Waveguide lengths for remote antenna mounting ......................................................... 6-16
6.11 STM-1 interface .................................................................................................................. 6-16
6.12 EOW interfaces................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.13 Power supply ...................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.14 Fan control.......................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.15 Environmental conditions ................................................................................................. 6-19
6.16 Dimensions and weights ................................................................................................... 6-20
6.16.1 Outdoor Unit ODU S ..................................................................................................... 6-20
6.16.2 Outdoor Unit ODU L...................................................................................................... 6-20
6.16.3 Outdoor Unit ODU LX ................................................................................................... 6-20
6.16.4 Indoor Units................................................................................................................... 6-20
6.17 EMC / Equipment safety / Protection type....................................................................... 6-21
6.18 CE conformity..................................................................................................................... 6-21
7 Ordering Information ..................................................................... 7-1

7.1 Outdoor Units ODU S and accessories ............................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 18.7 GHz band with ODU S ............................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.1.1 128 MLQAM systems .............................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1.2 16 MLQAM systems ................................................................................................ 7-3
7.1.1.3 Accessories ............................................................................................................. 7-5
7.1.2 23 GHz band with ODU S ............................................................................................... 7-6
7.1.2.1 128 MLQAM systems .............................................................................................. 7-6
7.1.2.2 16 MLQAM systems ................................................................................................ 7-8
7.1.2.3 Accessories ............................................................................................................. 7-9
7.1.3 26 GHz band with ODU S ............................................................................................. 7-10
7.1.3.1 128 MLQAM systems ............................................................................................ 7-10
7.1.3.2 16 MLQAM systems .............................................................................................. 7-12
7.1.3.3 Accessories ........................................................................................................... 7-13
7.1.4 28 GHz band with ODU S ............................................................................................. 7-14
7.1.4.1 128 MLQAM systems ............................................................................................ 7-14
7.1.4.2 16 MLQAM systems .............................................................................................. 7-16
7.1.4.3 Accessories ........................................................................................................... 7-17
7.2 Outdoor Units ODU L and accessories (no license for use in Germany) ................... 7-18
7.2.1 7.5 GHz band with ODU L (no license for use in Germany)......................................... 7-18
7.2.1.1 128 MLQAM systems with 161 MHz duplex spacing ............................................ 7-18
7.2.1.2 Accessories ........................................................................................................... 7-19
7.2.2 13 GHz band with ODU L (no license for use in Germany).......................................... 7-20
7.2.2.2 Accessories ........................................................................................................... 7-20
7.2.3 15 GHz band with ODU L (no license for use in Germany).......................................... 7-21
7.2.3.5 Accessories ........................................................................................................... 7-22
IV Marconi
7.3 Outdoor Units ODU LX and accessories ......................................................................... 7-23

7.3.1 7.5 GHz band with ODU LX.......................................................................................... 7-23
7.3.1.1 128 MLQAM systems with 154 MHz duplex spacing (for use in Germany).......... 7-23
7.3.1.2 128 MLQAM systems (for export) ......................................................................... 7-23
7.3.1.3 Accessories ........................................................................................................... 7-26
7.3.2 11 GHz band with ODU LX........................................................................................... 7-27
7.3.2.1 128 MLQAM systems (for export) ......................................................................... 7-27
7.3.2.2 Accessories ........................................................................................................... 7-30
7.3.3.1 128 MLQAM systems ............................................................................................ 7-31
7.3.3.2 Accessories ........................................................................................................... 7-31
7.3.4.1 128 MLQAM systems ............................................................................................ 7-33
7.3.4.2 16 MLQAM systems .............................................................................................. 7-35
7.3.4.3 Accessories ........................................................................................................... 7-36
7.4 Indoor Units and accessories........................................................................................... 7-37
7.5 Special devices – Dehydrators ......................................................................................... 7-39
8 Service Instructions .......................................................................8-1
Marconi V
VI Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Figures
Figures
Note Some of the systems depicted in this document include options which do
not belong to the normal delivery sope and have to be separately ordered.
Technical contents and characteristics subject to modification.
Fig. 1-1 Assignment of SOH and POH bytes ............................................................................... 1-2

Fig. 1-2 Components of a 1+0 radio link (setup with ODU S) .................................................... 1-3
Fig. 1-3 Frequency bands.............................................................................................................. 1-5
Fig. 2-1 System components (example) ...................................................................................... 2-1
Fig. 2-2 Lens antenna (PL) 0.15 m ................................................................................................ 2-5
Fig. 2-3 Parabolic antennas (UHP) 0.6 m and 1.2 m ................................................................... 2-7
Fig. 2-4 Comparison of a parabolic antenna with a shell antenna............................................ 2-8
Fig. 2-5 Shell antennas (SHP) 0.6 m and 1.2 m ........................................................................... 2-9
Fig. 2-6 0.3 m antenna with ODU S............................................................................................. 2-11
Fig. 2-7 0.6 m antenna with ODU S............................................................................................. 2-12
Fig. 2-8 1.2/2 m antenna with ODU S.......................................................................................... 2-13
Fig. 2-9 1.2/2 m antenna with ODU S (lateral view)................................................................... 2-14
Fig. 2-10 Integrated 0.15 m lens antenna with ODU S (lateral view) ..................................... 2-15
Fig. 2-11 Integrated 0.15 m lens antenna with ODU S (top view) .......................................... 2-16
Fig. 2-12 Integrated 0.15 m lens antenna with ODU S (rear view) ......................................... 2-17
Fig. 2-13 Direct antenna mounting - ODU L in a 1+0 configuration ...................................... 2-18
Fig. 2-14 Direct antenna mounting - ODU L in a 1+1 configuration ...................................... 2-18
Fig. 2-15 ODU LX – 1+0 configuration with integrated antenna (30 cm)............................... 2-19
Fig. 2-16 ODU LX – 1+1 or 2+0 configuration with integrated antenna (60 cm) ................... 2-19
Fig. 2-17 Opening/closing the housing cover (ODU LEX) ...................................................... 2-22
Fig. 2-18 Disconnecting/connecting the flat ribbon cable (ODU LEX).................................. 2-22
Fig. 2-19 Dismounting the channel filter (ODU LEX) .............................................................. 2-23
Fig. 2-20 Nameplate of channel filter (ODU LEX) .................................................................... 2-23
Fig. 2-21 ODU S – 1+0 configuration with remote antenna .................................................... 2-24
Fig. 2-22 ODU S – 1+1 configuration with RF coupler and remote antenna......................... 2-24
Fig. 2-23 ODU S – 4+0 configuration with remote antenna .................................................... 2-25
Fig. 2-24 Views of Outdoor Unit ODU S.................................................................................... 2-26
Fig. 2-25 ODU L – 1+0 configuration with compact antenna ................................................. 2-27
Fig. 2-26 ODU L – 1+1 or 2+0 configuration with compact antenna...................................... 2-27
Fig. 2-27 Views of Outdoor Unit (ODU L) ................................................................................. 2-28
Fig. 2-28 ODU LX – Direct antenna mounting in a 1+0 configuration ................................. 2-29
Fig. 2-29 ODU LX – 1+0 configuration with remote antenna.................................................. 2-29
Fig. 2-30 ODU LX – in 1+1 or 2+0 configuration with compact antenna ............................... 2-30
Fig. 2-31 ODU LX – in 1+1 or 2+0 configuration with remote antenna.................................. 2-30
Fig. 2-32 Bottom view of Outdoor Unit ODU LX ...................................................................... 2-31
Fig. 2-33 Indoor Unit MDRS 155 S............................................................................................. 2-32
Fig. 2-34 Indoor Unit interfaces................................................................................................. 2-36
Fig. 2-35 Front side and top view of Indoor Unit..................................................................... 2-38
Fig. 3-1 Setup with remote coupler (single channel spacing) .......................................... 3-4
Fig. 3-2 CCDP and ACAP operation ............................................................................................. 3-5
Fig. 3-3 System with filter box BB ................................................................................................ 3-6
Fig. 3-4 System with filter box BU ................................................................................................ 3-7
Fig. 3-5 1+0 configuration ............................................................................................................. 3-8
Marconi VII
Figures Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
Fig. 3-6 Filter box BB ..................................................................................................................... 3-8

Fig. 3-7 2+0 configuration (with OMT).......................................................................................... 3-9
Fig. 3-8 2+0 configuration (with two antennas)........................................................................... 3-9
Fig. 3-9 2+0 configuration (with RF coupler) ............................................................................. 3-10
Fig. 3-10 Filter boxes BB with coupler ..................................................................................... 3-10
Fig. 3-11 4+0 configuration (example with two antennas and OMTs) ................................... 3-11
Fig. 3-12 4+0 configuration (example with one antenna and RF couplers) .......................... 3-12
Fig. 3-13 Block diagram of the Outdoor Unit and filter box ................................................... 3-13
Fig. 3-14 Outdoor Unit and filter box BU.................................................................................. 3-14
Fig. 3-15 1+0 configuration (with channel filter)...................................................................... 3-15
Fig. 3-16 Channel filter (filter box BU) with antenna circulator ............................................. 3-15
Fig. 3-17 2+0 configuration (with channel filter)...................................................................... 3-16
Fig. 3-18 Outdoor Units with filter boxes BU ........................................................................... 3-16
Fig. 3-19 Connection of two channels via channel filter ........................................................ 3-17
Fig. 3-20 Interconnected filter boxes BU.................................................................................. 3-17
Fig. 3-21 4+0 configuration with channel filters and dual-polarized operation.................... 3-18
Fig. 3-22 4+2 configuration with optional DPU STM-4 ............................................................ 3-19
Fig. 3-23 1+0 terminal configuration......................................................................................... 3-20
Fig. 3-24 2+0 configuration (with OMT) .................................................................................... 3-20
Fig. 3-25 2+0 configuration (with two antennas) ..................................................................... 3-21
Fig. 3-26 2+0 configuration (with RF coupler) ......................................................................... 3-21
Fig. 3-27 4+0 configuration using couplers ............................................................................. 3-22
Fig. 3-28 1+0 configuration ........................................................................................................ 3-23
Fig. 3-29 2+0 configuration (with OMT) .................................................................................... 3-23
Fig. 3-30 2+0 configuration (with two antennas) ..................................................................... 3-24
Fig. 3-31 2+0 configuration (with RF coupler) ......................................................................... 3-24
Fig. 3-32 4+0 configuration with couplers................................................................................ 3-25
Fig. 3-33 EQP configuration with RF switch Operating channel (OP) active ....................... 3-29
Fig. 3-34 EQP configuration with RF switch Protection channel (PR) active....................... 3-29
Fig. 3-35 1+1 EQP configuration with RF switch (system overview; only ODU S) .............. 3-30
Fig. 3-36 RF switch - ODU S ...................................................................................................... 3-30
Fig. 3-37 EQP configuration with RF coupler Operating channel (OP) active...................... 3-31
Fig. 3-38 EQP configuration with RF coupler Protection channel (PR) active ..................... 3-31
Fig. 3-39 1+1 equipment protection config. with RF coupler ................................................. 3-32
Fig. 3-40 RF coupler - ODU S..................................................................................................... 3-32
Fig. 3-41 RF coupler - ODU LX .................................................................................................. 3-33
Fig. 3-42 RF coupler - ODU L..................................................................................................... 3-33
Fig. 3-43 EQP config. with RF switch and line switch Operating channel (OP) active........ 3-34
Fig. 3-44 EQP config. with RF switch and line switch Protection channel (PR) active ....... 3-34
Fig. 3-45 EQP config. with RF switch and line switch PR active / total failure of OP-IDU .. 3-35
Fig. 3-46 Line switch (optical) ................................................................................................... 3-36
Fig. 3-47 Line switch (electrical) ............................................................................................... 3-36
Fig. 3-48 EQP config. with RF switch and line switch Operating channel (OP) active........ 3-37
Fig. 3-49 EQP config. with RF switch and line switch Protection channel (PR) active ....... 3-37
Fig. 3-50 EQP config. with RF switch and line switch PR active / total failure of OP IDU... 3-38
Fig. 3-51 1+1 equipment protection with RF coupler and line switch................................... 3-39
Fig. 3-52 Line protection configuration Operating channel (OP) active ............................... 3-40
Fig. 3-53 Line protection configuration Protection channel (PR) active............................... 3-40
VIII Marconi
Fig. 3-54 1+1 line protection configuration (with cross-polar connection) .......................... 3-41
Fig. 3-55 1+1 line protection configuration (connection to one polarization)...................... 3-41
Fig. 3-56 Line protection configuration with line switch Operating channel (OP) active ... 3-42
Fig. 3-57 Line protection configuration with line switch Protection channel (PR) active... 3-42
Fig. 3-58 Line protection config. with line switch PR active / total failure of OP IDU ......... 3-43
Fig. 3-59 Terminal configuration with space diversity ........................................................... 3-44
Fig. 4-1 Protocol stack for connecting the LMT via the serial PC interface............................. 4-2
Fig. 4-2 TCP/IP connection between the MDRS 155 S and LMT................................................ 4-3
Fig. 4-3 Protocol stack for connecting the LMT via TCP/IP ....................................................... 4-5
Fig. 4-4 Connection of the LMT via a modem link ...................................................................... 4-5
Fig. 5-1 Structure of a QD2-SISA network ................................................................................... 5-2
Fig. 5-2 OSI 7-layer model ............................................................................................................. 5-4
Fig. 5-3 Data packaging in the individual protocol layers ......................................................... 5-5
Fig. 5-4 Switching protocol (VMP01)............................................................................................ 5-6
Fig. 5-5 Switching structure .......................................................................................................... 5-7
Fig. 5-6 Connection options to ServiceOn Access..................................................................... 5-7
Fig. 5-7 Structure of the QD2 protocol stack............................................................................... 5-8
Fig. 5-8 OSI protocol stack............................................................................................................ 5-9
Fig. 5-9 TCP/IP protocol stack .................................................................................................... 5-10
Fig. 5-10 Structure of the QD2/OSI/TCP/IP multi-protocol stack ........................................... 5-11
Fig. 5-11 Q3p mode .................................................................................................................... 5-12
Fig. 5-12 QD2 Slave mode ......................................................................................................... 5-13
Fig. 5-13 QD2-SISA-V mode....................................................................................................... 5-14
Fig. 5-14 QD2-IP mode ............................................................................................................... 5-15
Fig. 5-15 QD2-SISA-V-IP mode .................................................................................................. 5-16
Fig. 5-16 Structure of a Routing Domain.................................................................................. 5-19
Fig. 5-17 Structure of the NSAP address ................................................................................. 5-19
Fig. 5-18 Structure of the system ID for remote logon ........................................................... 5-21
Fig. 6-1 System overview / Equipment configuration .............................................................. 6-15
Marconi IX
X Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Abbreviations
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
10Base-T Ethernet Standard for Local Baseband Networks, 10 Mbit/s
ACAP Adjacent-Channel Alternate-Polarized Operation (corresponds to ACDP mode)
ACCP Adjacent-Channel Co-Polarization
ACDP Adjacent-Channel Dual-Polarized Operation
ADR Address Switch for Operating Mode Adjustment
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AIS Alarm Identification Signal
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
ATN Analog Terminal Network
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control
BAT Battery, Power Supply Access
AT Bit Error Pulse
BB Broadband Filter
BU Branching Unit (Channel Filter)
CCDP Co-Channel Dual-Polarized Operation
CF Channel Filter (only for 18.7 GHz / 16 MLQAM)
CMI Coded Mark Inversion
CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCCM Data Communication Channel in the MSOH
DCCR Data Communication Channel in the RSOH
DCN Data Communication Network
DSC Digital Service Channel (64 kbit/s channel)
DTMF Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency
EA-RU Equipment Alarm - Radio Unit
EDI External Device Interface
EOW Engineering Order Wire; Service Channel for Voice Transmission
EQP Equipment Protection
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
exp. expanded
EXTEOW Connection for External EOW Extension
FEC Forward Error Correction
GND Ground
IDU Indoor Unit
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IF Intermediate Frequency
ITU-R International Telecommunication Union - Radio Communication
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Standard
KDS Loss of Signal
LAN Local Area Network
LED Light Emitting Diode
LEI Line Error Pulse
LFI Line Error Pulse
LMT Local Maintenance Terminal
LO Local Oscillator
LON Local Operating Network
LOS Loss of Signal
LP Line Protection
MCU Monitoring & Control Unit
MDRS Marconi Digital Microwave Radio System
MLQAM Multi-Level QAM
MMIC Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit
MSOH Multiplex Section Overhead
MST Multiplex Section Termination
Marconi XI
Abbreviations Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
nc. not connected

NRZ Non-Return to Zero
OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance
ODU Outdoor Unit (also referred to as Radio Unit)
OMT OrthoMode Transducer
OP Operating Channel
OPT Optical
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
PABX Private Automatic Branch Exchange
PC Personal Computer
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
Phone Telephone Access for EOW
POH Path Overhead
PR Protection Channel
PS Power Supply
Q3p QD2 on top of OSI
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QD2 Q-Interface
RF Radio Frequency
RPS Radio Protection Switching
RST Regenerator Section Termination
RTPC Remote Transmit Power Control
SAW Surface Acoustic Wave
Sd/Em (Tx/Rx) Transmitter/Receiver
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SERV Service LED
SISA Supervisory and Information System for Local and Remote Areas
SMV (PS) Power Supply
SOA ServiceOn Access (previously: NSÜ)
SOH Section Overhead
STM Synchronous Transport Module
TCP/IP Transport Control Protocol
TMN Telecommunication Management Network
UHP Ultra-High Performance
WAN Wide Area Network
WSC Way-Side Channel (additional 2 Mbit/s data channel)
XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Canceller
ZF Intermediate Frequency
XII Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 System Family and Equipment Designations
System Family and Equipment Designations

The MDRS 155 S Digital Microwave Radio System with its System Software and
LMT Software Release 5 also supports the hardware components of both
Release 3 and Release 4.
System / Equipment designation
System MDRS 155 S = System designation
MDRS 155/...... - 128 MLQAM S = Equipment designation (up to Release 3)

ODU .... N
IDU 155 - 128 S or IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/...... - 128 MLQAM LS = Equipment designation (Rel. 4 and higher, for < 18 GHz)
ODU .... L with integrated broadband filter
IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/...... - 128 MLQAM CS = Equipment designation (Rel. 4 and higher; >18 GHz)
ODU .... S
Broadband filter
IDU 155-128 S or IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/...... - 16 MLQAM CS = Equipment designation (Release 4 and higher)

ODU .... S
Broadband filter
IDU 155 - 16 S
MDRS 155/...... - 128 MLQAM KS exp. = Equipment designation (Release 4 and higher)
ODU .... S
Channel filter with circulator
IDU 155 - 128 S or IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/...... - 16 MLQAM KS exp. = Equipment designation (Release 4 and higher)

ODU .... S
Channel filter with circulator
IDU 155 - 16 S
MDRS 155/...... - 16 MLQAM KS = Equipment designation (Release 4 and higher)

ODU .... S
Channel filter exp. = expandable
IDU 155 - 16 S
Marconi XIII
System Family and Equipment Designations Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
MDRS 155/...... - 128 MLQAM MXS = Equipment designation (Release 5 and higher)
ODU .... LMX with integrated broadband filter
IDU 155 - 128 LS
MDRS 155/...... - 16 MLQAM MXS = Equipment designation (Release 5 and higher)

ODU .... LMX with integrated broadband filter
IDU 155 - 16 LS
MDRS 155/...... - 128 MLQAM EXS = Equipment designation (Release 5 and higher)
ODU .... LEX with exchangeable filter
IDU 155 - 128 LS
MDRS 155/...... - 16 MLQAM EXS = Equipment designation (planned)

IDU 155 - 16 LS
MDRS 155/...... - 128 MLQAM KXS = Equipment designation (Release 5.1 and higher)
IDU 155 - 128 LS
In case of special country-specific versions, the equipment designations are

completed by the country code, e.g. MDRS 155/23000-128 MLQAM CS/MX for
Mexico.
All ODU types except ODU L are appropriate for XPIC operation.
XIV Marconi
The MDRS 155 S Digital Microwave Radio System, Release 3 includes the
following components:
Equipment designation Components

MDRS 155/18700-128 MLQAM S - ODU 155/18700-128 N *
- IDU 155-128 S / IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/23000-128 MLQAM S - ODU 155/23000-128 N *
- IDU 155-128 S / IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/26000-128 MLQAM S - ODU 155/26000-128 N *
- IDU 155-128 S / IDU 155-128 LS
The ODUs of version 3 have an integrated channel filter. Optionally, it is possible

to provide circulators.
Note * The ODUs of these systems are described in the following documents:
Designation Document type Document number

Digital Microwave Radio Systems RF/164-OM (11.03)
MDRS 155/18.7/ 23 / 26 - 128 MLQAM S Operator Manual AN00239158
includes: as from edition:
Register 1 Description 07.2003
Register 2 Mounting Instructions 11.2003
Register 3 Commissioning Instructions 07.2003
Marconi XV
The MDRS 155 S Digital Microwave Radio System, Release 4 with

broadband filter includes the following components:

(Release 4.4 and higher)
MDRS 155/7500-128 MLQAM LS - ODU 7-5 xxx-y L
- IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/13000-128 MLQAM LS - ODU 13 xxx-y L
- IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/15000-128 MLQAM LS - ODU 15-315 xxx-y L
- ODU 15-420 xxx-y L
- IDU 155-128 LS
Equipment designation
(Release 4 and higher)
MDRS 155/18700-128 MLQAM CS - ODU 155/18700-EDM S with filter box 18BB
- IDU 155-128 S / IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/23000-128 MLQAM CS - ODU 155/23000-128 S with filter box 23BB
- ODU 155/23000-EDM S with filter box 23BB
- IDU 155-128 S / IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/23000-128 MLQAM CS/MX - ODU 155/23000-M28 S with filter box 23BB-M28
- ODU 155/23000-M50 S with filter box 23BB-M50
- IDU 155-128 S / IDU 155-128 LS
- IDU 155-128 S / IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/28000-128 MLQAM CS - ODU 155/28000-128 S filter box 28BB
ODU 155/28000-EDM S filter box 28BB
- IDU 155-128 S / IDU 155-128 LS

- IDU 155-16 S
MDRS 155/18700-16 MLQAM CS/BR - ODU 155/18700-B55 S with filter box 18BB-B
- IDU 155-16 S
- IDU 155-16 S
MDRS 155/23000-16 MLQAM CS/BR - ODU 155/23000-B56 S with filter box 23BB-B
- IDU 155-16 S
- IDU 155-16 S
- IDU 155-16 S
xxx = LBT or UBT; y = 1, 2, ...
XVI Marconi
The MDRS 155 S Digital Microwave Radio System, Version 4 with channel
filter and circulators includes the following components:

MDRS 155/18700-128 MLQAM KS exp. - ODU 155/18700-EDM S with filter 18-128BU/xxx
- IDU 155-128 S / IDU 155-128 LS
- IDU 155-128 S / IDU 155-128 LS
- IDU 155-128 S / IDU 155-128 LS
- IDU 155-128 S / IDU 155-128 LS

- IDU 155-16 S
- IDU 155-16 S
- IDU 155-16 S
- IDU 155-16 S
The MDRS 155 S Digital Microwave Radio System, Version 4 with channel filter and
without circulators includes the following components:

MDRS 155/18700-16 MLQAM KS. - ODU 155/18700-EDM S with filter 18-16CF/xxx
- IDU 155-16 S
xxx = Channel number, e.g. 12a
Marconi XVII
The MDRS 155 S Digital Microwave Radio System, Version 5 with integrated
broadband filter includes the following components:

MDRS 155/18700-128 MLQAM MXS - ODU 18 xxx-y LMX (planned)
- IDU 155-128 LS
- IDU 155-128 LS
- IDU 155-128 LS
- IDU 155-128 LS
- IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/38000-128 MLQAM MXS 1
- ODU 38 xxx-y LMX
- IDU 155-1286 LS

- IDU 155-16 LS
- IDU 155-16 LS
- IDU 155-16 LS
- IDU 155-16 LS
- IDU 155-16 LS
MDRS 155/38000-16 MLQAM MXS 1
- ODU 38 xxx-y LMX
- IDU 155-16 LS
1
xxx = LBT or UBT, y = 1,2,3
XVIII Marconi
The MDRS 155 S Digital Microwave Radio System, Version 5.1 with
exchangeable channel filter includes the following components:

MDRS 155/7500-128 MLQAM EXS - ODU 7 SUB-1 LEX
- IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/7500-128 MLQAM KXS - ODU 7 SUB-y LEX (y = 1,2)
- IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/11000-128 MLQAM KXS - ODU 11 SUB-1 LEX
- IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/13000-128 MLQAM EXS - ODU 13 SUB-1 LEX
- IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/15000-128 MLQAM KXS - ODU 15 SUB-1 LEX (planned)
- IDU 155-128 LS
MDRS 155/18700-16 MLQAM EXS 1

- ODU 18 xxx-1 LEX (planned)
- IDU 155-16 LS
1
xxx = LBT or UBT
Marconi XIX
XX Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 New Generation of Microwave Radio Systems
1 New Generation of Microwave Radio Systems
1.1 SDH Digital Microwave Radio Systems from Marconi

Communications GmbH
Marconi Communications GmbH develops and manufactures
telecommunications systems worldwide.
Based on many years of experience in microwave radio technology, Marconi

Communications GmbH offers a complete, modular product portfolio of SDH
microwave radio systems with data rates from 155 Mbit/s (STM-1) to
622 Mbit/s (STM-4):
• Long-haul transmission systems

4 GHz to 13 GHz
• Short-haul transmission systems

7 GHz to 38 GHz
• Multiplex systems (separate from microwave radio systems)
• Radio access systems
• Lens antennas, parabolic antennas (S, HP, UHP) and shell antennas
• Waveguides
Marconi 1-1
New Generation of Microwave Radio Systems Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
1.2 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

State-of-the-art telecommunications networks represent the basis for the ever
increasing variety of communication services. The requirements to be met by
such networks have been continuously growing during the last few years. This
growth resulted in the necessity of an internationally standardized technology.
With the introduction of the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH), it was possible
to meet this requirement through a standardized multiplex hierarchy.
The Synchronous Digital Hierarchy supersedes the former Plesiochronous Digital
Hierarchy (PDH).
Besides standardization, SDH systems offer many advantages for the setup and
operation of state-of-the-art network structures. These include:
• Simple multiplexing procedure (no stuffing/destuffing);

• Common, network-wide reference clock;
• Direct access to individual channels;
• High bit rates for long-haul traffic links;
• High transmission capacity for network monitoring and control;
• Control by means of high-performance network management systems;
• Integration of already existing PDH structures;
• Uniform transmission network for all signal sources.
Fra me a lignme nt S TM
s igna l identifie r
261 byte s
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J 0/
RS OH C1 AU-4
B1 E1 F1
Voic e
Se rvic e cha nne l
D1 D2 D3
BER moni- S TM-1
toring H1 P ointe r H2 H3 H3 H3 Autom. prot. switch. s ign.
B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
Conne c tion che ck J1
D4 D5 D6
C -4
MS OH B3
D7 D8 D9 BE R monitoring P a yloa d
Ide nt. of VC conte nts C2
D10 D11 D12
S1 M1 E 2 Pa th sta tus G1
Z1 Z1 Z2 Z2
Use r c ha nne l F2
S ynchroniza tion Future purpose s Voic e Multifra me indic . H4 VC -4

s ta tus
Use r cha nne l F3
Se c tion RE I
Autom. prot. switching K3
D.. Da ta tra nsmiss ion Ma nage m. purpose s K4
S pare cha nnels
Fig. 1-1 Assignment of SOH and POH bytes
1-2 Marconi
1.3 MDRS 155 S Digital Microwave Radio Systems of the new

generation
The trends of international telecommunications markets require systems and
especially microwave radio systems which meet even the highest operator
demands in both the transport and access area. With increasing equipment
densities, compact equipment designs are preferred.
The new generation of digital short-haul microwave radio systems distinguishes

itself by
• the compact design of the Indoor Unit;
• functionalities;
• spectrum of possible applications;
• reliability;
• transmission quality and
• easy integration into a management network.
The new systems with their compact Indoor Unit offer both higher availability and
an improved spectrum characteristic allowing an even more efficient use of the
available bandwidths.
The new generation of digital microwave radio systems complies with the
standards and recommendations of national and international organizations such
as ETSI, ITU and CEPT.
Outdoor Unit (ODU) Outdoor Unit (ODU)

with antenna with antenna
Radio hop
Connecting cable Connecting cable

IDU-ODU IDU-ODU
(coaxial) (coaxial)
Indoor Unit (IDU) Indoor Unit (IDU)
STM-1 STM-1
Fig. 1-2 Components of a 1+0 radio link (setup with ODU S)
Marconi 1-3
1.4 Special features of MDRS 155 S

• Outdoor Units Rel. 3.x (ODU...N) to Rel. 4.x (ODU...S) are compatible
(mixed operation of different ODU versions possible as far end);
• Outdoor Units easily mountable to masts with diameters of 48 mm to 219 mm
(ODU L) or 63 mm to 219 mm (ODU S and ODU LX);
• Channel setting using synthesizer;
• Selection between different antenna types: Lens antenna, shell antenna,
parabolic antenna;
• Connection between Outdoor Unit and Indoor Unit via a coaxial cable with
integrated overvoltage protection (max. distance between ODU and IDU:
300 m with ODU S and ODU LX / 200 m with ODU L;
• Compact Indoor Unit – mountable in ETSI or 19“ subrack; flat design with
1.5 HU;
• Electrical (G.703) and/or optical (G.957) STM-1 interface;
• Expansion up to 4 x STM-1 or STM-4 possible in conjunction with DPU
STM-4 (also as 4+1 or 4+2 configuration – only with ODU S);
• 2 Mbit/s Wayside Channel (WSC);
• Digital service channels: 4×64 kbit/s in compliance with ITU-T G.703;
• 3 external alarm outputs on EDI 1;
• 10 external alarm inputs (3 on EDI 1; 7 on EDI 2);
• SDH Overhead processing with access to E1- and F1-bytes on line or radio
interface;
• Intelligent temperature management with three fans (1:2 redundancy) on one
plug-in module;
• Test loops for fault diagnosis;
• Performance evaluation in compliance with ITU-T G.826;
• Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC);
• Remote Transmit Power Control (RTPC) for ODU LX (with Software
Release 5.1 and higher)
• Forward Error Correction (FEC);
• Interfaces for local monitoring and diagnostic functions via a Local
Maintenance Terminal (LMT);
• Control using the ServiceOn Access Network Management System from
Marconi;
• DCN connection to the Network Management System via SISA, OSI or IP
network:
- LAN interface for TCP/IP and OSI, RS485 for SISA
- Support of integrated DCCR and DCCM Management channels
- Support of standardized OSPF/IP and OSI routing
- Configuration of the OSI stack
1-4 Marconi
• Co-channel operation with crossed polarization and XPIC operation

depending on ODU type.
1.5 Frequency bands available
The systems operate in the frequency bands of 7 GHz to 38 GHz.

Fig. 1-3 gives an overview of the corresponding frequency patterns.
MDRS 155 S can be supplied for almost each channel allocation, since the
integrated synthesizer permits tuning of both channel spacings and Tx/Rx duplex
spacings.
Frequency [GHz] 4 5 6L 6U 7 8 10 11 13 15 18 23 26 28 32 38 Frequency [GHz]

Channel spacing 40 29.65 27.5 28 Channel spacing
[MHz] 40 29.65 40 28 30 40 28
29 28 55 56 [MHz]
622 (STM-4) 128-MLQAM
16-MLQAM
2×155
MLQAM, CCDP
155 (STM-1)
Bit rate [Mbit/s] Modulation
MLQAM: Multi-level QAM

CCDP: Co-Channel Dual-Polarization Operation
Fig. 1-3 Frequency bands
Marconi 1-5
1-6 Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Short Description
2 Short Description
The MDRS 155 S Digital Microwave Radio System operates in the frequency
bands of 7 GHz to 38 GHz with 128 MLQAM or alternatively
16 MLQAM modulation (18 GHz and higher). In the ODU, channel allocation
takes please using a multi-loop synthesizer.
The system is designed for the transmission of STM-1 data streams (155 Mbit/s)
in the RST mode. An expansion to N+0 is possible by means of a combiner (3dB
coupler) or channel filter1.
The connection between the Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit is set up by means of
a coaxial cable with a maximum length of 300 m.
The compact Indoor Unit permits a space-saving installation. An intelligent
temperature monitoring system prevents damages due to excessive operating
temperatures.
A quick deployment of a radio link is possible , since both installation and
commissioning are very simple. All system-relevant settings are made via the
Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT). The antenna is aligned by means of the AGC
voltage which can be measured on the Outdoor Unit by means of a universal
voltmeter.
2.1 System components

The following picture shows the system components of MDRS 155 S Digital
Microwave Radio Systems:
Antenna Antenna
Lens: 0.15 m
Parabolic: 0.3 m to 3.7 m
Shell: 0.6 m to 4 m
connected to Waveguide (optional)
Outdoor Unit (ODU)

with overvoltage protection
Outdoor Unit Filter box with broadband
or channel filter
RF-coupler or RF switch
(optional)
connected to Coaxial cable

Length: up to 300 m with ODU S
200 m with ODU L
Indoor Unit
with FAN module
Indoor Unit CMI interface or
optical interface (option)
EOW (option)
Fig. 2-1 System components (example)
1
Only with ODU S
Marconi 2-1
Short Description Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
A radio link comprises two stations with three components each.
1. Antenna
Antenna sizes from 0.15 m to 4 m are possible. The ODU is either directly
connected to the antenna or remotely mounted using waveguides. Two different
types of waveguides are available:
• Flexible waveguides for short distances and high flexibility
• ALFORM waveguides for long distances and low attenuation values
2. Outdoor Unit
Three versions of Outdoor Units (ODUs) are available:
• ODU S – for very high system gain and optimum utilization of the available
spectrum
• ODU LX – with medium output power
• ODU L with low output power
The following table gives an overview of the features of the different ODU types:
ODU S ODU L ODU LX
Frequency bands 18,7; 23; 26 and 28 7.5; 13 and 15 GHz 7.5; 11; 13 and 38
GHz GHz
(15; 18.7; 23; 26; 28
and 32 GHz
planned)
System gain high low medium
CCDP mode for yes no yes

128 QAM
(with XPIC)
CCDP mode yes no yes
for 16 QAM
(w/o XPIC)
RF filter Broadband filter or Integrated Integrated
channel filter, broadband filter broadband filter.
mounted in separate Integrated channel
filter box filters only for 7.5;
11; 13; 15 and 18
GHz
Channel filter up to 8 STM-1 per not available not available
with low-loss antenna
circulators
2-2 Marconi
ODU S ODU L ODU LX
1+1 equipment RF switch or RF coupler RF coupler

protection RF coupler (symmetrical or (symmetrical or
(symmetrical or asymmetrical) asymmetrical)
asymmetrical)
1+1 line protection RF coupler RF coupler RF coupler
(symmetrical/ (symmetrical/ (symmetrical or
asymmetrical), asymmetrical), asymmetrical)
cross-polar cross-polar
connection or with connection or
2 antennas 2 antennas
Antenna Remote Compact or Compact or
installation remotely mounted remotely mounted
ODU S
ODU S Outdoor Units can be set up with a broadband filter (BB) or a channel
filter (BU or CF1).
These filters are located in a separate box and are mounted together with the
ODU.
In case of a fault, the Outdoor Unit is replaced. The filter boxes remain mounted
to the mast or wall.
ODU L
The Outdoor Units ODU L are always equipped with an integrated broadband
filter.
ODU LX
Two versions are available:
• ODU LMX with integrated broadband filter for 38 GHz. (18.7; 23; 26; 28
and 32 GHz planned)
• ODU LEX with exchangeable channel filters for 7.5; 11; 13 GHz (15 and
18.7 GHz. planned).
3. Indoor Unit
The Indoor Unit (IDU) is mounted inside a building and is connected to the ODU
by means of a coaxial cable. The IDU design is modular and can be configured
according to customer demands. It supports an enhanced TMN concept including
multi-protocol routing (QD2, OSI, TCP/IP) and SNMP-controlled equipment.
1
Channel filter only for 16 MLQAM; 18 GHz
Marconi 2-3
2.2 Antennas
The antenna incorporates the feeder system for both dual- and single-polar
operation. Lens, parabolic and shell antennas are available with heights from
0.15 m to 4.0 m.
The antennas for MDRS 155 S Digital Microwave Radio Systems (with Outdoor
Units ODU S, ODU LX and ODU L) can be mounted remotely and connected to
the Outdoor Unit by means of a waveguide.
When using ODU LX and ODU L, integrated antennas are available for direct
antenna mounting.
In 1+1 equipment protection configurations with ODU S, ODU LX and ODU L, the
connection is set up by means of symmetrical or asymmetrical couplers.
With ODU S, this operating mode is possible optionally with the RF switch and an
integrated or remotely mounted antenna.
All antennas with flanges in compliance with IEC Standards 60 154-1 and 60
154-2 can be used (also see chapter 2, Mounting Instructions).
The mounting variants and associated installation material must be defined

depending on local conditions.
Note Ordering data for all antennas and accessories upon request!
2-4 Marconi
2.2.1 Antenna types
The antennas listed below are available for system operation.
2.2.1.1 Lens antennas
The compact size and electrical characteristics of lens antennas make them ideal
for use at higher frequencies and for setting up short radio hops, e.g. in municipal
areas.
Antenna versions
0.15 m antenna PL
1- polar 2- polar
PL 0.15 - 26/1P PL 0.15 - 26/2P
PL 0.15 - 28/1P PL 0.15 - 28/2P
PL 0.15 - 32/1P (planned) PL 0.15 - 32/2P (planned)
PL 0.15 - 38/1P PL 0.15 - 38/2P
Fig. 2-2 Lens antenna (PL) 0.15 m
Marconi 2-5
2.2.1.2 Parabolic antennas
Parabolic antennas represent the classical form of microwave radio antennas and
distinguish themselves by their good electrical features. They are available in
several different versions and can be used in all frequency ranges.
Antenna versions
0.3 m antenna UHP

1- polar 2- polar
PS 0.3 - 15/1P - UHP PS 0.3 - 15/2P - UHP
PS 0.3 - 18.7/1P - UHP PS 0.3 - 18.7/2P - UHP
PS 0.3 - 23/1P - UHP PS 0.3 - 23/2P - UHP
PS 0.3 - 26/1P - UHP PS 0.3 - 26/2P - UHP
PS 0.3 - 28/1P - UHP PS 0.3 - 28/2P - UHP
PS 0.3 - 32/1P - UHP (planned) PS 0.3 - 32/2P - UHP (planned)
PS 0.3 - 38/1P - UHP PS 0.3 - 38/2P - UHP
0.6 m antenna UHP

1- polar 2- polar
PS 0.6 - 7.4/1P - UHP PS 0.6 - 7.4/2P - UHP
PS 0.6 - 11/1P - UHP PS 0.6 - 11/2P - UHP
PS 0.6 - 13/1P - UHP PS 0.6 - 13/2P - UHP
PS 0.6 - 15/1P - UHP PS 0.6 - 15/2P - UHP
PS 0.6 - 18.7/1P - UHP PS 0.6 - 18.7/2P - UHP
PS 0.6 - 23/1P - UHP PS 0.6 - 23/2P - UHP
PS 0.6 - 26/1P - UHP PS 0.6 - 26/2P - UHP
PS 0.6 - 28/1P - UHP PS 0.6 - 28/2P - UHP
PS 0.6 - 32/1P-UHP (planned) PS 0.6 - 32/2P-UHP (planned)
PS 0.6 - 38 / 1P - UHP PS 0.6 - 38 / 2P - UHP
1.2 m antenna UHP

1- polar 2- polar
PS 1.2 - 7.4/1P - UHP PS 1.2 - 7.4/2P - UHP
PS 1.2 - 11/1P - UHP PS 1.2 - 11/2P - UHP
PS 1.2 - 13/1P - UHP PS 1.2 - 13/2P - UHP
PS 1.2 - 15/1P - UHP PS 1.2 - 15/2P - UHP
PS 1.2 - 18.7/1P - UHP PS 1.2 - 18.7/2P - UHP
PS 1.2 - 23/1P - UHP PS 1.2 - 23/2P - UHP
PS 1.2 - 26/1P - UHP PS 1.2 - 26/2P - UHP
2.0 m antenna UHP

1- polar 2- polar
PS 2 - 7.4/1P - UHP PS 2 - 7.4/2P - UHP
PS 2 - 11/1P - UHP PS 2 - 11/2P - UHP
PS 2 - 13/1P - UHP PS 2 - 13/2P - UHP
PS 2 - 15/1P - UHP PS 2 - 15/2P - UHP
PS 2 - 18.7/1P - UHP PS 2 - 18.7/2P - UHP
PS 2 - 23/1P - UHP PS 2 - 23/2P - UHP
2-6 Marconi
3.0 m antenna UHP

1- polar 2- polar
PS 3 - 7.4/1P - UHP PS 3 - 7.4/2P - UHP
PS 3 - 11/1P - UHP PS 3 - 11/2P - UHP
PS 3 - 13/1P - UHP PS 3 - 13/2P - UHP
3.7 m antenna UHP

1- polar 2- polar
PS 3.7 - 7.4/1P - UHP PS 3.7 - 7.4/2P - UHP
PS 3.7 - 11/1P - UHP PS 3.7 - 11/2P - UHP
Fig. 2-3 Parabolic antennas (UHP) 0.6 m and 1.2 m
Marconi 2-7
2.2.1.3 Shell antennas
Shell antennas are highly concentrating and therefore especially appropriate for
use in network nodes where high angular decoupling values to adjacent radio
links are required to avoid interference. Due to their excellent electrical features,
they permit higher network densities.
This advantage is shown in Fig. 2-4, where the radiation patterns of a 1.2 m shell
antenna and a 1.2 m parabolic antenna are compared.
Comparison of radiation
pattern envelopes of
1.2m shell antenna and
1.2m UHP parabolic
20°
antenna operating in the SHP Type
13 GHz frequency band 80°

UHP Type
20
Re
lati 30
ve
Ga 40
in 1.2-m-UHP-Parabolic Antenna
[d
50
B]
60
70
1.2 m Shell Antenna
80
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Azimuth Angle [Degree]
Fig. 2-4 Comparison of a parabolic antenna with a shell antenna
Antenna versions
0.6 m antennas SHP

2- polar *
PE 0.6m - 18.7/2P – XPD
PE 0.6m - 23/2P – XPD
PE 0.6m - 26/2P - XPD - R220
PE 0.6m - 26/2P - XPD - R260
PE 0.6m - 28/2P - XPD - R260
PE 0.6m - 28/2P - XPD - R320
PE 0.6m - 32/2P - XPD (planned)
PE 0.6m - 38/2P - XPD
2-8 Marconi
1.2 m antenna SHP

2- polar *
PE 1.2 - 13/2P - XPD
PE 1.2 - 15/2P - XPD
PE 1.2 - 18.7/2P - XPD
PE 1.2 - 23/2P - XPD
PE 1.2 - 26/2P - XPD
2 m antenna SHP
2- polar *
PE 2 - 7.4/2P - XPD
PE 2 - 11/2P - XPD - R120
PE 2 - 13/2P - XPD
PE 2 - 15/2P - XPD
3 m antenna SHP
2- polar *
PE 3 - 7.4/2P - XPD
PE 3 - 11/2P - XPD - R120
PE 3 - 13/2P - XPD
PE 3 - 15/2P - XPD
4 m antenna SHP
2- polar *
PE 4 - 11/2P - XPD - R120
Note * Shell antennas are designed for dual-polarized operation. However, they can
also be used in the single-polar mode.
Fig. 2-5 Shell antennas (SHP) 0.6 m and 1.2 m
Marconi 2-9
2.2.2 Antenna gain
The antenna gain depends on the frequency used. The values indicated in the
table below are valid for the band center.
Frequency range Antenna size Antenna gain

Lens Parabolic Shell
antenna antenna antenna
0.6 m - 31.1 dBi -
7 GHz 1.2 m - 37.0 dBi -
2.0 m - 41.4 dBi 40.8 dBi
3.0 m - 44.6 dBi 44.3 dBi
3.7 m - 46.4 dBi -
4.0 m - - 46.4 dBi
0.6 m - 34.9 dBi -
11 GHz 1.2 m - 41.3 dBi -
2.0 m - 44.8 dBi 44.6/34.5
dBi 1
3.0 m - 47.8 dBi -
3.7 m - 49.5 dBi -
4.0 m - - 49.9 dBi
0.6 m - 36.6 dBi
13 GHz 1.2 m - 42.3 dBi 42.7 dBi
2.0 m - 46.1 dBi 45.8 dBi
3.0 m - 49.2 dBi 48.6 dBi
0.3 m - 31.0 dBi -
15 GHz 0.6 m - 37.5 dBi -
1.2 m - 42.7 dBi 44.3 dBi
2.0 m - 47.1 dBi 47.7 dBi
3.0 m - - 50.5 dBi
0.3 m - 33.2 dBi -
18.7 GHz 0.6 m - 39.5 dBi 39.5 dBi
1.2 m - 44.5 dBi 46.0 dBi
2.0 m - 48.7 dBi -
0.3 m - 34.7 dBi -
23 GHz 0.6 m - 41.0 dBi 41.1 dBi
1.2 m - 46.5 dBi 47.2 dBi
2.0 m - 50.3 dBi -
0.15 m 30.3 dBi - -
26 GHz 0.3 m - 35.2 dBi -
0.6 m - 41.9 dBi 41.8 dBi
1.2 m - 47.1 dBi 48.0 dBi
0.15 m 31.1 dBi - -
28 GHz 0.3 m - 36.5dBi -
0.6 m - 42.8 dBi 42.6 dBi
0.15 m (geplant) - -
32 GHz 0.3 m - (geplant) -
0.6 m - (geplant) (geplant)
0.15 m 33.7 dBi - -
38 GHz 0.3 m - 39.0 dBi -
0.6 m - 45.0 dBi 45.6 dBi
Table – Antenna gain
1
dependent on the antenna version
2-10 Marconi
Rear view
Mast
Radome
Parabolic antenna 0.3 m
Antenna mount
Waveguide
(outlined)
Transport handle
Mast mount
Outdoor Unit (ODU)
Mast
Lateral view
Radome
Parab. antenna 0.3 m
Antenna mount
Waveguide
(outlined)
Transport handle
Filter box
Mast mount
Outdoor Unit (ODU)
Fig. 2-6 0.3 m antenna with ODU S
Marconi 2-11
Radome
Rear view
Mast Parabolic antenna 0.6 m
Antenna mount
Waveguide
(outlined)
Transport handle
Mast mount
Outdoor Unit (ODU)
Lateral view
Radome
Mast
Parab. antenna 0.6 m
Antenna mount
Waveguide
(outlined)
Transport handle
Filter box
Mast mount
Outdoor Unit (ODU)
Fig. 2-7 0.6 m antenna with ODU S
2-12 Marconi
Mast
Rear view
Radome
Parabolic antenna 1.2/2 m
Antenna mount
Waveguide
(outlined)
Transport handle
Mast mount
Outdoor Unit (ODU)
Fig. 2-8 1.2/2 m antenna with ODU S
Marconi 2-13
Lateral view
Mast
Radome
Parabolic antenna 1.2/2 m
Antenna mount
Waveguide
(outlined)
Transport handle
Filter box
Outdoor Unit (ODU)
Fig. 2-9 1.2/2 m antenna with ODU S (lateral view)
2-14 Marconi
Lateral view
Waveguide
(outlined)
Mast
Lens
antenna
Ø 0.15 m
Filter
box
Mast
mount
Outdoor Unit (ODU)

Mast
Fig. 2-10 Integrated 0.15 m lens antenna with ODU S (lateral view)
Marconi 2-15
Top view
Lens
antenna
Ø 0.15 m
Waveguide
(outlined)
Mast
Mast
mount
Filter box Filter box
Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit

(ODU) (ODU)
Fig. 2-11 Integrated 0.15 m lens antenna with ODU S (top view)
2-16 Marconi
Rear view
Mast
Mast
mount
Waveguide
(outlined)
Lens
antenna
Ø 0.15 m
Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit

(ODU) (ODU)
Mast
Fig. 2-12 Integrated 0.15 m lens antenna with ODU S (rear view)
Marconi 2-17
Fig. 2-13 Direct antenna mounting - ODU L in a 1+0 configuration
Fig. 2-14 Direct antenna mounting - ODU L in a 1+1 configuration
2-18 Marconi
Fig. 2-15 ODU LX – 1+0 configuration with integrated antenna (30 cm)
Fig. 2-16 ODU LX – 1+1 or 2+0 configuration with integrated antenna (60 cm)
Marconi 2-19
2.3 Outdoor Units
The ODU S housing includes the IF modules, synthesizer, MCU (micro-controller

unit) and RF section. The RF filter is mounted in a separate filter box.
The ODU L and ODU LX housing includes the IF modules, synthesizer, MCU
(micro-controller unit), RF section as well as the RF filter.
With an Outdoor Unit, a STM-1 signal is transmitted using the 16 MLQAM or

128 MLQAM modulation mode. Depending on the Indoor Unit connected, the
latter is identified and configured automatically.
A transport handle facilitates both handling and installation.
2.3.1 Transmit direction
In the transmit direction, the attenuation of the coaxial cable is at first

compensated by an equalizer followed by amplifier and filter stages as well as a
Tx frequency converter. A synthesizer controls the LO (Local Oscillator) for
frequency and channel setting.
Due to the ATPC function, the transmit level can be reduced in times without
fading by up to 15 dB or 20 dB depending on the ODU type used (ODU S and
ODU L-7.5 GHz = 15 dB / ODU L and ODU LX = 20 dB). When the ATPC is
disabled, the transmit level must be adjusted to a permanent value. This can be
done in steps of 0.5 dB.
Using the RTPC function (only ODU LX), the ATPC control range can be
relocated. Thus, even with a lower output power, the ATPC range can be fully
used. (For control limits, please refer to section 6.3).
2.3.2 Receive direction
The receive signal is routed from the RF preamplifier to the single-sideband Rx

mixer. There it is converted to the IF level using the LO frequency and applied to
an IF preamplifier. The downstream regulated IF amplifier controlled by the
receive signal prevents an overmodulation of the receiver. Thus, sufficient
linearity is ensured at high input levels.
2.3.3 Outdoor Unit power supply
The Outdoor Unit is powered by the power supply module of the Indoor Unit via
the system cable. The output voltage of this power supply module is -48V ± 25%
or -60V ± 20%.
2.3.4 Cable branching network
The connection between the Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit is set up using a
coaxial cable (system cable). This cable is used to transmit the IF frequencies for
both the Tx and Rx signal as well as the telegrams of the signalling and
monitoring devices. Moreover, the Outdoor Unit is supplied with DC voltage via
2-20 Marconi
this cable. The cable branching network combines the functions of a frequency
filter and lightning protection in one module. The cable branching network is
available in both the Outdoor Unit and Indoor Unit.
2.3.5 Signalling, monitoring and configuration
The alarms and measuring values of the individual function units (modules) are
displayed by the LMT. The LMT is also used to make the settings and enter the
configuration data required by the ODU. For this purpose, the LMT is connected
to the Indoor Unit and has direct access to the ODU via the signalling channel.
ODU S
Four LEDs located on the rear side of the ODU are used for displaying
operational statuses and alarm signalling (see Fig. 2-24).
ODU L
No LEDs available.
ODU LX
These Outdoor Units (ODU LMX) are equipped with an integrated broadband
filter or exchangeable channel filter (ODU LEX).
Three LEDs located on the bottom side of the ODU are used for displaying
operational statuses and alarms (see Fig. 2-32).
2.3.6 Filter boxes/ RF filters

ODU S
The filter box includes ferrite isolators integrated in the Tx and Rx path.
Depending on the individual case of application, different filter boxes must be
used.
In the BB filter box, the Tx and Rx path are filtered by a broadband diplexer and
combined again.
In the BU filter box, channel filters are used whose bandwidth is dimensioned for
the transmission of a 155 Mbit/s channel (STM-1). The Tx and Rx paths are
separated via circulators and made available at external interfaces.
ODU L
The Outdoor Units ODU L are always equipped with an integrated broadband
filter.
ODU LX
Outdoor Units of type ODU LMX are always equipped with an integrated
broadband filter.
Outdoor Unit of type ODU LEX are always equipped with exchangeable channel
filters.
Marconi 2-21
2.3.6.1 Replacing the channel filter in systems with ODU LEX
The ODU LEX is composed of a channel-neutral RF transceiver and an

exchangeable channel filter.
To replace the channel filter, proceed as follows:
• Remove the ODU cover.

To do this, you must first loosen the four lateral screws of the ODU.
• Open the cover of the housing.
The housing cover

can be opened/closed
by means of
7 Torx T20 screws.
Fig. 2-17 Opening/closing the housing cover (ODU LEX)
• Disconnect the flat ribbon cable.
Disconnecting/connecting
the flat ribbon cable
Fig. 2-18 Disconnecting/connecting the flat ribbon cable (ODU LEX)
2-22 Marconi
• Remove the connectors by means of a wrench M8. Then loosen the two
Allen screws M4.
Take out the channel filter.
Loosen/tighten the two Allen screws

M4 (tighten with torque of 230 Ncm)
Remove/mount the connectors

with a torque wrench M8
(60 Ncm)
Fig. 2-19 Dismounting the channel filter (ODU LEX)
• Mount the replacement filter by executing the steps described above in

the reverse order:
- Fix the connectors by means of a torque wrench (60 Ncm).
- Tighten the Allen screws M4 with a torque of 230 Ncm.
- Connect the flat ribbon cable.
- Close the housing cover (tighten all four screws).
• Attach the nameplate of the new channel filter to the bottom side of the
ODU.
Nameplate of channel filter ODU nameplate

(nameplate is supplied with
filter and must be attached
here).
Fig. 2-20 Nameplate of channel filter (ODU LEX)
• Re-mount the cover.

After replacement of the filter, check the unit for error-free transmission
and ensure that there are no alarms.
Marconi 2-23
2.3.7 Mechanical design of the Outdoor Units
2.3.7.1 ODU S
Fig. 2-21 ODU S – 1+0 configuration with remote antenna
Fig. 2-22 ODU S – 1+1 configuration with RF coupler and remote antenna
2-24 Marconi
Fig. 2-23 ODU S – 4+0 configuration with remote antenna
Marconi 2-25
Rear view
Transport
handle
Green LED > Signals error-free

"Operation" transmission (a valid STM-1
signal is received)
OPERATION Red LED "PS" > Lights up in case of a

power supply fault in the
Outdoor Unit
PS
Red LED "EA-RU" > Equipment Alarm Radio Unit
- on if ODU is faulty;
EA-RU - flashes after power-up during
warm-up phase (RF amplifier
off during this time)
POWER Green LED > Signals faultless power

"Power" supply via connecting cable
"AGC" test sockets For antenna alignment

red / black > (using multimeter, see
on bottom side of list of measuring units in
ODU Commissioning Instructions)
Bottom view
System cable X-PIC

port port
(coaxial)
RF switch AGC measuring
port port
(connector)
Filter box
Grounding port Grounding port

(housing) AGC measurement
Fig. 2-24 Views of Outdoor Unit ODU S
2-26 Marconi
2.3.7.2 ODU L (no license for use in Germany)
Fig. 2-25 ODU L – 1+0 configuration with compact antenna
Fig. 2-26 ODU L – 1+1 or 2+0 configuration with compact antenna
Marconi 2-27
Fig. 2-27 Views of Outdoor Unit (ODU L)
2-28 Marconi
2.3.7.3 ODU LX
Fig. 2-28 ODU LX – Direct antenna mounting in a 1+0 configuration
Fig. 2-29 ODU LX – 1+0 configuration with remote antenna
Marconi 2-29
Fig. 2-30 ODU LX – in 1+1 or 2+0 configuration with compact antenna
Fig. 2-31 ODU LX – in 1+1 or 2+0 configuration with remote antenna
2-30 Marconi
Red "EA-RU" LED - Equipment Alarm Radio Unit

- Lights up if an ODU hardware fault is detected.
Green "Operation" LED - Flashes after "Power-up" during the quartz warm-up
Link Status phase (RF amplifier remains off during this time).
- Signals troublefree
transmission (a correct
Green "No EA-RU" LED
STM-1 signal is
received).
AGC
test socket
(BNC) System XPIC
cable port port
(coaxial)
Fig. 2-32 Bottom view of Outdoor Unit ODU LX
Marconi 2-31
2.4 Indoor Unit
The compact and lightweight Indoor Unit contains the major part of electronics.
The use of the very latest technology together with Marconi's expertise in large-
scale integration provides a world-class solution which permits the most
important system features to be controlled electronically.
The IDU is a small 1.5 HU module appropriate for installation in an ETSI or 19“
rack. It requires only 2 HU including the required cabling.
Thermal management – which is highly critical for compact devices – is

performed by an intelligent thermal control sub-system, allowing other equipment
to be placed directly below and above the IDU.
Coding switch for External signal Power

operating mode inputs/outputs and supply
setting EOW ports port
(optional)
Connecting Panel
Service Channels
and Network Connecting Panel
Management System STM-1 OPT
and CMI (el.) Fan module
Fig. 2-33 Indoor Unit MDRS 155 S
2-32 Marconi
2.4.1 Versions
The Indoor Unit is frequency band independent and therefore compatible with
Outdoor Units from 7 GHz to 38 GHz. Depending on the modulation scheme, the
following Indoor Units are available
IDU 155-128 S for 128 MLQAM

IDU 155-128 LS for 128 MLQAM
IDU 155-16 S for 16 MLQAM
IDU 155-16 LS for 16 MLQAM
These Indoor Units can be supplied in the following variants:
• Electrical interface, without EOW (version A001 or E)
• Electrical and optical interface (switchable), without EOW (version A002

or EO)
• Electrical interface, with EOW (version A003 or EE)
• Electrical and optical interface (switchable), with EOW (version A004 or EOE)
With the optical interface, the fiber-optic cable port is designed as a LC duplex
connector. The customer-side connector (e.g. SC(PC), DIN, E2000) is
implemented by means of patch cables and adapters.
Note In "Equipment Protection" and "Line Protection" configurations, two Indoor Units
are required with additional cabling.
The second protection switching level (line side) can be set up by means of an
upstream Line Switch.
2.4.2 IDU modules
An Indoor Unit includes the following modules:
• Housing with mainboard and backplane

• Fan module (FAN)
• EOW (optional)
Marconi 2-33
2.4.2.1 Mainboard and backplane
The mainboard comprises the function units described below.
Branching network
The branching network fulfills the same function as the cable branching network
in the Outdoor Unit. It separates the transmit and receive IF, signalling data and
supply voltage.
Modulator
The modulator modulates the outgoing data signal. The transmit IF is 350 MHz.
Demodulator
The demodulator demodulates the incoming signal. The receive IF is 140 MHz.
Signalling
The signalling modem regulates the exchange of signalling data for controlling
and monitoring the Outdoor Unit.
CPU
The processor unit includes the following functional blocks:
• SISA-0
• Controller for Indoor and Outdoor Unit
• OSI routing
• IP stack
DPU
The most important functions of the Data Processing Unit cover:
• STM-1 frame processing

• Quick switchover in 1+1 configurations
• Generation of performance data
• Baseband equalization
• Cross-polarization interference cancelling (XPIC)
SOH processing
This module passes on the data of auxiliary channels in both the Radio (R) and
Line (L) direction.
The backplane sets up the electrical connections between the modules.
2-34 Marconi
2.4.2.2 Power supply (PS)
The system is powered by -48 V ± 25% or -60V ±20%. This voltage is applied to
the Outdoor Unit via the coaxial cable. This connection is electronically protected
against short circuits.
2.4.2.3 Fan module (FAN)

The fan module is used for temperature reduction in the Indoor Unit. In case of a
failure (e.g. of one of the three fan motors), the module can be exchanged
without service interruption.
The IDU fans are switched on and off depending on the temperature.
In case of a total failure of the fan module or another serious defect of the cooling
system, an intelligent temperature management protects the Indoor Unit from
exceeding the maximum permissible temperature by switching off certain
functions. Thus, a possible damage of the Indoor Unit is avoided.
2.4.2.4 EOW (optional)

This equipment function is made available by different versions. The EOW basic
functions cover the following services:
• Phone for connecting an analog telephone set;

• PABX - analog 2-wire port for PSTN access or for connecting a PABX;
• EXTEOW - analog 4-wire port for external expansions;
• E1-L / E1-R - digital branching option to other systems or geographical
directions.
Marconi 2-35
2.4.3 Indoor Unit (IDU) interfaces
Fig. 2-34 shows all interfaces of the Indoor Unit.
ServiceOn
Alarm
External
Access LMT signalling
equipment
facility
Qx QD2 Alarm
RS232
interface interface contacts
Control interfaces
MDRS 155 S
PHONE
STM-1 radio
PABX Option: Aggregate
EOW function interfaces
STM-1 el./opt.
EXTEOW
E1, F1 Power supply

line
interfaces
4x 64 kbit/s
Overhead
interfaces
radio
2 Mbit/s WSC
Conv.
E1, F1
60 V DC
48 V DC 230 V AC
Fig. 2-34 Indoor Unit interfaces
SDH interfaces:
• Electrical STM-1 line interface

• Or electrical and optical STM-1 line interfaces (switchable):
The fiber-optic cable port is designed as a LC-duplex connector. The
customer-side connector (e.g. SC(PC), DIN, E2000) is implemented using
patch cables and adapters.
• STM-1 radio interface
Control interfaces:
• Different Qx interfaces to the Network Management System ServiceOn

Access: RS485 for QD2, LAN for OSI (Q3p) or TCP/IP (QD2-IP)
(see section 5.1.6)
• RS232 interface for connecting the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT,
Service PC)
• QD2 interface for controlling other equipment located in the same station
• 10 alarm inputs and 3 alarm outputs
2-36 Marconi
Overhead interfaces:
• Access to the E1 byte and F1 byte on the line side as well as

on the radio side
• 2 Mbit/s wayside channel
• 4x64 kbit/s service channel
Options: Interfaces via EOW module (see section 2.4.2.4)
• Phone interface
• PABX interface
• Extension interface
Power supply interfaces:
• -48V ±25% or -60V ±20% (-36 to -72 V DC)

• Redundant power feeding
• Converters for other voltages are available
2.4.4 Signalling, monitoring and configuration
• The alarms and measuring values of the individual function units (modules)
are displayed by the LMT. The LMT is also used to make the settings and
enter the configuration data required by the Indoor Unit. The LMT is
connected to the Indoor Unit either locally or remotely via a LAN/WAN or the
ECC. The IDU and ODU are interconnected and can communicate via the
internal signalling channel.
• LEDs located on the front side of the IDU are used for optical alarm
signalling.
• The EDI interfaces available are appropriate for feeding in up to ten external
alarms and outputting up to three internal alarms.
Marconi 2-37
2.4.5 Views of the Indoor Unit (IDU)
External signal inputs/

outputs and
XPIC XPIC (optional) Power supply Fan
ports port EOW ports port module
Port for Coding switch Connecting panel Signalling bus LED Connecting panel
coaxial cable for operating for service ports display STM-1 opt.
to ODU mode adjustment channels and (XPIC, protection panel and electr.
network switching, internal
management communication)
Fig. 2-35 Front side and top view of Indoor Unit
2-38 Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Configurations
3 Configurations
3.1 General
Due to the ever increasing number of services offered and the introduction of
new technologies, the data rates in transmission networks are often growing up
to their capacity limits. MDRS 155 S systems are especially appropriate for small
networks, for links between the Backbone and Access area and for fast access to
mobile radio stations.
In order to increase the transmission capacities of STM-1 connections, radio links

can be expanded to 2xSTM-1 to 4xSTM-1 (ODU S, ODU LX and ODU L) or
6xSTM-1 (ODU S). A setup with channel branching filter requires less space for
antennas.
In order to increase the availability, transmission via radio links can be protected.
For this purpose several expansion stages and variants (see section 3.1.1) are
available for protection switching.
When using DPU-STM-4 basic units, a STM-4 data stream can be split up into
four STM-1 data streams, transmitted via appropriate radio links and combined
again afterwards. STM-4 links without ring structure requiring high availability can
be planned with one or two additional redundant STM-1 radio links.
3.1.1 Operating modes
For reasons of environmental, ambient and operating conditions, radio

transmission equipment can be used in any of the operating modes described
below using one single antenna or combined in any kind of protection switching
configuration to increase link quality or avoid operation breakdowns by cascading
active hardware elements.
The MDRS 155 S digital microwave radio system supports the following
operating modes:
• 1+0 Transmission of one STM-1 signal without redundancy;
• 1+1 hot standby Transmission of one STM-1 signal with full equipment
protection; only one signal is transmitted via the air
interface.
• 1+1 line protection Transmission of one operating STM-1 signal and

one protection signal via one antenna, on one or both
polarizations and with or without XPIC1; the operating
signal and protection signal are simultaneously
transmitted via the air interface.
1
XPIC ODU S and ODU LX
Marconi 3-1
Configurations Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
• N+0 Transmission of N x STM-1 signals via one antenna,

without redundancy, on one or both polarizations and
with or without XPIC1;
• N+1 line protection Transmission of N operating STM-1 signals and

one protection signal via one antenna, on one or both
polarizations and with or without XPIC1 (planned);
• Line Switch Second protection switching level (line side) by

(additional) using an upstream Line Switch.
In the frequency bands of 7 GHz to 38 GHz, all ODUs supporting the 1+0, 1+1
hot standby and 1+1 line protection modes as well as the operating modes N+0
and N+1 via couplers. Additional branching networks are available in the
frequency bands of 18 GHz to 28 GHz for a low-loss connection of the ODU S to
the antenna.
3.1.2 2xSTM-1 features
• One antenna for channel filter connection (only with ODU S), coupler
connection or for transmission on the crossed polarization2; better
attenuation values compared to those achieved with coupler solutions.
• With a channel-branching filter, only one waveguide is required for remote

antenna installation. Expansions are possible without operating channel
interruption.
3.1.3 4xSTM-1 features
• One antenna for channel filter connection (only with ODU S) or in

combination with transmission on the crossed polarization2.
• For remote antenna installation and cross-polar operation, one waveguide is

required for each polarization.
3.1.4 6xSTM-1 features (only ODU S)
• All characteristics identical with those of 4xSTM-1; additional features:
• In combination with DPU-STM4, this configuration permits one or two STM-1

radio links to be used redundantly (4+1 or 4+2).
• This configuration permits a transmission of six channels without redundancy

(6+0).
1
XPIC only with ODU S and ODU LX
2
With 128 MLQAM, the XPIC function is required for CCDP operation; ACAP without XPIC
3-2 Marconi
3.2 Utilization of the frequency pattern
3.2.1 Co-polar connection (to one polarization)
Using single-polarized antennas, adjacent channel operation1 (ACCP operation)

is possible with spacings of 27.5/28 or 40 MHz (128 MLQAM) or 55/56 MHz
(16 MLQAM provided that one antenna is used in each Outdoor Unit for each
channel or the connection to the antenna is set up with ODU S and channel filters
(BU filter boxes) by means of a coupler (see note below).
Channel filters for ODU L are not available.
With a double channel spacing, up to four channels can be connected to one

antenna. When using ODU S and channel filters (BU filter boxes), these can be
interconnected directly.
With broadband filters (BB filter boxes for ODU S or integrated broadband filters
for ODU LX and ODU L), this must be done via couplers.
Permissible channel spacings with channel branching filter:
Filter box BB Filter box BU

128 Connection with
QAM 1 antenna 2 adjacent 1 antenna 2 adjacent
filter boxes BU
16 with coupler * antennas with coupler * antennas
directly
QAM
--- v v --- v
Single channel spacing
--- v v --- v
v v v ** v v
Double channel spacing
v v v ** v v
* Only 2-way coupler available.

** Better system values achieved with filter box BB.
Note regarding ODU S only
Due to the system design, the use of the BU filter box for connection to the direct
adjacent channel requires a setup with a remote coupler (see Fig. 3-1). Short
waveguides are used to establish the necessary connections.
When using the special CF filter box (channel filter for 16 MLQAM; 18 GHz), the
coupler can be mounted directly onto the latter. In this case, at least the double
channel spacing is required (decoupling).
1
Not possible with ODU L
Marconi 3-3
ODU 155 / ...

Filter box with separate
Rx and Tx narrowband filters
Indoor-Unit A/A'
IDU 155 - ... C/C'
PSU B/B'
OP1
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator
RF
coupler
Termination
ODU 155 / ...
Indoor-Unit
IDU 155 - ... A/A'
C/C'
PSU B/B'
OP2
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator f1 f2
H
OP1 OP2
Termination f
V single channel spacing
Fig. 3-1 Setup with remote coupler (single channel spacing)
3-4 Marconi
3.2.2 Cross-polar connection (using two polarizations)
When using dual-polarized antennas, co-channel operation (CCDP mode) is

possible with 16 MLQAM systems. With 128 MLQAM systems, an additional
XPIC (cross-polarization interference canceller1) is required.
When operating 128 MLQAM systems without XPIC function, these can be
alternately and cross-polarly connected to an antenna with single channel
spacing (ACAP operation, see figure below).
H
16 MLQAM system
16 MLQAM permits CCDP operation without XPIC
V
128 MLQAM system without XPIC

H (ODU S and ODU L)
128 MLQAM without XPIC permits ACAP operation
V with channel spacings of 27.5/28/40 MHz
(with ETSI spectrum mask Class 5a as efficient as
16 MLQAM)
H 128 MLQAM system with XPIC

(ODU S)
V 128 MLQAM with XPIC and CCDP operation
with channel spacings of 27.5/28 MHz
(example)
Fig. 3-2 CCDP and ACAP operation

Note:
ODU S and ODU LX offer the ACAP, ACCP and CCDP operating modes.
ODU L is only appropriate for ACAP operation.
3.3 Terminal and repeater station

A microwave radio terminal provides one line interface (optical or electrical) and
one RF interface. The line interface is operated in the RST mode.
A radio terminal can have an unprotected n+0 configuration, a 1+1 equipment

protection or a 1+1 line protection configuration.
A microwave radio repeater always provides two RF interfaces. It can be

operated with or without protection switching. The repeater station is composed
of two microwave radio terminals.
1
not for ODU L
Marconi 3-5
3.4 System configurations with ODU S
RX/TX branching and channel branching
The Outdoor Unit (ODU) can be equipped with a broadband filter (filter box BB)
or a channel filter (filter box BU or CF*) depending on the customer's
requirements.
* Only for 18.7 GHz / 16 MLQAM
Filter box BB
The filter box BB switches the transmitter output and receiver input of an ODU to
a common antenna interface. This channel can be connected - for example -
together with another channel operated at the same frequency cross-polarly to
one antenna.
The combining or branching of channels is generally referred to as 'channel

branching', whereas the combining and branching of the Rx and Tx path is
referred to as Rx/Tx branching. With the BB filter box, Rx/Tx branching takes
place in the diplexer of the respective filter box.
ODU 155/...
Filter box with
Rx/Tx diplexer
A/A' C/C'
TX/RX
XPIC
OMT
TX/RX
Fig. 3-3 System with filter box BB
Filter box BU
With filter box BU (setup with channel filters), the Tx outputs of several ODUs are
combined to a common transmit output. The common antenna receive signal is in
turn applied to the Rx inputs of the individual ODUs.
Using the BU filter box, several channels can be applied directly (with double
channel spacing) to one polarization plane of an antenna.
3-6 Marconi
In setups with channel filters (filter box BU), the Rx/Tx branching (in the external
antenna circulator) takes place at the end of the Tx and Rx paths connected (see
Fig. 3-20). On the other side of the BU filter boxes there is an absorber
(Termination).
ODU 155 / ...

A/A'
C/C'
B/B'
OP1
TX/RX
OP2
TX/RX
OMT
Termination
Fig. 3-4 System with filter box BU
Filter box CF*
The filter box CF represents a special variant of a channel filter (with integrated
Rx/Tx branching). Its design (housing) is identical to that of the broadband filter
(filter box BB). This CF filter box must be used whenever only one channel shall
be connected requiring a higher selection than that of a broadband filter.
RX/TX branching - internal/external:
Filter box Filter type Branching

BB Broadband filter RX/TX internal
BU Channel filter RX/TX external
CF* Channel filter RX/TX internal
Marconi 3-7
3.4.1 Outdoor Unit with broadband filter (with filter box BB)
3.4.1.1 1+0 configuration
In a 1+0 configuration, the microwave radio system is composed of an Indoor

Unit, coaxial system cable, Outdoor Unit and filter box. The EOW function
represents an option. Transmission takes place with horizontal or vertical
polarization. When using a dual-polarized antenna, an expansion to 2+0 is
possible without service interruption.
ODU 155 / ...

Filter box with
Rx/Tx diplexer
IDU 155 - ...
A/A' C/C'
STM-1 EOW PSU f1
electr. or Modulator
TX/RX
optical DPU
Demodulator H
Service/operating
channels
max. 4x64k, 1x2M
OMT
V
Horizontal or vertical
polarization
Fig. 3-5 1+0 configuration
The photograph in Fig. 3-6 below shows a filter box BB with integrated
Rx/Tx diplexer.
Fig. 3-6 Filter box BB
3-8 Marconi
In 2+0 configurations, both the Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit are doubled. The
Outdoor Units can be connected to the antennas as shown in the examples
depicted below (Fig. 3-7 to Fig. 3-8). Transmission takes place either on two
polarization planes (CCDP or ACAP operation) or using two antennas at two
different frequencies (ACCP operation) with a channel spacing of 27.5/28 MHz
(128 MLQAM) or 55/56 MHz (16 MLQAM).
Setup of an antenna and orthomode transducer (OMT):
ODU 155 / ...

Filter box with
2 x Indoor Unit Rx/Tx diplexer
IDU 155 - ...
A/A' C/C'
OP1 PSU f1
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator H
OP1
XPIC XPIC OP2 OP2
OMT
OP2 PSU V
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator f1 f2
CCDP or ACAP operation
Horizontal and vertical
polarization
Fig. 3-7 2+0 configuration (with OMT)
A setup with two antennas is depicted in Fig. 3-8:
ODU 155 / ...

Filter box with
2x Indoor Unit Rx/Tx diplexer
IDU 155 - ...
A/A' C/C'
OP1 PSU f1 f2
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator H
OP1 OP2
OP2 PSU V
ACCP operation
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator
Fig. 3-8 2+0 configuration (with two antennas)
Marconi 3-9
A further variant is depicted in Fig. 3-9 below. In this case, only one antenna is
used. The Outdoor Units and filter boxes are connected to this antenna via a
coupler. Double channel spacing is required. For radio hop planning, a higher
coupling loss must be taken into consideration.
If connection shall take place in the direct adjacent channel, i.e. with a single
channel spacing of 27.5/28 MHz (128 MLQAM) or 55/56 MHz (16 MLQAM), a
special setup using channel filters (filter boxes BU) with couplers is required (see
Note in section 3.2.1).
2x ODU 155 / ...

Filter box with
IDU 155 - ...
RF
A/A' C/C'
coupler
PSU
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator
f1 f3
PSU H
STM-1 Modulator OP1 OP2
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator f
V Double channel spacing
Fig. 3-9 2+0 configuration (with RF coupler)
Fig. 3-10 Filter boxes BB with coupler
3-10 Marconi
This operating mode permits the transmission of 4 x STM-1. In conjunction with

DPU STM-4, STM-4 transmission becomes possible. Fig. 3-11 shows a low-loss
connection as opposed to the coupler solution. In this application, 2 x STM-1
signals are transmitted by each antenna.
The difference between the two frequencies f1 and f2 corresponds to a (single)

channel spacing of 27.5/28 MHz (128 MLQAM) or 55/56 MHz (16 MLQAM).
ODU 155 / ...

Filter box with
IDU 155 - ...
A/A' C/C'
OP1 PSU
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator
XPIC XPIC
OMT
OP2 PSU
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator
ODU 155 / ...

Filter box with
IDU 155 - ...
A/A' C/C'
OP3 PSU f1 f2
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator H
OP1 OP3
XPIC XPIC
OP2 OP4
OMT
OP4 PSU
V
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU f1 f2
Demodulator
Fig. 3-11 4+0 configuration (example with two antennas and OMTs)
Marconi 3-11
Fig. 3-12 below shows a configuration variant with one antenna and couplers.
OP1 and OP2 (as well as OP3 and OP4) operate at the same frequency.
Double channel spacing is required. For radio hop planning, a higher coupling
loss must be taken into consideration.
If connection shall take place in the direct adjacent channel, i.e. with a single
channel spacing of 27.5/28 MHz (128 MLQAM) or 55/56 MHz (16 MLQAM), a
special setup using channel filters (filter boxes BU) with couplers is required (see
Note in section 3.2.1).
A further configuration variant without XPIC is shown in Fig. 3-27.
4 x ODU 155 / ...

Filter box with
IDU 155 - ...
OP 1 A/A' C/C' RF
coupler
PSU
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator
XPIC OP 3 XPIC
PSU
STM-1 Modulator f1 f3
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator
H
OP 2 OP1 OP3
OMT
OP2 OP4
PSU f
V
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator f1 f3
XPIC OP 4
XPIC
PSU
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator
Fig. 3-12 4+0 configuration (example with one antenna and RF couplers)
3-12 Marconi
3.4.2 Outdoor Unit with channel filter (filter box BU)
Channel connection and channel branching filter
The ODU includes the IF and RF modules as well a the common synthesizer for
the transmit and receive path. Channel connection takes place using filter box BU
with integrated channel branching filters. The bandwidth is dimensioned so that
one 155 Mbit/s channel can be transmitted in one filter.
ODU 155 / ...

Filter box with separated
Indoor Unit A/A'
IDU 155 - ... C/C'
PSU B/B' f1
OP1
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator H
V
OMT
Termination

polarization
Fig. 3-13 Block diagram of the Outdoor Unit and filter box
Î B/B‘ are the interfaces of the Outdoor Unit with filter box.
C/C‘ is located behind the antenna circulator.
Marconi 3-13
Fig. 3-14 below shows the integrated channel branching network in detail. The
transmit and receive path (B‘ and B) are separately routed to the outside.
The isolator at A‘ ensures a good adaptation to the amplifier output of the ODU.
It is followed by the channel branching filter with circulator.
The Tx signal output is B‘. Further filter boxes can be connected to the free
circulator port.
The receiver input is B. From there, the receive signal is routed via the input
circulator, channel branching filter and isolator to the internal receive section with
a good adaptation at point A.
ODU 155 / ...

A/A' B' B
TX/RX
Circulators
Channel branching
Isolators filter Termination
Fig. 3-14 Outdoor Unit and filter box BU
3-14 Marconi
3.4.2.1 1+0 configuration with channel filter
Fig. 3-15 below shows the external connections of a 1+0 equipment variant. In
this case, an absorber and antenna circulator are required. Interface C/C‘ is used
as antenna port.
The use of an OMT (orthomode transducer) permits an expansion to 2+0 by
means of a cross-polar connection (CCDP operation) without service interruption.
System:
ODU 155 / ...

Indoor Unit A/A'
IDU 155 - ... C/C'
PSU B/B' f1
OP1
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator H
V
OMT
Termination
Port for cross-polar connection polarization
Fig. 3-15 1+0 configuration (with channel filter)
Filter box BU:

A/A' C/C'
Antenna circulator
B/B'
Termination
Fig. 3-16 Channel filter (filter box BU) with antenna circulator
Marconi 3-15
3.4.2.2 2+0 configuration - Connection with channel filter
The advantage of a low-attenuation channel branching filter compared with a

coupler solution becomes obvious in the configuration depicted in Fig. 3-20. The
minimum frequency spacing to be observed is the double channel spacing.
System:
ODU 155 / ...
2 x Indoor Unit A/A'
IDU 155 - ...
C/C'
B/B'
PSU
OP1 TX/RX
Modulator f1 f3
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
H H
PSU
OP2
TX/RX
Modulator
STM-1 DPU V V
Demodulator
f1 f3
Horizontal or vertical polarization
Termination
Fig. 3-17 2+0 configuration (with channel filter)
If two Outdoor Units are connected to one antenna via the same polarization, the
two filter boxes of the Outdoor Units must be interconnected. The channel
spacing is at least 55/56 MHz (128 MLQAM) or 110/112 MHz (16 MLQAM).
The transmit signal of Outdoor Unit 2 is routed to Outdoor Unit 1. There it is

reflected by the internal channel branching filter and applied to antenna port C'.
The receive signal for Outdoor Unit 2 is routed via the internal channel filter of
Outdoor Unit 1.
Fig. 3-18 Outdoor Units with filter boxes BU
3-16 Marconi
Individual filter boxes BU:

A/A'
C/C'
B/B'
Termination
Fig. 3-19 Connection of two channels via channel filter
The photographs depicted in Fig. 3-20 show three filter boxes BU interconnected.
The antenna circulator (left) and absorber (termination, right) can be clearly
identified.
Fig. 3-20 Interconnected filter boxes BU
Marconi 3-17
3.4.2.3 4+0 configuration with channel filters and dual-polar operation
By using both antenna polarizations, a 2+0 configuration can be expanded to

4+0. If the 2+0 configuration has been planned and designed using a dual-
polarized antenna from the beginning, an expansion to 4+0 is possible without
service interruption.
Fig. 3-21 shows a variant with one antenna used in conjunction with channel
branching filters with filter boxes BU. Compared with the coupler solution (Fig.
3-12), this type of connection distinguishes itself by a considerably lower loss.
The channel spacing is at least 55/56 MHz (128 MLQAM) and 110/112 MHz
(16 MLQAM) (double channel spacing).
ODU 155 / ...

IDU 155 - ... C/C'
B/B'
PSU
OP1
TX/RX
Modulator
DPU
STM-1 Demodulator
PSU
OP3 f1 f3
TX/RX
Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator OMT
H
OP1 OP3
OP2 OP4
V
XPIC Termination
connections
Horizontal and
vertical polarization
C/C'
B/B'
PSU
OP2
TX/RX
Modulator
DPU
STM-1 Demodulator
PSU
OP4
TX/RX
Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
Termination
Fig. 3-21 4+0 configuration with channel filters and dual-polarized operation
3-18 Marconi
3.4.2.4 6+0 configuration (optionally 4+2 with DPU-STM-4)
The maximum expansion is 6+0. From 4+0 onwards, the optional DPU-STM-4
permits unprotected STM-4 transmission. However, if transmission takes place in
ring structures, it is protected.
If a ring structure is not possible, transmission can be additionally protected by

means of one or two STM-1 links (4+1 or 4+2 ) (see Fig. 3-22).
ODU 155 / ...

IDU 155 - ... C/C'
B/B'
PSU
OP1
TX/RX
Modulator
DPU
STM-1 Demodulator
PSU
OP3
TX/RX
Modulator
DPU
STM-1 Demodulator OMT
PSU
OP5 Modulator
TX/RX
f1 f3 f5
DPU
STM-1 Demodulator
H
OP1 OP3 OP5

OP2 OP4 OP6
DPU STM-4
V
STM-4 XPIC Termination
connections
polarization
C/C'
B/B'
PSU
OP2
TX/RX
Modulator
DPU
STM-1
Demodulator
PSU
OP4
TX/RX
Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
PSU
OP6
TX/RX
Modulator
DPU
STM-1 Demodulator
Termination
Fig. 3-22 4+2 configuration with optional DPU STM-4
The channel spacing of f1, f3 and f5 is at least 55/56 MHz (128 MLQAM) and
110/112 MHz (16 MLQAM) (double channel spacing).
Marconi 3-19
3.5 System configurations with ODU L

(no license for use in Germany)
3.5.1 1+0 configuration
Fig. 3-23 shows the 1+0 terminal configuration consisting of the IDU, coaxial
cable, ODU L, waveguide and antenna.
Transmission takes place either with horizontal or vertical polarization.
IDU f1
STM-1 EOW Power Supply Coax. H

Modulator cable Waveguide
DPU
Demodulator
ODU OP
V
BB Filter
Fig. 3-23 1+0 terminal configuration
below (see Fig. 3-24 and Fig. 3-25). Transmission takes place on two
polarizations (ACAP mode) with the defined channel spacing.
Setup with one antenna and orthomode transducer (OMT):
IDU
STM-1 EOW Power Supply Coax.
DPU
Demodulator
ODU
OMT
BB Filter
f1
H
OP1
IDU OP2
V
Modulator cable
DPU
Demodulator
ODU Waveguide f2
ACAP mode
BB Filter polarisation.
3-20 Marconi
IDU
STM-1 EOW Power Supply coax.
DPU
Demodulator
ODU
f1
BB Filter
H
OP1
OP2
IDU V
STM-1 EOW Power Supply coax.

Modulator cable Waveguide f2
DPU
Demodulator
ODU ACAP mode
polarisation.
BB Filter
A further configuration variant is depicted in Fig. 3-26. In this example, one

antenna is used. The Outdoor Units are connected to this antenna via a coupler.
In this case, a double channel spacing is required.
The higher coupling loss must be taken into consideration in the scope of radio
link planning.
2x ODU 155 / ...

IDU 155
EOW Power Supply
Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
ODU f1 f3
H
OP1 OP2
IDU 155
Coupler f
EOW Power Supply
Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
ODU
Marconi 3-21
Fig. 3-27 shows a connection of four STM-1 to one antenna using couplers. This
configuration consists of four IDUs connected via four coaxial cables to four
ODUs L Outdoor Units. Two waveguides are required for setting up the
connections to the antenna.
IDU 155
EOW Power Supply
Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
ODU
IDU 155 Waveguide

Coupler
EOW Power Supply
Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
ODU OMT
IDU 155
EOW Power Supply f1 f3
Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
ODU H
OP1 OP3
OP2 OP4
V
IDU 155
Coupler Waveguide f2 f4
EOW Power Supply

Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
ODU
Fig. 3-27 4+0 configuration using couplers
3-22 Marconi
3.6 System configurations with ODU LX
Fig. 3-28 shows a 1+0 configuration consisting of the IDU, coaxial cable,
ODU LX, waveguide and antenna.
Transmission takes place either with horizontal or vertical polarization.
f1
IDU H
OP
DPU
Demodulator
ODU V
BB Filter Horizontal or vertical

polarization
Fig. 3-28 1+0 configuration

below (Fig. 3-29 and Fig. 3-30). Transmission takes place either on two
polarization planes (CCDP or ACAP mode) or using two antennas operated at
two different frequencies (ACCP mode) and with the defined channel spacings.
Setup with one antenna and orthomode transducer (OMT):
IDU
DPU
Demodulator
ODU
f1
OMT
BB Filter
H
OP1
OP2 OP2
V
IDU
f1 f2
.
Modulator cable CCDP or ACAP mode
DPU
Demodulator
ODU Waveguide Horizontal and vertical
polarization.
BB Filter
Marconi 3-23
IDU
.
DPU
Demodulator
ODU f1 f2
BB Filter H
OP1 OP2
V
IDU ACCP mode

.
DPU
Demodulator
ODU
BB Filter
A further configuration variant is depicted in Fig. 3-31. In this example, one

antenna is used. The Outdoor Units are connected to this antenna via a coupler.
In this case, a double channel spacing is required.
The higher coupling loss must be taken into consideration in the scope of radio
link planning.
2x ODU 155 / ...

IDU 155
EOW Power Supply
Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
ODU f1 f3
H
OP1 OP2
IDU 155
Coupler f
EOW Power Supply
Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
ODU
3-24 Marconi
Fig. 3-32 shows a connection of 4 x STM-1 to one antenna using couplers. This
configuration requires four IDUs to be connected via four coaxial cables to four
ODU LX Outdoor Units. In additions, two waveguides are required for setting up
the connections to the antenna.
IDU 155
EOW Power Supply
Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
ODU
IDU 155 Waveguide

Coupler
EOW Power Supply
Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
ODU OMT
IDU 155
EOW Power Supply f1 f3
Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
ODU H
OP1 OP3
OP2 OP4
V
IDU 155
Coupler Waveguide f2 f4
EOW Power Supply

Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
ODU
Fig. 3-32 4+0 configuration with couplers
Marconi 3-25
3.7 Protection switching with MDRS 155 S
In protection switching configurations, the STM-1 traffic data streams are

transmitted via redundant modules or radio links in order to increase availability.
Depending on the individual case of application, different configuration variants
can be used which will be described in detail in the sections below. The basic
configuration includes two Indoor Units and two Outdoor Units with the
appropriate connections.
The following variants are basically available:
• 1+1 equipment protection

• 1+1 line protection
• N+1 line protection (planned)
Equipment protection
In equipment protection configurations, only one data stream is transmitted.

The equipment units available are protecting themselves mutually. They are
operating at the same RF frequency.
For this purpose, a terminal needs a baseband protection switch and an RF

protection switch. Two different options are available:
• Baseband protection switching can take place either only in the OP-IDU
(Master) or in the OP-IDU and an additional 1+1 Line Switch.
• RF switchover can be implemented using an external RF switch (only ODU S)
or an RF coupler (ODU S, ODU LX and ODU L).
For equipment protection configurations, the RF coupler represents an

alternative to the RF switch (RF switch, waveguide switch). It is available in two
different variants (symmetrical or asymmetrical).
By using an upstream line switch, it is possible to protect the non-redundant

path in the Master-IDU (OP) itself, if the Master IDU fails or must be exchanged.
Thus, availability can be considerably increased.
3-26 Marconi
The following table shows the advantages and disadvantages of the different
equipment protection options:
Advantages Disadvantages
Baseband - No additional equipment - No protection of the STM-1 interface and
switchover only required data processing block
in the OP-IDU - High availability - OP-IDU cannot be exchanged without
service interruption
Baseband - Protection of the STM-1 - Additional equipment (line switch)
switchover in interface
the OP-IDU - OP-IDU can be
and in the exchanged without
additional 1+1 service interruption
line switch - Very high availability
RF switchover - Low attenuation of the - Additional active equipment
implemented operating path (2 dB) (RF switch)
with RF switch and protection path - Complex and large
(only ODU S) (2 dB)
RF switchover - No active equipment - With symmetrical coupler:
implemented - Simple Attenuation
with RF coupler ODU S ODU L ODU LX
OP and PR OP and PR OP and PR
= 6.2 dB = 6.6 dB = 6.4 dB
- With asymmetrical coupler:

Attenuation
ODU S ODU L ODU LX
OP = 2.6 dB OP = 3.2 dB OP = 2.8 dB
PR = 7.6 dB PR = 8.3 dB PR = 7.8 dB
Line protection
Line protection requires two independent transmission channels. Thus, error-free

protection switching is possible on the receive side.
Notes
The selected protection switching variant must be configured by means of the

LMT under "RPS module configuration" or using the Commissioning Wizard,
since the correct functioning and signalling are depending on the appropriate
configuration.
All configuration variants can be equipped with an electrical or optical STM-1

interface.
Marconi 3-27
3.7.1 Configuration options (overview)
Operating modes ODU S ODU LX ODU L
1. No redundancy (1+0) X X X
2. “Equipment protection with RF switch”
(1+1 hot standby configuration with RF switch; X – –
ODUs electrically connected via waveguide
switches)
3. “Equipment protection with RF coupler”
(1+1 equipment protection with RF coupler; ODUs X X X
electrically connected via couplers; two coupler
variants available)
4. “Equipment protection with RF switch and line
switch” (basic configuration as described under item X – –
2, with additional line switch)
5. “Equipment protection with RF coupler and line
switch” (basic configuration as described under item X X X
3, with additional line switch)
6. “Line protection”
(1+1 with ACCP, ACAP or CCDP operation; without X X X
OT (Occasional Traffic) option (only ACAP)
7. “Line protection with line switch” (basic configuration
as described under item 6, with additional line X X X
switch)
A coding switch (ADR) for adjusting the operating mode is located on the front
side of the Indoor Unit.
Three setting options are available:
1+0 No protection switching (no redundancy)
1+1 OP Protection switching active: Indoor Unit is OP-IDU and acts as "Master"
1+1 PR Protection switching active: Indoor Unit is PR-IDU and acts as "Slave"
The protection switching variant (see Table above, items 2 to 7) is adjusted by

means of the LMT in the "RPS Module Configuration“ form or using the LMT
Commissioning Wizard.
Note In dual-polarized co-channel operation (CCDP), the XPIC function (only ODU S
and ODU LX) is required to avoid degradation due to interference in 128 MLQAM
systems. This function can be used both in 1+1 line protection configurations and
in case of two systems connected to one antenna in a 1+0 configuration (with
crossed polarization).
3-28 Marconi
3.7.2 Equipment protection configuration with RF switch (only ODU S)
3.7.2.1 Signal flow
The following diagrams show the signal flow in an equipment protection

configuration, the redundant systems operating at the same frequency.
Switchover takes place simultaneously for both the transmit and receive
direction. For the radio side, an external RF switch driven by the Outdoor
Units is required.
IDU: OP ODU: OP
OP Coax
STM-1 RF Unit
PR
Cable
STM-1 RF Switch
IDU: PR ODU: PR
Coax
RF Unit
Cable
Fig. 3-33 EQP configuration with RF switch

Operating channel (OP) active
IDU: OP ODU: OP
OP Coax
STM-1 RF Unit
PR Cable
STM-1 RF Switch
IDU: PR ODU: PR
Coax
RF Unit
Cable
Fig. 3-34 EQP configuration with RF switch

Protection channel (PR) active
In trouble-free operation, transmission takes place via the Indoor Unit OP

(Master) and the Outdoor Unit connected to it. In case of an equipment failure,
the system switches over to the Indoor Unit PR (Slave) with its redundant
modulator and demodulator function groups and simultaneously to the redundant
Outdoor Unit. The receiver not switched through in normal operation receives an
Rx signal reduced by about 11 dB from the RF switch for continuous function
monitoring. Since both transmitters are always in operation, the transmitter
currently not switched through is also monitored.
Note Switchover in equipment protection configurations leads to a short interruption of

data transmission.
Marconi 3-29
3.7.2.2 System diagram
ODU 155/...
Filter box with

IDU 155-...
OP A/A' C/C' RF Switch
PSU
STM-1 Modulator
TX/RX
DPU
Demodulator f1
OMT Orthomode transducer
PR H
Demodulator TX/RX
DPU
Modulator
OMT V
PSU
polarization
This port is not
occupied in 1x (1+1)
configurations.
Fig. 3-35 1+1 EQP configuration with RF switch (system overview; only ODU S)
The photograph below shows the RF switch without any connections.
Fig. 3-36 RF switch - ODU S
3-30 Marconi
3.7.3 Equipment protection configuration with RF coupler
In equipment protection configurations, the RF coupler represents an alternative

to the RF switch (RF switch, waveguide switch). It is available in two variants
(symmetrical or asymmetrical). The Tx output stage (RF section) of the channel
currently not used is switched off by software control and is activated again only
in case of a fault or failure (switchover).
3.7.3.1 Signal flow

IDU: OP ODU: OP
OP Coax
STM-1 RF Unit
PR
Cable
STM-1 RF coupler
IDU: PR ODU: PR
Coax
RF Unit
Cable
Fig. 3-37 EQP configuration with RF coupler

IDU: OP ODU: OP
OP Coax
STM-1 RF Unit
PR
Cable
STM-1 RF coupler
IDU: PR ODU: PR
Coax
RF Unit
Cable
Fig. 3-38 EQP configuration with RF coupler

Note With a symmetrical coupler, a switchover process caused by a fault or failure

does not lead to further system losses. Reversion to a preferred channel
(operating channel, OP) is not obligatory here.
With an asymmetrical coupler, it must be ensured that transmission takes place

via the low-attenuation path (operating channel) whenever possible. Switchover
due to a fault or failure leads to considerable system losses. For this reason, the
automatic reversion to the operating channel should always be activated (if
possible) via the "RPS Module Config. RF Coupler, Line Switch" configuration
menu.
Switchover in equipment protection configurations leads to a short interruption of
data transmission.
The use of RF couplers permits a compact system design.
Marconi 3-31
Master-IDU BB Filter
Power Supply
Coax.
EOW
Modulator cable
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator ODU
Waveguide
f1
IDU
EOW Power Supply Coupler
Modulator H
DPU
Demodulator ODU
Fig. 3-39 1+1 equipment protection config. with RF coupler
The photograph below shows an RF coupler (for ODU S) without connections.
Fig. 3-40 RF coupler - ODU S
3-32 Marconi
The photograph below shows an RF coupler (for ODU LX) without connections.
Fig. 3-41 RF coupler - ODU LX
The following photograph shows an RF coupler (for ODU L) without connections.
Fig. 3-42 RF coupler - ODU L
Marconi 3-33
3.7.4 Equipment protection configuration with RF switch and line switch

(only ODU S)
In equipment protection configurations, the redundant systems operate at the

same frequency. Switchover takes place simultaneously for both the transmit and
receive direction. For the radio side, an external RF switch driven by the Outdoor
Units is required. The additional line switch implements a second protection
switching level on the line side.
3.7.4.1 Signal flow
The diagram below shows normal operation without a fault or failure. The STM-1
data signal is transmitted via the operating channel. Both the line switch and RF
switch are set to OP.
IDU: OP ODU: OP
Line Switch
OP Coax
RF Unit
PR
Cable
STM-1 STM-1 RF Switch
IDU: PR ODU: PR
Coax
RF Unit
Cable
Fig. 3-43 EQP config. with RF switch and line switch

The diagram below shows the signal path in case of a fault or failure in the
redundant part (modulator, demodulator, ODU) of the operating channel. The
STM-1 data signal is first routed via the Master IDU to the Slave IDU and then
transmitted via the protection channel. The line switch is set to OP, whereas the
RF switch is set to PR.
IDU: OP ODU: OP
Line Switch
OP Coax
RF Unit
PR Cable
IDU: PR ODU: PR
Coax
RF Unit
Cable

3-34 Marconi
In case of a total failure or a fault in the non-redundant path of the OP-IDU, the
signalling path routed via the latter is no longer available. In this case, the STM-1
data signal is applied directly to the Indoor Unit of the protection channel (PR-
IDU) by the line switch. Both the line switch and RF switch are set to PR.
IDU: OP ODU: OP
Line Switch
OP Coax
RF Unit
PR
Cable
IDU: PR ODU: PR
Coax
RF Unit
Cable

PR active / total failure of OP-IDU
Note The line switch is mounted in a separate housing. It is available in an optical and
electrical version.
A total failure or a fault in the non-redundant path of the OP-IDU occurs

whenever the power supply, SPI interface (opt. or el.) or DPU of the OP-IDU fails.
For service purposes (exchange of the OP-IDU), the line switch can be forced
over to the protection channel (see "PRS Module Config. RF Coupler, Line
Switch" form).
Since a switchover of the line switch leads to a short interruption of data

transmission, a time switching command for an automatic reversion can be
defined. In this case, the system will switch over to the operating channel
automatically at the time entered.
In equipment protection configurations, each switchover leads to a short

interruption of data transmission.
Caution If the line switch changes over to the protection channel, all auxiliary channels
and service functions (service channels, EOW, wayside channels, XQI) as well
as the LMT and SOA connection will be interrupted and no longer available
(without OP-IDU).
Marconi 3-35
The photographs below show the Line Switch (optical and electrical) without any
connections.
Fig. 3-46 Line switch (optical)
Fig. 3-47 Line switch (electrical)
3-36 Marconi
3.7.5 Equipment protection configuration with RF coupler and line switch
In equipment protection configurations, the redundant systems are operated at

the same frequency and connected via an RF coupler. The Tx output stage (RF
section) of the channel currently not used is switched off by software control and
is activated again only in case of a fault or failure (switchover). The RF coupler is
available in two variants (symmetrical or asymmetrical). Using the line switch, a
second protection switching level is implemented on the line side.
3.7.5.1 Signal flow
data signal is transmitted via the operating channel. The line switch is set to OP.
The Tx output stage of the protection channel (PR) is deactivated.
IDU: OP ODU: OP
Line Switch
OP Coax
RF Unit
PR
Cable
STM-1 STM-1 RF coupler
IDU: PR ODU: PR
Coax
RF Unit
Cable

The next diagram shows the signal path in case of a fault or failure in the
redundant part of the operating channel. The STM-1 data signal is first routed via
the OP-IDU to the PR-IDU and then transmitted via the protection channel. The
line switch is set to OP. The Tx output stage of the operating channel (OP) is
deactivated.
IDU: OP ODU: OP
Line Switch
OP Coax
RF Unit
PR
Cable
IDU: PR ODU: PR
Coax
RF Unit
Cable

Marconi 3-37
data signal is applied directly to the Indoor Unit of the protection channel (PR-
IDU) by the line switch. The line switch is then in the PR position. The Tx output
stage of the operating channel (OP) is deactivated.
IDU: OP ODU: OP
Line Switch
OP Coax
RF Unit
PR
Cable
IDU: PR ODU: PR
Coax
RF Unit
Cable

PR active / total failure of OP IDU
Note With a symmetrical coupler, a switchover process caused by a fault or failure

does not lead to further system losses. Reversion to a preferred channel
(operating channel, OP) is not obligatory.
With an asymmetrical coupler, it must be ensured that transmission takes place

via the low-attenuation path (operating channel) whenever possible. Switchover
due to a fault or failure leads to considerable system losses. For this reason, the
automatic reversion to the operating channel should therefore always be
activated (if possible) via the "RPS Module Config. RF Coupler, Line Switch"
configuration menu.
The use of RF couplers permits a compact system design.
The line switch is mounted in a separate housing. It is available in an optical and

electrical version.

whenever the power supply, SPI interface (opt. or el.) or DPU of the OP-IDU
fails.
For service purposes (exchange of the OP-IDU), the line switch can be forced
over to the protection channel (see "PRS Module Config. RF Coupler, Line
Switch" form).

In equipment protection configurations, each switchover leads to a short

interruption of data transmission.
3-38 Marconi
(without OP-IDU).
OP-IDU BB filter
EOW Power Supply
Modulator
DPU
Demodulator
ODU
STM-1 RF coupler
EOW Power Supply

Modulator
DPU
Demodulator
ODU
1+1 Line PR-IDU BB filter
Switch
Fig. 3-51 1+1 equipment protection with RF coupler and line switch
Marconi 3-39
3.7.6 Line protection configuration
3.7.6.1 Signal flow
The following diagrams show the signal flow in a line protection configuration.
Operation is possible with frequency redundancy or channel redundancy. With
line protection, the Tx signal is permanently applied to both radio links so that
there is no switchover. The Rx signal is switched over without any bit errors if the
two data streams received are synchronous.
IDU: OP ODU: OP
OP Coax
STM-1 RF Unit
PR
Cable
STM-1
IDU: PR ODU: PR
Coax
RF Unit
Cable
Fig. 3-52 Line protection configuration

IDU: OP ODU: OP
OP Coax
STM-1 RF Unit
PR
Cable
STM-1
IDU: PR ODU: PR
Coax
RF Unit
Cable
Fig. 3-53 Line protection configuration

3-40 Marconi
3.7.6.2 System diagram (cross-polar connection)

f1
H
OP1
OP2 CCDP or ACAP mode

for ODU S and ODU LX
V *ACAP mode with ODU L
*
f1 f2
2 x IDU 2 x IDU
EOW Power Supply
Waveguide Waveguide Power Supply
Modulator
EOW
STM-1 DPU
Modulator
ODU ODU DPU STM-1
Demodulator Demodulator
OMT OMT
EOW Power Supply Power Supply EOW
Modulator
DPU
Modulator
ODU ODU DPU
Demodulator Demodulator
2 BB Filter 2 BB Filter
Fig. 3-54 1+1 line protection configuration (with cross-polar connection)
3.7.6.3 System diagram (connection to one polarization)
2 x IDU H 2 x IDU
BK EK
EOW Power Supply Power Supply EOW

Modulator
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator
ODU V ODU
Modulator
DPU STM-1
Demodulator
Waveguide
EOW Power Supply Waveguide Power Supply EOW

Modulator
DPU
Demodulator
ODU (optional for ODU
Modulator
DPU
Demodulator
ODU LEX, LMX,
LKX and L)
Fig. 3-55 1+1 line protection configuration (connection to one polarization)
Marconi 3-41
3.7.7 Line protection configuration with line switch
3.7.7.1 Signal flow
The following diagrams show the signal flow in a line protection configuration.
Operation is possible with frequency redundancy or channel redundancy. With
line protection, the Tx signal is permanently applied to both radio links so that
there is no switchover. The line switch implements a second protection switching
level on the line side.
data signal is transmitted via the operating channel. The line switch is set to OP.
IDU: OP ODU: OP
Line Switch
OP Coax
RF Unit
PR
Cable
STM-1 STM-1
IDU: PR ODU: PR
Coax
RF Unit
Cable
Fig. 3-56 Line protection configuration with line switch

The next diagram shows the signal path in case of a fault or failure in the
redundant part of the operating channel. The STM-1 data signal is first routed via
the OP-IDU to the PR-IDU and then transmitted via the protection channel. The
line switch is set to OP. The Rx signal is switched over without any bit errors
provided that the two data streams received are synchronous.
IDU: OP ODU: OP
Line Switch
OP Coax
RF Unit
PR
Cable
STM-1 STM-1
IDU: PR ODU: PR
Coax
RF Unit
Cable
Fig. 3-57 Line protection configuration with line switch

3-42 Marconi
data signal is switched directly to the Indoor Unit of the protection channel (PR-
IDU) by the line switch. The latter is now in the PR position.
IDU: OP ODU: OP
Line Switch
OP Coax
RF Unit
PR
Cable
STM-1 STM-1
IDU: PR ODU: PR
Coax
RF Unit
Cable
Fig. 3-58 Line protection config. with line switch

PR active / total failure of OP IDU
Note The line switch is mounted in a separate housing. It is available in an optical and
electrical version.

whenever the power supply, SPI interface (opt. or el.) or DPU of the OP-IDU fails.
For maintenance or repair purposes (exchange of the OP-IDU), the line switch
can be forced over to the protection channel (see "PRS Module Config. RF
Coupler, Line Switch" form).

(without OP-IDU).
Marconi 3-43
3.8 Diversity
3.8.1 Space diversity
Space diversity configurations are used to improve transmission quality of radio

links operated under difficult geographical or climatic conditions.
Fig. 3-59 shows a typical application. In this case, the higher-quality receive
signal is used.
Master-IDU BB filter Main Antenna

Coax. f1
EOW Power Supply
STM-1 DPU
Demodulator ODU
H
IDU
EOW Power Supply V
Modulator
DPU
Demodulator ODU
Diversity Antenna
Fig. 3-59 Terminal configuration with space diversity
3.8.2 1+1 space diversity
In this configuration, only one transmitter is active on the Tx side (like in 1+1
equipment protection configurations). On the Rx side, the system behaves like in
space diversity configurations (both receivers active; also see section 3.8.1).
3.8.3 Frequency diversity
Frequency diversity configurations are identical with line protection. In this case,
however, two different frequencies are used (see section 3.7).
3-44 Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Local Maintenance Terminal
4 Local Maintenance Terminal

The Local Maintenance Terminal PC with the corresponding LMT program is
especially used for MDRS 155 S commissioning and maintenance. The LMT
program can address not only MDRS 155 S but also other network element
types.
The address setting of the network element during initial commissioning can be
performed only by means of the LMT. Only after adjusting the correct address,
the network element can be controlled and monitored by ServiceOn Access. The
LMT also permits control and monitoring tasks to be executed in service on the
MDRS 155 S.
The connection of the LMT to MDRS 155 S can be set up as follows:
• Direct connection to the LMT interface (RS-232);

• LAN/WAN connection via TCP/IP;
• Modem connection.
Logon to a remote MDRS 155 S is also possible depending on ServiceOn

Access.
For a logon process, the operator requires a password configurable by the
ServiceOn Access system or the remote logon must have been explicitly
released by the latter. For safety reasons, such a release process for a remote
logon will be automatically cancelled after expiry of a timer.
Marconi 4-1
Local Maintenance Terminal Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
4.1 Direct connection to the LMT interface

A LMT interface located on the front panel of the MDRS 155 S system permits
the connection of the Local Maintenance Terminal for control purposes.
The protocol stack depicted below is used for communication between the LMT
and MDRS 155 S. The LMT can either communicate with MDRS 155 S locally via
the RS-232 interface, TC57 and the TP4 user interface or remotely (via the ECC
or the LAN using the OSI protocol stack).
The LMT permits several remote logons to be executed simultaneously. The

number of possible connections is determined by the LMT performance features.
OSI Layer
User Protocol (AWP01)
7
Switching Protocol (VMP01)
Layers 5 and 6 are not used. Local connection
OSI transport layer, class 4 (TP4) 4

X.214, X.224
(ISO 8072, ISO 8072/AD2, ISO 8073, ISO 8073/AD2) Remote
connection
Network layer 3
CLNS - ISO 8473 (ISO 8348/DAD1)
ES-IS - ISO 9542 / IS-IS - ISO 10589
LAPD, Q.921 LLC - ISO 8802-2 (Type 1)

MAC: CSMA/CD - ISO 8802-3
TC57 2
DCCR DCCM 10BaseT RS 232 1
ECC transmission LAN interface PC interface
Fig. 4-1 Protocol stack for connecting the LMT via the serial PC interface
4.2 LAN/WAN connection via TCP/IP

A connection between the MDRS 155 S and LMT can also be set up via a
TCP/IP link provided that the LAN interface is available.
This method offers the following advantages:
• Increased data throughput;

• Remote MDRS 155 S systems can be easily addressed.
A possible example of a TCP/IP connection is depicted in the following diagram.
4-2 Marconi
DHCP Server LMT
LAN/WAN
BOOTP Server Internet or Intranet

LAN/WAN
LAN
ECC ECC
MDRS 155 S MDRS 155 S MDRS 155 S
QD2 Master RS-485
QD2 station bus
NE NE
Fig. 4-2 TCP/IP connection between the MDRS 155 S and LMT
In this case, the MDRS 155 S is connected via its LAN interface to a LAN. The
LMT is also connected to a LAN. Both LANs are interconnected either via the
Internet or an Intranet.
For setting up the connection, both the MDRS 155 S and LMT still require some
IP address information (IP address, sub-net mask, IP address of the default
Gateway) to be made available via the PC interface.
The LMT can get its IP address information in the following ways:
1. Via the own system configuration;
2. Via a DHCP server. This method is normally used in PC networks. This

server manages the IP address information of the PC network. This
information is transmitted as soon as the LMT is booted.
The LMT can also set up remote connections to further network elements. For
this purpose, a TCP/IP connection is first set up to the MDRS 155 S. Then a
remote logon is performed via the ECC to the corresponding network element.
Only one LMT connection can be set up to a MDRS 155 S at a time. If a TCP/IP
connection already exists, additional connection commands (via TCP/IP or the
serial PC interface) will be rejected. If a connection via the serial PC interface
already exists, an additional TCP/IP connection to the MDRS 155 S cannot be
set up.
Protection against unauthorized access:

The Network Administrator must ensure that unauthorized access to the MDRS
155 S is not possible via the TCP/IP connection. Such an unauthorized access
could be prevented, for example, by installing a firewall in the LAN of the
MDRS 155 S.
Marconi 4-3
4.2.1 IP address information for MDRS 155 S
The IP address information covers settings which must always be defined for IP
networks (networks used for TCP/IP data exchange). Normally, the MDRS 155 S
is integrated in an already existing LAN. For this IP network, the IP address
information has already been planned and implemented. For this reason, the
address settings for the MDRS 155 S must be adapted to the already existing
structure. The following IP address information must therefore be made available
by the IP Network Administrator:
IP address:
The IP address, e.g. 144.130.012.004, is used for an unambiguous identification
of the unit within the Internet/Intranet.
Sub-net mask:
Using the sub-net mask, e.g. 255.255.0.0, and the IP address, it is possible to
determine whether the MDRS 155 S and LMT are located in the same or in
different IP networks. If the MDRS 155 S and LMT are located in different IP
networks, the interconnection between these two networks is set up via an
Intranet or the Internet.
IP address of the default Gateway:

If the MDRS 155 S and LMT are located in different IP networks, an Intranet or
the Internet must be used for data exchange between these two networks. The
connection to such a transmission network is performed using a Router or
Gateway, whose IP address must be known to MDRS 155 S.
This IP address information is memorized in the MDRS 155 S in an EEPROM.

Any modification of these configuration data via the LMT results in a
MDRS 155 S reset.
4.2.2 IP address information for the LMT
The IP address information necessary for MDRS 155 S is also required for the
LMT. It is entered either manually at the LMT or supplied by a DHCP server.
For setting up a connection to MDRS 155 S, it is also possible to use

alphanumeric names such as "helios" instead of the IP addresses, provided that
a name resolution between the IP address and alphanumeric name is performed
in the IP network of the LMT. This name resolution could, for example, be
performed by a DNS server.
4.2.3 Protocol stack of the TCP/IP connection
The protocol stack shown below is used for the TCP/IP connection between the
LMT and MDRS 155 S. In this case, the LMT communicates via the TCP/IP
connection and TP4 user interface with MDRS 155 S. Remote connections to
other network elements are set up via the ECC.
4-4 Marconi
For the connection between the LMT and MDRS 155 S, the port address of the
TCP protocol has been adjusted to 41300.
OSI Layer
7
Local connection to the NE
Layers 5 and 6 are not used! addressed via TCP/IP
OSI transport layer, class 4 (TP4) 4

X.214, X.224
(ISO 8072, ISO 8072/AD2, ISO 8073, ISO 8073/AD2) Remote Transport layer
conn. TCP: RFC 793, 896
Network layer Network layer 3

CLNS - ISO 8473 (ISO 8348/DAD1) ICMP: RFC 792
ES-IS - ISO 9542 / IS-IS - ISO 10589 IP: RFC 791
LAPD, Q.921 LLC - ISO 8802-2 (Type 1)

MAC: CSMA/CD - ISO 8802-3
2
DCCR DCCM 10BaseT 1
ECC transmission LAN interface
Fig. 4-3 Protocol stack for connecting the LMT via TCP/IP
4.3 Modem link

The connection of the LMT to MDRS 155 S can also be set up via a modem link.
LMT
Modem
Modem Modem link
MDRS 155 S
LMT IF
Fig. 4-4 Connection of the LMT via a modem link
In this case, one of the two modems is connected to the PC interface (LMT) of
MDRS 155 S, while the far-end modem is connected to the RS-232 interface of
the LMT.
Before this link can be used, both modems must be configured via a PC using an
appropriate Terminal program, e.g. HyperTerminal of Win95.
The protocol stack depicted for the "LAN/WAN connection via TCP/IP“ is also
used for this type of connection.
Marconi 4-5
4-6 Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 MDRS 155 S System in the Data Communication Network
5 MDRS 155 S System in the Data Communication

Network
5.1 Integration into a TMN
5.1.1 Introduction
The present chapter describes the integration of the MDRS 155 S Microwave
Radio System into a ServiceOn Access (SOA) control and monitoring system.
This task is fulfilled by a Network Management System for Telecommunications
Networks (TMN). It is based on the SISA specification and the QD2 information
model. The connection of MDRS 155 S to SOA can be performed in different
ways:
• Classical connection to a hierarchical SISA infrastructure;

• OSI transport networks;
• IP transport networks.
The OSI and IP transport networks are based on the SISA technology which has
already been used for several years. They are complementing the classical
connection type. This is briefly explained in the following section.
5.1.2 Introduction to the SISA network
The SISA network (Supervisory and Information System for local and remote
Areas) is used for information exchange (alarms, commands, measuring values
etc.) between transmission equipment and a monitoring system such as the
ServiceOn Access Network Management System from Marconi.
Messages from local or remote transmission equipment, i.e. from the so-called
Network Elements (NE), are transmitted to the ServiceOn Access Workstations.
In addition, information (e.g. control commands, requests etc.) is transmitted from
the ServiceOn Access System to the network elements. Thus, both control and
monitoring of the individual network elements are ensured.
A SISA network (Data Communication Network (DCN)) always has a hierarchical

tree structure based on the Master/Slave concept. This hierarchical structure is
set up by means of concentrators. Concentrators fulfill a Master function and
permit the connection of further network elements (Slaves). Regarding the overall
structure, Slaves are located at the hierarchy level directly below the associated
Master. Provided that a Slave operates itself as concentrator, it can represent
again a Master function for the next lower level. This principle leads to the above-
mentioned tree structure which can be composed of up to nine hierarchy levels.
Thus, concentrators can operate both as Master and Slave, i.e. within the
hierarchical structure, they act as Slaves towards the higher level and as Masters
towards the lower level.
Marconi 5-1
MDRS 155 S System in the Data Communication Network Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
Concentrators can be implemented on a hardware basis (SISA-K) or on a

software basis. The latter are referred to as virtual concentrators (SISA-V).
The individual Slaves are physically connected to the QD2int bus which is in
compliance with RS 485 and has a transmission rate of 64 kbit/s. Up to 30
network elements can be connected to this bus.
In order to create redundancies to avoid service interruptions in case of a failure,

it is possible to set up ring structures within the SISA network.
The connection between the SISA network and the ServiceOn Access LAN/WAN
is set up via a QD2 Gateway. The ServiceOn Access System can be connected
to several QD2 Gateways.
The figure depicted below shows these relations and gives a first overview of
network element addressing described in the next chapter.
LAN/WAN
Network no. 1 Network no. 2
QD-2 QD-2
Gateway Gateway
1:1 2:1
SISA-K SISA-K
1:1.1 1:1.2 2:1.1 2:1.2
SISA-K NE NE NE
1:1.1.1 1:1.1.2 1:1.1.3
NE NE NE
Fig. 5-1 Structure of a QD2-SISA network
5-2 Marconi
5.1.3 Network element addressing in the SISA network
To identify individual network elements, they are assigned their own node
numbers. These node numbers lie in the following ranges:
• 1 - 30: The higher-order concentrator is a SISA-K.

• 1 - 254: The higher-order concentrator is a SISA-V.
All network elements of the same hierarchical level must have their own, unique
addresses.
To be able to address a network element within the entire SISA network, all
addresses of the higher-order connecting elements (switching nodes) must be
known.
Each SISA network connected via a QD2 Gateway to the ServiceOn Access
system is assigned a network number by the latter.
The overall address of a network element is a sequence of all addresses of the

individual connecting elements from the top of the tree down to the respective
network element complying with the following conventions:
<Network no.> : <Level 1> . <Level 2> . < ... > . <Level n> . <Node no.>
Thus, a possible address could be 2:1.2. For further examples, please refer to
Fig. 5-1.
The node numbers assigned to the concentrators lead to a further level set up via
this number.
When assigning addresses, please note that the first concentrator below the QD2
Gateway must always be assigned node no. 1.
Marconi 5-3
5.1.4 Basic information on protocols
The present section gives only a brief overview of the OSI 7-Layer model (Open
Systems Interconnection) with its protocol stacks, their basic meaning and
fundamental relations.
The 7-Layer model is used as guideline for data transmission and is composed
as follows:
Layers
7 Application Application
application-oriented
6 Presentation Presentation
5 Control Control
4 Transport Transport
Transport-oriented
3
Switching Switching
2
Protection Protection
1
Physical layer Physical layer
Fig. 5-2 OSI 7-layer model
This model permits an even rougher classification, i.e. the three top layers are
application-oriented and describe how the traffic data are processed and
displayed. In addition, they determine the way communication with the partner
takes place. The four bottom layers are used for a secure transport of this
information to the correct destination.
The tasks of the individual layers are fulfilled by so-called protocols. Since the
individual protocols are located on top of each other just like in a stack, this
arrangement is also referred to as protocol stack.
Regarding the communication between the transmitter and receiver, there is a

protocol stack on each side of the link and each level sees the information
exchange in such a way as if it would directly communicate with the far end at the
same level.
Communication between the transmitter and receiver takes place according to

the following concept:
On the transmit side, the traffic data are assembled in Layer 7 and passed on to
the next lower level. The latter accepts the information made available and
executes its specific tasks. Then it complements this information by adding its
own control information (header), so that the equivalent Layer on the far end can
correctly interpret the information received. This procedure is now continued up
to Layer 2. The information to be transmitted now has the following structure:
5-4 Marconi
Header Header Header Header Header Header

Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4 Layer 5 Layer 6 Data
Fig. 5-3 Data packaging in the individual protocol layers
The overall packet is now physically passed on to the transmission medium.

When this information is received on the Rx side, each layer evaluates the
header determined for it.
Afterwards the complete information (reduced by the actual header) is passed on

to the next higher layer, i.e. the traffic data of Layer 7 are unpacked step by step.
These data are finally transported to the higher-order application. Please note
that not all layers of the OSI model have to be implemented. Depending on the
tasks to be fulfilled and conditions, it is possible that some layers do not have to
be explicitly implemented.
5.1.5 SISA protocols
SISA information is exchanged using two protocols. The actual information is

created/read by means the User protocol and sent to the correct receiver by
means of the Switching protocol. These two protocol types are briefly described
in the following two sections.
5.1.5.1 User protocol (AWP01)
The User protocol (Layer 7 and 6) includes information exchanged between the
network element and the monitoring system. Thus, data indicating the operational
status of a network element can be sent to the ServiceOn Access Network
Management System. On the other hand, network element settings can also be
made via ServiceOn Access. Five different options are available for information
exchange:
Command (Com.) Commands are used to send setting parameters or other

commands to the network element. The latter acknowledges the
reception.
Request (Requ.) Requests are used to request current information from the
network element. Requests can be addressed to one or more
functional units. If a request is to be sent to several functional
units, this is done by means of collective addressing.
Acknowledgement Acknowledgments are, for example, answers to commands. They

inform the operator that
- the command sent has been received and
- whether the command can be executed in this form.
In addition, acknowledgement messages are sent back to the
requesting party, if the request cannot be answered.
Marconi 5-5
Response (Resp.) Responses are reactions to a request and supply the

requested information.
If a request cannot be answered with the required information,
a negative acknowledgement will be transmitted. In case of
collective addressing, only functional units capable of
supplying the requested information will send a response
message. Negative acknowledgements will not be sent in this
case.
Spontaneous message (Spo)

Spontaneous messages are transmitted by a network element in
the direction of the ServiceOn Access Network Management
System whenever modifications to be signalled have occurred in
the network element. In the "Maintenance" mode, certain
spontaneous messages are suppressed.
5.1.5.2 Switching protocol (VMP01)
Within a network element, data are transmitted to their destination using the
Switching protocol (VMP01) (see diagram below). This switching process takes
place via up to four ports.
Information flow to the ServiceOn Access SystemLocal Maintenance Terminal PC (LMT)
Port d
Own SISA data (AWP01)
Port e
Port f
1
P0
VM
Port a
To further network elements connected to the

QD2int bus as Slaves
Fig. 5-4 Switching protocol (VMP01)
Meaning of the individual ports:
Port d: Ascending in the ServiceOn Access direction.

Port f: LMT interface of the network element.
Port e: Own data of the network element.
Port a: Descending in the direction of lower-order Slaves.
This port is available only on concentrators.
If SISA information is transmitted, for example, to the ServiceOn Access Network

Management System, this information enters the switching node at Port e using
the Application protocol and is transmitted via port d and the lower-order
protocols in the ServiceOn Access direction.
From the switching view, a SISA network is regarded as a network composed of

switching nodes.
5-6 Marconi
Switching sections
Starting node Destination node
Information Switching Switching Switching Information

source node node node sink
Local Exchange
Fig. 5-5 Switching structure
A complete set of addresses of a node includes the respective node number of

the switching node and port. In order to set up the path from the information
source to the sink, the addresses of all intermediate switching nodes are
necessary.
5.1.6 Connection of MDRS 155 S to the ServiceOn Access System
As depicted below, the MDRS 155 S can be connected to the ServiceOn Access
Network Management System in three different ways.
Connection to ServiceOn Access
via QD2-DCN via OSI-DCN via IP-DCN
directly indirectly directly indirectly directly indirectly
RS485 DCCR or DCCM LAN (OSI) DCCR or DCCM LAN (IP) DCCR or DCCM
Fig. 5-6 Connection options to ServiceOn Access
A direct connection can be set up via the respective physical interfaces (QD2,
LAN). An indirect connection is set up by embedding the SISA Management
information in the STM-1 signal. In this case, SISA data are transported in the
internal communication channel, i.e. in the so-called ECC (Embedded Control
Channel) reserved for management purposes.
The ECC can be implemented on the DCCM or DCCR. The DCCM is composed of
bytes D4 to D12 of the STM-1 signal SOH, while the DCCR is composed of D1 to
D3. As to whether the DCCR or DCCM is used to implement the ECC depends on
the operating mode adjusted for SOH processing of the corresponding STM-1
signal. The operating modes for SOH processing can be selected independently
of each other for both STM-1 signals.
Marconi 5-7
From the view of the ServiceOn Access Network Management System, it is of no

importance as to which transport layers are used to transmit the SISA protocol.
TCP/IP and OSI-TP4 (OSI transport) are used as transport systems. TCP/IP is
used by the QD2 Gateway, while OSI-TP4 can be additionally used in case of
connections set up via the LAN interface or in case of transmission via the ECC.
5.1.7 Protocol stack of interfaces
5.1.7.1 QD2 interface
The QD2 interface is used to connect the MDRS 155 S Microwave Radio System
to a SISA-DCN. In addition, it is also possible to connect a QD2 network,
provided that the system operates as Master. The protocol stack of this interface
is described in the following overview.
OSI Layer
User Protocol (AWP01) 7
Layers 4 to 6 are not used.
Switching Protocol (VMP01) 3

HDLC (Multidrop) 2
RS485 1
QD2 interface
Fig. 5-7 Structure of the QD2 protocol stack
The data transmission protocol ensures a secure and bit-error-free transmission

of the SISA data (AWP01 and VMP01) using the HDLC procedure. From the
physical view, these data are finally transported via a serial RS-485 4-wire
interface.
5-8 Marconi
5.1.7.2 OSI protocol stack
The OSI protocol stack is composed as depicted below. The SISA-specific data
of the User and Switching protocols are transported using the OSI-TP4 protocol
and the lower-order layers either via the LAN interface or the ECC to their
destination.
OSI Layer
7
Layers 5 and 6 are not used.
OSI transport layer class 4 (TP4) 4

X.214, X.224
(ISO 8072, ISO 8072/AD2, ISO 8073, ISO 8073/AD2)
Network layer 3
CLNS - ISO 8473 (ISO 8348/DAD1)
ES-IS - ISO 9542 / IS-IS - ISO 10589
LAPD, Q.921
LLC - ISO 8802-2 (Type 1)
MAC: CSMA/CD - ISO 8802-3 2
DCCR DCCM 10BaseT 1
ECC transmission LAN interface
Fig. 5-8 OSI protocol stack
Routing functionality
Layer-3 routing protocols always use the shortest path for information exchange
between the transmitter and receiver. For this purpose, each network element
informs all other network elements within an SDH network (routing area) on the
adjacent network elements connected to it. Based on this information, each
network element creates a routing table which includes the shortest path (lowest
number of LEs) to each destination within the routing area. These routing tables
are updated after each topology modification or at regular intervals.
Marconi 5-9
5.1.7.3 TCP/IP protocol stack
The TCP/IP interface is used to connect the MDRS 155 S to a TCP/IP-DCN. The
protocol stack of this interface is shown below.
OSI Layer
7
Layers 5 and 6 are not used.
TCP 4
IP 3
LLC - ISO 8802-2 (Type 1)
10BaseT 1
LAN interface
Fig. 5-9 TCP/IP protocol stack
Since the standardized TCP/IP protocols are supported, the local network
element can be connected to the TMN using TCP/IP networks. Error-free
transmission of the SISA data (AWP01 and VMP01) is guaranteed by the LLC
and MAC protocols. The physical transport takes place via a 10BaseT interface.
5.1.7.4 Routing functionality
MDRS 155 S supports both the entry of static routes and dynamic OSPF routing
in compliance with RFC 2328.
5.1.7.4.1 Static routing
A radio link is set up using two routers, each station being equipped with a LAN
port (10Base-T) and WAN port (ECC). In order to interconnect the LANs of a
radio link, a default route is entered automatically. However, this entry is not
visible in the routing table. The routing table permits the entry of up to ten static
IP routes for setting up logic, hierarchical network structures with destination
networks outside the two own IP network address areas. The bandwidth of the
WAN port (ECC) is maximally 168 kbit/s.
Note The address of the default gateway is adjusted in the TCP/IP connection
network element.
5-10 Marconi
5.1.7.4.2 Dynamic routing (OSPF)
The Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol is a hierarchical link state protocol.
To calculate the routes, the OSPF protocol uses the Shortest Path First (SPF)
algorithm. In the initial shape of the SPF algorithm, each router sends out link
status messages at regular intervals via each addressable neighbor. With X
routers connected, this results in X2 messages. The OSPF provides a dedicated
Gateway (Router) for each multi-access network. This Gateway sends out the
routing messages representative for all routers available in this network. Thus,
the number of routing messages is reduced to a minimum. Line costs, TOS
routing, dynamic load distribution, authentication between different routers,
network partitioning into smaller sub-networks and the creation of virtual links are
taken into account by OSPF. In an OSPF network, the network administrator can
calculate the costs of one or several transmission links using parameters such as
traffic volume, signal delay, transmission bandwidth and line tariffs and assign
these costs to the individual WAN interfaces. This enables the router to exactly
calculate the routing metrics.
5.1.7.5 Multi-protocol stack
Fig. 5-10 shows the interaction of the implemented multi-protocol stack.
OSI Layer
7
Layers 5 and 6
Layers 5 and 6 are not used. are not
used.
OSI Transport Layer - Class 4 (TP4)

Layer 4
is not used.
Layer 4
is not used.
X.214, X.224
(ISO 8072, ISO 8072/AD2, ISO 8073, ISO 8073/AD2)
TCP 4
Switching Protocol Layer 3 Network Layer
(VMP01) is not used. CLNS - ISO 8473 (ISO 8348/DAD1)
ES-IS - ISO 9542 / IS-IS - ISO 10589
IP 3
HDLC (Multidrop) TC57 LAPD, Q.921 LLC - ISO 8802-2 (Type 1)
RS-485 RS-232 DCCR DCCM 10BaseT 1
QD2 interface LMT ECC transmission LAN interface
Fig. 5-10 Structure of the QD2/OSI/TCP/IP multi-protocol stack
Marconi 5-11
5.2 DCN operating modes
5.2.1 Connection to an OSI network
In the Q3p mode, the MDRS 155 S system is operated as a complete OSI
network element. Management information is transported in the traffic data
stream either via the DCC(R) or DCC(M).
This operating mode permits the MDRS 155 S to be simultaneously used as QD2
Gateway. Besides the QD2 agent and XQI of the system, an additional Master
SISA-V is managed which permits the setup of a QD2 station bus.
Active Router Port

NE can be connected
to SOA
OSI-NE
- MS1/4
OSI-DCN - MDRS 155
(Mode Q3P)
LAN LAN
Multi- LAN Multi- LAN

proto- protocol DCC
DCC Router Ra-
col dio
IP Ra- IP
Router dio
LAN LAN
OSI-NE OSI-NE
- MS1/4 OSI OSI - MS1/4
- MDRS 155 DCC DCC DCC DCC - MDRS 155
(Mode Q3P) Line Radio Radio Line (Mode Q3P)
Network Network
Element Element
MDRS 155 S MDRS 155 S
SISA-V SISA-V
Agent XQI Master SISA-V Agent XQI Master SISA-V

Mode Q3P Mode Q3P
RS485 RS485
QD2-NE QD2-NE
- MS1/4 - MS1/4
- MDRS 155 - MDRS 155
(Mode QD2-Slave (Mode QD2-Slave
or QD2-SISA-V) or QD2-SISA-V)
Fig. 5-11 Q3p mode
5-12 Marconi
5.2.2 Connection to a QD2 network
5.2.2.1 MDRS 155 S used as Slave without SISA concentrator function
In the QD2 Slave mode, the MDRS 155 S system is used as a conventional QD2
subscriber connected to a QD2 station bus. The network element implements the
access via a SISA-V to the system agent and the integrated XQI adapter.
A Master SISA-V function is not integrated. The network management functions
via OSI or IP are deactivated in this operating mode.
Active Router Port

NE can be connected
to SOA
QD2-DCN
RS485
LAN Multi-protocol
Router
DCC
IP Radio
LAN
DCC OSI DCC

Network Line Radio
Element
MDRS 155 S
SISA-V
Agent XQI
Mode QD2 Slave
Fig. 5-12 QD2 Slave mode
Marconi 5-13
5.2.2.2 MDRS 155 S used as Slave with SISA concentrator function
In the QD2-SISA-V and QD2-via-SISA-V modes, the MDRS 155 S system is

operated in a QD2 network. Management information is transported in the traffic
data stream either via the DCC(R) or DCC(M). Operated in the QD2-SISA-V
mode, the system represents the Gateway to the QD2 network and is connected
via the RS485 interface.
Besides the QD2 agent of the system and the associated XQI, this operating
mode permits the simultaneous use of another SISA-V as virtual SISA
concentrator. The connected MDRS 155 S systems can be addressed via the
selected DCC. They are operated in the QD2-via-SISA-V mode.
Operated in the QD2-via-SISA-V mode, the system is logically connected via the
selected DCC to a SISA-V of the MDRS 155 S operated in the QD2-SISA-V
mode. When using the QD2 station bus, the systems operated in the QD2-Slave
or QD2-SISA-V mode must be connected using the same connection variant.
Management information is transmitted via the DCC and OSI/LAN interface and
made available here to further MDRS systems operated in the QD2-via-SISA-V
mode.
Please note that in the QD2-via-SISA-V, QD2-Slave and QD2-SISA-V modes, the
number of systems connected according to this principle is limited to 30.
Active Router Port

NE can be connected
to SOA
MDRS 155 MDRS 155

(Mode QD2 (Mode QD2
via SISA-V) via SISA-V)
QD2-DCN
LAN LAN
RS485
LAN Multi- LAN Multi-

protocol protocol
DCC Router DCC Router
IP Ra- Radio IP
dio
LAN LAN
MDRS 155 MDRS 155

OSI OSI
(Mode QD2 DCC DCC DCC DCC (Mode QD2
via SISA-V) Line Radio Radio Line via SISA-V)
Network SISA-V Network

Element Element
SISA-V SISA-V
Agent XQI Mode Mode Agent XQI Master SISA-V

QD2-SISA-V QD2-via-SISA-V
RS485
QD2-NE
- MS1/4
- MDRS 155
(Mode QD2-Slave
or QD2-SISA-V)
Fig. 5-13 QD2-SISA-V mode
5-14 Marconi
5.2.3 Connection to an IP network
5.2.3.1 Connection to an IP network without SISA concentrator function
In the QD2-IP mode, the MDRS 155 S system is operated in a TCP/IP network.
The management data are transported in the traffic data stream either via the
DCC(R) or DCC(M). Besides the QD2 agent and XQI of the system, a Master
SISA-V is managed. The latter sets up a QD2 station bus via the QD2 interface.
This bus permits the connection of another 30 QD2 network elements.
An IP data channel is established via the DCC channel to the far end. Using this
channel, another QD2 station bus can be set up in the far end and further TCP/IP
network elements can be included in the IP data traffic.
Active Router Port

NE can be connected
to SOA
IP-NE
MDRS 155
IP-DCN (Mode QD2-IP or
QD2-SISA-V-IP
LAN LAN
LAN Multi- LAN

DCC protocol DCC
Radio Router Radio
IP IP
LAN LAN
Multi- DCC OSI DCC DCC OSI DCC

protocol Line Radio Radio Line
Router
Network Network
Element Element
SISA-V SISA-V
Mode Mode
Agent XQI Master SISA-V Agent XQI Master SISA-V
QD2-IP QD2-IP
RS485 RS485
QD2-NE QD2-NE
- MS1/4 - MS1/4
- MDRS 155 - MDRS 155
(Mode QD2-Slave (Mode QD2-Slave
or QD2-SISA-V) or QD2-SISA-V)
Fig. 5-14 QD2-IP mode
Marconi 5-15
5.2.3.2 Connection to an IP network with SISA concentrator function
In the QD2-SISA-V-IP and QD2-via SISA-V modes, the MDRS 155 S system is
operated in a TCP/ IP network. The management information is transported in
the traffic data stream either via the DCC(R) or DCC(M). Operated in the QD2-
SISA-V-IP mode, the system is used as Gateway to the IP network and
connected to the latter via the LAN interface. Besides the QD2 agent of the
system and the associated XQI, the operating mode permits the simultaneous
use of another SISA-V as virtual SISA concentrator. The connected MDRS 155 S
systems can be addressed via the selected DCC. They are operated in the QD2-
via-SISA-V mode.
Operated in the QD2-via-SISA-V mode, the system is logically connected via the
selected DCC to a SISA-V of a MDRS 155 S system operated in the QD2-SISA-
V-IP mode. When using the QD2 station bus, the systems operated in the QD2-
Slave or QD2-SISA-V mode must be connected using the same connection
variant. Management information is transmitted via the DCC and OSI/LAN
interface and made available here to further MDRS systems operated in the
QD2-via-SISA-V mode.
Please note that in the QD2-via-SISA-V, QD2-Slave and QD2-SISA-V modes, the
number of systems connected according to this principle is limited to 30 network
elements.
Active Router Port

NE can be connected
via SOA
IP-NE
MDRS 155 MDRS 155
Mode: (Mode QD2
QD2-IP or
QD2-SISA-V-IP) via SISA-V)
IP-DCN
LAN LAN
LAN
LAN Multiprotocol LAN Multi-

DCC Router DCC protocol
Radio Radio Router
IP IP
LAN LAN
MDRS 155 MDRS 155

OSI OSI
(Mode QD2 DCC DCC DCC DCC (Mode QD2
via SISA-V) Line Radio Radio Line via SISA-V)
Network SISA-V Network

Element Element
SISA-V SISA-V
Agent XQI Mode Mode Agent XQI Master SISA-V

QD2-SISA-V-IP QD2-via-SISA-V
RS485
QD2-NE
- MS1/4
- MDRS 155
(Mode QD2
or SISA-V)
Fig. 5-15 QD2-SISA-V-IP mode
5-16 Marconi
5.2.4 Overview of DCN operating modes
The following table gives an overview of possible connection variants and

operating modes of the MDRS 155 S system. A distinction between the different
applications is made depending on protocol types (OSI and TCP/IP) and
transmission paths (DCC/RS485).
QD2-via SISA-V
QD2-SISA-V-IP
MDRS Operating Modes
QD2-SISA-V
QD2-Slave
QD2-IP
Q3P
NMS connection - SOA direction via RS485 ■ ■ ■
NMS connection to SOA via TCP/IP LAN ■ ■
NMS connection to SOA via OSI LAN ■
NMS NMS connection - SOA direction via IP DCC/Radio ■

connect-
NMS connection - SOA direction via OSI DCC/Line ■
ion
NMS connection - SOA direction via OSI DCC/Radio ■
NMS connection with higher-order concentrator via OSI* ■
Concentrator for lower-order NE via RS485 ■ ■ ■
Concentrator for lower-order NE via OSI ■ ■
LMT access via RS232 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

LMT
access LMT access via TCP/IP (LAN or DCC/Radio) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
LMT access to far end ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
LAN interface for IP routing ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Active LAN interface for OSI routing ■ ■ ■ ■
router
ports DCC/R interface for IP routing ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
DCC/R interface for OSI routing ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
DCC/L interface for OSI routing ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
• Only in conjunction with a concentrator in the form of an identical system

operated in the QD2-SISA-V or QD2-SISA-V-IP modes.
Table - Overview of connection variants and operating modes
Notes:
Terms such as "higher-order" or "lower-order" refer to the hierarchical VMP

address structure used in the QD2 management with the net manager at the top
and the network element address tree becoming wider in the descending order.
Marconi 5-17
5.3 Addresses for setting up a connection to ServiceOn Access

In order to ensure that a connection can be set up between the ServiceOn
Access system and MDRS 155 S, some addresses must be adjusted by means
of the LMT in the scope of the initial commissioning process.
5.3.1 Addresses for setting up a direct QD2 connection
In this case (QD2 Slave mode), only the corresponding node no. must be
assigned.
5.3.2 Addresses for OSI transport
For transporting SISA data using the OSI protocol stack, an OSI transport
address is required. This address is composed of the following two parts:
• Transport layer address (Transport Service Access Point TSAP, layer 4) and
• Network layer address (Network Service Access Point, NSAP, layer 3).
5.3.2.1 TSAP addresses
In addition to NSAP addresses, TSAP addresses (Transport Service Access

Point) are required for setting up transport links. They are also used to assign
• Node numbers and

• NE access numbers (for the ServiceOn Access and redundant ServiceOn
Access system).
• TSAP addresses are composed of two bytes separated by a dot. The node
numbers and NE access numbers are contained in the last byte. The first
byte is 0 in this case.
Example of a TSAP address: 000.001
Depending on the operating mode adjusted, the Agent and/or SISA-V appear in
the MDRS 155 S. Node numbers and NE access numbers must be adjusted for
both of them.
If a redundant ServiceOn Access system is available, the NE access number of

this latter must also be adjusted.
5.3.2.2 NSAP addresses
Using NSAP addresses (Network Service Access Point), a network element can
set up a TP4 connection to ServiceOn Access or any other network element. The
NSAP addresses of both the transmitter and receiver are required for
communication.
5-18 Marconi
The NSAP address of a Routing Domain (i.e. a closed entity) has a fixed format.
A Routing Domain represents a higher-order combination of all Intermediate
Systems (IS) and all End Systems (ES) using a common routing protocol. An End
System such as ServiceOn Access can only transmit or receive messages.
Intermediate Systems can also route messages. A Routing Domain can be
divided up into several Areas (see diagram below).
Domain
ES ES
IS IS
ES L1 ES
L1 L1
ES ES
Area IS IS Area
L2 Routing Domain L2
ES ES
IS IS
ES ES
L1
L1 L1
ES ES
ES: End System; IS: Intermediate System; L1: Level 1; L2: Level 2
Fig. 5-16 Structure of a Routing Domain
A level-1 router only routes messages inside its own area. If a level-1 router
receives a message determined for another area, it passes on this message to
the next level-2 router. If there is no level-2 router in the own area, the message
is rejected.
In addition to the IS and ES of its own area, a level-2 router also knows the level-
2 routers of the other areas. If a message is determined for a certain area, it is
passed on by the level-2 router of the source area to a level-2 router of the
destination area (if necessary via several level-2 routers).
An area can also include several level-2 routers. Routing between level-2 routers
is possible only if the corresponding level-2 routers are directly interconnected
(i.e. not via level-1 routers).
The MDRS 155 S can be used both as level-1 router and level-2 router.
Initial Domain Part IDP Domain-Specific Part DSP
AFI IDI Section assigned by operator
Area address (required for level-2 routing and identical System ID SEL
for all network elements within the same area) (required for level-1 routing)
Fig. 5-17 Structure of the NSAP address
Marconi 5-19
AFI Authority and Format Identifier

IDI Initial Domain Identifier; ISO Data Country Code
System ID Unambiguous identification of the individual systems within an area.
SEL NSAP selector; identifies the Network Service User
Meaning of the individual sections:
• With MDRS 155 S, the selector is always "01“.
• Each OSI system is assigned one system ID; it must be unique in the entire
Domain (with level-2 routers) or Area (with level-1 routers).
An IS (both level-1 and level-2 routers) has only one system ID (irrespective
of the number of Area addresses).
• With level-2 routing, the Area address is used to distinguish between the
different areas. Network elements located within the same area have the
same Area address.
An IS (both level-1 and level-2 router) can simultaneously belong to several

areas, i.e. it can have several Area addresses.
NSAP addresses can be configured.

• automatically or
• manually
5.3.2.2.1 Automatic generation of the NSAP address
For this purpose, the MDRS 155 S uses an own Area address. The unique
manufacturing no. of the subrack (complemented by two heading zero bytes) is
used as system ID.
The system ID for the NSAP address of ServiceOn Access is occupied as

follows:
The ServiceOn Access Workstation is equipped with an OSI-LAN module. This

card has been assigned an IP address. This IP address is used as system ID and
must be known to MDRS 155 S.
The NSAP selector SEL is “01” for all systems.
5.3.2.2.2 Manual adjustment of the NSAP address
It is also possible to adjust NSAP addresses manually. Thus, a large SDH

network can be divided up into several Routing Areas to reduce the volume of
management information exchange. NSAP addresses are then assigned to the
network element, ServiceOn Access and redundant ServiceOn Access system.
Moreover, a network element can be assigned a second Area address by

allocating an additional NSAP address. In this case, however, both Routing
5-20 Marconi
Areas are treated as one logic unit. This functionality is primarily used in the
following cases of application:
• The Area addresses of several network elements of a Routing Area are

changed. By assigning an additional NSAP address it is ensured that
during the modification process all network elements involved are always
combined to form one logic unit.
• Combination of two areas to one unit.
• Classification of manufacturer-specific network elements by assigning
different Area addresses.
When assigning the NSAP addresses, it is also necessary to enter the length of
the entire address (max. 20 bytes) as well as the length of the system ID.
Addresses are entered in the HEX format.
Restrictions regarding a remote logon using the LMT
If the NSAP address is manually adjusted, a remote logon to/from this element
using the LMT is normally no longer possible.
Provided that the network elements are located in the same area, this restriction
can be eliminated by selecting an appropriate NSAP address. However, the
prerequisite to be fulfilled here is that the system ID adjusted by the user has a
length of 6 bytes and the following structure:
Byte 6 5 4 3 2 1
Contents 00 00 XX XX XX XX Proposal: should be used only for MDRS and MS1/4
Contents 00 01 XX XX XX XX Freely usable system margin
Contents 00 02 XX XX XX XX Freely usable system margin
Contents 00 03 XX XX XX XX Proposal: should be used only for MDRS 155 E and MS1-C
Fig. 5-18 Structure of the system ID for remote logon
Remark: Bytes 1 to 4 must include a network-wide unique identifier, e.g. the subrack
manufacturing number.
In addition, value "01" must be entered in the SEL box and the NSAP address
must have a length of 20 bytes. The 13-byte Area address can be freely
selected..
5.3.2.3 SISA-V Gateway address
In the QD2-via-SISA-V mode, the so-called SIVA-V Gateway address is used in

addition to the node no. of the network element.
This address informs the MDRS 155 S as to which network element the OSI-TP4
connection is to be set up. The SISA-V Gateway address corresponds to the
subrack manufacturing no. of the destination network element.
Marconi 5-21
5.3.2.4 Internet addresses
In the Q3p mode, the ServiceOn Access system responsible for controlling and
monitoring MDRS 155 S must be indicated. The corresponding assignment takes
place via the IP address (Internet address, e.g. 144.130.012.004) of the OSI-LAN
module in the corresponding Workstation. In case of an automatic NSAP address
assignment, this IP address becomes part of the system ID (for ServiceOn
Access). In this case, the connection to ServiceOn Access is not set up via
TCP/IP.
5.3.3 Ethernet address
This address required in the LAN for communication purposes is mentioned here
only for the sake of completeness. This world-wide unique address is stored in a
non-volatile memory and cannot be modified.
This address has the following meaning:
If any unit connected to the LAN sends data into the network, these data are
assembled in frames. These frames also include the Ethernet address of the
destination. Each unit connected to the LAN reads the Ethernet address out of
the frame. The unit, whose own Ethernet address is identical with the one
contained in the frame, reads the data. All other units ignore them.
5-22 Marconi
5.3.4 Summary of address settings
The following table gives an overview of the addresses to be adjusted for the
individual operating modes.
Addresses QD2- QD2- QD2- Q3p Q3p QD2- QD2-

Slave SISA V via-SISA V automatic manual IP SISAV-IP
Node no. of the
SISA-V X X X X X X
Node no. of the
agent X X X X X X
NE access no. of
ServiceOn Acess X X X X
for the agent
NE access no. of
redundant X X
ServiceOn
Access for the
agent
SISA-V Gateway
address X
Internet address Instead of the
of ServiceOn X Internet address,
Access the manually
adjusted NSAP
address is
required here.
Internet address Instead of the
of redundant X Internet address, X X
ServiceOn the manually
Access adjusted NSAP
address is
required here.
TCP/IP address
of local network X X
element
Address settings in the different operating modes
NSAP addresses can be manually set in all operating modes.
Marconi 5-23
5-24 Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Technical Characteristics (Typical Values)
6 Technical Characteristics (Typical Values)
6.1 MDRS 155 S systems – with ODU S
6.1.1 MDRS 155/ ... –128 MLQAM CS and KS systems
General data Standards

Channel pattern 18700 MHz 17700 – 19700 MHz CEPT ERC/REC
27.5 MHz at 155 Mbit/s 12-03 E
Channel pattern 23000 MHz 22000 – 23600 MHz CEPT T/R
28 MHz at 155 Mbit/s 13-02 E Annex A
28 MHz at 155 Mbit/s 13-02 E Annex B
28 MHz at 155 Mbit/s 13-02 E Annex C
Duplex spacing 1010 MHz at 18.7 GHz
1008 MHz at 23, 26 and 28 GHz
Frequencies 18.7 GHz EN 300430
23 GHz EN 300198
26 GHz EN 300431
28 GHz EN 300431
LO drift ± 15 ppm
Adaptation to C´/C 20 dB
Operating mode STM-1 regenerator
STM-1 signal 155.52 Mbit/s
Modulation mode 128 QAM
Forward error correction MLQAM
System gain for 1E-3 at C´/C ( BB / BU )
(BB/BU for 1+0 configuration) 89.0 / 86.0 dB for 18.7 GHz
89.0 / 86.0 dB for 23 GHz 1
89.0 / 86.0 dB for 26 GHz
86.5 / 83.5 dB for 28 GHz
RSL (Receiver Signal Level) at C´/C ( BB / BU )
(BB/BU for 1+0 configuration) 1E-3 -70.5 / -69.0 dBm
1E-6 -68.5 / -67.0 dBm
1E-8 -67.5 / -66.0 dBm
Co-channel interferers EN 300198
EN 300430
EN 300431
Adjacent-channel interferers EN 300198
EN 300430
EN 300431
Signature values EN 300430
Digital service channels 4x64 kbit/s ITU-T Rec. G703
(plesiochronous, codirectional in radio
direction) DSC1 to DSC4
Digital service channels (E1, F1 syn- 2x64 kbit/s (E1, F1 in radio direction) ITU-T Rec. G703
chronous, codirectional in radio and 2x64 kbit/s (E1, F1 in line direction)
line direction)
Way-side channel (WSC) 1x2.048 Mbit/s ITU-T Rec. G703
direction)
1
1dB lower for ODU 155/23-128 S
Marconi 6-1
Technical Characteristics (Typical Values) Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
Interface Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit Coaxial connector, 50 Ohms

EDI contacts (10 inputs / 3 outputs) Freely configurable
Additional attenuation (per station) - Coupler, symmetrical: 3.1 dB
when using - Coupler, asymmetrical: 1.3/6.3 dB
Transmitter
Transmit power at C‘ ( BB / BU )
(BB/BU for 1+0 configurations) 18.7 GHz +18.5 / 17.0 dBm +2.0/-1.0 dB
23 GHz1 +18.5 / 17.0 dBm ±2.0 dB
26 GHz +18.5 / 17.0 dBm ±2.0 dB
28 GHz +16.0 / 14.5 dBm ±2.0 dB
Transmit power at A‘ 18.7 GHz +19.5 dBm +2.0/-1.0 dB
23 GHz1 +19.5 dBm ±2.0 dB
26 GHz +19.5 dBm ±2.0 dB
28 GHz +17.0 dBm ±2.0 dB
ATPC control range 15 dB
ATPC control rate > 20 dB/s
Transmit power adjustable in steps of 0.5 dB
Transmit IF 350 MHz
Receiver
Receiver sensitivity without branching BER 10-3 10-6
loss at A
18.7 GHz -71.5 dBm -69.5 dBm
23 GHz -71.5 dBm -69.5 dBm
26 GHz -71.5 dBm -69.5 dBm
28 GHz -71.5 dBm -69.5 dBm
ATPC reference level recommended: -50 dBm; adjustable in steps
of 0.5 dB from -30 dBm to -58 dBm.
Receive IF 140 MHz
6.1.2 MDRS 155/ ... –16 MLQAM systems CS and KS

Channel pattern 18700 MHz 17700 – 19700 MHz CEPT ERC/REC
55 MHz at 155 Mbit/s 12-03 E
56 MHz at 155 Mbit/s 13-02 E Annex A
56 MHz at 155 Mbit/s 13-02 E Annex B
56 MHz at 155 Mbit/s 13-02 E Annex C
1008 MHz at 23. 26 and 28 GHz
Frequencies 18.7 GHz EN 300430
23 GHz EN 300198
26 GHz EN 300431
28 GHz EN 300431
LO drift ± 15 ppm
1
6-2 Marconi

System gain for 1E-3 at C´/C (BB / CF* / BU)
(BB/CF*/BU for 1+0 configuration) 96.5 / 94.3 / 94.3 dB for 18.7/ 23/ 26 GHz
94.0 / 91.8 / 91.8 dB for 28 GHz
RSL (Receiver Signal Level) at C´/C ( BB / CF* / BU )
(BB/CF*/BU for 1+0 configuration)
1E-3 -76.0 / -74.9 / -74.9 dBm
1E-6 -74.0 / -72.9 / -72.9 dBm
1E-8 -73.0 / -71.9 / -71.9 dBm
EN 300430
EN 300431
Adjacent channel interferers EN 300198
EN 300430
EN 300431
Digital service channels (E1, F1 2x64 kbit/s (E1, F1 in radio direction) ITU-T Rec. G703
synchronous, codirectional in radio 2x64 kbit/s (E1, F1 in line direction)
and line direction)
Way Side Channel (WSC) 1x2.048 Mbit/s ITU-T Rec. G703
direction)
EDI contacts (10 inputs / 3 outputs) freely configurable
Additional attenuation (per station) - Symmetrical coupler: 3.1 dB
with - Asymmetrical coupler: 1.3 / 6.3 dB
Transmitter
Transmit power at C‘ ( BB / CF*/ BU )
(BB/CF*/BU for 1+0 configuration): 18.7 GHz +20.5/19.4/19.4 dBm +2.0/-1.0 dB
23 GHz +20.5/19.4/19.4 dBm ±2.0 dB
26 GHz +20.5/19.4/19.4 dBm ±2.0 dB
28 GHz +18.0/16.9/16.9 dBm ±2.0 dB
23 GHz +21.5 dBm ±2.0 dB
26 GHz +21.5 dBm ±2.0 dB
28 GHz +19.0 dBm ±2.0 dB
Transmit IF 350 MHz
Receiver
loss at A 18.7 GHz -77.0 dBm -75.0 dBm
23 GHz -77.0 dBm -75.0 dBm
26 GHz -77.0 dBm -75.0 dBm
28 GHz -77.0 dBm -75.0 dBm
ATPC reference level Recommended: -50 dBm; adjustable in steps
of 0.5 dB from -30 dBm to -65 dBm
Receive IF 140 MHz
Marconi 6-3
6.2 MDRS 155 S systems – with ODU L

6.2.1 MDRS 155/ ... –128 MLQAM LS systems

Channel pattern 7500 MHz 7114 – 7868 MHz ITU-R F.385-7
28 MHz at 155 Mbit/s
Duplex spacing 154, 160 or 161 MHz at 7.5 GHz
266 MHz at 13 GHz
315, 420, 490 or 728 MHz at 15 GHz
Frequencies 7.5 GHz
13 GHz
EN 300234
15 GHz
LO drift ± 15 ppm
System gain for 1E-3 at C´/C -87.0 dB for 7.5 GHz
(for 1+0 configuration) with integrated -86.5 dB for 13 GHz
BB -86.5 dB for 15 GHz
RSL (Receiver Signal Level) at C´/C 7.5 GHz 13/15 GHz
(for 1+0 configuration) with 1E-3 -71.0 dBm 71.5 dBm
integrated BB 1E-6 -69.0 dBm 69.5 dBm
1E-8 -68.0 dBm 68.5 dBm
Adjacent channel interferers EN 300234
direction)
DSC1 to DSC4
and line direction)
direction)
Interface Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit Coaxial connector 50 Ohms
with - Asymmetrical coupler: 1.6/6.7 dB
Transmitter
Transmit power at C‘ 7.5 GHz +16 dBm ±2 dB
(for 1+0 configuration) with integrated 13 GHz +15 dBm ±2 dB
BB 15 GHz +15 dBm ±2 dB
ATPC control range 7.5 GHz 15 dB
13 GHz 20 dB
15 GHz 20 dB
6-4 Marconi

Transmit IF 350 MHz
Receiver
Receiver sensitivity without branching with BER 10-3 10-6
loss at C 7.5 GHz -71.0 dBm -69.0 dBm
13 GHz -71.5 dBm -69.5 dBm
15 GHz -71.5 dBm -69.5 dBm
of 0.5 dB between -30 dBm and -58 dBm
Receive IF 140 MHz
Marconi 6-5
6.3 MDRS 155 S systems – with ODU LX
6.3.1 MDRS 155/ ... –128 MLQAM EXS and KXS systems

Channel pattern 7500 MHz (EXS) 7442 – 7708 MHz ITU-R F.385-7
28 MHz at 155 Mbit/s Annex 1
Channel pattern 7500 MHz (KXS) 7100 – 7900 MHz ITU-R F.385-7
Channel pattern 11000 MHz (KXS) 10700 – 11700MHz ITU-R F.387
Channel pattern 13000 MHz (EXS) 12751 – 13241 MHz ITU-R F.497-6
Duplex spacing 7.5 GHz (EXS) 154 MHz
7.5 GHz (KXS) 154, 161, 168, 196 or
245 MHz
11 GHz (KXS) 490 oder 530 MHz
13 GHz (EXS) 266 MHz
Frequencies 7.5 GHz (EXS) EN 302217-2-1
7.5 GHz (KXS) EN 301217
11 GHz (KXS) EN 302217-2-2
13 GHz (EXS) EN 302217-2-1
LO drift ± 15 ppm
Adaptation at C´/C 20 dB
System gain for 1E-3 at C´/C 92.0 dBm for 7.5 GHz
(for 1+0 configuration) with 89.5 dBm for 11 GHz
exchangeable channel filter 88.5 dB for 13 GHz
RSL (Receiver Signal Level) at C´/C 7.5 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz
(for 1+0 configuration) with 1E-3 -71.5 dBm -71.0 dBm -70.5 dBm
exchangeable channel filter 1E-6 -69.5 dBm -69.0 dBm -68.5 dBm
1E-8 -68.5 dBm -68.0 dBm -67.5 dBm
Co-channel interferer, Adjacent- 7.5 GHz (EXS) EN 302217-2-1
channel interferer, Signature values 7.5 GHz (KXS) EN 301217
11 GHz (KXS) EN 302217-2-2
13 GHz (EXS) EN 302217-2-1
Digital service channels (plesiochr., 4x64 kbit/s ITU-T Rec. G703
codirectional in radio direction) DSC1
to DSC4
and line direction)
Way Side Channel (WSC) (plesiochr., 1x2.048 Mbit/s ITU-T Rec. G703
codirectional in radio direction)
Indoor Unit – Outdoor Unit interface Coaxial connector, 50 Ohms
6-6 Marconi
Transmitter
Tx power at C‘ (for 1+0 configuration) 7.5 GHz +20.5 dBm ±2 dB
with exchangeable channel filter 11 GHz +18.5 dBm ±2 dB
13 GHz +18.0 dBm ±2 dB
RTPC / ATPC control range 7.5 GHz
RTPC: 17 ±2 dB
ATPC: 0<RTPC<3 dB = 20 dB
4<RTPC<13 dB = 19 dB
14<RTPC = 17 dB
11 GHz
RTPC: 15 ±2 dB
5<RTPC<15 dB = 19 dB
13 GHz
RTPC: 15 ±2 dB
ATPC: RTPC<15 dB = 20 dB
RTPC>15 dB = 35 dB - RTPC
Transmit IF 350 MHz
Receiver
Receive sensitivity w/o branching loss with BER 10-3 10-6
at C 7.5 GHz -71.5 dBm -69.5 dBm
11 GHz -71.0 dBm -69.0 dBm
13 GHz -70.5 dBm -68.5 dBm
ATPC reference level Recommended value: -50 dBm; adjustable in
steps of 0.5 dB from -30 dBm to -58 dBm.
Receive IF 140 MHz
Marconi 6-7
6.3.2 MDRS 155/ ... –128 MLQAM MXS systems

Duplex spacing 1260 MHz at 38 GHz
Frequencies 38 GHz EN 302217-2-2
LO drift ± 15 ppm
System gain for 1E-3 at C´/C (for 1+0 83.0 dB for 38 GHz
configuration) with integrated BB
RSL (Receiver Signal Level) at C´/C 38 GHz
(for 1+0 configuration) with 1E-3 -68.0 dBm
integrated BB 1E-6 -66.0 dBm
1E-8 -65.0 dBm
Co-channel interferer, Adjacent- 38 GHz EN 302217-2-2
channel interferer, Signature values
and line direction)
direction)
Transmitter
Tx power at C‘ (for 1+0 configuration) 38 GHz +15 dBm ±2 dB
with integrated BB
RTPC / ATPC control range 38 GHz
RTPC: 15 ±2 dB
3<RTPC<6 dB = 22 dB - RTPC
7<RTPC = 15 dB
Transmit IF 350 MHz
Receiver
at C 38 GHz -68.0 dBm -66.0 dBm
steps of 0.5 dB from -30 dBm to -58 dBm
Receive IF 140 MHz
6-8 Marconi
6.3.3 MDRS 155/ ... –16 MLQAM MXS systems

Duplex spacing 38 GHz 1260 MHz
Frequencies 38 GHz EN 302217-2-2
LO drift ± 15 ppm
System gain for 1E-3 at C´/C (for 1+0 92.5 dB for 38 GHz
configuration) with integrated BB
RSL (Receiver Signal Level) at C´/C 38 GHz
(for 1+0 configuration) with 1E-3 -74.5 dBm
integrated BB 1E-6 -72.5 dBm
1E-8 -71.5 dBm
Co-channel interferer EN 300197
Adjacent-channel interferer EN 300197
and line direction)
direction)
Transmitter
Tx power at C‘ (for 1+0 configuration) 38 GHz +18.0 dBm ±2.0 dB
with integrated BB
RTPC / ATPC control range 38 GHz
RTPC: 15 ±2 dB
3<RTPC<6 dB = 22 dB - RTPC
7<RTPC = 15 dB
Transmit IF 350 MHz
Receiver
at C 38 GHz -74.5 dBm -72.5 dBm
steps of 0.5 dB from -30 dBm to -58 dBm
Receive IF 140 MHz
Marconi 6-9
6.4 MDRS 155 S systems – with ODU S Mexico
6.4.1 MDRS 155/ ... –128 MLQAM CS/MX systems

Channel pattern 23000 MHz 21241.5 – 22865.5 MHz
21825.0 to 23475.0 MHz ITU-R F.637
Duplex spacing 1232 MHz with 28 MHz channel pattern
1200 MHz with 50 MHz channel pattern
Frequencies 23 GHz ETS 300198*
LO drift ± 15 ppm
System gain for 1E-3 at C´/C (with BB filter box)
(BB for 1+0 operating mode) 89.0 dB
RSL (Receiver Signal Level) at C´/C (with BB filter box)
(BB for 1+0 configuration) 1E-3 -70.5 dBm
1E-6 -68.5 dBm
1E-8 -67.5 dBm
Co-channel interferers ETS 300198*
Adjacent channel interferers ETS 300198*
Signature values ETS 300430*
direction)
DSC1 to DSC4
and line direction)
direction)
Transmitter
Transmit power at C‘ (with BB filter box)
(BB for 1+0 configuration) 23 GHz +18.5 dBm ±2.0 dB
Transmit power at A‘ 23 GHz +19.5 dBm ±2.0 dB
Transmit IF 350 MHz
6-10 Marconi
Receiver
loss at A 23 GHz -71,5 dBm -69,5 dBm
Receive IF 140 MHz
* Subject to regional standards
Marconi 6-11
6.5 MDRS 155 S systems – with ODU S Brazil
6.5.1 MDRS 155/ ... –16 MLQAM CS/BR systems

Channel pattern 18700 MHz 17727.5 to 19672.5 MHz
Channel pattern 23000 MHz 21843.5 to 23562.0 MHz Ministry of
56/87.5 MHz at 155 Mbit/s Communications,
Decree No.83/92
(D.O.U. 01/05/93)
1232 MHz at 23 GHz
Frequencies 18.7 GHz ETS 300430*
23 GHz ETS 300198*
LO drift ± 15 ppm
Modulation 16 QAM
System gain for 1E-3 at C´/C (with BB filter box)
(BB/CF*/BU for 1+0 configuration) 96.5 dB for 18.7 and 23 GHz
RSL (Receiver Signal Level) at C´/C (with BB filter box)
(BB for 1+0 filter box) 1E-3 -76.0 dBm
1E-6 -74.0 dBm
1E-8 -73.0 dBm
Co-channel interferers ETS 300198*
ETS 300430*
Adjacent channel interferers ETS 300198*
ETS 300430*
Signature values ETS 300430*
and line direction)
direction)
Transmitter
Transmit power at C‘ (with BB filter box)
(BB for 1+0 configuration) 18.7 GHz +20.5 dBm +2.0/-1.0 dB
23 GHz +20.5 dBm ±2.0 dB
23 GHz +21.5 dBm ±2.0 dB
6-12 Marconi

Transmit IF 350 MHz
Receiver
loss at A 18.7 GHz -77,0 dBm -75,0 dBm
23 GHz -77,0 dBm -75,0 dBm
Receiver IF 140 MHz
* Subject to regional standards
Marconi 6-13
6.6 Start-up delay of the Tx amplifier

In order to ensure operation according to specification, the Tx amplifier remains
off after startup of the ODU S, until the internal quartz oscillator has reached its
operating temperature. The startup delay depends on the temperature of the
ODU at the time the latter is switched on. However, the system start (Power-Up)
is determined by the longer boot process of the IDU application.
Temperature (C°) Time (approx. in s)

- 40 150
- 20 105
0 70
25 35
50 10
6.7 Signal delay time between the transmitter and receiver

The corresponding measurement is performed using an artificial radio hop.
The Tx signal is injected and measured as Rx signal in the far end.
Delay time
Configuration
(approx. in µs)
1+0 45
Line Protection (1+1) 84
Equipment Protection (1+1) 46
2 Mbit/s WSC 215
6-14 Marconi
6.8 Branching loss

Z' E' Transmitter A' B' C' D'
Modulator RF filter Branching Feeder
Tx Tx Tx Network* Tx
* no filter attenuation included
Z Demo- E A B C D
Receiver RF filter Branching Feeder
dulator
Rx Rx Network* Rx
Rx
Fig. 6-1 System overview / Equipment configuration
6.8.1 Systems with ODU S
6.8.1.1 128 MLQAM

MDRS 155/...-CS and –KS 1+0/1+1 LP (BB) N+0 (BU, 128 QAM) 1+1 HSB with
RF switch
Branching loss RX and TX 4.6 dB + N x 0.4 dB 1.2 to 1.4 dB
without waveguide from A‘ to A 2.0 dB up to N = 4 per polarization additional loss
18.7 GHz to 28 GHz compared to 1+0
configuration
6.8.1.2 16 MLQAM
MDRS 155/...-CS and -KS 1+0/1+1 LP (BB) N+0 (BU/CF, 16 QAM) 1+1 HSB with RF
Switch
Branching loss RX and TX 1.2 to 1.4 dB
without waveguide from A‘ to A 2.0 dB 3,8 dB + N x 0.4 dB additional loss
18.7 GHz to 28 GHz up to N = 4 per polarization compared to 1+0
configuration
6.8.1.3 RF coupler
6.8.2 Systems with ODU L (no license for use in Germany)
6.8.2.1 RF coupler
Additional attenuation (per station) with - Symmetrical coupler: 3.3 dB
- Asymmetrical coupler: 1.6 / 6.7 dB
6.8.3 Systems with ODU LX
6.8.3.1 RF coupler
Additional attenuation (per station) with - Symmetrical coupler: 3.2 dB
- Asymmetrical coupler: 1.4 / 6.4 dB
Marconi 6-15
6.9 Indoor Unit - Outdoor Unit connecting cables

Cable type LI8 Cellflex ¼” Cellflex ½”
Ident. number AN00226089 A002: AN00080254 A002:
AN00087586
Connector N-connector 50 Ohms N-connector 50 Ohms N-connector 50
Ohms
Shield >100 dB >120 dB at 3GHz >120 dB at 3GHz
Frequency range DC - 1.5 GHz DC - 3 GHz DC - 3 GHz
Insertion loss/300 m at 350 MHz 23.8 dB 24.6 dB 12.3 dB
Insertion loss/300 m at 140 MHz 14.6 dB 15.26 dB 7.8 dB
Return loss >23 dB >23 dB >23 dB
DC resistance/ at 300 m 3.3 Ohms 2.28 Ohms 1.056 Ohms
Minimum bending radius >136 mm >120 mm 125 mm
(multiple times) (multiple times) (multiple times)
Maximum cable length
- with ODU S and ODU LX 150 m 150 m 300 m
- with ODU L 100 m 100 m 200 m
6.10 Waveguide lengths for remote antenna mounting

ODU type Waveguide lengths are frequency-independent
ODU S No restriction *
ODU L ≤8m
ODU LX ≤8m
* If you require waveguide lengths exceeding 10 m, please contact

Marconi for additional information.
6.11 STM-1 interface

MDRS 155/...-CS, -KS and -LS
systems Standards
CMI interface STM-1 electrical, 75 Ohms, 1.6/5.6 ITU-T Rec.G.703
Interface opt. LC Duplex ITU-T G.957: S-1.1
(monomode; 1310 nm) Input sensitivity: -28 dBm
Output power: max.: -8 dBm
min.:-15 dBm
or with patching cable
LC duplex Î SC-PC (convex) or
HRL (high return loss) LC duplex Î SC-APC (8o convex)
Adapters
SC-PC (convex) Î SC-PC (convex)
SC-PC (convex) Î DIN (convex)
SC-PC (convex) Î E2000 (convex)
HRL (high return loss) SC-APC (8o convex) Î SC-APC (8o convex)
HRL (high return loss) SC-APC (8o convex) Î DIN (8o convex)
HRL (high return loss) SC-APC (8o convex) Î E2000 (8o convex)
6-16 Marconi
6.12 EOW interfaces

MDRS 155/...
-128 MLQAM and -16 MLQAM Standards
systems
E1-L (internal connection) 64 kbit/s (STM-1 line side as int. TTL connection)
E1-R (internal connection) 64 kbit/s (STM-1 radio side as int. TTL connection)
E1-L (external connector) 64 kbit/s codirectional 4-wire line, bal. ITU-T G.703
E1-R (external connector) 64 kbit/s codirectional 4-wire line, bal. ITU-T G.703
EXTEOW Analog 4-wire line
Frequency range 0.3 to 3.4 kHz
Channel measuring level -4 dBr across Z = 600 Ohms (bal. referred to ground)
PABX Analog 2-wire line
2-wire line for PSTN access in -7 or -13 dBr bal. *)
out 0 or -6 dBr bal.*)
Source voltage of unoccupied line 20 to 72 Volt
Ringing AC voltage 32 to 55 Vrms , 23 to 27 Hz
PHONE Port for connecting analog telephone sets
2-wire line for telephone in -6.0 dBr bal. across Z=600 Ohms
out +1.0 dBr bal. across Z=600 Ohms
Internal voltage - on-hook status approx. 24 Volt
Supply current < 60 mA
Ringing AC voltage 50 to 65 Vrms∼ , 24 to 26 Hz
Response voltage for overvoltage approx. 340 Voltpp
protection shutdown
*) Remark: The levels in/out must be configured separately. Complex terminal resistance ZR in
compliance with Federal Office for Telecommunications (Bundesamt für
Telekommunikation) (BAPT) 223 of 01.05.1994.
Marconi 6-17
6.13 Power supply

MDRS 155/...-128
MLQAM and -16 Normen
MLQAM systems
Input voltage -48 V DC ± 25 % or -60 V DC ± 20 %
Nominal voltage -48 V DC
Input power values 30 W Indoor Unit (IDU) with electr. interface (without EOW)
(individual) 31 W Indoor Unit (IDU) with electr./opt. interface (without EOW)
32 W Indoor Unit (IDU) with electr. interface (with EOW)
33 W Indoor Unit (IDU) with electr./opt. interface (with EOW)
52 W Outdoor Unit (ODU S)
40 W Outdoor Unit (ODU L)
35 W Outdoor Unit (ODU LX)
Input power values 82 W 1+0 (with electr. interface; without EOW)
(systems with 83 W 1+0 (with electr./opt. interface; without EOW)
ODU S) 84 W 1+0 (with electr. interface; with EOW)
85 W 1+0 (with electr./opt. interface; with EOW)
164 W 1+1 (with electr. interface; without EOW)
166 W 1+1 (with electr./opt. interface; without EOW)
166 W 1+1 (with electr. interface; with EOW*)
168 W 1+1 (with electr./opt. interface; with EOW*)
(* EOW option is used only in OP-IDU)
ODU L): 72 W 1+0 (with electr. interface; with EOW)
ODU LX): 67 W 1+0 (with electr. interface; with EOW)
Startup current ETS 300132-2
Interface Connector Sub-D 3pin female, with high-power contacts
6.14 Fan control

After power-up, the fans are active.
– The fans are switched off at an ambient temperature of about +5 °C (corresponds to an equipment
temperature of about +13 °C).
– The fans are switched on at an ambient temperature of about + 10 °C (corresponds to an equipment

temperature of about +47 °C).
6-18 Marconi
6.15 Environmental conditions

MDRS 155/... Standards
-128 MLQAM and
-16 MLQAM systems
Operation Indoor Unit Temperature -5 to +45 °C
Humidity 5 % to 95 %
Vibration 5 m/s 2 ETS 300 019-1-3
Altitude < 3000 m Class 3.2
Operation Outdoor Unit Temperature -45 to +55 °C *
ODU S and ODU LX Humidity 15 % to 100 %
Altitude < 3000 m Class 4.1E
Operation Outdoor Unit Temperature -33 to +55 °C *
ODU L Humidity 15 % to 100 %
7 GHz to 15 GHz Vibration 10 m/s 2 ETS 300 019-1-4
Transport Temperature -25 to +70 °C
Storage Temperature -25 to +55 (70) °C
* including insolation
Marconi 6-19
6.16 Dimensions and weights
6.16.1 Outdoor Unit ODU S
Designation Weight (approx. in kg) Dimensions (HxWxD approx. in mm)

Outdoor Unit 18.7 7.8 387 x 120 x 340
Filter boxes (18BB; 18BU) 2.3 235 x 120 x 118
Outdoor Unit 23 7.8 387 x 120 x 340
Outdoor Unit 26 7.8 387 x 120 x 340
Outdoor Unit 28 7.8 387 x 120 x 340
Filter boxes (28BB; 28-128BU) 2.3 235 x 120 x 118
RF Switch 18 1.7 160 x 160 x 185
RF Switch 23 1.7 160 x 160 x 185
RF Switch 26 1.7 160 x 160 x 185
RF Switch 28 1.7 160 x 160 x 185
6.16.2 Outdoor Unit ODU L
Designation Weight (approx. in kg) Dimensions (approx. in mm)

Outdoor Unit 7 to 15 GHz 4.6 267 x 89 (DxH)
6.16.3 Outdoor Unit ODU LX
Designation Weight (approx. in kg) Dimensions (HxWxD approx. in mm)

Outdoor Unit 13 GHz 4.5 303 x 260 x 105
Outdoor Unit 38 GHz 4.5 303 x 260 x 105
6.16.4 Indoor Units
Designation Weight Dimensions (HxWxD approx. in mm)

(approx. in kg)
Indoor Unit 4.5 Height: (1.5 HU) 66.75
Width: Only housing 435
Indoor Unit 4.8 Housing with 19“ flange 483
with EOW Housing with ETSI flange 535
Depth: Flange flush with front 228
Flange coming out 240
6-20 Marconi
6.17 EMC / Equipment safety / Protection type

MDRS 155/... Standards
-128 MLQAM and -16 MLQAM
systems
Immunity to interference EN 301 489-01 / EN 301 489-04
Emission EN 301 489-01 / EN 301 489-04, EN 55022 Limiting value class B
Equipment safety EN 60950
Protection type IEC 60529
6.18 CE conformity
Marconi Communications GmbH declares that this product complies with the
basic requirements of § 3 and all other relevant regulations of FTEG (Article 3 of
R&TTE, 1999 / 05 / EC) provided that it is operated according to instructions.
MDRS 155/... EU guideline

-128 MLQAM and -16 MLQAM
systems
CE label (example) R&TTE, 1999/05/EC
Approved comprehensive quality Registration no.: acc. to Annex 5, R&TTE

assurance system Q811250M 1999/05/EC
A complete copy of the original CE declaration can be ordered from the Marconi
Sales Account Team.
Marconi 6-21
6-22 Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Ordering Information
7 Ordering Information
7.1 Outdoor Units ODU S and accessories
7.1.1 18.7 GHz band with ODU S
7.1.1.1 128 MLQAM systems
Designation Tx frequency Drawing number Ident. number

(27.5 MHz Marconi code no.
pattern)
RF switch
RF switch 18.7 GHz 65.7186.140.00-A001 AN00041019
Expansion kit RF-U.AB 65.7186.155.00-A001 AN00041020
RF coupler
Coupler 18GHz/3dB 05MBH00028AAK
(symmetrical 3dB coupler)
Coupler 18GHz/6dB 05MBH00029AAM
(asymmetrical 6dB coupler)
Outdoor Units (lower band)
ODU 155/18.7-EDM S (1a-9a/1a-18a) 05HAN00034AAY
ODU 155/18.7-EDM S (10a-17a/19a-35a) 05HAN00034ACJ
Outdoor Units (upper band)
ODU 155/18.7-EDM S (1b-9b/1b-18b) 05HAN00034ABR
ODU 155/18.7-EDM S (10b-17b/19b-35b) 05HAN00034ADB
Filter boxes BB (lower band)
Filter box 18BB/A1 17 727.5–18 195.0 05MBH00018AAU
Filter box 18BB/A2 18 222.5–18 662.5 05MBH00018ACE
Filter boxes BB (upper band)
Filter box 18BB/B1 18 737.5–19 205.0 05MBH00018ABM
filter box 18BB/B2 19 232.5–19 672.5 05MBH00018ADW
Filter boxes BU (lower band)
Filter 18-128BU/1a 17 727.5 05MBH00022AAW
Filter 18-128BU/2a 17 755.0 05MBH00022ACG
Filter 18-128BU/3a 17 782.5 05MBH00022AER
Filter 18-128BU/4a 17 810.0 05MBH00022AGB
Filter 18-128BU/5a 17 837.5 05MBH00022AJL
Filter 18-128BU/6a 17 865.0 05MBH00022ALV
Filter 18-128BU/7a 17 892.5 05MBH00022ANF
Filter 18-128BU/8a 17 920.0 05MBH00022AQQ
Filter 18-128BU/9a 17 947.5 05MBH00022ASA
Filter 18-128BU/10a 17 975.0 05MBH00022AUK
Filter 18-128BU/11a 18 002.5 05MBH00022AWU
Filter 18-128BU/12a 18 030.0 05MBH00022AYE
Filter 18-128BU/13a 18 057.5 05MBH00022BAT
Filter 18-128BU/14a 18 085.0 05MBH00022BCD
Filter 18-128BU/15a 18 112.5 05MBH00022BEN
Filter 18-128BU/16a 18 140.0 05MBH00022BGX
Filter 18-128BU/17a 18 167.5 05MBH00022BJH
Filter 18-128BU/18a 18 195.0 05MBH00022BLS
Filter 18-128BU/19a 18 222.5 05MBH00022BNC
Filter 18-128BU/20a 18 250.0 05MBH00022BQM
Filter 18-128BU/21a 18 277.5 05MBH00022BSW
Filter 18-128BU/22a 18 305.0 05MBH00022BUG
Filter 18-128BU/23a 18 332.5 05MBH00022BWR
Marconi 7-1
Ordering Information Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
Filter 18-128BU/24a 18 360.0 05MBH00022BYB

Filter 18-128BU/25a 18 387.5 05MBH00022CAQ
Filter 18-128BU/26a 18 415.0 05MBH00022CCA
Filter 18-128BU/27a 18 442.5 05MBH00022CEK
Filter 18-128BU/28a 18 470.0 05MBH00022CGU
Filter 18-128BU/29a 18 497.5 05MBH00022CJE
Filter 18-128BU/30a 18 525.0 05MBH00022CLP
Filter 18-128BU/31a 18 552.5 05MBH00022CNY
Filter 18-128BU/32a 18 580.0 05MBH00022CQJ
Filter 18-128BU/33a 18 607.5 05MBH00022CST
Filter 18-128BU/34a 18 635.0 05MBH00022CUD
Filter 18-128BU/35a 18 662.5 05MBH00022CWN
Filter boxes BU (upper band)
Filter 18-128BU/1b 18 737.5 05MBH00022ABP
Filter 18-128BU/2b 18 765.0 05MBH00022ADY
Filter 18-128BU/3b 18 792.5 05MBH00022AFJ
Filter 18-128BU/4b 18 820.0 05MBH00022AHT
Filter 18-128BU/5b 18 847.5 05MBH00022AKD
Filter 18-128BU/6b 18 875.0 05MBH00022AMN
Filter 18-128BU/7b 18 902.5 05MBH00022APX
Filter 18-128BU/8b 18 930.0 05MBH00022ARH
Filter 18-128BU/9b 18 957.5 05MBH00022ATS
Filter 18-128BU/10b 18 985.0 05MBH00022AVC
Filter 18-128BU/11b 19 012.5 05MBH00022AXM
Filter 18-128BU/12b 19 040.0 05MBH00022AZW
Filter 18-128BU/13b 19 067.5 05MBH00022BBL
Filter 18-128BU/14b 19 095.0 05MBH00022BDV
Filter 18-128BU/15b 19 122.5 05MBH00022BFF
Filter 18-128BU/16b 19 150.0 05MBH00022BHQ
Filter 18-128BU/17b 19 177.5 05MBH00022BKA
Filter 18-128BU/18b 19 205.0 05MBH00022BMK
Filter 18-128BU/19b 19 232.5 05MBH00022BPU
Filter 18-128BU/20b 19 260.0 05MBH00022BRE
Filter 18-128BU/21b 19 287.5 05MBH00022BTP
Filter 18-128BU/22b 19 315.0 05MBH00022BVY
Filter 18-128BU/23b 19 342.5 05MBH00022BXJ
Filter 18-128BU/24b 19 370.0 05MBH00022BZT
Filter 18-128BU/25b 19 397.5 05MBH00022CBH
Filter 18-128BU/26b 19 425.0 05MBH00022CDS
Filter 18-128BU/27b 19 452.5 05MBH00022BUC
Filter 18-128BU/28b 19 480.0 05MBH00022CHM
Filter 18-128BU/29b 19 507.5 05MBH00022CKW
Filter 18-128BU/30b 19 535.0 05MBH00022CMG
Filter 18-128BU/31b 19 562.5 05MBH00022CPR
Filter 18-128BU/32b 19 590.0 05MBH00022CRB
Filter 18-128BU/33b 19 617.5 05MBH00022CTL
Filter 18-128BU/34b 19 645.0 05MBH00022CVV
Filter 18-128BU/35b 19 672.5 05MBH00022CXF
7-2 Marconi

(55 MHz pattern) Marconi code no.
RF switch
RF switch 18.7 GHz 65.7186.140.00-A001 AN00041019
RF coupler
ODU 155/18.7-EDM S (1a-9a/1a-18a) 05HAN00034AAY
ODU 155/18.7-EDM S (10a-17a/19a-35a) 05HAN00034ACJ
ODU 155/18-B55 S (1a-8a) (55 MHz pattern) 05HAN00153AAJ
ODU 155/18.7-EDM S (1b-9b/1b-18b) 05HAN00034ABR
ODU 155/18.7-EDM S (10b-17b/19b-35b) 05HAN00034ADB
ODU 155/18-B55 S (1b-8b) (55 MHz pattern) 05HAN00153ABB
Filter box 18BB/A1 17 755.0–18 195.0 05MBH00018AAU
Filter box 18BB/A2 18 250.0–18 635.0 05MBH00018ACE
Filter box 18BB-B/A1 17 727.5–18 112.5 05MBH00074AAC
Filter box 18BB/B1 18 765.0–19 205.0 05MBH00018ABM
Filter box 18BB/B2 19 260.0–19 645.0 05MBH00018ADW
Filter box 18BB-B/B1 19 287.5–19 672.5 05MBH00074ABU
Filter 18-16BU/1a 17 755.0 05MBH00020AAS
Filter 18-16BU/2a 17 810.0 05MBH00020ACC
Filter 18-16BU/3a 17 865.0 05MBH00020AEM
Filter 18-16BU/4a 17 920.0 05MBH00020AGW
Filter 18-16BU/5a 17 975.0 05MBH00020AJG
Filter 18-16BU/6a 18 030.0 05MBH00020ALR
Filter 18-16BU/7a 18 085.0 05MBH00020ANB
Filter 18-16BU/8a 18 140.0 05MBH00020AQL
Filter 18-16BU/9a 18 195.0 05MBH00020ASV
Filter 18-16BU/10a 18 250.0 05MBH00020AUF
Filter 18-16BU/11a 18 305.0 05MBH00020AWQ
Filter 18-16BU/12a 18 360.0 05MBH00020AYA
Filter 18-16BU/13a 18 415.0 05MBH00020BAP
Filter 18-16BU/14a 18 470.0 05MBH00020BCY
Filter 18-16BU/15a 18 525.0 05MBH00020BEJ
Filter 18-16BU/16a 18 580.0 05MBH00020BGT
Filter 18-16BU/17a 18 635.0 05MBH00020BJD
Filter 18-16BU/1b 18 765.0 05MBH00020ABK
Filter 18-16BU/2b 18 820.0 05MBH00020ADU
Filter 18-16BU/3b 18 875.0 05MBH00020AFE
Filter 18-16BU/4b 18 930.0 05MBH00020AHP
Filter 18-16BU/5b 18 985.0 05MBH00020AKY
Filter 18-16BU/6b 19 040.0 05MBH00020AMJ
Filter 18-16BU/7b 19 095.0 05MBH00020APT
Filter 18-16BU/8b 19 150.0 05MBH00020ARD
Filter 18-16BU/9b 19 205.0 05MBH00020ATN
Filter 18-16BU/10b 19 260.0 05MBH00020AVX
Filter 18-16BU/11b 19 315.0 05MBH00020AXH
Marconi 7-3
Filter 18-16BU/12b 19 370.0 05MBH00020AZS

Filter 18-16BU/13b 19 425.0 05MBH00020BBG
Filter 18-16BU/14b 19 480.0 05MBH00020BDR
Filter 18-16BU/15b 19 535.0 05MBH00020BFB
Filter 18-16BU/16b 19 590.0 05MBH00020BHL
Filter 18-16BU/17b 19 645.0 05MBH00020BKV
Filter boxes CF (lower band)
Filter 18-16CF/1a 17 755.0 05MBH00115AAU
Filter 18-16CF/2a 17 810.0 05MBH00115ACE
Filter 18-16CF/3a 17 865.0 05MBH00115AEP
Filter 18-16CF/4a 17 920.0 05MBH00115AGY
Filter 18-16CF/5a 17 975.0 05MBH00115AJJ
Filter 18-16CF/6a 18 030.0 05MBH00115ALT
Filter 18-16CF/7a 18 085.0 05MBH00115AND
Filter 18-16CF/8a 18 140.0 05MBH00115AQN
Filter 18-16CF/9a 18 195.0 05MBH00115ASX
Filter 18-16CF/10a 18 250.0 05MBH00115AUH
Filter 18-16CF/11a 18 305.0 05MBH00115AWS
Filter 18-16CF/12a 18 360.0 05MBH00115AYC
Filter 18-16CF/13a 18 415.0 05MBH00115BAR
Filter 18-16CF/14a 18 470.0 05MBH00115BCB
Filter 18-16CF/15a 18 525.0 05MBH00115BEL
Filter 18-16CF/16a 18 580.0 05MBH00115BGV
Filter 18-16CF/17a 18 635.0 05MBH00115BJF
Filter boxes CF (upper band)
Filter 18-16CF/1b 18 765.0 05MBH00115ABM
Filter 18-16CF/2b 18 820.0 05MBH00115ADW
Filter 18-16CF/3b 18 875.0 05MBH00115AFG
Filter 18-16CF/4b 18 930.0 05MBH00115AHR
Filter 18-16CF/5b 18 985.0 05MBH00115AKB
Filter 18-16CF/6b 19 040.0 05MBH00115AML
Filter 18-16CF/7b 19 095.0 05MBH00115APV
Filter 18-16CF/8b 19 150.0 05MBH00115ARF
Filter 18-16CF/9b 19 205.0 05MBH00115ATQ
Filter 18-16CF/10b 19 260.0 05MBH00115AVA
Filter 18-16CF/11b 19 315.0 05MBH00115AXK
Filter 18-16CF/12b 19 370.0 05MBH00115AZU
Filter 18-16CF/13b 19 425.0 05MBH00115BBJ
Filter 18-16CF/14b 19 480.0 05MBH00115BDT
Filter 18-16CF/15b 19 535.0 05MBH00115BFD
Filter 18-16CF/16b 19 590.0 05MBH00115BHN
Filter 18-16CF/17b 19 645.0 05MBH00115BKX
7-4 Marconi
7.1.1.3 Accessories
Designation Drawing number Ident. number

Installation material
Mounting kit RF-S 65.7726.270.00-A001 AN00277015
Mounting kit for RF switch 76-115 mm 65.7721.830.00-A001 AN00041008
Waveguides and accessories
Alform-A185 14.1821.007.99-A001 AN00574083
Fitting A185-PBR220 65.7764.534.00-A003 AN00578530
Fitting A185-UBR220 65.7764.534.00-A001 AN00578573
Alform-A110/19 AN00816154
Fitting A110-PBR220/19 65.7764.900.00-A001 AN00814412
Flexible waveguide PBR220 (400 mm) 8400426-0018
WG kit R220 05HAN00024AAJ
Pressure window PBR 220/UBR 220 65.7764.000.20-A001 AN00016418
Intermediate plate PBR 220/UBR 220 65.7764.000.16-A001 AN00008880
Screw M3x8 AN00720011
Miscellaneous
RX/TX branching 18.7 05MBH00024AAB
Termination 18.7-26GHz 05MBH00026AAF
Connecting cable (CCDP) 65.7243.900.04-A002 AN00276520
Single mount wall AN00276964
Double mount wall C 05MBH00160AAK
Double mount kit C 05MBB00051AAT
U-bolt 63-115 65.7721.993.00-A001 AN00232453
Tube kit 127-219 05MBH00091AAB
Tube adapter AN00277010
Marconi 7-5
7.1.2 23 GHz band with ODU S

RF switch
RF switch 23 GHz 65.7187.140.00-A001 AN00038176
RF couplers
Coupler 23GHz/3dB 05MBH00030AAH
ODU 155/23-128 S (1a-20a) 05HAN00015AAV
ODU 155/23-EDM S (1a-9a/1a-20a) 05HAN00020AAA
ODU 155/23-M28 S (1a-15a) (28 MHz pattern) 05HAN00154AAL
ODU 155/23-M50 S (16a-25a) (50 MHz pattern) 05HAN00152AAG
ODU 155/23-128 S (1b-20b) 05HAN00015ABN
ODU 155/23-EDM S (1b-9b/1b-20b) 05HAN00020ABS
ODU 155/23-M28 S (1b-15b) (28 MHz pattern) 05HAN00154ABD
ODU 155/23-M50 S (16b-25b) (50 MHz pattern) 05HAN00152ABY
Filter box 23BB/A1 22 022.0–22 554.0 05MBH00004AAV
Filter box 23BB-M28/A1 21 241.5–21 633.5 05MBH00075AAE
Filter box 23BB-M50/A1 21 825.0–22 275.0 05MBH00073AAA
Filter box 23BB/B1 23 030.0–23 562.0 05MBH00004ABN
Filter box 23BB-M28/B1 22 473.5–22 865.5 05MBH00075ABW
Filter box 23BB-M50/B1 23 025.0–23 475.0 05MBH00073ABS
Filter 23-128BU/1a 22 022.0 05MBH00009AAG
Filter 23-128BU/2a 22 050.0 05MBH00009ACR
Filter 23-128BU/3a 22 078.0 05MBH00009AEB
Filter 23-128BU/4a 22 106.0 05MBH00009AGL
Filter 23-128BU/5a 22 134.0 05MBH00009AJV
Filter 23-128BU/6a 22 162.0 05MBH00009ALF
Filter 23-128BU/7a 22 190.0 05MBH00009ANQ
Filter 23-128BU/8a 22 218.0 05MBH00009AQA
Filter 23-128BU/9a 22 246.0 05MBH00009ASK
Filter 23-128BU/10a 22 274.0 05MBH00009AUU
Filter 23-128BU/11a 22 302.0 05MBH00009AWE
Filter 23-128BU/12a 22 330.0 05MBH00009AYP
Filter 23-128BU/13a 22 358.0 05MBH00009BAD
Filter 23-128BU/14a 22 386.0 05MBH00009BCN
Filter 23-128BU/15a 22 414.0 05MBH00009BEX
Filter 23-128BU/16a 22 442.0 05MBH00009BGH
Filter 23-128BU/17a 22 470.0 05MBH00009BJS
Filter 23-128BU/18a 22 498.0 05MBH00009BLC
Filter 23-128BU/19a 22 526.0 05MBH00009BNM
Filter 23-128BU/20a 22 554.0 05MBH00009BQW
Filter 23-128BU/1b 23 030.0 05MBH00009ABY
Filter 23-128BU/2b 23 058.0 05MBH00009ADJ
Filter 23-128BU/3b 23 086.0 05MBH00009AFT
7-6 Marconi
Filter 23-128BU/4b 23 114.0 05MBH00009AHD

Filter 23-128BU/5b 23 142.0 05MBH00009AKN
Filter 23-128BU/6b 23 170.0 05MBH00009AMX
Filter 23-128BU/7b 23 198.0 05MBH00009APH
Filter 23-128BU/8b 23 226.0 05MBH00009ARS
Filter 23-128BU/9b 23 254.0 05MBH00009ATC
Filter 23-128BU/10b 23 282.0 05MBH00009AVM
Filter 23-128BU/11b 23 310.0 05MBH00009AXW
Filter 23-128BU/12b 23 338.0 05MBH00009AZG
Filter 23-128BU/13b 23 366.0 05MBH00009BBV
Filter 23-128BU/14b 23 394.0 05MBH00009BDF
Filter 23-128BU/15b 23 422.0 05MBH00009BFQ
Filter 23-128BU/16b 23 450.0 05MBH00009BHA
Filter 23-128BU/17b 23 478.0 05MBH00009BKK
Filter 23-128BU/18b 23 506.0 05MBH00009BMU
Filter 23-128BU/19b 23 534.0 05MBH00009BPE
Filter 23-128BU/20b 23 562.0 05MBH00009BRP
Marconi 7-7

RF switch
RF switch 23 GHz 65.7187.140.00-A001 AN00038176
RF coupler
Coupler 23GHz/3dB 05MBH00030AAH
ODU 155/23-EDM S (1a-9a/1a-20a) 05HAN00020AAA
ODU 155/23-B56 S (1a-8a) (56/87.5 MHz-R.) 05HAN00151AAE
ODU 155/23-EDM S (1b-9b/1b-20b) 05HAN00020ABS
ODU 155/23-B56 S (1b-8b) (56/87.5 MHz-R.) 05HAN00151ABW
Filter box 23BB/A1 22 078.0–22 526.0 05MBH00004AAV
Filter box 23BB-B/A1 21 843.5–22 330.0 05MBH00072AAX
Filter box 23BB/B1 23 086.0–23 534.0 05MBH00004ABN
Filter box 23BB-B/B1 23 075.5–23 562.0 05MBH00072ABQ
Filter 23-16BU/1a 22 078.0 05MBH00008AAE
Filter 23-16BU/2a 22 134.0 05MBH00008ACP
Filter 23-16BU/3a 22 190.0 05MBH00008AEY
Filter 23-16BU/4a 22 246.0 05MBH00008AGJ
Filter 23-16BU/5a 22 302.0 05MBH00008AJT
Filter 23-16BU/6a 22 358.0 05MBH00008ALD
Filter 23-16BU/7a 22 414.0 05MBH00008ANN
Filter 23-16BU/8a 22 470.0 05MBH00008AQX
Filter 23-16BU/9a 22 526.0 05MBH00008ASH
Filter 23-16BU/1b 23 086.0 05MBH00008ABW
Filter 23-16BU/2b 23 142.0 05MBH00008ADG
Filter 23-16BU/3b 23 198.0 05MBH00008AFR
Filter 23-16BU/4b 23 254.0 05MBH00008AHB
Filter 23-16BU/5b 23 310.0 05MBH00008AKL
Filter 23-16BU/6b 23 366.0 05MBH00008AMV
Filter 23-16BU/7b 23 422.0 05MBH00008APF
Filter 23-16BU/8b 23 478.0 05MBH00008ARQ
Filter 23-16BU/9b 23 534.0 05MBH00008ATA
7-8 Marconi
7.1.2.3 Accessories

Alform-A230 14.1821.011.99-A001 AN00797677
Fitting A230-PBR220 65.7764.764.00-A001 AN00798107
Fitting A230-UBR220 65.7764.764.00-A002 AN00833698
Alform-A110/23 AN00838582
Fitting A110-PBR220/23 65.7764.900.00-A002 AN00834445
WG-Kit R220 05HAN00024AAJ
Pressure window PBR 220/UBR 220 65.7764.000.20-A001 AN00016418
Miscellaneous
RXTX branching 23A (lower band) 05MBH00007AAC
RXTX branching 23B (upper band) 05MBH00007ABU
U-bolt 63-115 AN00232453
Marconi 7-9

RF switch
RF switch 26 GHz / R220 05HAN00107AAR
RF coupler
Coupler 26GHz/6dB 05MBH00033AAP
ODU 155/26-EDM S (1a-8a/1a-16a) 05HAN00036AAD
ODU 155/26-EDM S (9a-16a/17a-32a) 05HAN00036ACN
ODU 155/26-EDM S (1b-8b/1b-16b) 05HAN00036ABV
ODU 155/26-EDM S (9b-16b/17b-32b) 05HAN00036ADF
Filter box 26BB/A1 24 563.0–24 983.0 05MBH00019AAW
Filter box 26BB/A2 25 011.0–25 431.0 05MBH00019ACG
Filter box 26BB/B1 25 571.0–25 991.0 05MBH00019ABP
Filter box 26BB/B2 26 019.0–26 439.0 05MBH00019ADY
Filter 26-128BU/1a 24 563.0 05MBH00023AAY
Filter 26-128BU/2a 24 591.0 05MBH00023ACJ
Filter 26-128BU/3a 24 619.0 05MBH00023AET
Filter 26-128BU/4a 24 647.0 05MBH00023AGD
Filter 26-128BU/5a 24 675.0 05MBH00023AJN
Filter 26-128BU/6a 24 703.0 05MBH00023ALX
Filter 26-128BU/7a 24 731.0 05MBH00023ANH
Filter 26-128BU/8a 24 759.0 05MBH00023AQS
Filter 26-128BU/9a 24 787.0 05MBH00023ASC
Filter 26-128BU/10a 24 815.0 05MBH00023AUM
Filter 26-128BU/11a 24 843.0 05MBH00023AWW
Filter 26-128BU/12a 24 871.0 05MBH00023AYG
Filter 26-128BU/13a 24 899.0 05MBH00023BAV
Filter 26-128BU/14a 24 927.0 05MBH00023BBU
Filter 26-128BU/15a 24 955.0 05MBH00023BEQ
Filter 26-128BU/16a 24 983.0 05MBH00023BGA
Filter 26-128BU/17a 25 011.0 05MBH00023BJK
Filter 26-128BU/18a 25 039.0 05MBH00023BLU
Filter 26-128BU/19a 25 067.0 05MBH00023BNE
Filter 26-128BU/20a 25 095.0 05MBH00023BQP
Filter 26-128BU/21a 25 123.0 05MBH00023BSY
Filter 26-128BU/22a 25 151.0 05MBH00023BUJ
Filter 26-128BU/23a 25 179.0 05MBH00023BWT
Filter 26-128BU/24a 25 207.0 05MBH00023BYD
Filter 26-128BU/25a 25 235.0 05MBH00023CAS
Filter 26-128BU/26a 25 263.0 05MBH00023CCC
Filter 26-128BU/27a 25 291.0 05MBH00023CEM
Filter 26-128BU/28a 25 319.0 05MBH00023CGW
Filter 26-128BU/29a 25 347.0 05MBH00023CJG
Filter 26-128BU/30a 25 375.0 05MBH00023CLR
7-10 Marconi
Filter 26-128BU/31a 25 403.0 05MBH00023CNB

Filter 26-128BU/32a 25 431.0 05MBH00023CQL
Filter 26-128BU/1b 25 571.0 05MBH00023ABR
Filter 26-128BU/2b 25 599.0 05MBH00023ADB
Filter 26-128BU/3b 25 627.0 05MBH00023AFL
Filter 26-128BU/4b 25 655.0 05MBH00023AHV
Filter 26-128BU/5b 25 683.0 05MBH00023AKF
Filter 26-128BU/6b 25 711.0 05MBH00023AMQ
Filter 26-128BU/7b 25 739.0 05MBH00023APA
Filter 26-128BU/8b 25 767.0 05MBH00023ARK
Filter 26-128BU/9b 25 795.0 05MBH00023ATU
Filter 26-128BU/10b 25 823.0 05MBH00023AVE
Filter 26-128BU/11b 25 851.0 05MBH00023AXP
Filter 26-128BU/12b 25 879.0 05MBH00023AZY
Filter 26-128BU/13b 25 907.0 05MBH00023BBN
Filter 26-128BU/14b 25 935.0 05MBH00023BDX
Filter 26-128BU/15b 25 963.0 05MBH00023BFH
Filter 26-128BU/16b 25 991.0 05MBH00023BHS
Filter 26-128BU/17b 26 019.0 05MBH00023BKC
Filter 26-128BU/18b 26 047.0 05MBH00023BMM
Filter 26-128BU/19b 26 075.0 05MBH00023BPW
Filter 26-128BU/20b 26 103.0 05MBH00023BRG
Filter 26-128BU/21b 26 131.0 05MBH00023BTR
Filter 26-128BU/22b 26 159.0 05MBH00023BVB
Filter 26-128BU/23b 26 187.0 05MBH00023BXL
Filter 26-128BU/24b 26 215.0 05MBH00023BZV
Filter 26-128BU/25b 26 243.0 05MBH00023CBK
Filter 26-128BU/26b 26 271.0 05MBH00023CDU
Filter 26-128BU/27b 26 299.0 05MBH00023BUE
Filter 26-128BU/28b 26 327.0 05MBH00023CHP
Filter 26-128BU/29b 26 355.0 05MBH00023CKY
Filter26-128BU/30b 26 383,0 05MBH00023CMJ
Filter 26-128BU/31b 26 411.0 05MBH00023CPT
Filter 26-128BU/32b 26 439.0 05MBH00023CRD
Marconi 7-11

RF switch
RF switch 26 GHz / R220 05HAN00107AAR
RF coupler
Coupler 26GHz/6dB 05MBH00033AAP
ODU 155/26-EDM S (1a-8a/1a-16a) 05HAN00036AAD
ODU 155/26-EDM S (9a-16a/17a-32a) 05HAN00036ACN
ODU 155/26-EDM S (1b-8b/1b-16b) 05HAN00036ABV
ODU 155/26-EDM S (9b-16b/17b-32b) 05HAN00036ADF
Filter box 26BB/A1 24 577.0–24 969.0 05MBH00019AAW
Filter box 26BB/A2 25 025.0–25 417.0 05MBH00019ACG
Filter box 26BB/B1 25 585.0–25 977.0 05MBH00019ABP
Filter box 26BB/B2 26 033.0–26 425.0 05MBH00019ADY
Filter 26-16BU/1a 24 577.0 05MBH00021AAU
Filter 26-16BU/2a 24 633.0 05MBH00021ACE
Filter 26-16BU/3a 24 689.0 05MBH00021AEP
Filter 26-16BU/4a 24 745.0 05MBH00021AGY
Filter 26-16BU/5a 24 801.0 05MBH00021AJJ
Filter 26-16BU/6a 24 857.0 05MBH00021ALT
Filter 26-16BU/7a 24 913.0 05MBH00021AND
Filter 26-16BU/8a 24 969.0 05MBH00021AQN
Filter 26-16BU/9a 25 025.0 05MBH00021ASX
Filter 26-16BU/10a 25 081.0 05MBH00021AUH
Filter 26-16BU/11a 25 137.0 05MBH00021AWS
Filter 26-16BU/12a 25 193.0 05MBH00021AYC
Filter 26-16BU/13a 25 249.0 05MBH00021BAR
Filter 26-16BU/14a 25 305.0 05MBH00021BCB
Filter 26-16BU/15a 25 361.0 05MBH00021BEL
Filter 26-16BU/16a 25 417.0 05MBH00021BGV
Filter 26-16BU/1b 25 585.0 05MBH00021ABM
Filter 26-16BU/2b 25 641.0 05MBH00021ADW
Filter 26-16BU/3b 25 697.0 05MBH00021AFG
Filter 26-16BU/4b 25 753.0 05MBH00021AHR
Filter 26-16BU/5b 25 809.0 05MBH00021AKB
Filter 26-16BU/6b 25 865.0 05MBH00021AML
Filter 26-16BU/7b 25 921.0 05MBH00021APV
Filter 26-16BU/8b 25 977.0 05MBH00021ARF
Filter 26-16BU/9b 26 033.0 05MBH00021ATQ
Filter 26-16BU/10b 26 089.0 05MBH00021AVA
Filter 26-16BU/11b 26 145.0 05MBH00021AXK
Filter 26-16BU/12b 26 201.0 05MBH00021AZU
Filter 26-16BU/13b 26 257.0 05MBH00021BBJ
Filter 26-16BU/14b 26 313.0 05MBH00021BDT
Filter 26-16BU/15b 26 369.0 05MBH00021BFD
Filter 26-16BU/16b 26 425.0 05MBH00021BHN
7-12 Marconi
7.1.3.3 Accessories

Alform-A290 14.1821.012.99-A001 AN00797678
Fitting A290-PBR220 65.7761.725.00-A003 AN00118683
Fitting A290-UBR220 65.7761.725.00-A002 AN00226209
WG-Kit R220 05HAN00024AAJ
Pressure window PBR 220/UBR 220 05MAF00009AAY
Miscellaneous
RX/TX branching 26 05MBH00025AAD
Adapter kit R220 - R260 05MBB00047AAR
U-bolt 63-115 AN00232453
Marconi 7-13

(28 MHz pattern)
RF switch
RF switch 28 GHz 65.7248.140.00-A001 AN00270170
RF coupler
Coupler 28GHz/3dB 65.7248.150.00-A001 AN00277154
ODU 155/28-128 S (1a-16a) 27 562.5–27 982.5 65.7248.300.00-A001 AN00238118
ODU 155/28-128 S (17a-32a) 28 010.5–28 430.5 65.7248.300.00-A003 AN00238120
ODU 155/28-EDM S (1a-8a/1a-16a) 05HAN00247AAJ
ODU 155/28-EDM S (9a-16a/17a-32a) 05HAN00247ACT
ODU 155/28-128 S (1b-16b) 28 570.5–28 990.5 65.7248.300.00-A002 AN00238119
ODU 155/28-128 S (17b-32b) 29 018.5–29 438.5 65.7248.300.00-A004 AN00238121
ODU 155/28-EDM S (1b-8b/1b-16b) 05HAN00247ABB
ODU 155/28-EDM S (9b-16b/17b-32b) 05HAN00247ADL
Filter box 28BB/A1 27 562.5–27 982.5 65.7248.400.00-A001 AN00272271
Filter box 28BB/B1 28 570.5–28 990.5 65.7248.400.00-A002 AN00272272
Filter 28-128BU/1a 27 562.5 65.7248.481.00-A001 AN00276811
Filter 28-128BU/2a 27 590.5 65.7248.481.00-A003 AN00276813
Filter 28-128BU/3a 27 618.5 65.7248.481.00-A005 AN00276815
Filter 28-128BU/4a 27 646.5 65.7248.481.00-A007 AN00276817
Filter 28-128BU/5a 27 674.5 65.7248.481.00-A009 AN00276819
Filter 28-128BU/6a 27 702.5 65.7248.481.00-A011 AN00276821
Filter 28-128BU/7a 27 730.5 65.7248.481.00-A013 AN00276823
Filter 28-128BU/8a 27 758.5 65.7248.481.00-A015 AN00276825
Filter 28-128BU/9a 27 786.5 65.7248.481.00-A017 AN00276827
Filter 28-128BU/10a 27 814.5 65.7248.481.00-A019 AN00276829
Filter 28-128BU/11a 27 842.5 65.7248.481.00-A021 AN00276831
Filter 28-128BU/12a 27 870.5 65.7248.481.00-A023 AN00276833
Filter 28-128BU/13a 27 898.5 65.7248.481.00-A025 AN00276835
Filter 28-128BU/14a 27 926.5 65.7248.481.00-A027 AN00276837
Filter 28-128BU/15a 27 954.5 65.7248.481.00-A029 AN00276839
Filter 28-128BU/16a 27 982.5 65.7248.481.00-A031 AN00276841
Filter 28-128BU/17a 28 010.5 65.7248.481.00-A033 AN00276843
Filter 28-128BU/18a 28 038.5 65.7248.481.00-A035 AN00276845
Filter 28-128BU/19a 28 066.5 65.7248.481.00-A037 AN00276847
Filter 28-128BU/20a 28 094.5 65.7248.481.00-A039 AN00276849
Filter 28-128BU/21a 28 122.5 65.7248.481.00-A041 AN00276851
Filter 28-128BU/22a 28 150.5 65.7248.481.00-A043 AN00276853
Filter 28-128BU/23a 28 178.5 65.7248.481.00-A045 AN00276855
Filter 28-128BU/24a 28 206.5 65.7248.481.00-A047 AN00276857
Filter 28-128BU/25a 28 234.5 65.7248.481.00-A049 AN00276859
Filter 28-128BU/26a 28 262.5 65.7248.481.00-A051 AN00276861
7-14 Marconi
Filter 28-128BU/27a 28 290.5 65.7248.481.00-A053 AN00276863

Filter 28-128BU/28a 28 318.5 65.7248.481.00-A055 AN00276865
Filter 28-128BU/29a 28 346.5 65.7248.481.00-A057 AN00276867
Filter 28-128BU/30a 28 374.5 65.7248.481.00-A059 AN00276869
Filter 28-128BU/31a 28 402.5 65.7248.481.00-A061 AN00276871
Filter 28-128BU/32a 28 430.5 65.7248.481.00-A063 AN00276873
Filter 28-128BU/1b 28 570.5 65.7248.481.00-A002 AN00276812
Filter 28-128BU/2b 28 598.5 65.7248.481.00-A004 AN00276814
Filter 28-128BU/3b 28 626.5 65.7248.481.00-A006 AN00276816
Filter 28-128BU/4b 28 654.5 65.7248.481.00-A008 AN00276818
Filter 28-128BU/5b 28 682.5 65.7248.481.00-A010 AN00276820
Filter 28-128BU/6b 28 710.5 65.7248.481.00-A012 AN00276822
Filter 28-128BU/7b 28 738.5 65.7248.481.00-A014 AN00276824
Filter 28-128BU/8b 28 766.5 65.7248.481.00-A016 AN00276826
Filter 28-128BU/9b 28 794.5 65.7248.481.00-A018 AN00276828
Filter 28-128BU/10b 28 822.5 65.7248.481.00-A020 AN00276830
Filter 28-128BU/11b 28 850.5 65.7248.481.00-A022 AN00276832
Filter 28-128BU/12b 28 878.5 65.7248.481.00-A024 AN00276834
Filter 28-128BU/13b 28 906.5 65.7248.481.00-A026 AN00276836
Filter 28-128BU/14b 28 934.5 65.7248.481.00-A028 AN00276838
Filter 28-128BU/15b 28 962.5 65.7248.481.00-A030 AN00276840
Filter 28-128BU/16b 28 990.5 65.7248.481.00-A032 AN00276842
Filter 28-128BU/17b 29 018.5 65.7248.481.00-A034 AN00276844
Filter 28-128BU/18b 29 046.5 65.7248.481.00-A036 AN00276846
Filter 28-128BU/19b 29 074.5 65.7248.481.00-A038 AN00276848
Filter 28-128BU/20b 29 102.5 65.7248.481.00-A040 AN00276850
Filter 28-128BU/21b 29 130.5 65.7248.481.00-A042 AN00276852
Filter 28-128BU/22b 29 158.5 65.7248.481.00-A044 AN00276854
Filter 28-128BU/23b 29 186.5 65.7248.481.00-A046 AN00276856
Filter 28-128BU/24b 29 214.5 65.7248.481.00-A048 AN00276858
Filter 28-128BU/25b 29 242.5 65.7248.481.00-A050 AN00276860
Filter 28-128BU/26b 29 270.5 65.7248.481.00-A052 AN00276862
Filter 28-128BU/27b 29 298.5 65.7248.481.00-A054 AN00276864
Filter 28-128BU/28b 29 326.5 65.7248.481.00-A056 AN00276866
Filter 28-128BU/29b 29 354.5 65.7248.481.00-A058 AN00276868
Filter 28-128BU/30b 29 382.5 65.7248.481.00-A060 AN00276870
Filter 28-128BU/31b 29 410.5 65.7248.481.00-A062 AN00276872
Filter 28-128BU/32b 29 438.5 65.7248.481.00-A064 AN00276874
Marconi 7-15

RF switch
RF switch 28 GHz 65.7248.140.00-A001 AN00270170
RF coupler
ODU 155/28-EDM S (1a-8a/1a-16a) 05HAN00247AAJ
ODU 155/28-EDM S (9a-16a/17a-32a) 05HAN00247ACT
ODU 155/28-EDM S (1b-8b/1b-16b) 05HAN00247ABB
ODU 155/28-EDM S (9b-16b/17b-32b) 05HAN00247ADL
Filter 28-16BU/1a 27 576.5 65.7248.480.00-A001 AN00276778
Filter 28-16BU/2a 27 632.5 65.7248.480.00-A003 AN00276780
Filter 28-16BU/3a 27 688.5 65.7248.480.00-A005 AN00276782
Filter 28-16BU/4a 27 744.5 65.7248.480.00-A007 AN00276784
Filter 28-16BU/5a 27 800.5 65.7248.480.00-A009 AN00276786
Filter 28-16BU/6a 27 856.5 65.7248.480.00-A011 AN00276788
Filter 28-16BU/7a 27 912.5 65.7248.480.00-A013 AN00276790
Filter 28-16BU/8a 27 968.5 65.7248.480.00-A015 AN00276792
Filter 28-16BU/9a 28 024.5 65.7248.480.00-A017 AN00276794
Filter 28-16BU/10a 28 080.5 65.7248.480.00-A019 AN00276796
Filter 28-16BU/11a 28 136.5 65.7248.480.00-A021 AN00276798
Filter 28-16BU/12a 28 192.5 65.7248.480.00-A023 AN00276800
Filter 28-16BU/13a 28 248.5 65.7248.480.00-A025 AN00276802
Filter 28-16BU/14a 28 304.5 65.7248.480.00-A027 AN00276804
Filter 28-16BU/15a 28 360.5 65.7248.480.00-A029 AN00276806
Filter 28-16BU/16a 28 416.5 65.7248.480.00-A031 AN00276808
Filter 28-16BU/1b 28 584.5 65.7248.480.00-A002 AN00276779
Filter 28-16BU/2b 28 640.5 65.7248.480.00-A004 AN00276781
Filter 28-16BU/3b 28 696.5 65.7248.480.00-A006 AN00276783
Filter 28-16BU/4b 28 752.5 65.7248.480.00-A008 AN00276785
Filter 28-16BU/5b 28 808.5 65.7248.480.00-A010 AN00276787
Filter 28-16BU/6b 28 864.5 65.7248.480.00-A012 AN00276789
Filter 28-16BU/7b 28 920.5 65.7248.480.00-A014 AN00276791
Filter 28-16BU/8b 28 976.5 65.7248.480.00-A016 AN00276793
Filter 28-16BU/9b 29 032.5 65.7248.480.00-A018 AN00276795
Filter 28-16BU/10b 29 088.5 65.7248.480.00-A020 AN00276797
Filter 28-16BU/11b 29 144.5 65.7248.480.00-A022 AN00276799
Filter 28-16BU/12b 29 200.5 65.7248.480.00-A024 AN00276801
Filter 28-16BU/13b 29 256.5 65.7248.480.00-A026 AN00276803
Filter 28-16BU/14b 29 312.5 65.7248.480.00-A028 AN00276805
Filter 28-16BU/15b 29 368.5 65.7248.480.00-A030 AN00276807
Filter 28-16BU/16b 29 424.5 65.7248.480.00-A032 AN00276809
7-16 Marconi
7.1.4.3 Accessories

Alform A290 14.1821.012.99-A001 AN00797678
Fitting A290-PBR 320 65.7764.765.00-A001 AN00237359
Fitting A290-UBR 320 65.7764.766.00-A001 AN00798108
WG kit R320 05HAN00023AAG
Pressure window R320 05MAF00014AAD
Intermediate plate R320 05MAF00008AAW
Miscellaneous
RX/TX branching 28 65.7248.450.00-A001 AN00274443
Termination 28 65.7248.455.00-A001 AN00277135
U-bolt 63-115 AN00232453
Marconi 7-17
7.2 Outdoor Units ODU L and accessories

7.2.1 7.5 GHz band with ODU L (no license for use in Germany)
7.2.1.1 128 MLQAM systems with 161 MHz duplex spacing
Designation Tx frequency (MHz) min./max. Ident. number

RF couplers
Coupler 7/3 (symmetrical) 9401734-0012
Coupler 7/6 (asymmetrical) 9401735-0011
ODU 7-5 LBT-1 L 7114.0 – 7177.0 9401728-0010
ODU 7-5 LBT-2 L 7149.0 – 7212.0 9401728-0036
ODU 7-5 LBT-3 L 7184.0 – 7247.0 9401728-0051
ODU 7-5 LBT-4 L 7219.0 – 7282.0 9401728-0077
ODU 7-5 LBT-5 L 7239.0 – 7302.0 9401728-0093
ODU 7-5 LBT-6 L 7274.0 – 7337.0 9401728-0119
ODU 7-5 LBT-7 L 7309.0 – 7372.0 9401728-0135
ODU 7-5 LBT-8 L 7344.0 – 7407.0 9401728-0150
ODU 7-5 LBT-9 L 7414.0 – 7477.0 9401728-0176
ODU 7-5 LBT-10 L 7449.0 – 7512.0 9401728-0192
ODU 7-5 LBT-21 L 7484.0 – 7547.0 9401728-0218
ODU 7-5 LBT-22 L 7519.0 – 7582.0 9401728-0234
ODU 7-5 LBT-23 L 7539.0 – 7602.0 9401728-0259
ODU 7-5 LBT-24 L 7574.0 – 7637.0 9401728-0275
ODU 7-5 LBT-25 L 7609.0 – 7672.0 9401728-0291
ODU 7-5 LBT-26 L 7644.0 – 7707.0 9401728-0317
ODU 7-5 UBT-1 L 7275.0 – 7338.0 9401728-0028
ODU 7-5 UBT-2 L 7310.0 – 7373.0 9401728-0044
ODU 7-5 UBT-3 L 7345.0 – 7408.0 9401728-0069
ODU 7-5 UBT-4 L 7380.0 – 7443.0 9401728-0085
ODU 7-5 UBT-5 L 7400.0 – 7463.0 9401728-0101
ODU 7-5 UBT-6 L 7435.0 – 7498.0 9401728-0127
ODU 7-5 UBT-7 L 7470.0 – 7533.0 9401728-0143
ODU 7-5 UBT-8 L 7505.0 – 7568.0 9401728-0168
ODU 7-5 UBT-9 L 7575.0 – 7638.0 9401728-0184
ODU 7-5 UBT-10 L 7610.0 – 7673.0 9401728-0200
ODU 7-5 UBT-21 L 7645.0 – 7708.0 9401728-0226
ODU 7-5 UBT-22 L 7680.0 – 7743.0 9401728-0242
ODU 7-5 UBT-23 L 7700.0 – 7763.0 9401728-0267
ODU 7-5 UBT-24 L 7735.0 – 7798.0 9401728-0283
ODU 7-5 UBT-25 L 7770.0 – 7833.0 9401728-0309
ODU 7-5 UBT-26 L 7805.0 – 7868.0 9401728-0325
7-18 Marconi
7.2.1.2 Accessories

Mounting kit 7-RC1 9401752-0019
ODU mounting kit adapter 115 - 219 mm MCG000-000614
Flexible WG PDR84/PBR84 (400 mm) 8400470-0062
Connecting kit PDR84 (FL/FL) AN00758721
Connecting kit PDR84 (FL/G) AN00020350
Adapter PBR84 - PDR70 AN00235388
Marconi 7-19
7.2.2 13 GHz band with ODU L (no license for use in Germany)

RF couplers
ODU 13 LBT-1 L 12751.0 – 12814.0 9401729-0019
ODU 13 LBT-2 L 12807.0 – 12870.0 9401729-0035
ODU 13 LBT-3 L 12863.0 – 12926.0 9401729-0050
ODU 13 LBT-4 L 12919.0 – 12982.0 9401729-0076
ODU 13 UBT-1 L 13017.0 – 13080.0 9401729-0027
ODU 13 UBT-2 L 13073.0 – 13136.0 9401729-0043
ODU 13 UBT-3 L 13129.0 – 13192.0 9401729-0068
ODU 13 UBT-4 L 13185.0 – 13248.0 9401729-0084
7.2.2.2 Accessories

Mounting kit 13-RR1 9401752-0027
ALFORM A110 14.1821.002.99-A001 AN00598873
A110-PDR120 AN00736699
A110-PBR120 AN00227774
A110-UBR120 AN00227775
7-20 Marconi
7.2.3 15 GHz band with ODU L (no license for use in Germany)

RF couplers
ODU 15-315 LBT-1 L 14627,0 – 14732,0 9401849-0014
ODU 15-315 LBT-2 L 14725,0 – 14844,0 9401849-0030
ODU 15-315 LBT-3 L 14823,0 – 14928,0 9401849-0055
ODU 15-315 UBT-1 L 14942,0 – 15047,0 9401849-0022
ODU 15-315 UBT-2 L 15040,0 – 15159,0 9401849-0048
ODU 15-315 UBT-3 L 15138,0 – 15243,0 9401849-0063

RF couplers
ODU 15-420 LBT-4 L 14501.0 – 14613.0 9401730-0016
ODU 15-420 LBT-5 L 14606.0 – 14725.0 9401730-0032
ODU 15-420 LBT-6 L 14718.0 – 14837.0 9401730-0057
ODU 15-420 LBT-7 L 14816.0 – 14928.0 9401730-0073
ODU 15-420 UBT-4 L 14921.0 – 15033.0 9401730-0024
ODU 15-420 UBT-5 L 15026.0 – 15145.0 9401730-0040
ODU 15-420 UBT-6 L 15138.0 – 15257.0 9401730-0065
ODU 15-420 UBT-7 L 15236.0 – 15348.0 9401730-0081

RF couplers
ODU 15-490 LBT-4 L 14403.0 – 14522.0 9401731-0015
ODU 15-490 LBT-5 L 14515.0 – 14634.0 9401731-0031
ODU 15-490 LBT-6 L 14627.0 – 14746.0 9401731-0056
ODU 15-490 LBT-7 L 14739.0 – 14858.0 9401731-0072
ODU 15-490 UBT-4 L 14893.0 – 15012.0 9401731-0023
ODU 15-490 UBT-5 L 15005.0 – 15124.0 9401731-0049
ODU 15-490 UBT-6 L 15117.0 – 15236.0 9401731-0064
ODU 15-490 UBT-7 L 15229.0 – 15348.0 9401731-0080
Marconi 7-21

RF couplers
ODU 15-728 LBT-1 L 14500.0 – 14615.0 9401732-0014
ODU 15-728 UBT-1 L 15228.0 – 15343.0 9401732-0022
7.2.3.5 Accessories

Mounting kit 15-RR1 9401752-0035
ALFORM A140 AN00195046
A140-PBR140 AN00078525
A140-UBR140 AN00077584
ALFORM A82/15 AN00777571
A82-PDR140/15 AN00738911
A82-PBR140/15 AN00232827
Pressure window PBR 140 AN00077081
Intermediate plate PBR 140 AN00082361
Nut M4 AN00221065
7-22 Marconi
7.3 Outdoor Units ODU LX and accessories
7.3.1 7.5 GHz band with ODU LX
7.3.1.1 128 MLQAM systems with 154 MHz duplex spacing (for use in Germany)

(28 MHz pattern) Marconi Code No.
RF coupler
Coupler 7&8GHz/3dB 05HAN00323AAB
Coupler 7&8GHz/6dB 05HAN00323ABT
Outdoor Unit
ODU 7 SUB-1 LEX 7 400 – 7 900 05HAA00083AAE
Diplexer (lower band)
7 GHz LBT-1 7 442 – 7 554 05MBH00200AAA
Diplexer (upper band)
7 GHz UBT-1 7 596 – 7 708 05MBH00200ABS
Channel frequencies (lower band)1
1a 7 442
2a 7 470
3a 7 498
4a 7 526
5a 7 554
Channel frequencies (upper band)1
1b 7 596
2b 7 624
3b 7 652
4b 7 680
5b 7 708
7.3.1.2 128 MLQAM systems (for export)

with 154, 161, 168, 196 or 254 MHz duplex spacing

RF coupler
Coupler 7&8GHz/3dB 05HAN00323AAB
Coupler 7&8GHz/6dB 05HAN00323ABT
Outdoor Units
ODU 7 SUB-1 LEX 7 400 – 7 900 05HAA00083AAE
ODU 7 SUB-2 LEX 7 100 – 7 600 05HAA00083ABW
Diplexer (lower band) 1
7 GHz LBT-2 7 100 – 7 750 05MBH00200ACK
Diplexer (upper band) 1
7 GHz UBT-2 7 250 – 7 900 05MBH00200ADC
1
Please specify the channel filter frequencies when placing an order.
Marconi 7-23
Channel frequencies in systems with

154 MHz duplex spacing
(ITU-R F.385-7 Annex 1, Frequency
band 7, interleaved)
Lower band 1
1a 7 456
2a 7 484
3a 7 512
4a 7 540
5a 7 568
Upper band 1
1b 7 610
2b 7 638
3b 7 666
4b 7 694
5b 7 722
(ITU-R F.385-7 Annex 1, Extension
Frequency band 8)
Lower band 1
1a 7 254
Upper band 1
1b 7 408
154 MHz duplex spacing (ITU-R F.385-
7 Specific, Frequency band 15)
lower band 1
1a 7 281
2a 7 309
3a 7 337
4a 7 365
Upper band 1
1b 7 435
2b 7 463
3b 7 491
4b 7 519
154 MHz duplex spacing (CEPT
ECC/REC (02)06, Frequency band 16)
Lower band 1
1a 7 142
2a 7 170
3a 7 198
4a 7 226
5a 7 254
Upper band 1
1b 7 296
2b 7 324
3b 7 352
4b 7 380
5b 7 408
154 MHz duplex spacing (CEPT
ECC/REC (02)06, Frequency band 17)
Lower band 1
1
7-24 Marconi
1a 7 442
2a 7 470
3a 7 498
4a 7 526
5a 7 554
Upper band 1
1b 7 596
2b 7 624
3b 7 652
4b 7 680
5b 7 708
7 Specific, Frequency band 14)
Lower band 1
1a 7 522,5
2a 7 550,5
Upper band 1
1b 7 683,5
2b 7 711,5
7 Annex 3, Frequency band 11)
Lower band 1
1a 7 457
2a 7 485
3a 7 513
4a 7 541
5a 7 569
Upper band 1
1b 7 625
2b 7 653
3b 7 681
4b 7 709
5b 7 737
Lower band 1
1a 7 121
2a 7 149
3a 7 177
4a 7 205
5a 7 233
Upper band 1
1b 7 317
2b 7 345
3b 7 373
4b 7 401
5b 7 429
Lower band 1
1a 7 442
2a 7 470
1
Marconi 7-25
3a 7 498
4a 7 526
5a 7 554
6a 7 582
7a 7 610
8a 7 638
Upper band 1
1b 7 687
2b 7 715
3b 7 743
4b 7 771
5b 7 799
6b 7 827
7b 7 855
8b 7 883
7.3.1.3 Accessories

Adapter frame ODU 05MBH00136AAC
ODU bracket 05MBH00170AAA
U-bolt 63-115 65.7721.993.00-A001 AN00232453
Mounting kit adapter 115-219 mm 65.7721.885.00-A001 AN00079891
Flexible waveguide PDR84/PBR84 (400 mm) 8400470-0062
Miscellaneous
Adapter PBR84-PDR70 AN00235388
Absorber 7&8 05MAA00872AAH
Absorber 7&8 Kit 05MBB00080AAM
1
7-26 Marconi
7.3.2 11 GHz band with ODU LX
7.3.2.1 128 MLQAM systems (for export)

with 490 MHz or 530 MHz duplex spacing

(40-MHz- pattern) Marconi Code No.
RF coupler
Coupler 11&13GHz/3dB 05HAN00343AAG
Coupler 11&13GHz/6dB 05HAN00343ABY
Outdoor Units
ODU 11 SUB-1 LEX 10 715 – 11 685 05HAA00085AAJ
Diplexer (lower band )
11 GHz LBT-1 10 715 – 11 175 05MBH00201AAC
Diplexer (upper band )
11 GHz UBT-1 11 225 – 11 685 05MBH00201ABU
9, Frequency band 2 and ITU-R F.387-9
Annex 2, Frequency band 7)
Lower band 1
1a 10 755
2a 10 795
3a 10 835
4a 10 875
5a 10 915
6a 10 955
7a 10 995
8a 11 035
9a 11 075
10a 11 115
11a 11 155
Upper band 1
1b 11245
2b 11285
3b 11325
4b 11365
5b 11405
6b 11445
7b 11485
8b 11525
9b 11565
10b 11605
11b 11645
(ITU-R F.387- 9, Frequency band 4,
interleaved and ITU-R F.387- 9 Annex
2, Frequency band 9, interl. )
Lower band 1
1a 10 735
2a 10 775
3a 10 815
1
Marconi 7-27
4a 10 855
5a 10 895
6a 10 935
7a 10 975
8a 11 015
9a 11 055
10a 11 095
11a 11 135
Upper band 1
1b 11 225
2b 11 265
3b 11 305
4b 11 345
5b 11 385
6b 11 425
7b 11 465
8b 11 505
9b 11 545
10b 11 585
11b 11 625
9 Annex 2, Frequency band 10 and
ERC/REC 12-06 E Frequency band 10)
Lower band 1
1a 10 735
2a 10 775
3a 10 815
4a 10 855
5a 10 895
6a 10 935
7a 10 975
8a 11 015
9a 11 055
10a 11 095
11a 11 135
12a 11 175
Upper band 1
1b 11 225
2b 11 265
3b 11 305
4b 11 345
5b 11 385
6b 11 425
7b 11 465
8b 11 505
9b 11 545
10b 11 585
11b 11 625
12b 11 665
(ITU-R F.387- 9, Frequency band 1 and
Annex 2, Frequency band 6)
Lower band 1
1a 10 715
1
7-28 Marconi
2a 10 755
3a 10 795
4a 10 835
5a 10 875
6a 10 915
7a 10 955
8a 10 995
9a 11 035
10a 11 075
11a 11 115
12a 11 155
Upper band 1
1b 11 245
2b 11 285
3b 11 325
4b 11 365
5b 11 405
6b 11 445
7b 11 485
8b 11 525
9b 11 565
10b 11 605
11b 11 645
12b 11 685
9, Frequency band 3, interleaved)
Lower band 1
1a 10 695
2a 10 735
3a 10 775
4a 10 815
5a 10 855
6a 10 895
7a 10 935
8a 10 975
9a 11 015
10a 11 055
11a 11 095
12a 11 135
Upper band 1
1b 11 225
2b 11 265
3b 11 305
4b 11 345
5b 11 385
6b 11 425
7b 11 465
8b 11 505
9b 11 545
10b 11 585
11b 11 625
12b 11 665
1
Marconi 7-29

9 Annex 2, Frequency band 8 and
ERC/REC 12-06 E, Frequency band 8)
Lower band 1
1a 10 735
2a 10 775
3a 10 815
4a 10 855
5a 10 895
6a 10 935
7a 10 975
8a 11 015
9a 11 055
10a 11 095
11a 11 135
Upper band 1
1b 11 265
2b 11 305
3b 11 345
4b 11 385
5b 11 425
6b 11 465
7b 11 505
8b 11 545
9b 11 585
10b 11 625
11b 11 665
7.3.2.2 Accessories

U-bolt 63-115 65.7721.993.00-A001 AN00232453
Alform A110 14.1821.002.99-A001 AN00598873
Fitting A110-PDR120 AN00736699
Fitting A110-PBR120 AN00227774
Fitting A110-UBR120 AN00227775
Miscellaneous
Adapter PDR100-PDR120 05MBH00230AAV
Pressure window UBR/PBR120 8400487-0014
Absorber 11&13 05MBH00232AAA
Absorber 11&13 Kit 05MBB00081AAP
1
7-30 Marconi

RF coupler
Coupler 13GHz/3dB 05HAN00324AAD
Coupler 13GHz/6dB 05HAN00324ABV
Outdoor Unit
ODU 13 SUB-1 LEX 12 765 – 13 227 05HAA00086AAL
Diplexer (lower band)
13 GHz LBT 12 765 – 12 961 05MBH00181ABK
Diplexer (upper band)
13 GHz UBT 13 031 – 13 227 05MBH00181AAS
Channel frequencies (lower band)1
1a 12 765
2a 12 793
3a 12 821
4a 12 849
5a 12 877
6a 12 905
7a 12 933
8a 12 961
Channel frequencies (upper band)1
1b 13 031
2b 13 059
3b 13 087
4b 13 115
5b 13 143
6b 13 171
7b 13 199
8b 13 227
7.3.3.2 Accessories

U-bolt 63-115 65.7721.993.00-A001 AN00232453
Alform-A110 14.1821.002.99-A001 AN00598873
Fitting A110-PDR120 AN00736699
Fitting A110-PBR120 AN00227774
Fitting A110-UBR120 AN00227775
1
Marconi 7-31
Miscellaneous
Connecting kit PDR120 (Fl/Fl) AN00595319
Connecting kit PDR120 (Fl/G) AN00028654
Pressure windowUBR/PBR120 8400487-0014
Absorber R120 05MBH00206AAN
Absorber 13 Kit 05MBB00071AAY
7-32 Marconi

RF coupler
Coupler 38GHz/3dB 05HAN00277AAE
Coupler 38GHz/6dB 05HAN00277ABW
ODU 38 LBT-1 LMX (1a-16a) 37 072 – 37 492 05HAN00265AAK
ODU 38 LBT-2 LMX (13a-28a) 37 408 – 37 828 05HAN00265ACU
ODU 38 LBT-3 LMX (23a-40a) 37 688 – 38 164 05HAN00265AEE
ODU 38 UBT-1 LMX (1b-16b) 38 332 – 38 752 05HAN00265ABC
ODU 38 UBT-2 LMX (13b-28b) 38 668 – 39 088 05HAN00265ADM
ODU 38 UBT-3 LMX (23b-40b) 38 948 – 39 424 05HAN00265AFW
Channel frequencies (lower band)
1a 37 072
2a 37 100
3a 37 128
4a 37 156
5a 37 184
6a 37 212
7a 37 240
8a 37 268
9a 37 296
10a 37 324
11a 37 352
12a 37 380
13a 37 408
14a 37 436
15a 37 464
16a 37 492
17a 37 520
18a 37 548
19a 37 576
20a 37 604
21a 37 632
22a 37 660
23a 37 688
24a 37 716
25a 37 744
26a 37 772
27a 37 800
28a 37 828
29a 37 856
30a 37 884
31a 37 912
32a 37 940
33a 37 968
34a 37 996
35a 38 024
36a 38 052
37a 38 080
Marconi 7-33
38a 38 108
39a 38 136
40a 38 164
Channel frequencies (upper band)
1b 38 332
2b 38 360
3b 38 388
4b 38 416
5b 38 444
6b 38 472
7b 38 500
8b 38 528
9b 38 556
10b 38 584
11b 38 612
12b 38 640
13b 38 668
14b 38 696
15b 38 724
16b 38 752
17b 38 780
18b 38 808
19b 38 836
20b 38 864
21b 38 892
22b 38 920
23b 38 948
24b 38 976
25b 39 004
26b 39 032
27b 39 060
28b 39 088
29b 39 116
30b 39 144
31b 39 172
32b 39 200
33b 39 228
34b 39 256
35b 39 284
36b 39 312
37b 39 340
38b 39 368
39b 39 396
40b 39 424
7-34 Marconi

RF coupler
Coupler 38GHz/3dB 05HAN00277AAE
Coupler 38GHz/6dB 05HAN00277ABW
ODU 38 LBT-1 LMX (1a-8a) 37 086 – 37 478 05HAN00265AAK
ODU 38 LBT-2 LMX (7a-14a) 37 422 – 37 814 05HAN00265ACU
ODU 38 LBT-3 LMX (12a-20a) 37 702 – 38 150 05HAN00265AEE
ODU 38 UBT-1 LMX (1b-8b) 38 346 – 38 738 05HAN00265ABC
ODU 38 UBT-2 LMX (7b-14b) 38 682 – 39 074 05HAN00265ADM
ODU 38 UBT-3 LMX (12b-20b) 38 962 – 39 410 05HAN00265AFW
Channel frequencies (lower band)
1a 37 086
2a 37 142
3a 37 198
4a 37 254
5a 37 310
6a 37 366
7a 37 422
8a 37 478
9a 37 534
10a 37 590
11a 37 646
12a 37 702
13a 37 758
14a 37 814
15a 37 870
16a 37 926
17a 37 982
18a 38 038
19a 38 094
20a 38 150
Channel frequencies (upper band)
1b 38 346
2b 38 402
3b 38 458
4b 38 514
5b 38 570
6b 38 626
7b 38 682
8b 38 738
9b 38 794
10b 38 850
11b 38 906
12b 38 962
13b 39 018
14b 39 074
15b 39 130
16b 39 186
17b 39 242
18b 39 298
19b 39 354
20b 39 410
Marconi 7-35
7.3.4.3 Accessories

U-bolt 63-115 65.7721.993.00-A001 AN00232453
Equipment mount 1+0 AN00035455
Equipment mount 1+1 AN00035460
Mast mounting bracket (80-115) AN00867053
Adapter RAU2 AN00274047
ALFORM A290/38 14.1821.012.99-A001 AN00797678
Fitting A290-PBR320/38 65.7764.770.00-A001 AN00221421
Fitting A290-UBR320/38 65.7764.775.00-A001 AN00221422
Miscellaneous
Waveguide coupler 38/3 65.7190.115.00-A001 AN00032159
Coupler mount 65.7721.040.00-A001 AN00237216
Absorber 38 GHz AN00276051
Absorber 38 kit 05MBB00070AAW
Pressure window PBR 320/UBR320 65.7764.000.24-A001 AN00052136
Intermediate plate PBR 320/UBR320 65.7764.000.27-A001 AN00055626
7-36 Marconi
7.4 Indoor Units and accessories
Designation Ident. number

Indoor Units 128 S
IDU 155-128 S (electr. interface without EOW) AN00232075
IDU 155-128 S (electr./opt. interface without EOW) AN00232076
IDU 155-128 S (electr. interface with EOW) AN00232077
IDU 155-128 S (electr./opt. interface with EOW) AN00232078
Indoor Units 128 LS
IDU 155-128 LS E (electr. interface without EOW) 05HAN00133AAD
IDU 155-128 LS EO (electr./opt. interface without EOW) 05HAN00133ABV
IDU 155-128 LS EE (electr. interface with EOW) 05HAN00133ACN
IDU 155-128 LS EOE (electr./opt. interface with EOW) 05HAN00133ADF
Indoor Units 16 S
IDU 155-16 S E (electr. interface without EOW) AN00236227
IDU 155-16 S EO (electr./opt. interface without EOW) AN00236228
IDU 155-16 S EE (electr. interface with EOW) AN00236229
IDU 155-16 S EOE (electr./opt. interface with EOW) AN00236230
Indoor Units 16 LS
IDU 155-16 LS E (electr. interface without EOW) 05HAN00192AAS
IDU 155-16 LS EO (electr./opt. interface without EOW) 05HAN00192ABK
IDU 155-16 LS EE (electr. interface with EOW) 05HAN00192ACC
IDU 155-16 LS EOE (electr./opt. interface with EOW) 05HAN00192ADU
Connecting cables for expansions (1+1 configuration, HSB or line
protection; 2+0 with XPIC, 1+1 line protection with XPIC)
Connecting cable AN00239811
Adapter cable – optical interface
FO cable (LC/PC-SC/PC duplex) 1400785-0010
FO coupler (Adapter SC-PC; convex; to SC-PC; convex) AN00542458
FO coupler (Adapter SC-PC; convex; to DIN; convex) AN00037771
FO coupler (Adapter SC-PC; convex; to E2000; convex) AN00064929
FO cable (LC/PC-SC/APC duplex) 1400786-0019
FO coupler (Adapter SC-APC; 8° convex) to SC-PC ; 8° convex) AN00022476
FO coupler (Adapter SC-APC; 8° convex) to DIN; 8° convex) AN00064939
FO coupler (Adapter SC-APC; 8° convex) to E2000; 8° convex) AN00050516
Adapter cable QD2
RJ-45 to D-Sub/F, 1000 mm AN00232085
Y-cable, 3x D-Sub (MMF), 1000 mm AN00232086
2x D-Sub (FF), 2500 mm AN00046133
Bus termination (121 Ohms) AN00100766
Connecting cable EOW
2x RJ-45, 230 mm (EXTEOW) AN00224733
System cable and accessories
System cable 1 (CF 1/4“, ≤ 150 m) A002 AN00080254
Connector, 50 Ohms for CF 1/4“ (for system cable 1) AN00079978
System cable 2 (CF 1/2“, ≤ 300 m) A002 AN00087586
Connector, 50 Ohms for CF 1/2“ (for system cable 2) AN00111994
Connector, 50 Ohms for CF 1/2“ (for system cable 2, A002) AN00089138
System cable 4 (LI 8, ≤ 150 m) AN00226089
Connector, 50 Ohms for LI 8 (for system cable 4) 5105171-0013
N-connector 90° AN00049509
Overvoltage protection AN00046600
Grounding clamp for CF 1/4“ (for system cables 1 and 4) AN00276999
Grounding clamp CF 1/2“ (for system cable 2) AN00277000
Marconi 7-37
Connecting cable (serial)

Adapter LMT-IDU (RJ-45 ↔ D-Sub/M) AN00232092
Connectors
Power supply connector AN00020488
Connector RJ-45 AN00115407
Line switch
Line switch 1+1 CMI 05HAN00183AAE
Line switch 1+1 OPT 05HAN00184AAG
Spare part
Fan module (FAN) AN00118622
Miscellaneous
Wall mount AN000118615
Adapter DPU STM-4 (DPU accessories) AN000232084
Connecting cable adapter DPU STM-4 to MDRS A001 (500 mm) AN000224237
7-38 Marconi
7.5 Special devices – Dehydrators

Marconi Code No.
Dehydrator LLUE 110 230 VAC (3HE) AN00217183
48/60 VDC (3HE) AN00217181
230 VAC (2HE) AN00217199
48/60 VDC (2HE) AN00217198
Dehydrator LLUE 310 230 VAC (3HE) AN00217213
48/60 VDC (3HE) AN00217212
Desiccant cartridge AN00226349
(required for LLUE 110)
Air distributor LUVT6 indoor AN00122593
outdoor AN00122633
Connector for LUVT cascading AN00122642
Air hose 13 mm indoor AN00844002
outdoor 6L.2773.003.00-A001 AN00743129
Hose clamp AN00114270
Adapter for hose AN00114295
Hose tail fitting M8, A65-A110 65.7762.211.00-A001 AN00749410
M8, 90 deg, A65-A110 65.7764.419.00-A001 AN00462947
M6, A140-A230 65.7764.535.00-A002 AN00730736
M6, 90 deg, A140-A230 65.7764.419.00-A002 AN00464393
M5, A290 65.7761.737.00-A001 AN00213170
Marconi 7-39
7-40 Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Service Instructions
8 Service Instructions
Digital Microwave Radio Systems from Marconi Communications GmbH are
maintenance-free.
If not otherwise agreed upon by contract, equipment repairs are limited to the
replacement of complete modules.
Provided that there are no other contractual regulations, please send defective
modules to the following address:

Central Europe Repair Management
Robert-Bosch-Str.10
01454 Radeberg
Germany
Repair Management
(during normal service hours)
Phone: + 49 3528 / 456 - 267 or – 583

Fax: +49 3528 / 456 534
Front Line Support (FLS)
Call Numbers:
(24h/7d)
Phone: 08000 / 6272664

Fax: 0800 / 1812275
Marconi 8-1
Service Instructions Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
8-2 Marconi
Systems
MDRS 155 S
Mounting Instructions
Release 5.1
05PHA00151AAM
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
D-71520 Backnang
Telefon (07191) 13-0 Telefax (07191) 13-3212


D-71520 Backnang

MDRS, MDMS and ServiceOn Access are
trademarks of
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation, Redmond.
C o n te n ts
T itle D o c u m e n t -n o .
g e n e r a l Ite m s C o n te n ts 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .0 0
S u p p le m e n ta r y m o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n s 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .0 1
M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H . W h ith o u t th e ir c o n s e n t
L is t o f to o ls 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .0 2
ID U T e c h n ic a l s p e c ific a tio n s a n d m e a s u r e m e n ts 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 0
it m a y n o t b e r e p r o d u c e d o r g iv e n t o th ir d p a r t ie s .
In s ta lla tio n in 1 9 in .- r a c k 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 1
C T h is d r a w in g is th e e x c lu s iv e p r o p e r ty o f
In s ta lla tio n in E T S I- r a c k 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 2
O v e r v ie w o f th e in te r fa c e s 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 3
V o lta g e s u p p ly 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 4
P in a s s ig n m e n t P A B X / P H O N E 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 5
P in a s s ig n m e n t E X T E O W 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 6
P in a s s ig n m e n t D S C 1 - 4 , E 1 , F 1 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 7
P in a s s ig n m e n t E D I 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 8
P in a s s ig n m e n t L A N , L M T 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 9
P in a s s ig n m e n t W S C 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 0
P in a s s ig n m e n t S T M - 1 - e le c tr ic a l in te r fa c e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 1
P in a s s ig n m e n t S T M - 1 - o p tic a l in te r fa c e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 2
In te g r a tio n in a T e le c o m m u n ic a tio n M a n a g e m e n t N e tw o r k 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 3
P in a s s ig n m e n t o f Q D 2 - b u s c o n n e c to r s 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 5
A d d itio n a l c a b le c o n n e c tio n s fo r p r o te c tio n s w itc h in g
C o n fig u r a tio n fo r c o c h a n n e l o p e r a tio n a n d m o d e 2 + 0 w ith X P IC 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 6
C o n fig u r a tio n fo r c o c h a n n e l o p e r a tio n a n d m o d e 1 + 1 w ith X P IC 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 7
C o n fig u a tio n fo r m o d e 1 + 1 w ith o u t X P IC 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 8
fü r d e n F a ll v o n S c h u tz r e c h ts a n m e ld u n g e n . J e d e V e r fü g u n g s -
C o n fig u r a tio n fo r m o d e 1 + 1 w ith L in e S w itc h , e le c tr ic a l in te r fa c e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 9

C A lle R e c h te b e i M a r c o n i C o m m u n ic a tio n s G m b H , a u c h
C o n fig u r a tio n fo r m o d e 1 + 1 w ith L in e S w itc h , o p tic a l in te r fa c e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .3 0

b e fu g n is , w ie K o p ie r - u n d W e ite r g a b e r e c h t, b e i u n s .
IF - c a b le C o n n e c tio n ID U - O D U 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .3 1
C a b le la b e llin g 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .3 2
O D U -S In te r fa c e s a n d te c h n ic a l s p e c ific a tio n s 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 0
M o u n tin g w ith s in g le - m o u n t 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 1
M o u n tin g w ith d o u b le - m o u n t 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 2
C o n fig u r a tio n w ith d o u b le - m o u n t a n d R F - s w itc h 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 3
C o n fig u r a tio n w ith c o u p le r 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 4
C o n fig u r a tio n fo r in tr u s io n w ith in te g r a te d c h a n n e l b r a n c h in g 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 5
O D U -L In te r fa c e s a n d te c h n ic a l s p e c ific a tio n s 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 6
S u p p o rt fo r m o d e 1 + 0 a n d s e p a ra te d a n te n n a 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 7
S u p p o r t fo r m o d e 2 + 0 /1 + 1 w ith c o u p le r a n d s e p a r a te d a n te n n a 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 8
O D U -L X In te r fa c e s a n d te c h n ic a l s p e c ific a tio n s 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .5 0
M o u n tin g fo r m o d e 1 + 0 w ith c o m p a c t o r s e p a r a te d a n te n n a 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .5 1
M o u n tin g w ith c o u p le r a n d c o m p a c t o r s e p a r a te d a n te n n a 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .5 2
M o u n tin g O D U - L X to th e c o u p le r 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .5 3
M o u n tin g w ith R a u - h o ld e r a n d s e p a r a te d a n te n n a 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .5 4
O D U 1 3 L E X c h a n n e l filte r m o u n tin g 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .5 5
A n te n n a s O v e r v ie w o f th e a n te n n a s 7 ,4 - 3 8 G H z 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .6 0
W a v e g u id e W a v e g u id e - o v e r v ie w 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .6 5
A c c e s s o r ie s fo r w a v e g u id e s 1 8 - 3 8 G H z 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .6 6
A c c e s s o r ie s fo r w a v e g u id e s 7 ,4 - 1 5 G H z 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .6 7
W a v e g u id e - d e h y d r a tio n 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .6 8
E a r th in g /lig h tn in g p r o te c tio n L ig h tn in g p r o te c tio n o n b u ild in g s w ith o u t L P S 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .7 0
L ig h tn in g p r o te c tio n o n b u ild in g s w ith L P S 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .7 1
E a r th in g O D U 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .7 2
A d d itio n a l lig h tn in g p r o te c tio n 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .7 3
M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 4 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
B e a rb .
. . . . D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d T a b le o f c o n te n ts
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
b N P I/L M 2 7 .0 4 .0 5 M s B la tt/S h e e t
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .0 0
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
Ä n d e ru n g D a tu m . B l.
Z u s ta n d N a m e
R e v is io n D a te
S ta tu s E r s . f. / R e p l. f. : E r s . d . / R e p l. b y :
This page has been left blank für editorial reasons.
05PHA00151AAM
S u p p le m e n ta r y m o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n s
D o c u m e n t T itle
A n te n n a s - g e n e r a l ite m s
1 5 .8 5 4 5 .7 4 1 .0 0 O v e r v ie w a n te n n a s , d im e n s io n illu s tr a tio n o f a n te n n a w ith b r a c k e t
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 4 0 .8 1 C le a r e n c e a n g e l fo r a n te n n a s
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 4 0 .8 9 A d ju s t o f a n te n n a s
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 4 0 .9 6 A lig n o f a n te n n a s
6 0 .8 9 4 0 .0 0 0 .0 1 M o u n tin g o f a n te n n a s
1 5 .8 5 6 4 .2 0 0 .2 2 M a r k e r fo r m o u n tin g o f a n te n n a
6 5 .7 7 8 7 .6 3 2 .0 0 S ta r tin g to r q u e
6 0 .8 5 3 6 .0 0 0 .0 9 S ta r tin g to r q u e fo r s c r e w e d fa s te n in g
C o m p a c t a n te n n a s
A A F O _ S E .0 5 1 C o m p a c t a n te n n a s 0 .2 6 /0 .3 /0 .6 m fo r A X R a n d M D R S 1 5 5 S R 5 .0
0 ,1 5 m le n s a n te n n a
1 5 .8 5 6 4 .2 0 0 .2 6 N K R S le n s a n te n n a
1 5 .8 5 6 4 .2 0 0 .2 7 M D R S in te g r a te d le n s a n te n n a
0 ,3 /0 ,6 m p a r a b o lic a n te n n a
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 3 9 .6 1 P A t 0 ,3 a n d 0 ,6 m
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 3 9 .3 7 P A t 0 ,6 m U H P
1 5 .8 5 6 4 .2 0 0 .1 0 C o m fo r ta b lie r m a s t m o u n tin g
A A S E _ IC S .0 2 2 M P a t 0 ,3 /0 ,6 m w ith M D R S 1 5 5 - 1 6 /1 2 8 M L Q A M S
A A S E _ IC S .0 3 4 R A U 2 in te g r . P A t 0 ,3 m a n d 0 ,6 m
1 ,2 m p a r a b o lic a n te n n a
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 3 9 .3 8 P A t 1 ,2 m U H P
1 5 .8 5 6 4 .2 0 0 .2 1 M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n p a r a b o lic a n te n n a 1 ,2 m

1 5 .8 5 6 4 .2 0 0 .2 4 N K R S P a t 1 ,2 m n e w
2 m p a r a b o lic a n te n n a
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 3 9 .7 3 P A t 2 ,0 m
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 3 9 .7 6 P A t 2 ,0 m w ith b r a c k e t d ia m e te r 1 1 4 m m
1 5 .8 5 6 4 .2 0 0 .1 7 N K R S P a t 2 ,0 m
3 m p a r a b o lic a n te n n a
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 3 9 .7 2 P A t 3 ,0 m
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 3 9 .7 7 P A t 3 ,0 m w ith b r a c k e t d ia m e te r 1 1 4 m m
1 5 .8 5 6 4 .2 0 0 .1 5 P A t 3 ,7 m
S h e ll a n te n n a
A A S E _ IC S .0 2 6 P E 0 ,6 m X P D
1 5 .8 5 6 4 .2 0 0 .2 3 P E 1 ,2 m X P D
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 3 9 .5 5 P E 2 ,0 m X P D
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 3 9 .7 4 P E 3 ,0 m X P D
1 5 .8 5 6 4 .2 0 0 .2 0 P E 4 ,0 m X P D
W a v e g u id e a n d c a b le
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .7 0 2 .0 0 F IM O - c la m p s
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .7 0 3 .0 0 W a v e g u id e - fla n g e c o n n e c tio n s
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 2 3 .7 0 M o u n tin g o f W G - c la m p s
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 2 3 .9 1 F le x ib le w a v e g u id e s
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 2 5 .0 7 G ro m m e t
1 4 .1 8 2 8 .0 3 0 .1 0 M o u n tin g A 1 8 5 , A 2 3 0 , A 2 9 0
W a v e g u id e - D e h y d r a tio n
A A S E _ IC S .0 2 0 L L U E 1 1 0 _ L L U E 3 1 0
A A S E _ IC S .0 2 1 d e h y d r a tio n o f w a v e g u id e A L F O R M a n d F L E X W E L L
s e q u e l to ta b le s e e s h e e t 2
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
B e a rb .
. . . . D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d S u p p le m e n ta r y m o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n s
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .0 1
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
Ä n d e ru n g D a tu m 0 2 B l.
05PHA00151AAM
s e q u e l to ta b le :
D o c u m e n t T itle
C o n n e c to r
6 0 .8 9 4 2 .0 3 9 .0 1 B N C - c o n n e c to r
6 0 .8 9 4 2 .0 3 9 .0 5 C x (1 ,0 /2 ,3 ) - c o n n e c to r
6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 4 9 .3 2 C x (1 ,6 /5 ,6 ) - c o n n e c to r
6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 4 9 .3 7 C o n n e c to r p u s h - p u ll c a b le 0 2 Y ( S t) C Y 0 ,4 5 /2 ,0
6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .0 3 C u t- c la m p c o n n e c to r
6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .0 5 D - S u b - c o n n e c to r ( s o ld e r in g te c h n iq u e )
6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 1 D - S u b - c o n n e c to r ( c u t- c la m p te c h n iq u e )
6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 2 R J 4 5
A A S E _ IC S .0 3 3 C o n n e c to r N -ty p e C P N 5 1 0 5 1 7 1 -0 0 1 3
E a r th in g
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .1 1 5 .2 6 G r o u n d in g c o n n e c tio n a t g a lv a n is e d p a r ts
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .1 1 5 .5 4 G r o u n d in g c o n n e c tio n a t A lfo r m - w a v e g u id e s
6 2 .1 0 1 7 .0 0 0 .5 0 G r o u n d in g c o n c e p t o f m ic o w a v e r a d io s y s te m s
A A S E _ IC S .0 1 9 F im o - e a r th in g
A A F O _ S E .0 4 7 E a r th in g k it fo r c o a x ia l c a b le a n d F L E X W E L L - w a v e g u id e
P o w e r d is tr ib u to r
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .8 0 2 .0 0 P o w e r d is tr ib u to r P o w e r B o x B 1 6
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 4 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
B e a rb .
. . . . D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d S u p p le m e n ta r y m o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n s
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .0 1
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 2
S V
Ä n d e ru n g D a tu m 0 2 B l.
05PHA00151AAM
Tools
Title Comment Ident. no.
Generaly tools plate shears Hahn & Kolb no. 53680 AN00809656
hammer drill Bosch SDS-plus 620W 870 rpm AN00807047
 2001 Marconi Communications GmbH. All rights reserved.
ear muffs Bilsom 717 AN00803803

hammmer DIN1041-200g AN00010157
hot air blower Bosch PHG 600 230V , 2000W , 50-600 cent. AN00809043
universal pliers 160mm VDE AN00801152
tweezers 4 mm - broad AN00801154
tweezers pointed AN00801176
vice bracket Hoffmann-Nr.97690-45mm AN00805529
edge cutter Erem 110 mm, AN00801176
ESD-mat Service ESD with wristband and cable AN00809881
Generaly measuring and Adapter BNC to banana jack AN00798518
test equipment rule 2m AN00801859
LC-Connector Tool unlocking device for opt. LC-connector 1400792-0011
rule 300mm steel AN00801857
multimeter Digital Voltcraft VC240 Solar AN00074014
water level Stabila-06901 Allround 250mm AN00778229
Stripping tool stripping tool Spinner BN 541320 1 / 4 “ AN00275056
stripping tool Spinner BN 541320 1 / 2 “ AN00275055
stripper 160mm VDE AN00806543
cable cutter Knipex 180mm VDE AN00806542
cable shear Knipex 9506 230mm VDE AN00807754
flat file 200mm Hieb 3 AN00801185
file haft 100mm AN00801490
filing brush 115 x 40mm AN00801961
shear 100mm long nickel-plate AN00055306
Insertion tools insertion tool LSA-PLUS AN00010652
insertion tool Quante-62397- 513 00 ID 3000 Comfort AN00275035
insertion tool Quante-79397- 512 00 SID-C/Evs 80Q AN00275036
insertion tool Reichle De Massari VS83 AN00275037
insertion tool RXS-C39407-A139-A12 AN00275038
Lettering device lettering device Brother P-Touch 1200
ticket-punch Rose-1495 6014195 AN00275073
Crimping tools crimping tool Lemosa-SAA 950-10440 , hexagonal, 3,7mm AN00123042
crimping tool Lemosa-Nr. SBA 950-0041 hexagonal, 4,72mm AN00809898
removing tool 6L.8949.006.00-A001 TAA.950-075 AN00030401
 2001 Marconi Communications GmbH. Alle Rechte vorbehalten.
crimping tool Suhner Nr. 75 Z-0-3-4 hexagonal, 5,4mm AN00855243

crimping tool Rosenberger 11W150-000 AN00051519
crimping insert Rosenberger-11W150-115 , hexagonal, 10,9mm 9100552-0019
crimping insert Rosenberger-11W150-450 , hexagonal, 4,5mm AN00123046
crimping tool D-SUB 6L-8955.007.00-A013 AN00058758
crimping tool 6-pol Telegärtner RJ12 AN00226927
crimping tool 8-pol Telegärtner RJ45 AN00095630
crimping tool Westfalia 1,5 – 6 mm² AN00793010
jointing clamp Klauke 6-50 mm² AN00838349
a 05 Datum / Date Name

Bearb.
Drawn 22.03.05 Messing
MDRS 155 S
Gepr.
Checked
Norm/STD
Abt./Dept.
b NPI/LM 21.04.05 Ms Blatt/Sheet
a
S V
NPI/LM 22.03.055Ms Tools 1
3303Bk Zustand Änderung Datum Nam 3 Bl.
Status Revision Date e Ers. f.: Repl. f: Ers. d.: Repl. by:
08_2001
05PHA00151AAM
Torque spanner torque spanner Rosenberger 32 W 006-016 60Ncm AN00275061
torque spanner 9x12 , 05-50Nm AN00275057
plug tool 9x12 , 13mm , 20Nm AN00275065
plug tool 9x12 , 16mm , 37Nm
plug tool 9x12 , 17mm , 37Nm AN00275066
torque spanner squrare ½“ 5-50Nm AN00275060

Bit- holder hex. ¼“ - square ½“
Bit hex.; 5x50 mm: 7,7 Nm AN00808536
Soldering system soldering system Weller WS 50 adjustable 55W AN00804357
solder-iron tip ET-B 2,4mm AN00804359
solder-iron tip ET-K 1,2mm AN00804360
safety soldering tissue 700 x 2700mm blue AN00806964
Combination wrench combination wrench SW 05,5mm AN00801376
combination wrench SW 06,0mm AN00801377
Tubular key tubular key MA 3-1 AN00295013
Screwdriver screwdriver cross slot PH Gr.1 AN00801361
screwdriver cross slot PH Gr.2 AN00801362
screwdriver cross slot PH Gr.3 AN00801363
screwdriver WIHA-224-1x2x100 cross slot PZ angular AN00808425
screwdriver WIHA-324-0x060 cross slot PZ isolated AN00808521
screwdriver Ballpoint tip hex. SW 2,5mm AN00806161
screwdriver DIN8060-VDE 0,4x2,5x075 AN00805455

screwdriver Torx 10 AN00807574
allen key SW 8 , 350 long 9100558-0013
allen key set DIN911-SW 2-10mm nickel-plated AN00801408

Bearb.
MDRS 155 S
Gepr.
Checked
Norm/STD
Abt./Dept.
a
S V
08_2001
05PHA00151AAM
Special borer borer FZUB 12x50 AN00809224
equipment to drive in FZUE 12 AN00809233
Wire-wrap technique wire-wrap tool Typ 14HP-1C, Manuel
guide bush (1),(2) Cooper Nr. 522212 AN00807231
guide bush (3) Cooper Nr. 522204

wire-wrap insert (1) Cooper Nr. 522211 AN00809611
wire-wrap insert (2) Cooper Nr. 990646 AN00807546
wire-wrap insert (3) Cooper Nr. 522203
Terminating tools for ALFORM - waveguide
A75 A82/15 A110 A140 A185 A230 A290

mandrel AN00372519 AN00196763 AN00191239 AN00576166 AN00832470 AN00816159
enlarge punch AN00779094
expanding device AN00370371 AN0019240 AN00576165 AN00832469 AN00816158
clamping piece AN00370373 AN00370374 - - - - -
face milling
AN00373527 AN00191237 AN00576163 AN00832467 AN00816156
fixture
cutter
AN00373528 AN00368332 AN00770652
(in exchange)
broaching fixture AN00368327 AN00191236 AN00576162 AN00832466 AN00816155
broach AN00368329 AN00368330 AN00191235 AN00311679

saw blade
AN00770651 AN00826844
(in exchange)
Instep log AN00191420 AN00191419
twisting tool-kit AN00373997 AN00373998 AN00196762 AN00191238 AN00576164 AN00832468 AN00816157
transport case AN00191655 AN00191888 AN00191651 AN00194763 AN00385534 AN00463904 AN00463905

combination
- - - - 17 mm
wrench
flat file x
saw
300 mm 146 mm
for light metal
scraper x
brush x
sharpening
x
sponge
cleaning cloth x
spirit x
lubricating oil x

Bearb.
MDRS 155 S
Gepr.
Checked
Norm/STD
Abt./Dept.
a
S V
08_2001
05PHA00151AAM
A s -d e liv e r e d s ta te :
In s ta lla tio n in 1 9 - in c h - r a c k s In s ta lla tio n in E T S I - r a c k s
4 3 5
2 4 0
2 2 8
2 4 0
2 2 8
4 6 5 5 1 5
4 8 3 5 3 5
M o u n tin g b ra c k e ts c a n b e m o v e d
fo rw a rd b y 1 2 m m
h e ig h t: 6 6 ,7 5 m m (1 ,5 U ) (a d d . p r o te c tio n fo r o p t. in te rfa c e -S T M 1 )
a n d w ill u s e d a fte r c o rre s p o n d in g r e tr o fit
to fix in g in a 1 9 in .- o r E T S I-ra c k .
T e c h n ic a l s p e c ific a tio n s ( s e e a ls o d e s c r ip tio n c h a p te r 6 ) :
v o lta g e r a n g e - 3 6 V D C ..... - 7 2 V D C
w ith O D U - S w ith O D U - L
m a x . p o w e r (1 + 0 /1 + 1 ) 9 0 W / 1 8 0 W 9 0 W / 1 8 0 W
fu s e 4 A , s lo w o r 6 A , s lo w
a m b ie n t te m p e r a tu r e lim it ( o p e r a tio n ) - 5 c e n t. .... + 4 5 c e n t. ( E T S 3 0 0 0 1 9 - 1 - 3 C la s s 3 .2 )
p ro te c tio n c la s s IP 2 0 ( IE C 6 0 5 2 9 )
e le c tr ic a l s a fe ty E N 6 0 9 5 0
e m is s io n E N 3 0 1 4 8 9 -0 1 / E N 3 0 1 4 8 9 -0 4 / E N 5 5 0 2 2 c la s s B
w e ig h t ( w ith o u t / w ith E O W ) 4 ,5 k p / 4 ,8 k p
M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g ID U
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d T e c h n ic a l s p e c ific a tio n s a n d
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
m e a s u re m e n ts
. . . . B la tt/S h e e t
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 0
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
r a c k w id th : 6 0 0 m m
p itc h ( h e ig h t u n it ) :
2 H U = 8 9 m m
1
d is tr ib u to r : P o w e r B o x B 1 6
6 6 m m
M D R S 1 5 5 S
5
P r e fe r r e d c a b lin g a r e a
M D R S 1 5 5 S
p itc h ( h e ig h t u n it ) :
M D R S 1 5 5 S
2 H U = 8 9 m m
6 6 m m
1 0
M D R S 1 5 5 S
F ix in g o f th e ID U
w ith
4 x le n s h e a d s c r e w M 6 x 1 6 T o rx
1 5 a n d
4 x s p e c ia l n u t M 6
s iz e o f T o r x : T 3 0
2 0
2 5
T h e p r e f e r r e d c a b lin g a r e a s h o u ld lie b e t w e e n t h e t w o In d d o r U n it s ( ID U ) .
T h e c a b le s a r e th e n r o u te d to th e le ft a n d r ig h t in to t h e r a c k w ir in g a r e a .
F o r c o o lin g p u r p o s e s , a d d itio n a l s p a c e is n o t r e q u ir e d b e tw e e n th e In d o o r U n its .
M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d In s ta lla tio n in 1 9 in .- r a c k
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 1
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
r a c k w id th : 6 0 0 m m
d is tr ib u to r : P o w e r B o x B 1 6
M D R S 1 5 5 S (1 )
( s y s te m u n it) : ( s y s te m u n it) :
4 S U = 1 0 0 m m 4 S U = 1 0 0 m m
6 6 m m
p itc h
M D R S 1 5 5 S (2 )
6 6 m m
p itc h
M D R S 1 5 5 S (3 )
M D R S 1 5 5 S (4 )
F ix in g o f th e ID U
w ith
4 x le n s h e a d s c r e w M 6 x 1 6 T o rx
a n d
4 x s p e c ia l n u t M 6
s iz e o f T o r x : T 3 0
T h e p r e f e r r e d c a b lin g a r e a s h o u ld lie b e t w e e n t h e t w o In d d o r U n it s ( ID U ) .
T h e c a b le s a r e th e n r o u te d to th e le ft a n d r ig h t in to t h e r a c k w ir in g a r e a .
F o r c o o lin g p u r p o s e s , a d d itio n a l s p a c e is n o t r e q u ir e d b e tw e e n th e In d o o r U n its .
M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d In s ta lla tio n in E T S I- r a c k
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 2
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
A tte n tio n : T h e O D U - L a n d O D U - L X is o n ly u s e a b le w ith th e ID U 1 5 5 - X X X L S ( s e e la b e l o f ty p e ) .

ID U1 5 5 - 1 6 S O D U x x S
ID U 1 5 5 - 1 2 8 S O D U x x - 1 2 8 N O D U x x S
ID U 1 5 5 - 1 6 L S O D U x x S O D U x x L X
ID U 1 5 5 - 1 2 8 L S O D U x x - 1 2 8 N O D U x x S O D U x x L X O D U x x L
In te rfa c e
e x te r n a l in - /
o u tp u t a n d
( o p tio n a l)
E O W - C o n n e c tio n s
In te rfa c e s In te rfa c e ( E D I- 8 p o l. R J 4 5 /fe m a le ; In te rfa c e
X P IC X P IC E X T E O W /P A B X /P H O N E - p o w e r s u p p ly F a n -
( C x - 1 ,0 /2 ,3 - fe m a le ) 8 - p o le R J 4 5 /fe m a le 6 p o l. R J 4 5 /fe m a le ) ( 3 p o l.- S u b - D /m a le ) m o d u le
B A T D C 4 8 V 3 ,5 A
E O W E D I 1 E D I 2 E X T E O W P A B X P H O N E
+ /G N D
M D R S 1 5 5 S F A N
D S C 4 D S C 3
D S C 2 F 1 - R E 1 - R X P IC 2 B U S Y
X P IC 1 L W L Q D 2
A D R L A S E R C L A S S 1
X P IC 1 to IE C 6 0 0 2 5 -1 /2 0 0 1
IF
O P 1
1 + 0
P R
S T M -1
B U S 1 B U S 2 O P T C M I
S E R V
D C
O D U
R P S X P IC 3
-4 8 V
A tte n tio n ! D S C 1 F 1 -L E 1 -L W S C L M T L A N
R P S T X
R P S R X
ID U
C h e c k O D U -T y p e
2
6
5
4
3
b e fo r e c o n n e c tin g IF c a b le S T M -1
O P
O P
O P
O P
O P
L E D
In te rfa c e C o d e s w itc h In te rfa c e s In te rfa c e s In te rfa c e
C o a x ia l c a b le fo r o p e r a tin g s e r v ic e c h a n n e ls s ig n a lin g b u s S T M -1
to O D U s y s te m a n d N e tw o rk - ( M in i- S u b - D / o p tic a l - B 3 5 0 0 /fe m a le
( N - c o n n e c to r /fe m a le ) m a n a g e m e n t 1 - m a le R P S e le c tr ic a l - 1 ,6 /5 ,6 / fe m a le
( 8 p o l.- R J 4 5 /fe m a le ) 2 - fe m a le ) (C x -1 ,0 /1 ,2 ;
fe m a le )
M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d O v e r v ie w o f th e in te r fa c e s
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 3
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
to D C - d is tr ib u to r
B A T D C 4 8 V 3 ,5 A
+ /G N D
M D R S 1 5 5 S
F A N
D S C 4 D S C 3
D S C 2 B U S Y
X P IC 1 F 1 - R E 1 - R X P IC 2 L W L Q D 2
X P IC 1 to IE C 6 0 0 2 5 -1 /2 0 0 1
IF
O P 1
1 + 0
P R
S T M -1
S E R V
D C
O D U
R P S X P IC 3
-4 8 V
R P S T X
R P S R X
ID U
2
6
5
4
3
O P
O P
O P
O P
O P
p la c k in g s id e s o ld e r in g s id e fu s e s
4 A , s lo w
A 1
B U /-U B 2 . d .c . s u p p ly ( r e d u n d a n t)
A 2
B U /-U B
1 . d .c . s u p p ly
B N /+ U B 1 1
B N /+ U B 1 1
A 3
3
D -S U B -F 0 3 M 3 /L K P L (C P N 5 1 0 2 5 1 5 -0 0 1 6 ) 1 1 2 Y (S t)C H 2 x 1 ,4 /2 ,2
o r (A N 0 0 0 1 3 1 7 3 )
c o n fig u r a te d c a b le ( C P N 1 3 0 2 9 4 4 - 0 0 1 6 )
( c o n s is t o f 2 c a b le s , l = 3 m , a n d th e fe m a le c o n n e c to r )
M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .0 5 M A L ( D - S U B /L )
M D R S 1 5 5 S m ic r o w a v e r a d io s y s te m s w o r k w ith a - 4 8 V D C ± 2 5 % / - 6 0 V D C ± 2 0 % o p e r a tin g v o lta g e .

T h e O u td o o r U n it is p o w e r e d v ia th e c o a x ia l c o n n e c tin g c a b le . T h is c o n n e c tio n is e le c tr o n ic a lly p r o te c te d a g a in s t s h o r t- c ir c u its .
C A U T IO N :
T h is e q u ip m e n t is d e s ig n e d to p e r m it th e c o n n e c tio n o f th e e a r th e d c o n d u c to r o f th e d .c . s u p p ly c ir c u it to th e e a r th in g c o n d u c to r a t
th
e e q u ip m e n t.
T h is e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e c o n n e c te d to d ir e c tly to th e d .c . s u p p ly s y s te m e a r th in g e le c tr o d e c o n d u c to r o r to a b o n d in g ju m p e r fr o m a n
e a r th in g te r m in a l b a r o r b u s to w h ic h th e d .c . s u p p ly s y s te m e a r th in g e le c tr o d e c o n d u c to r is c o n n e c te d .
T h is e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e lo c a te d in th e s a m e im m e d ia te a r e a (s u c h a s , a d ja c e n t c a b in e ts ) a s a n y o th e r e q u ip m e n t th a t h a s a c o n n e c tio n
b e tw e e n th e e a r th e d c o n d u c to r o f th e s a m e d .c . s u p p ly c ir c u it a n d th e e a r th in g c o n d u c to r, a n d a ls o th e p o in t o f e a r th in g o f th e d .c . s y s te m .
T he d .c . s y s te m s h a ll n o t b e e a r th e d e ls e w h e r e . T h e d . c . s u p p ly s o u r c e is to b e lo c a te d w ith in th e s a m e p r e m is e s a s th e e q u ip m e n t.
S w itc h in g o r d is c o n n e c tin g d e v ic e s s h a ll n o t b e in th e e a r th e d c ir c u it c o n d u c to r b e tw e e n th e d .c . s o u r c e a n d th e p o in t o f c o n n e c tio n o f th e
e a r th in g e le c tr o d e c o n d u c to r .
In d o o r U n it c o n n e c tin g c a b le s m a y b e p lu g g e d in o r p u lle d o u t o n ly w ith th e p o w e r s u p p ly s w itc h e d o ff. E x c e p tio n : D a ta lin e s .

T h e s y s te m c a b le b e tw e e n th e O u td o o r U n it a n d In d o o r U n it m a y b e p lu g g e d in o r p u lle d o u t o n ly w ith th e In d o o r U n it s w itc h e d o ff.
B e fo re s w itc h in g o n th e p o w e r s u p p ly , p le a s e v e r ify th a t th e o p e ra t in g v o lta g e a n d

s u p p ly v o lta g e a r e id e n t ic a l a n d th e p o la r ity is c o rre c t. B e fo re s w itc h in g o n th e
! o p e r a tin g v o lta g e , p le a s e e n s u re th a t th e c o a x ia l c a b le b e tw e e n th e In d o o r a n d
O u td o o r U n it h a s b e e n c o n n e c te d to b o th e n d s a n d th a t th e c o n n e c to r o n th e O D U
h a s b e e n tig h te n e d w ith a to rq u e o f 1 0 0 ± 1 0 N c m o r s e c u re d b y m e a n s o f a
h e a t-s h r in k in g tu b e !
M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 4 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d V o lta g e s u p p ly
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 4
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
R e m o te te le p h o n e / P S T N
M D R S 1 5 5 S
D ir e c tio n A D ir e c tio n B
P A B X /P H O N E
3 2
P A B X
C a b le e n tr y s id e P in W ir e
d e p ic te d
1 b la c k
2 g re e n
1 6 3 re d 2 a L a
4 w h ite 1 a L b
5 b lu e
6 o ra n g e
3 2 D is tr ib u to r
P H O N E
C a b le e n tr y s id e P in W ir e
d e p ic te d
1 b la c k
2 g re e n
1 6 3 re d 2 a L a
4 w h ite 1 a L b
5 b lu e
6 o ra n g e
3 2
3 2
C o lo r c o d e : L i- 0 2 Y S ( C ) H 4 x 2 x ( 7 x 0 ,1 7 )
P a ir C o n d u c to r c o lo r s
n o . a - w ir e b - w ir e
1 w h ite b lu e
2 re d o ra n g e
P A B X /P H O N E c o n n e c to r 3 b la c k g re e n
R J 4 5 6 - p in , s h ie ld e d ( A N 0 0 2 2 6 9 2 6 ) 4 y e llo w b ro w n
b e n d p r o te c tio n fo r R J 4 5 6 - p in ( A N 2 2 6 9 2 8 )
M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n s 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 2 M A L ( R J 4 5 ) L i- 0 2 Y S ( C ) H 4 x 2 x ( 7 x 0 ,1 7 )
3 2 (A N 0 0 0 7 8 7 0 7 )
M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5
ID U
D a tu m /D a te N a m e
B e a rb .
. . . . D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d P in a s s ig n m e n t
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
P A B X /P h o n e
A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 5
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
V o ic e tr a n s m is s io n c h a n n e l b r a n c h e d to fu r th e r n e tw o r k ( a n a lo g )
M D R S 1 5 5 S
S T M 1 R a d io s id e
D ir e c tio n A D ir e c tio n B
lin e s id e
E X T E O W
3 2
a n a lo g
0 .3 ...3 .4 k H z
E X T E O W
D ir e c tio n C D ir e c tio n D
M D R S 1 5 5 ´S e .g .
N K R S
X 3 3
1
6
2
7
2 a 3
2 b 8
3 a 4
3 b 9
5
e .g .
o r D E -2 te r m . s e t F 1 ,F A
X 2
2 a 1
2 b 6
2
7
3 a 3
3 b 8
4
9
5
o r
E X T E O W E X T E O W
C a b le e n tr y s id e P in S ig n a l W ir e P in S ig n a l W ir e C a b le e n tr y s id e
d e p ic te d d e p ic te d
1 T a b la c k 3 a 2 a 1 T a re d
2 T b g re e n 3 b 2 b 2 T b o ra n g e
1 6 3 - - 3 - - 1 6
4 - - 4 - -
5 R a re d 2 a 3 a 5 R a b la c k
6 R b o ra n g e 2 b 3 b 6 R b g re e n
3 2
3 2
1 w h ite b lu e
2 re d o ra n g e
E X T E O W c o n n e c to r 3 b la c k g re e n
R J 1 2 6 - p in , s h ie ld e d ( A N 0 0 2 2 6 9 2 6 )
A n ti- k in k p r o te c tio n fo r R J 1 2 6 - p in ( A N 0 0 2 2 6 9 2 8 ) 4 y e llo w b ro w n
L i- 0 2 Y S ( C ) H 4 x 2 x ( 7 x 0 ,1 7 )
3 2 (A N 0 0 0 7 8 7 0 7 )
M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
E X T E O W
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 6
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h a n n e ls
L in e s id e ( S T M 1 ) R a d io s id e
in /o u t in /o u t 6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h .
6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h . E 1 3 2 E 1 -L E 1 -R 3 2
6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h . F 1 in /o u t in /o u t
3 2 F 1 -L F 1 -R 3 2 6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h .
in /o u t 6 4 k b it/s s e r v ic e c h .
D S C 1 3 2
D S C 2 3 2
D S C 3 3 2
D S C 4 3 2
D is tr ib u to r ( e .g . L S A P lu s )
e .g .
D E - 2 te r m in . s e t Q D 2 ,F A
X 4 o . X 5
N K R S X 5 1 -5 8
1 a 1
1 b 6
2
7
3 a 3
3 b 8
4
9
E 1 -L D S C 1 E 1 -L D S C 1
E 1 -R D S C 2 E 1 -R D S C 2
F 1 -L D S C 3 F 1 -L D S C 3
F 1 -R D S C 4 F 1 -R D S C 4
1 T a b la c k 3 a 1 a 1 T a w h ite
2 T b g re e n 3 b 1 b 2 T b b lu e
1 8 3 G r o u n d re d 2 a 2 a 3 G r o u n d re d 1 8
4 R a w h ite 1 a 3 a 4 R a b la c k
5 R b b lu e 1 b 3 b 5 R b g re e n
6 G r o u n d o ra n g e 2 b 2 b 6 G r o u n d o ra n g e
7 fre e y e llo w 7 fre e y e llo w
8 fre e b ro w n 3 2 8 fre e b ro w n
3 2
D S C 1 -4 ,E 1 -L ,E 1 -R ,F 1 -L ,F 1 -R c o n n e c to r 1 w h ite b lu e
R J 4 5 8 - p in , s h ie ld e d ( A N 0 0 1 1 5 4 0 7 ) 2 re d o ra n g e
3 b la c k g re e n
N K R S X 5 1 -X 5 8 a n d D E 2 X 4 -X 5 c o n n e c to r 4 y e llo w b ro w n
D -S U B -F 0 9 M 3 /S (A N 0 0 0 5 5 9 0 8 )
M o u n tin g In s tr u c tio n s 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 2 M A L (R J 4 5 ) L i- 0 2 Y S ( C ) H 4 x 2 x ( 7 x 0 ,1 7 )
3 2 (A N 0 0 0 7 8 7 0 7 )
M o u n tin g In s tr u c tio n s 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 1 M A L (D -S U B C o n n e c to r)
M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
D S C 1 -4 , E 1 , F 1
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 7
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
D ig . s ig n a llin g o u tp u ts ( T T L )
C u s to m e r - s id e r e la y
5 V D C ; m a x . 2 0 m A
D A 1 3 a
A - A la r m
0 = F a ilu r e
a e x te r n a l: + 5 V D C + /- 1 0 %
D A 2 3 b
B - A la r m
1 = F a ilu r e
b
G N D 2 a
E D I 1 O p tio n a l:
If n o e x te rn a l 5 V D C
C a b le e n tr y s id e fre e is a v a ila b le a n d
P in S ig n a l D A 3 is n 't n e e d e d ,
d e p ic te d D A 3 1 a
1 O u tp u t 1 3 a X Q I s ta tic c o n fig u r a te
2 O u tp u t 2 3 b o n " lo g ic 1 "
1 8 D ig . s ig n a llin g in p u ts ( T T L ) (s e e o p e r a to r m a n u a l) .
3 G ro u n d 2 a
1 b M E 1
4 O u tp u t 3 1 a
2 b G N D
5 In p u t 1 1 b
4 a M E 2
6 G ro u n d 2 b
7 In p u t 2 4 a
4 b M E 3
8 In p u t 3 4 b
5 6 3 2
w ir e w r a p - c a b le
3 2
1 3 0 1 6 7 0 -0 0 5 9 - 6 ,0 m
D ig . s ig n a llin g in p u ts ( T T L )
3 a M E 4
2 a G N D
E D I 2 3 b M E 5
1 a M E 6
C a b le e n tr y s id e P in S ig n a l
d e p ic te d
1 In p u t 4 3 a 1 b M E 7
2 In p u t 5 3 b
1 8 3 G ro u n d 2 b M E 8
2 a
4 In p u t 6 1 a
5 In p u t 7 1 b 4 a M E 9
6 In p u t 8 2 b
7 In p u t 9 4 a 4 b M E 1 0
8 In p u t 1 0 4 b
3 2 5 6
w ir e w r a p - c a b le
3 2
1 3 0 1 6 7 0 -0 0 5 9 - 6 ,0 m
C o lo r c o d e 0 2 Y S (S t)C H 4 x 2 x 0 ,4 C o lo r c o d e : L i- 0 2 Y S ( C ) H 4 x 2 x ( 7 x 0 ,1 7 )
P a ir C o n d u c to r c o lo r s P a ir C o n d u c to r c o lo r s
n o . a - w ir e b - w ir e n o . a - w ir e b - w ir e
1 w h ite b ro w n 1 w h ite b lu e
2 g re e n y e llo w 2 re d o ra n g e
3 g re y p in k 3
E D I 1 , E D I 2 c o n n e c to rs b la c k g re e n
4 b lu e re d
R J 4 5 8 - p in , s h ie ld e d ( A N 0 0 1 1 5 4 0 7 ) 4 y e llo w b ro w n
M o u n tin g In s tr u c tio n s 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 2 M A L ( R J 4 5 ) 0 2 Y S (S t)C H 4 x 2 x 0 ,4
5 6 L i- 0 2 Y S ( C ) H 4 x 2 x ( 7 x 0 ,1 7 )
(C P N 1 3 0 2 4 2 6 -0 0 3 9 ) 3 2 (A N 0 0 0 7 8 7 0 7 )
M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
E D I
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 8
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
L A N L A N H u b
1 T D + b la c k 3 a 3 a 1 T D + b la c k
1 8
2
3
T D
R D +
- g re e n
re d
3 b
2 a
1 :1 3 b
2 a
2
3
T D
R D +
- g re e n
re d 1 8
4 fre e b lu e 4 fre e b lu e
5 fre e w h ite 5 fre e w h ite

6 R D - o ra n g e 2 b 2 b 6 R D - o ra n g e
7 fre e y e llo w
7 fre e y e llo w
8 fre e b ro w n 3 2 8 fre e b ro w n
1 3 0 1 6 8 0 -0 0 2 4 - 0 ,5 m
1 3 0 1 6 8 0 -0 0 3 2 - 1 ,0 m
1 3 0 1 6 8 0 -0 0 4 0 - 2 ,0 m
1 3 0 1 6 8 0 -0 0 5 7 - 3 ,0 m
A N 0 0 2 1 4 5 1 1 - 5 ,0 m
A N 0 0 2 1 4 5 1 2 -1 0 ,0 m
1 3 0 1 6 8 0 -0 0 6 5 -1 5 ,0 m
L A N L A N R o u te r
1 T D + b la c k 3 a 2 a 1 R D + re d
1 8
2
3
T D
R D +
- g re e n
re d
3 b
2 a
X 2 b
3 a
2
3
R D
T D +
- o ra n g e
b la c k 1 8
4 fre e b lu e 4 fre e y e llo w
5 fre e w h ite 5 fre e b ro w n
6 R D - o ra n g e 2 b 3 b 6 T D - g re e n
7 fre e y e llo w 7 fre e b lu e
8 fre e b ro w n 3 2 8 fre e w h ite
1 3 0 3 0 0 8 - 0 0 1 7 - 0 ,5 m
1 3 0 3 0 0 8 - 0 0 2 5 - 1 ,0 m
1 3 0 3 0 0 8 - 0 0 3 3 - 2 ,0 m
1 3 0 3 0 0 8 - 0 0 4 1 - 3 ,0 m
1 3 0 3 0 0 8 - 0 0 5 8 - 5 ,0 m
1 3 0 3 0 0 8 - 0 0 6 6 -1 0 ,0 m
1 3 0 3 0 0 8 - 0 0 7 4 -1 5 ,0 m
S e r v ic e P C
L M T
C a b le e n tr y s id e P in S ig n a l W ir e
d e p ic te d 1
1 T X b la c k 3 a 6
2 fre e g re e n 3 a 2
1 8 3 G ro u n d re d 2 a 7
4 fre e w h ite 1 b 3
5 R X b lu e 1 b 8
6 G ro u n d o ra n g e 2 a 4
7 fre e y e llo w 9
8 fre e b ro w n 3 2 5
A d a p te r L M T
c a b le le n g t h : 2 ,5 m (A N 0 0 2 3 2 0 9 2 )
L A N , L M T c o n n e c to r 1 w h ite b lu e
R J 4 5 8 - p in , s h ie ld e d ( A N 0 0 1 1 5 4 0 7 ) 2 re d o ra n g e
S e r v ic e P C c o n n e c to r 3 b la c k g re e n
D -S U B -F 0 9 M 3 /S (A N 0 0 0 5 5 9 0 8 ) 4 y e llo w b ro w n
M o u n tin g In s tr u c tio n s 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 2 M A L (R J 4 5 )
L i- 0 2 Y S ( C ) H 4 x 2 x ( 7 x 0 ,1 7 )
M o u n tin g In s tr u c tio n s 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 1 M A L (D -S U B c o n n e c to r) 3 2 (A N 0 0 0 7 8 7 0 7 )
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
L A N , L M T
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .1 9
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
2 ,0 4 8 M b it/s ( W a y S id e C h a n n e l)
in /o u t
S O H W S C 3 2 4 6 2 ,0 4 8 M b it/s
W S C
C a b le e n tr y s id e P in S ig n a l W ir e
d e p ic te d
1 T a b la c k 3 a 3 2
2 T b g re e n 3 b
1 8 3 G r o u n d re d
4 R a w h ite 1 a
5 R b b lu e 1 b c a b le V B L - R J 4 5 1 2 .1 7 0 2 .5 4 7 - A ... C o lo r c o d e : L i- 0 2 Y S ( C ) H 4 x 2 x ( 7 x 0 ,1 7 )
6 G r o u n d o ra n g e C o n d u c to r c o lo r s
v e r s io n C P N le n g th P a ir
7 fre e y e llo w
8 fre e b ro w n A 0 0 1 1 3 0 1 6 7 0 -0 0 5 9 6 ,0 m
1 w h ite b lu e
2 re d o ra n g e
3 b la c k g re e n
3 2
4 y e llo w b ro w n
L i- 0 2 Y S ( C ) H 4 x 2 x ( 7 x 0 ,1 7 )
3 2 (A N 0 0 0 7 8 7 0 7 )
to th e d is tr ib u to r
W S C
P in S ig n a l W ir e
C a b le e n tr y s id e
d e p ic te d 1 T a 4 6
b la c k 1 a C o lo r c o d e 0 2 Y S (S t)C H 2 x 2 x 0 ,4
2 T b g re e n 1 b
1 8 3 G r o u n d re d
4 R a c a b le V B L - W A N E 1 1 2 .1 7 0 2 .4 9 8 - A ... n o . a - w ir e b - w ir e
w h ite 2 a
5 R b b lu e 2 b v e rs . Id .-n o . le n g th 1 w h ite b ro w n
6 G r o u n d o ra n g e 2 g re e n y e llo w
7 fre e y e llo w A 0 0 1 A N 0 0 2 3 9 3 7 9 1 0 ,0 0 m
8 fre e A 0 0 2 A N 0 0 2 3 9 3 8 0 1 5 ,0 0 m
b ro w n
A 0 0 3 A N 0 0 2 3 9 3 8 1 2 0 ,0 0 m
A 0 0 4 A N 0 0 2 3 9 3 8 2 2 5 ,0 0 m
A 0 0 5 A N 0 0 2 3 9 2 8 3 3 0 ,0 0 m 0 2 Y S (S t)C H 2 x 2 x 0 ,4
4 6
4 6 A 0 0 6 A N 0 0 2 7 2 8 3 0 5 ,0 0 m (A N 0 0 2 3 8 6 0 9 )
to th e d is tr ib u to r
W S C c o n n e c to r
R J 4 5 8 - p in , s h ie ld e d ( A N 0 0 1 1 5 4 0 7 )
M o u n tin g In s tr u c tio n s 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 2
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5
ID U
B e a rb .
. . . . D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g
. . . . G e p rü ft
. . . .
W S C
N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 0
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
S T M 1
L A S E R C L A S S 1
to IE C 6 0 8 2 5 -1 /2 0 0 1
O P T C M I
S T M 1 s ig n a l in p u t
D S 1 5 5
S T M 1 9 c o a x ia l d is tr ib u to r
C o n n e c to r o n c o a x ia l d is tr ib u to r :
P lu g c o n n e c to r , fe m a le , s tr a ig h t ( A N 0 0 0 3 8 9 0 1 )
o r
S T M 1 s ig n a l o u tp u t P lu g c o n n e c to r , fe m a le , a n g le ( A N 0 0 0 3 0 4 1 4 )
D S 1 5 5
S T M 1 9 c o a x ia l d is tr ib u to r
c o a x ia l- c o n n e c to r , a n g le C R /P u s h P u ll 1 ,6 /5 ,6 ( m a le )
(A N 0 0 0 3 0 4 5 6 )
o r
c o a x ia l c o n n e c to r , a n g le C R /s c r e w 1 ,6 /5 ,6 ( m a le )
(A N 0 0 0 7 8 6 4 6 )
c o a x .- c a b le w ith P u s h - P u ll- r ig h t- a n g le p lu g 1 ,6 /5 ,6 c o a x .- c a b le w ith s c r e w - r ig h t- a n g le p lu g 1 ,6 /5 ,6

1 2 .1 7 0 2 .4 8 4 .0 0 -... 1 2 .1 7 0 2 .4 8 5 .0 0 -...
v e rs . Id . -n o . le n g th o f c a b le v e rs . Id .-n o . le n g th o f c a b le
A 0 0 1 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 6 2 0 ,6 m A 0 0 1 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 7 0 0 ,6 m
A 0 0 2 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 6 3 1 ,0 m A 0 0 2 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 7 1 1 ,0 m
A 0 0 3 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 6 4 1 ,5 m A 0 0 3 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 7 2 1 ,5 m
A 0 0 4 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 6 5 2 ,0 m A 0 0 4 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 7 3 2 ,0 m
A 0 0 5 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 6 6 2 ,5 m A 0 0 5 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 7 4 2 ,5 m
A 0 0 6 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 6 7 3 ,0 m A 0 0 6 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 7 5 3 ,0 m
A 0 0 7 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 6 8 6 ,0 m A 0 0 7 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 7 7 6 ,0 m
A 0 0 8 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 6 9 1 0 ,0 m A 0 0 8 A N 0 0 2 2 0 7 7 8 1 0 ,0 m
M o u n tin g In s tr u c tio n s 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 4 9 .3 7 M A L 0 2 Y (S t)C Y 0 ,4 5 /2 ,0

9 (A N 0 0 0 2 4 7 9 5 )
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5
ID U
B e a rb .
. . . . D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g
. . . . G e p rü ft
. . . .
S T M 1 - e le c tr ic a l in te r fa c e
N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 1
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
S T M 1 c o n n e c tio n , o p tic a l
U s e o f tr a n s m it d io d e s ( s h o r t h a u l) w ith a T x le v e l o f - 8 to - 1 5 d B m .
In p u t le v e l o f r e c e iv e d io d e s : - 2 8 d B m .
T h is r e s u lts in a m a x im u m p e r m is s ib le lin e a tte n u a tio n o f a p p r o x . 1 3 d B .
N e w o p tic a l c a b le s u s e d b y M a r c o n i h a v e a lin e a tte n u a tio n o f 0 .4 d B /k m a t a w a v e le n g th o f 1 3 0 0 n m .

L o s s p e r c o n n e c to r: < 1 d B
T h is r e s u lts in a th e o re tic a l lin e le n g th o f a p p r o x . 2 0 k m . P le a s e n o te th a t e a c h a d d itio n a l c o n n e c to r a n d s p lic e jo in t

w ill le a d to a d d itio n a l a tte n u a tio n .
C a u tio n !
U s e o f c o n tr o ls o r a d ju s tm e n ts
o r p e rfo rm a n c e o f p ro c e d u r e s
D S 1 5 5
o th e r th a n th o s e s p e c ifie d h e r e in
m a y r e s u lt in h a z a rd o u s r a d ia tio n
e x p o s u re .
F O c a b le
S T M -1 In te rfa c e
M a in te n a n c e a n d r e p a ir w o r k s m a y o n ly b e p e r fo r m e d b y q u a lifie d s e r v ic e p e r s o n n e l.
T h e la s e r s o u r c e e m its in v is ib le la s e r r a d ia tio n . L a s e r b e a m s m a y le a d to ir r e p a r a b le e y e
in ju r ie s . N e v e r lo o k in to a la s e r s o u r c e o r o n to th e c o n n e c to r s u r fa c e o f F O c a b le s
c o n n e c te d , n o t e v e n w ith o p tic a l in s tr u m e n ts .
P a tc h C a b le
A d a p te r
L C D u p le x S C -P C
}
o p tic a l M o d u l 1 4 0 0 7 8 5 -0 0 1 0
S C -P C to S C -P C A N 0 0 5 4 2 4 5 8
M D R S 1 5 5 S o r S C -P C to D IN A N 0 0 0 3 7 7 7 1
o r S C -P C to E 2 0 0 0 A N 0 0 0 6 4 9 2 9
S C -A P C H R
}
L C D u p le x
1 4 0 0 7 8 6 -0 0 1 9
S C -A P C to S C -A P C H R A N 0 0 0 2 2 4 7 6
L C D u p le x o r S C -A P C to D IN H R A N 0 0 0 6 4 9 3 9
o r S C -A P C to E 2 0 0 0 H R A N 0 0 0 5 0 5 1 6
H R = H ig h R e tu r n L o s s
L W L : L C x L C d u p lx 1 2 . 1 7 0 4 .2 0 0 .0 9 - A . ..
V e r s io n C o r p . P a r t N o . C a b le le n g t h
L C /P C d u p le x L C /P C d u p le x A 0 0 1 1 4 0 0 8 1 8 - 0 0 1 1 1 m
A 0 0 2 1 4 0 0 8 1 8 - 0 0 2 9 2 m
A 0 0 3 1 4 0 0 8 1 8 - 0 0 3 7 3 m
A 0 0 4 1 4 0 0 8 1 8 - 0 0 4 5 5 m
A 0 0 5 1 4 0 0 8 1 8 - 0 0 5 2 1 0 m
A 0 0 6 1 4 0 0 8 1 8 - 0 0 6 0 1 5 m
A 0 0 7 1 4 0 0 8 1 8 - 0 0 7 8 2 0 m
M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n : 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 6 .0 3 M A L ( In s ta lla tio n o f fib e r o p tic c a b le s )

1 2 .1 7 0 0 .0 0 0 .3 9 ( L a b e lin g o f la s e r e q u ip m e n ts )
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g
ID U
. . . . G e p rü ft
. . . .
S T M 1 - o p tic a l in te r fa c e
N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 2
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
In te g r a tio n in a N e tw o r k M a n a g e m e n t S y s te m fo r T e le c o m m u n ic a tio n
T h e in te g r a tio n o f th e m ic r o w a v e s y s te m M D R S 1 5 5 S in a c o n tr o l- a n d m o n ito r in g s y s te m
( T M N - T e le c o m m u n ic a tio n M a n a g e m e n t N e tw o r k ) c a n b e e x e c u te d in s e v e r a l d iffe r e n t w a y s
( s e e a ls o O p e r a tin g M a n u e l, c h a p te r 5 ) :
Q D 2 - B u s - c o n n e c tio n s w ith o th e r e q u ip m e n ts : A t c o n fig u ra t io n o f th e M D R S 1 5 5 S a s a M a s te r a

Q D 2 b u s te rm in a t io n p lu g
M D R S 1 5 5 S a s M a s te r S -f e m a le (A N 0 0 2 3 2 0 9 1 ) o r P -m a le (A N 0 0 2 3 2 0 8 9 )
a lw a y s is t to in s ta ll in im m e d ia te p r o x im ity o f th e ID U !
F A N
IF
M F
A F M M F F
B C
E q u ip m e n t
G e rä t
z u m M S 1 /4 A 1
F M S la v e
B
M D R S 1 5 5 C a s S la v e F M
F A N X 3 8
1
9
2
1 0
3
1 1
4
1 2
IF
5
1 3
6
1 4
7
1 5
8
O H A U /M D R S 1 5 5 E ;
S la v e N K R S
1 ...8
X 3 9
1
9
2
1 0
3
1 1
4
1 2
5
1 3
6
1 4
7
1 5
8
F M
F M
A
B
M D R S 1 5 5 S a s S la v e
F A N
IF
1 ...8
M
F
F M
A
B
M
F
Q D 2 -b u s m u s t b e a lw a y s c o m p le te d w ith a Q D 2 -b u s te r m in a tio n p lu g
S - fe m a le (A N 0 0 2 3 2 0 9 1 ) o r P - m a le (A N 0 0 2 3 2 0 8 9 ) !
Q D 2 c o n n e c to r A Q D 2 c o n n e c tio n
R J 4 5 8 - p in , s h ie ld e d ( A N 0 0 1 1 5 4 0 7 ) ( A N 0 0 2 3 2 0 8 5 ; l= 1 0 0 0 m m )
N K R S c o n n e c to r (X 3 8 ,3 9 ) , Y - c a b le
D - S U B -F 1 5 M 3 /S (A N 0 0 0 5 5 9 0 9 ) B P a tc h c o r d Q D 2 ( Y - c a b le )
D - S U B -M 1 5 M 3 /S (A N 0 0 0 5 5 9 1 3 ) ( A N 0 0 2 3 2 0 8 6 ; l= 1 0 0 0 m m )
D - S U B -M 1 5 M 3 /L (A N 0 0 0 5 5 9 0 3 )
M o u n tin g In s tr u c tio n s 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 2 M A L (R J 4 5 ) C C o n n e c tin g c a b le
M o u n tin g In s tr u c tio n s 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 1 M A L ( A N 0 0 0 4 6 1 3 3 ; l= 2 5 0 0 m m )
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5
ID U
B e a rb .
. . . . D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d In te g r a tio n in T e le c o m m u n ic a tio n
. . . .
M a n a g e m e n t N e tw o rk (T M N )
N a m /S T D
c N P I/L M 1 9 .0 8 .0 5 M s A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 3
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
Q D 2 p a tc h c o r d R J 4 5 /D -S U B
3 2
M a s te r / S la v e
C a b le e n tr y s id e P in S ig n a l W ir e 2 a 1
d e p ic te d 1 b 9
1 T b b la c k 3 a T b / R b
g re e n 3 b T a / R a 1 a 2
A 1 8
2
3
T a
G r o u n d re d 2 a G N D 1 0
4 R b b lu e 1 b R b / T b 3
O H A U X 3 8 ,3 9
Q D 2 c o n n e c tio n 5 R a w h ite 1 a
2 b
R a / T a 3 a
3 b
1 1
4
F N K R S X 3 8 ,3 9
(A N 0 0 2 3 2 0 8 5 ; 6 G r o u n d o ra n g e G N D
y e llo w 1 2
7 fre e
l= 1 0 0 0 m m ) 8 fre e b ro w n 5
1 3
6
1 4
7
1 5
2 b
8
P a tc h c o r d Q D 2 (Y -c a b le )
1 2 a /2 a 2 a 1 2 a 1
B 9 1 b /1 b 1 b 9 1 b 9
2 1 a /1 a 1 a 2 1 a 2
p a tc h c o rd Q D 2 1 0 1 0 1 0
(Y -c a b le ) 3 3 3
1 1 3 a /3 a 3 a 1 1 3 b 1 1
(A N 0 0 2 3 2 0 8 6 ; 4 3 b /3 b 3 a O H A U X 3 8 ,3 9
l= 1 0 0 0 m m ) M 1 2
3 b 4
1 2 M 1 2
4
F N K R S X 3 8 ,3 9
5 5 5
1 3 1 3 1 3
6 6 6
1 4 1 4 1 4
7 7 7
1 5 1 5 1 5
2 b /2 b 2 b 2 b
8 8 8
3 2
3 2
Q D 2 - b u s te r m in a tio n
C o n n e c tin g c a b le D -S U B /D -S U B F o r M
1 2 a 2 a 1 1
C 9
2
1 b
1 a
1 b
1 a
9
2
9
1 2 1 2
1 0 1 0 1 0
p a tc h c o rd 3 3 3
3 a 3 a
(A N 0 0 0 4 6 1 3 3 ; 1 1
3 b 3 b
1 1 1 1
1 2 1
4 4 4
l= 2 5 0 0 m m ) F 1 2 1 2 F 1 2
5 5 5
1 3 1 3 1 3
6 6 6
1 4 1 4 1 4
7 7 7
1 5 1 5 1 5
8 2 b 2 b 8 8
3 2
Q D 2 - te r m in a tio n S ( fe m a le )
6 5 .7 2 3 2 .9 0 0 .0 5 -0 0 1 / A N 0 0 2 3 2 0 9 1
C o n n e c tin g c a b le Q D 2 to 7 R c o n n e c tin g p a n e l o r
Q D 2 - te r m in a tio n P ( m a le )
Q D 2 6 5 .7 2 3 2 .9 0 0 .0 5 -0 0 1 / A N 0 0 2 3 2 0 8 9
F
C a b le e n tr y s id e P in S ig n a l W ir e M a s te r / S la v e
d e p ic te d 1
1 T b b la c k 3 a T b / R b 1 a 6
1 8
2 T a g re e n 3 b T a / R a 2
3 G r o u n d re d 1 b 7
4 R b b lu e 1 b R b / T b 3
7 R c o n n e c tin g p a n e l
5 R a w h ite 1 a R a / T a 3 b 8 X 1 5
6 G r o u n d o ra n g e 4
7 fre e y e llo w 3 a 9
8 fre e b ro w n 5
3 2
Q D 2 c o n n e c to r
R J 4 5 8 - p in , s h ie ld e d ( A N 0 0 1 1 5 4 0 7 ) 1 w h ite b lu e
N K R S c o n n e c to r (X 3 8 ,3 9 ) , Y - c a b le 2 re d o ra n g e
C o n n e c to r o n X 1 5 o n 7 R c o n n e c tin g p a n e l D - S U B -F 1 5 M 3 /S (A N 00 0 5 5 9 0 9 ) 3 b la c k g re e n
D -S U B - F 0 9 M 3 /S (A N 0 0 0 5 5 9 0 8 ) D - S U B -M 1 5 M 3 /S (A N 0 0 0 5 5 9 1 3 ) 4 y e llo w b ro w n
M o u n tin g In s tru c t. 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 2 M A L (R J 4 5 ) D - S U B -M 1 5 M 3 /L (A N 0 0 0 5 5 9 0 3 )
D - S U B -F 1 5 M 3 /L (A N 0 0 0 5 5 8 9 9 ) L i- 0 2 Y S ( C ) H 4 x 2 x ( 7 x 0 ,1 7 )
M o u n tin g In s tru c t. 6 0 .8 9 4 2 .1 5 1 .1 1 M A L 3 2 (A N 0 0 0 7 8 7 0 7 )
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
P in a s s ig n m e n t
G e p rü ft
. . . . C h e c k e d
. . . .
Q D 2 -b u s c o n n e c to rs
N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 5
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
M o d e : 2 + 0 w ith X P IC (c o c h a n n e l o p e r a tio n o n h o r iz o n ta l/v e r tic a l p o la r iz a tio n )
B A T D C 4 8 V 3 ,5 A
+ /G N D
M D R S 1 5 5 S F A N
D S C 4 D S C 3
L W L Q D 2
X P IC 1 to IE C 6 0 0 2 5 -1 /2 0 0 1
IF
O P 1
1 + 0
P R
S T M -1
S E R V
D C
O D U
R P S X P IC 3
-4 8 V
R P S T X
R P S R X
ID U
2
6
5
4
3
O P
O P
O P
O P
O P
ID U O P 1
6
7
B A T D C 4 8 V 3 ,5 A
+ /G N D
M D R S 1 5 5 S F A N
D S C 4 D S C 3
D S C 2 B U S Y
F 1 - R E 1 - R X P IC 2 L W L Q D 2
X P IC 1 to IE C 6 0 0 2 5 -1 /2 0 0 1
IF
O P 1
1 + 0
P R
S T M -1
S E R V
D C
O D U
R P S X P IC 3
-4 8 V
R P S T X
R P S R X
ID U
2
6
5
4
3
O P
O P
O P
O P
O P
ID U O P 2
A tte n tio n : A d d itio n a ly m u s t b e in s ta lle d a c o n n e c tin g c a b le b e tw e e n b o th o u td o o r u n its

(C o n n e c tin g c a b le C C D P ) - s e e : 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 0 + 4 3 .
X P I C c o n n e c t in g c a b le ( O D U )
l= 1 5 0 0 m m ( A N 0 0 2 3 9 9 1 5 ) c o a x . c a b le R G 2 2 3 F R N C
l= 7 0 0 m m ( A N 0 0 2 7 6 5 2 0 )
T N C - 5 0 O h m T N C - 5 0 O h m
S W 1 1
6 X P IC - c o n n e c tin g c a b le
l= 2 3 0 m m ( A N 0 0 2 3 9 8 1 0 )
X 1 X 2 C o lo r c o d e L i- 0 2 Y S ( C ) H 4 x 2 x ( 7 x 0 .1 7 )
P in A d e r P in A d e r P a ir C o lo r o f w ir e s
c a b le e n tr y s id e c a b le e n tr y s id e
d e p ic te d 1 W H 1 a 4 b 1 B N d e p ic te d n o . a - w ir e b - w ir e
B U 1 b
X 4 a 2 Y E
2
1 8 3 b 3 1 8 1 w h ite b lu e
3 R D 2 a G N
4 O G 2 b 3 a 4 B K 2 re d o ra n g e
3 2
5 B K 3 a 2 b 5 O G 3 b la c k g re e n
6 G N 3 b 2 a 6 R D 4 y e llo w b ro w n
7 Y E 4 a 1 b 7 B U
8 B N 4 b 1 a 8 W H L i- 0 2 Y S ( C ) H 4 x 2 x ( 7 x 0 .1 7 )
3 2
(A N 0 0 0 7 8 7 0 7 )
7 X P IC - C o n n e c tin g c a b le
l= 2 3 0 m m A N 0 0 2 3 9 8 1 1
c o a x . c a b le 0 2 Y 1 2 Y ( S t) C Y 0 ,4 5 /2 ,0
(A N 0 0 0 2 4 7 9 5 )
c o a x . c o n n e c to r c r/p p 1 .0 /2 .3 c o a x . c o n n e c to r c r/p p 1 .0 /2 .3
(A N 0 0 2 7 0 2 4 2 ) (A N 0 0 2 7 0 2 4 2 )
c r im p in g to o l L e m o s a S A A 9 5 0 - 1 0 4 4 0 ( A N 0 0 2 7 5 0 7 3 )
m e a s u r e s to d is p la c e th e in s u la tio n o f c o a x . c a b le : 2 /4 ,5 /1 4 m m
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d C o n fig u r a tio n fo r c o c h a n n e l o p e r a tio n
. . . .
a n d m o d e 2 + 0 w ith X P IC
N a m /S T D
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 6
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
M o d e : 1 + 1 lin e s u b s titu te w ith X P IC (c o c h a n n e l o p e r a tio n o n h o r iz o n ta l/v e r tic a l p o la r is a tio n )
B A T D C 4 8 V 3 ,5 A
+ /G N D
M D R S 1 5 5 S
F A N
D S C 4 D S C 3
D S C 2 B U S Y
X P IC 1 to IE C 6 0 0 2 5 -1 /2 0 0 1
IF
O P 1
1 + 0
P R
S T M -1
S E R V
D C
O D U
R P S X P IC 3
-4 8 V
R P S T X
R P S R X
ID U
2
6
5
4
3
O P
O P
O P
O P
O P
ID U O P (M a s te r)
7
7
7 6 8
B A T D C 4 8 V 3 ,5 A
+ /G N D
M D R S 1 5 5 S F A N
D S C 4 D S C 3
X P IC 1 L W L Q D 2
X P IC 1 to IE C 6 0 0 2 5 -1 /2 0 0 1
IF
O P 1
1 + 0
P R
S T M -1
S E R V
D C
O D U
R P S X P IC 3
-4 8 V
R P S T X
R P S R X
ID U
2
6
5
4
3
O P
O P
O P
O P
O P
ID U P R ( S la v e )
A tte n tio n : A d d itio n a ly m u s t b e in s ta lle d a c o n n e c tin g c a b le b e tw e e n b o th o u td o o r u n its

(C o n n e c tin g c a b le C C D P ) - s e e : 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 0 + 4 3 .
X P I C c o n n e c t in g c a b le ( O D U )
l= 1 5 0 0 m m ( A N 0 0 2 3 9 9 1 5 ) c o a x . c a b le R G 2 2 3 F R N C
l= 7 0 0 m m ( A N 0 0 2 7 6 5 2 0 )
T N C - 5 0 O h m T N C - 5 0 O h m
S W 1 1
6 X P IC - C o n n e c tin g c a b le ; l= 2 3 0 m m (A N 0 0 2 3 9 8 1 0 ) - s e e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 6
8 C o n n e c tin g c a b le ; l= 2 5 0 m m (A N 0 0 2 3 9 8 0 9 )
1 1 a T D + 1 a 1
9 1 b T D - 1 b 9
2 1 c T R + 1 c 2
1 0 1 d T R - 1 d 1 0
3 2 a L F Ia 2 a 3 C o lo r c o d e S -0 9 Y S (S t)C H 8 x 2 x 0 .6
1 1 2 b L F Ib 2 b 1 1
4 2 c F R G B C M Ia 2 c Q u a d C o lo r o f w ir e s
4
F 1 2 2 d
3 a
F R G
I2 C a
B C M Ib 2 d
3 a
1 2 M n o . a - w ir e b - w ir e c - w ir e d - w ir e
5 5 1 w h ite b lu e tu rq u o is e v io le t
1 3 3 b I2 C b 3 b 1 3 2 w h ite o ra n g e tu rq u o is e v io le t
6 3 c C A N a 3 c 6 3 w h ite g re e n tu rq u o is e v io le t
1 4 3 d C A N b 3 d 1 4 4 w h ite b ro w n tu rq u o is e v io le t
7 4 a U + 5 V 4 a 7
1 5 4 b G N D 4 b 1 5 S -0 9 Y S (S t)C H 8 x 2 x 0 .6
B U S te rm 2
8 4 c 4 c 8 (P a rt n o . A N 0 0 0 1 3 1 7 1 )
c o n n e c to r to B U S 1 c o n n e c to r to B U S 2
D -S U B -F 1 5 M 3 /S (A N 0 0 0 5 5 9 0 9 ) D -S U B -M 1 5 M 3 /S (A N 0 0 0 5 5 9 1 3 )
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d C o n fig u r a tio n fo r c o c h a n n e l o p e r a tio n
. . . . N a m /S T D
a n d m o d e 1 + 1 w ith X P IC
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 7
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
M o d e : 1 + 1 lin e s u b s titu te (w ith 2 c h a n n e ls ) / h o t s ta n d b y
B A T D C 4 8 V 3 ,5 A
+ /G N D
M D R S 1 5 5 S F A N
D S C 4 D S C 3
L W L Q D 2
X P IC 1 to IE C 6 0 0 2 5 -1 /2 0 0 1
IF
O P 1
1 + 0
P R
S T M -1
S E R V
D C
O D U
R P S X P IC 3
-4 8 V
R P S T X
R P S R X
ID U
2
6
5
4
3
O P
O P
O P
O P
O P
ID U O P (M a s te r) 7
B A T D C 4 8 V 3 ,5 A
+ /G N D
M D R S 1 5 5 S F A N
D S C 4 D S C 3
D S C 2 B U S Y
F 1 - R E 1 - R X P IC 2 L W L Q D 2
X P IC 1 to IE C 6 0 0 2 5 -1 /2 0 0 1
IF
O P 1
1 + 0
P R
S T M -1
S E R V
D C
O D U
R P S X P IC 3
-4 8 V
R P S T X
R P S R X
ID U
2
6
5
4
3
O P
O P
O P
O P
O P
ID U P R ( S la v e )
8 C o n n e c tin g c a b le ; l= 2 5 0 m m (A N 0 0 2 3 9 8 0 9 ) - s e e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 6
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d C o n fig u a tio n fo r m o d e 1 + 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
w ith o u t X P IC
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 8
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
Ä n d e ru n g D a tu m B l.
05PHA00151AAM
M a s te r
B B - filte r
ID U O D U
R F - s w itc h
o r
S T M 1
R F - c o u p le r
B B - filte r
ID U O D U
1 + 1 L in e S w itc h
L in e S w itc h 1 + 1 C M I (0 5 H A N 0 0 1 8 3 A A E )
c o n s is tin g :
- C M I S w itc h 1 + 1 (0 5 H A M 0 0 0 5 2 A A N )
- S h e lf L in e S w itc h 1 + 1 (0 5 M B B 0 0 0 1 8 A A X )
- C o n n e c tin g c a b le l= 0 ,3 m (A N 0 0 2 1 9 4 2 4 )
w ith C x - c a b le -a n g le - s c r e w a b le 1 ,6 /5 ,6
to S T M - 1 d is tr ib u to r
B A T D C 4 8 V 3 ,5 A
+ /G N D
M D R S 1 5 5 S F A N
D S C 4 D S C 3
D S C 2 B U S Y
X P IC 1 to IE C 6 0 0 2 5 -1 /2 0 0 1
IF
O P 1
1 + 0
P R
S T M -1
S E R V
D C
O D U
R P S X P IC 3
-4 8 V
R P S T X
R P S R X
ID U
2
6
5
4
3
O P
O P
O P
O P
O P
O P S T M -1 P R O P S T M -1 P R
B A T D C 4 8 V 3 ,5 A
+ /G N D
M D R S 1 5 5 S F A N
D S C 4 D S C 3
D S C 2 B U S Y
X P IC 1 to IE C 6 0 0 2 5 -1 /2 0 0 1
IF
O P 1
1 + 0
P R
S T M -1
S E R V
D C
O D U
R P S X P IC 3
-4 8 V
R P S T X
R P S R X
ID U
2
6
5
4
3
O P
O P
O P
O P
O P
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d C o n fig u r a tio n fo r m o d e 1 + 1 w ith
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
L in e S w itc h 1 + 1 , e le c tr ic a l in te r fa c e
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .2 9
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
M a s te r
B B - filte r
ID U O D U R F - s w itc h
o r
S T M 1
R F - c o u p le r
B B - filte r
ID U O D U
1 + 1 L in e S w itc h
L in e S w itc h 1 + 1 O P T (0 5 H A N 0 0 1 8 4 A A G )
c o n s is tin g :
- O P T S w itc h 1 + 1 (0 5 H A M 0 0 0 5 3 A A Q )
- S h e lf L in e S w itc h 1 + 1 (0 5 M B B 0 0 0 1 8 A A X )
- o p tic a l c o n n e c tin g c a b le l= 0 ,3 m (1 4 0 0 7 8 7 -0 0 1 8 )
w ith L C /P C -L C /P C D u p le x - c o n n e c to r
to S T M - 1 d is tr ib u to r
B A T D C 4 8 V 3 ,5 A
+ /G N D
M D R S 1 5 5 S F A N
D S C 4 D S C 3
D S C 2 B U S Y
X P IC 1 to IE C 6 0 0 2 5 -1 /2 0 0 1
IF
O P 1
1 + 0
P R
S T M -1
S E R V
D C
O D U
R P S X P IC 3
-4 8 V
R P S T X
R P S R X
ID U
2
6
5
4
3
O P
O P
O P
O P
O P
O P P R S T M -1
B A T D C 4 8 V 3 ,5 A
+ /G N D
M D R S 1 5 5 S F A N
D S C 4 D S C 3
D S C 2 B U S Y
X P IC 1 to IE C 6 0 0 2 5 -1 /2 0 0 1
IF
O P 1
1 + 0
P R
S T M -1
S E R V
D C
O D U
R P S X P IC 3
-4 8 V
R P S T X
R P S R X
ID U
2
6
5
4
3
O P
O P
O P
O P
O P
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g ID U p a tc h c o rd s fo r
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d C o n fig u r a tio n fo r m o d e 1 + 1 w ith
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
L in e S w itc h 1 + 1 , o p tic a l in te r fa c e
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .3 0
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
b y r e q u ir e m e n t: c o a x .- c a b le 1 /4 in ., Ø 1 0 m m
O D U N - a n g le - a d a p te r
1 A N 0 0 2 2 6 0 8 9 w ith N - c o n n e c to r ( 5 1 0 5 1 7 1 - 0 0 1 3 )
(5 1 0 3 6 8 4 -0 0 1 8 ) o r
w r e n c h s iz e 1 8 A N 0 0 0 8 0 2 5 4 w ith N - c o n n e c to r (A N 0 0 0 7 9 9 7 8 )
tig h te n in g to r q u e : m a x . 1 1 0 N c m m a x . le n g th o f c a b le : 1 0 0 m / O D U -L
O D U 1 5 0 m / O D U -S
2 c o a x .- c a b le 1 /2 in ., Ø 1 6 m m
A N 0 0 0 8 7 5 8 6 w ith N - c o n n e c to r (A N 0 0 0 8 9 1 3 8 )
m a x . le n g th o f c a b le : 2 0 0 m / O D U -L
3 0 0 m / O D U -S
1 C -p r o file s e c tio n ( A N 0 0 1 1 2 6 1 7 )
c a b le - c la m p , s in g le m o u n te d w ith s o c k e t h e a t s c r e w M 8 x 1 0
Ø 1 0 -1 1 m m (A N 0 0 1 1 4 2 6 8 ) (A N 0 0 0 1 3 1 2 5 )
o n te n s io n in g b e lt ( A N 0 0 1 3 5 5 5 7 ) . C o a x ia l- c a b le 1 /4 - in . / J u m p e r c a b le
( in c l. N - c o n n e c to r - m a le ) ; l = 1 m ;
W ith s u ffic ie n t e m p ty s p a c e
a v a ila b le , ju m p e r - c a b le s a re n o t
c a b le - c la m p , s in g le r e q u ir e d a n d th e 1 /2 In .- c a b le s
Ø 1 6 -1 7 m m (A N 0 0 1 1 4 2 7 0 ) c a n b e c o n n e c te d d ir e c tly
m o u n te d o n C - p r o file s e c tio n to th e O u td o o r U n it.
2
c o m p le te e a r th in g k it
w ith c a b le 1 6 m m ² fo r
1 /2 In .- c a b le ( 8 1 0 1 9 5 5 - 0 0 1 1 )
N - c o n n e c to r ( fe m a le ) ( A N 0 0 1 1 1 9 9 4 )
c o m p le te e a r th in g k it p r e fe r a b ly in c a b le d u c t
w ith c a b le 1 6 m m ² fo r
1 /4 In .- c a b le ( 8 1 0 1 9 5 4 - 0 0 1 2 )
w a ll fe e d th r o u g h
a d d itio n a l o v e r v o lta g e p r o te c tio n

(A N 0 0 0 4 6 6 0 0 )
( o p tio n a l)
o p tio n a l:
ju m p e r c a b le o r
M in . a llo w a b le b e n d r a d iu s o f c a b le c o a x .- c a b le 1 /4 In .- Ø 1 0 m m
is to o b s e r v e ! w ith N - c o n n e c t o r ( m a le )
m in . m a x .
c a b le b e n d r a d iu s te n s ile fo r c e
A N 0 0 2 2 6 0 8 9 > 1 3 6 m m 4 0 0 N
A N 0 0 0 8 0 2 5 4 > 1 2 0 m m 6 5 0 N
A N 0 0 0 8 7 6 8 6 > 1 2 5 m m 1 1 0 0 N
M D R S 1 5 5 S F A N
IF
R e s p e c t: N - c o n n e c to r - a n g le
B e fo re y o u c o n n e c t th e ID U w ith (A N 0 0 0 4 9 5 0 9 )
th e IF -c a b le , c o n tr o l th e O D U -ty p e
(s e e ty p e -s h ie ld : O D U ... - ... S ) M D R S 1 5 5 S F A N
IF
u n d th e s o ftw a re s ta tu s o f th e ID U
(m in im u m : 4 .0 ).
T h e O D U -L o n ly w o r k w ith th e ID U -L S .
(s e e c o m m is s io n in g in s tr u c tio n , C h a p te r 4 )!
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
B e a rb .
. . . . D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d C o n n e c tio n ID U - O D U
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .3 1
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
C a b le L a b e llin g
In o r d e r to a v o id e r r o r s d u r in g th e e x c h a n g e o f e q u ip m e n t u n its , a ll c a b le s m u s t b e a p p r o p r ia te ly m a r k e d a n d la b e lle d .
T h is c a n b e d o n e u s in g d if f e r e n t in s c r ip t io n s y s t e m s a n d in s c r ip t io n t e x t s d e p e n d in g o n t h e c u s t o m e r 's r e q u ir e m e n t s .
W h e n e v e r s u c h r e q u ir e m e n ts a r e n o t a v a ila b le , a ll c a b le s s h o u ld b e m a r k e d u s in g th e B r o th e r in s c r ip tio n s y s te m .
T h e in s c r ip tio n te x t m u s t b e id e n tic a l w ith th e c o n n e c to r d e s ig n a tio n o n th e e q u ip m e n t fr o n t p a n e l.
In s c r ip tio n u n it B ro th e r P -T o u c h A N 0 0 0 8 7 4 9 1
In s c r ip tio n b a n d A N 0 0 0 8 7 5 2 3
P la s tic p r o file A N 0 0 0 4 8 7 1 4
Y e llo w p la s tic la b e l A N 0 0 0 5 8 1 0 7
P u n c h in g p lie r s R o s e T y p e 6 0 1 4 1 9 5
S tr a p r e ta in e r A N 0 0 7 4 0 8 3 5
A tta c h th e s e lf- a d h e s iv e la b e l p r e p a r e d u s in g th e P - T o u c h u n it o n to th e y e llo w p la s tic s tr ip , c u t it to th e a p p r o p r ia te

le n g th a n d in s e r t it in to th e p la s tic p r o file .
T h e n p u n c h th e p la s tic p r o file a t b o th e n d s a n d s e c u r e it to th e c a b le b y m e a n s o f tw o s tr a p r e ta in e r s .
L a b e llin g e x a m p le :
M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 4 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
B e a rb .
. . . . D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d C a b le la b e llin g
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .3 2
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
w a v e g u id e
filte r b o x
O D U
in te r fa c e s
V ie w o f b e lo w
C o n n
e c tio n o f
C o n n e c tio n o f X
-P IC
S y s te m c a b le (T N C
- fe m a le
( C x - N - c o n n e c to r /fe m a le ) 5 0
O h m )
C o n n e c tio n o f
C o n n e c tio n o f A G C - m e a s u r in g
R F - s w itc h (C o n n e c to r)
to filte r b o x
E a r th in g c o n n e c tio n E a r th in g c o n n e c tio n
(C a s e /M 8 ) fo r A G C - m e a s u r in g
T e c h n ic a l s p e c if ic a tio n s ( O D U - S + f ilt e r b o x ) :
a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu r e lim it ( o p e r a tio n ) - 4 5 c e n t. .... + 5 5 c e n t. ( E T S 3 0 0 0 1 9 - 1 - 4 C la s s 4 .1 E )

w e ig h t ( w ith filte r b o x ) 1 0 ,1 k p
d im e n s io n s O D U (H x B x D ) ( 3 8 7 x 1 2 0 x 3 4 0 ) m m
d im e n s io n s filte r b o x (H x B x D ) ( 2 3 5 x 1 2 0 x 1 1 8 ) m m
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 4 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g O D U -S
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d In te rfa c e s
. . . .
. . . .
N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
T e c h n ic a l s p e c ific a tio n s
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 0
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
T h e U n it c a n
b e m o u n te d a lte r n a tiv e ly
w ith a tu r n b y + /- 9 0 ° .
tu b e a d a p te r
(A N 0 0 2 7 7 0 1 0 )
w ith 4 x h e x a g o n s c re w s M 1 0 x 3 0
a n d 4 x n u ts M 1 0
w re n c h s iz e : 1 6
s in g le m o u n t w a ll
(A N 0 0 2 7 6 9 6 4 )
tu b e h o ld e r Ø 6 3 -1 1 5
(A N 0 0 2 3 2 4 5 3 )
w ith
h e x a g o n b o lts M 1 0 x 1 6 0
n u ts M 1 0
w r e n c h s iz e : 1 6
s ta r tin g to r q u e : m a x . 2 0 N m
( a s s e m p ly s c h e d u le 0 5 M A A 0 0 3 7 7 A A L
in th e p a c k in g e n c lo s e d )
tu b e k it Ø 1 2 7 - 2 1 9
(0 5 M B H 0 0 0 9 1 A A B )
th re a d e d ro d M 1 0
a n d n u t M 1 0
w r e n c h s iz e : 1 6
s ta r tin g to r q u e : m a x . 2 0 N m
( a s s e m p ly s c h e d u le 0 5 M A A 0 0 2 9 0 A A U
s e e : m o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n A A S E _ IC S .0 2 2 M in th e p a c k in g e n c lo s e d )
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d M o u n tin g w ith
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
s in g le - m o u n t
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 1
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
d o u b le m o u n t w a ll ( o ld ) tu b e a d a p te r tu b e h o ld e r Ø 6 3 - 1 1 5
(A N 0 0 2 7 6 9 6 8 ) (A N 0 0 2 7 7 0 1 0 ) (A N 0 0 2 3 2 4 5 3 )
to m o u n t o f m a x . 1 x D o u b le M o u n t W a ll
o n th e r ig h t- a n d /o r le ft s id e
m o u n tin g k it ( o ld ) ( 0 5 M B B 0 0 0 2 5 A A G )
c o n s is tin g :
3 x h e x a g o n h e a d s c re w s M 1 0 x 2 5
3 x n u ts M 1 0
6 x w a s h e rs A 1 0 ,5
tu b e h o ld e r Ø 6 3 - 1 1 5
tu b e k it Ø 1 2 7 - 2 1 9
(A N 0 0 2 3 2 4 5 3 ) (0 5 M B H 0 0 0 9 1 A A B )
tu b e a d a p te r (A N 0 0 2 7 7 0 1 0 )
d o u b le m o u n t w a ll C (n e w ) to m o u n t o f m a x . 1 x D o u b le M o u n t W a ll tu b e h o ld e r Ø 6 3 - 1 1 5
0 5 M B H 0 0 1 6 0 A A K o n th e r ig h t- a n d /o r le ft s id e (A N 0 0 2 3 2 4 5 3 )
m o u n tin g k it C ( 0 5 M B B 0 0 0 5 1 A A T )
c o n s is tin g o f:
3 x h e x a g o n h e a d s c e w s M 1 0 x 3 0
3 x n u ts M 1 0
tu b e h o ld e r Ø 6 3 - 1 1 5
(A N 0 0 2 3 2 4 5 3 ) tu b e k it Ø 1 2 7 - 2 1 9
(0 5 M B H 0 0 0 9 1 A A B )
s e e : m o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n A A S E _ IC S .0 2 2 M
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d M o u n tin g w ith
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
d o u b le - m o u n t
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 2
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
to a n te n n a /fe e d s y s te m
R F - S w itc h / M o u n tin g k it w a v e g u id e u n d fittin g s
1 8 ,7 G H z - A N 0 0 0 4 1 0 1 9 / A N 0 0 0 4 1 0 2 0 s e e : 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .6 3
2 3 G H z - A N 0 0 0 3 8 1 7 6 / A N 0 0 0 4 1 0 2 0
2 6 G H z - A N 0 0 1 1 2 7 3 7 / A N 0 0 0 4 1 0 2 0
2 8 G H z - A N 0 0 2 7 0 1 7 0 / A N 0 0 2 2 8 8 3 7
W a v e g u id e k it R 2 2 0 R F s w itc h
M o u n tin g k it R F - S fo r (1 8 ,7 - 2 6 ) G H z
(A N 0 0 2 7 7 0 1 5 ) 2 (0 5 H A N 0 0 0 2 4 A A J )
o r
a t tu b e m o u n tin g 1 W a v e g u id e k it R 3 2 0 R F s w itc h
- fo r tu b e -Ø (7 6 -1 1 5 ) m m fo r (2 8 - 3 2 ) G H z
(A N 0 0 0 4 1 0 0 8 ) (0 5 H A N 0 0 0 2 3 A A G )
- fo r tu b e -Ø (1 1 5 -2 1 9 ) m m
(A N 0 0 0 8 4 3 1 9 )
O D U 1
D o u b le m o u n t w a ll ( o ld )
(A N 0 0 2 7 6 9 6 8 ) o r
d o u b le m o u n t w a ll C ( n e w )
(0 5 M B H 0 0 1 6 0 A A K )
c o n tro l lin e , l = 2 m
C o n n e c tin g c a b le ( C C D P ) (c o m p o n e n t o f R F s w itc h ) ;
(A N 0 0 2 7 6 5 2 0 ) In te rfa c e s o f th e O D U
In te rfa c e s o f th e O D U s e e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 0
s e e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 0
T h e lo w - lo s s e x p a n s io n ( a p p r o x . 1 d B p e r te r m in a l) .
O p e r a tio n in te r r u p tio n a t s w itc h in g < 5 0 0 m s . C o a x -c a b le
In c o m p a r is o n w ith e x p a n s io n b y c o u p le r s lo w e r a v a ila b ility . to th e ID U ,
In te rfa c e s o f th e O D U
s e e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 0
s e e : M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n A A S E _ IC S .0 2 2 M
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d C o n fig u r a tio n w ith d o u b le - m o u n t
. . . .
a n d R F - s w itc h
N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 3
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
c o n n e c tio n o f w a v e g u id e
to fe e d s y s te m /a n te n n a
s e e : 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .6 3
S c r e w e d w ith 8 s o c k e t h e a t s c re w s
M 3 x 2 5 o n F ilte r b o x ,
w r e n c h s iz e : 2 ,5 .
A tte n tio n :
T h e s c r e w fa s te n in g to fix in g
th e filte r s o n th e b r a c k e t o n ly
a fte r th e c o m p le te a s s e m b ly o f
th e c o u p le r tig h te n .
s y m m e tr ic a l c o u p le r a s y m m e tr ic a l c o u p le r W G - fla n g e
1 8 ,7 G H z 0 5 M B H 0 0 0 2 8 A A K 0 5 M B H 0 0 0 2 9 A A M R 2 2 0
2 3 G H z 0 5 M B H 0 0 0 3 0 A A H 0 5 M B H 0 0 0 3 1 A A K R 2 2 0
2 6 G H z 0 5 M B H 0 0 0 3 2 A A M 0 5 M B H 0 0 0 3 3 A A P R 2 2 0
2 8 G H z A N 0 0 2 7 7 1 5 4 A N 0 0 2 7 7 1 5 5 R 3 2 0
3 2 G H z 0 5 M B H 0 0 0 4 1 A A A 0 5 M B H 0 0 0 4 2 A A C R 3 2 0
s y m m e tr ic a l c o u p le r a s y m m e tr ic a l c o u p le r
a tte n u a tio n o f o p e r a tin g c h a n n e l 3 ,1 + /- 0 ,2 d B 1 ,3 + /- 0 ,2 d B
p e r te rm in a l
a tte n u a tio n o f p r o te c tio n c h a n n e l 3 ,1 + /- 0 ,2 d B 6 ,3 + /- 0 ,3 d B
p e r te rm in a l
a tte n u a tio n o f lin k in th e fa u lt- fr e e c a s e 6 ,2 d B 2 ,6 d B
a tte n u a tio n o f lin k in th e fa u lt c a s e 6 ,2 d B 7 ,6 d B
O p e r a tin g in te r r u p tio n b y s w itc h in g < 5 0 0 m s .

In th e c o m p a r is o n w ith e x p a n s a tio n b y R F - s w itc h h ig h e r a v a ila b ility .
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d C o n fig u r a tio n w ith c o u p le r
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 4
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
F ix in g o f th e s o c k e t R x /T x -B ra n c h in g , T e r m in a tio n ,
h e a d s c re w in th e h o ld e r F ix in g o f th e s o c k e t F ix in g o f th e s o c k e t h e a d s c r e w
(c o m p o n e n t o f th e filte r b o x ) h e a d s c re w w ith w ith w r e n c h s iz e 6 ,0
w ith w re n c h s iz e 5 ,0 w re n c h s iz e 6 ,0
F ix in g o f th e O D U
a t th e filte r b o x
w ith s o c k e t w re n c h 8 x 3 5 0
(9 1 0 0 5 5 8 -0 0 1 3 )
( w ith s h r in k a b le tu b in g 9 ,5 )
O D U
In te r fa c e fo r w a v e g u id e filte r b o x
to fe e d s y s te m /a n te n n a w ith in te g r a te d b r a n c h in g u n it ( B U )
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d C o n fig u r a tio n fo r in tr u s io n
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
w ith in te g r a te d c h a n n e l b r a n c h in g
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 5
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
g r o u n d in g c o n n e c tio n M 5
N - fe m a le c o n n e c to r
fo r IF - c a b le B N C -c o n n e c to r
fo r A G C - m e a s u r in g
8 9
2 6 7
Ø
a ll m e a s u r e s in m m
T e c h n ic a l s p e c ific a tio n s ( O D U - L ) :
a m b ie n t te m p e r a tu r e lim it ( o p e r a tio n ) - 3 3 c e n t. .... + 5 5 c e n t. ( E T S 3 0 0 0 1 9 - 1 - 4 C la s s 4 .1 )

w e ig h t 4 ,6 k p
d im e n s io n s ( D x H ) ( 2 6 7 x 8 9 ) m m
A ll te c h n ic a l s p e c ific a tio n s s e e te c h n ic a l d a t a in s y s te m d e s c r ip t io n .
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g O D U -L
. . . . G e p rü ft
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 6
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
S u p p o r t o f th e O D U - L w ith s e p a r a te d a n te n n a a t th e p ip e - Ø 4 8 -2 1 9 m m
T h e O r in g a n d th e u n c o a te d c o n ta c t s u rfa c e s h a s to b e ru b b e d in
b e tw e e n th e O D U -L a n d th e b r a c k e t w ith s ilic o n e g r e a s e ( c o m p o n e n t o f
th e b ra c k e t) b e fo re th e a s s e m b ly o f th e O D U - L to th e b r a c k e t.
T h e in s ta lla tio n p o s itio n o f th e O D U - L is d e te r m in e d b y th e lo c a tin g p in s .

A fte r th e a d ju s tm e n t o f th e O D U - L w ith th e 4 c la m p s th e fix in g is c a r r ie d
o u t w ith 4 x M 8 h e x a g o n s o c k e t, w r e n c h s iz e 6 a n d m a x . s ta r tin g to rq u e
1 8 ,7 N m .
M o u n tin g k it
fo r p ip e - Ø 4 8 - 1 1 5 m m
1 - S u p p o r t fo r p ip e - Ø 4 8 - 1 1 5 m m
2 - c la m p
3 - h e x a g o n b o lt M 1 0 x 1 5 0
4 - w a s h e r M 1 0
5 - s p r in g w a s h e r M 1 0
6 - n u t M 1 0
7 - p ro te c tiv e c u p
tig h te n in g to rq u e : M 1 0 - 3 9 N m
m o u n tin g k it 7 -R C -1 9 4 0 1 7 5 2 -0 0 1 9 7 ,5 G H z U B R 8 4
m o u n tin g k it 1 1 -R R 1 9 4 0 1 7 5 2 -0 0 4 3 1 1 G H z U B R 1 2 0
a d a p to r fo r M C G 0 0 0 -0 0 0 6 1 4
p ip e - Ø 1 1 5 -2 1 9 m m
M o u n tin g k it c a n b e m o u n te d b o th o n th e le ft o r o n th e r ig h t b y th e p ip e .
W a v e g u id e a n d m o u n tin g s : s e e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 4 .4 0 - 0 1 + 0 3
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g O D U L
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d S u p p o rt fo r m o d e 1 + 0 a n d
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
s e p a ra te d a n te n n a
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 7
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
S u p p o r t o f th e O D U - L fo r m o d e 2 + 0 / 1 + 1 w ith s e p a r a te d a n te n n a b y p ip e - Ø 4 8 -2 1 9 m m
m o u tin g k it
fo r p ip e - Ø 4 8 - 1 1 5 m m c o u p le r
F ix in g o f th e c o u p le r w ith 4 x s o c k e t h e a t s c r e w s
M 6 ( S W 6 ) a n d th e 4 c lip s .
P e rm . to rq u e : M 6 - 7 ,7 N m
T h e c o n ta c t s u r fa c e s h a v e to b e r u b b e d in w ith e n c lo s e d s ilic o n e g r e a s e .
c o u p le r ( 3 d B ) fo r m o d e 2 + 0
c o u p le r 7 /3 9 4 0 1 7 3 4 - 0 0 1 2 7 ,5 G H z M o u n tin g k it w ith c o u p le r a n d a O D U - L
c o u p le r 1 1 /3 9 4 0 1 7 3 6 - 0 0 1 0 1 1 G H z a t th e p ip e - Ø 1 1 5 m m
c o u p le r 1 3 /3 9 4 0 1 7 3 8 - 0 0 1 8 1 3 G H z
c o u p le r 1 5 /3 9 4 0 1 7 4 0 - 0 0 1 4 1 5 G H z
c o u p le r ( 6 d B ) fo r m o d e 1 + 1
c o u p le r 7 /6 9 4 0 1 7 3 5 - 0 0 1 1 7 ,5 G H z
c o u p le r 1 1 /6 9 4 0 1 7 3 7 - 0 0 1 9 1 1 G H z
c o u p le r 1 3 /6 9 4 0 1 7 3 9 - 0 0 1 7 1 3 G H z
c o u p le r 1 5 /6 9 4 0 1 7 4 1 - 0 0 1 3 1 5 G H z
If th e c o u p le r is in s ta lle d w ith o n e O D U , a c o r r e s p o n d in g
a b s o r b e r h a s to b e m o u n te d to th e s e c o n d w a v e g u id e c o n n e c tio n .
w a v e g u id e a n d m o u n t in g s : s e e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 4 .4 0 - 0 1 + 0 3
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g O D U L
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d S u p p o r t fo r m o d e 2 + 0 /1 + 1 w ith
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
c o u p le r a n d s e p a r a te d a n te n n a
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .4 8
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
In te rfa c e s o f O D U -L X
( e a r th in g o f th e O D U s e e : 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .7 2 )
X -P IC
T N C - fe m a le
N -c o n n e c to r (5 0 O h m )
( fe m a le ) fo r IF - c a b le w ith s c re w c a p
B N C - ja c k w ith p r o te c t iv e c a p
fo r A G C - m e a s u r in g
h e x a g o n h e a d s c re w M 8 x 2 0
w ith s p r in g r in g A 8 to g r o u n d th e O D U
fla n g e s iz e
IE C 1 5 4 E IA W R fre q u e n c y
U B R 7 0 W R 1 3 7 < 7 .4 G H z
U B R 8 4 W R 1 1 2 7 .4 /8 G H z
U B R 1 2 0 W R 7 5 1 0 /1 1 /1 3 G H z
U B R 1 4 0 W R 6 2 1 5 G H z
U B R 2 2 0 W R 4 2 1 8 /2 3 G H z
U B R 2 6 0 W R 3 4 2 4 /2 6 /2 8 G H z
U B R 3 2 0 W R 2 8 3 2 /3 8 G H z
IF - in te r fa c e
o f ID U
N - c o n n e c to r - fe m a le fo r IF - c a b le
N - a n g le - c o u p le r ( o u td o o r )
5 1 0 3 6 8 4 -0 0 1 8
N - c o n n e c to r C a b le
5 1 0 5 1 7 1 - 0 0 1 3 1 3 0 1 2 1 8 -0 0 1 7
5 1 0 3 5 8 3 - 0 0 1 0 1 3 0 1 1 7 3 -0 0 2 8
T e c h n ic a l s p e c ific a tio n ( O D U - L X ) : 5 1 0 3 6 6 8 - 0 0 1 8 1 3 0 1 1 7 4 -0 0 2 7
( aT e l l c t h e n c i c h a n l d i c a a t e l s s ( p O e D c U i f ) i : c a t i o n s s e e d e s c r i p t i o n )
a m b ie n t te m p e r a tu r e lim it ( o p e r a tin g ) - 4 5 °C .... + 5 5 ° C ( E T S 3 0 0 0 1 9 - 1 - 4 C la s s 4 .1 E )

p r o te c tio n c la s s IP 5 4 ( IE C 6 0 5 2 9 )
e q u ip m e n t r e lia b ility E N 6 0 9 5 0
e m is s io n E N 3 0 1 4 8 9
w e ig h t 4 ,6 5 k p
d im e n s io n s (H x B x D ) ( 3 0 3 x 2 6 0 x 1 0 5 ) m m
M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n :
C o n n e c to r 5 1 0 5 1 7 1 -0 0 1 3 - A A S E _ IC S .0 3 3
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
D ra w n 0 3 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g O D U L X
. . . . G e p rü ft
. . . .
N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .5 0
a N P I/L M 0 3 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
O D U L X w ith c o m p a c t a n te n n a (m o d e 1 + 0 )
b ra c k e t A N 0 0 0 7 4 7 8 0 m o u n tin g k it a d a p te r A N 0 0 0 7 9 8 9 1
(p a rt o f th e a n te n n a )
Ø 1 2 7 - 2 1 9 m m
A d ju s tin g a re a :
a z im u th : + /- 1 0 °
e le v a tio n : + /- 7 ,5 °
p o la r ity : + /- 5 °
7 6 - 1 1 4 m m
Ø
O D U L X w ith s e p a r a te d a n te n n a (m o d e 1 + 0 )
w a v e g u id e
m o u n tin g k it a d a p te r ( Ø 1 2 7 - 2 1 9 m m ) p ip e c la m p ( Ø 6 3 - 1 1 5 m m ) O D U b ra c k e t a d a p te r fra m e O D U
A N 0 0 0 7 9 8 9 1 A N 0 0 2 3 2 4 5 3 0 5 M B H 0 0 1 7 0 A A A 0 5 M B H 0 0 1 3 6 A A C
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d M o u n tin g fo r m o d e 1 + 0 w ith
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
c o m p a c t / s e p a ra te d a n te n n a
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .5 1
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
O D U L X w ith c o m p a c t a n te n n a (m o d e 1 + 1 /2 + 0 )

b ra c k e t A N 0 0 0 7 4 7 8 0
(p a rt o f th e a n te n n a )
a d ju s tin g a r e a :
e . g . P S 0 .3 -C -U N I
a z im u th : + /- 1 0 °
e le v a tio n : + /- 7 ,5 °
p o la r ity : + /- 5 °
7 6 - 1 1 4 m m
tr a n s c e iv e r tr a n s c e iv e r
Ø
c o u p le r
O D U L X w ith s e p a r a te d a n te n n a (m o d e 1 + 1 /2 + 0 )
w a v e g u id e
m o u n tin g k it a d a p te r ( Ø 1 2 7 - 2 1 9 m m ) p ip e c la m p ( Ø 6 3 - 1 1 5 m m ) O D U b ra c k e t
A N 0 0 0 7 9 8 9 1 A N 0 0 2 3 2 4 5 3 0 5 M B H 0 0 1 7 0 A A A
c o u p le r
N o te : If o n ly o n e O D U - L X in a fir s t c o n s tr u c tio n s ta g e is to b e in s ta lle d ,

th e s e c o n d w a v e g u id e p o r t h a s to b e c o m p le te d w ith a te r m in a tio n .

. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
D ra w n 0 3 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g O D U L X w ith c o u p le r
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d M o u n tin g w ith c o u p le r a n d
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
c o m p a c t o r s e p a ra te d a n te n n a
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .5 2
a N P I/L M 0 3 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
M o u n t th e O D U -L X in th e c o u p le r fr a m e b y h a n g in g it in to th e tw o h e x a g o n a l h o le s in th e b u tto m s e c tio n a n d th e la te r a l h o o k s ( r ig h t a n d
le ft) in th e to p p a rt, s o th a t it c a n n o t tilt o u t.
T h e n s e c u re th e O D U - L X b y t ig h e n in g th e 4 x M 8 A lle n s c r e w s ( S W 6 )
(m a x . to rq u e : 1 9 N m ) .
T h e tw o M 8 th r e a d e d h o le s c a n b e u s e d fo r in s ta llin g a u x ilia r y
m o u n tin g d e v ic e s fo r h o is t in g t h e c o u p le r o n to th e m a s t.
H a n g th e O D U in to th e tw o
h e x a g o n a l h o le s .
W h e n d is m o u n tin g th e O D U - L X , lo o s e n th e fo u r A lle n s c r e w s . S lig h tly lif t th e O D U a n d tilt it o u t o v e r th e tw o la te r a l h o o k s . T h e n lift it o u t o f

th e b o tto m h e x a g o n h o le s o f th e c o u p le r .
L o o s e n th e fo u r la te r a l s lo tte d s c r e w s . T h e n m o v e th e
p r o te c t iv e c a p o f th e O D U - L X in th e u p w a r d d ir e c tio n .
T h e fo u r m o u n tin g s c r e w s a n d in te r fa c e s o f th e O D U b e c o m e
a c c e s s ib le .
A fte r c o m p le tin g a ll w o rk s o n th e O D U -L X , m o v e b a c k th e
p r o te c t iv e c a p to its in itia l p o s itio n a n d s e c u r e it b y m e a n s o f th e
fo u r s lo tte d s c r e w s .
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d M o u n tin g O D U - L X
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
to th e C o u p le r
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .5 3
a N P I/L M 0 3 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
O D U m o u n tin g in th e n e a r o f th e s e p a r a te d a n te n n a
U H P -a n te n n a
( 0 ,3 / 0 ,6 m w ith o u t s u p p o r t)
s u p p o r t f. p ip e - Ø 7 6 -1 1 5 m m
A N 0 0 0 3 8 9 8 4
M o u n tin g o f th e a n te n n a : s e e 6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 3 9 .6 1 M A L
M o u n tin g o f th e s u p p o r t fo r th e tr a n s c e iv e r : a n a lo g u e 1 5 .8 5 6 4 .2 0 0 .0 1 M A L
O D U m o u n tin g w ith d is ta n c e to t h e s e p a r a te d a n te n n a
U H P -a n te n n a
(0 ,3 / 0 ,6 m )
w ith
s u p p o r t f. p ip e - Ø 7 6 - 1 1 5 m m
S u p p o r t f. c o u p le r
A N 0 0 2 3 7 2 1 6
C o u p le r
3 d B o r 6 d B
M a s t-s u p p o rt
A N 0 0 8 6 7 0 5 3
a d a p te r R A U 2
A N 0 0 2 7 4 0 4 7
S u p p o r t ( a p p e n d ix )
A N 0 0 0 3 5 4 6 0
S u p p o rt (b a s e )
A N 0 0 0 3 5 4 5 5 M o u n tin g a n d a llig n m e n t o f a n te n n a : s e e 6 5 .8 5 6 4 .2 0 0 .1 0 M A L
M o u n tin g o f th e s u p p o r t fo r th e tr a n s c e iv e r : a n a lo g u e 1 5 .8 5 6 4 .2 0 0 .0 1 M A L
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d M o u n tin g w ith R a u - h o ld e r a n d
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
s e p a ra te d a n te n n a
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .5 4
a N P I/L M 0 3 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
T h e O D U 1 3 L E X is c o m p o s e d o f a c h a n n e l- n e u tr a l R F tr a n s c e iv e r a n d a n e x c h a n g e a b le c h a n n e l- s p e c ific filte r .
T h e R F tra n s c e iv e r c o v e rs b o th th e c o m p le te lo w e r a n d u p p e r b a n d w ith o n e h a r d w a r e u n it.
T h u s , o n ly o n e R F tr a n s c e iv e r m u s t b e h e ld in th e s p a r e p a r ts in v e n to r y . T h is R F tr a n s c e iv e r c a n b e e x p a n d e d to O D U 1 3 L E X b y
m o u n tin g th e re q u ir e d c h a n n e l- s p e c ific filte r .
L o o s e n /tig h te n th e
s e v e n T o rx 2 0 s c re w s
to o p e n th e h o u s in g
c o v e r.
N a m e p la te o f c h a n n e l f ilt e r O D U n a m e p la te
(T h is n a m e p la te is d e liv e r e d
to g e th e r w ith th e f ilt e r a n d m u s t
b e a tta c h e d h e re ).
C o n n e c t/d is c o n n e c t fla t r ib b o n c a b le .
L o o s e n /tig h te n
th e tw o A lle n s c re w s M 4
( w ith m a x im u m
to rq u e o f 2 3 0 N c m )
4 N 6 N
T ig h te n ( 6 0 N c m ) /lo o s e n
w ith S W 5 /1 6 " o r 8 .
M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
O D U 1 3 L E X
G e p rü ft
. . . . C h e c k e d
. . . .
C h a n n e l filte r m o u n tin g
N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .5 5
a N P I/L M 0 3 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
A n te n n a - o v e r v ie w
M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n s s e e ta b le in 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .0 1
7 ,4 G H z 8 .2 G H z 1 1 G H z 1 3 G H z 1 5 G H z
(R 8 4 ) (R 8 4 ) (R 1 2 0 ) (R 1 2 0 ) (R 1 4 0 )
0 ,2 6 m
0 ,3 m
0 ,6 m x x x
1 ,2 m x x x
P a r a b o lic a n te n n a s
0 ,3 m x
0 ,6 m x x x x x
1 ,2 m x x x x x
2 ,0 m x x x x x
3 ,0 m x x x x
3 ,7 m x x x
S h e ll a n te n n a s
0 ,6 m
1 ,2 m x x
2 ,0 m x x x x
3 ,0 m x x x x
4 ,0 m x x
1 8 ,7 G H z 2 3 G H z 2 6 G H z 2 6 G H z 2 8 G H z 2 8 G H z 3 2 G H z 3 8 G H z
(R 2 2 0 ) (R 2 2 0 ) (R 2 2 0 ) (R 2 6 0 ) (R 2 6 0 ) (R 3 2 0 ) (R 3 2 0 ) (R 3 2 0 )
L e n s a n te n n a
0 ,1 5 m x x x x x x
0 ,2 6 m x x x x x x
0 ,3 m x x x x x x
0 ,6 m x x x x x x
1 ,2 m x x x x
P a r a b o lic a n te n n a s
0 ,3 m x x x x x x x x
1 ,2 m x x x x
2 ,0 m x x
3 ,0 m
3 ,7 m
S h e ll a n te n n a s
1 ,2 m x x x x
2 ,0 m
3 ,0 m
4 ,0 m
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g A n te n n a s
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d O v e r v ie w
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
7 ,4 G H z - 3 8 G H z
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .6 0
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
O v e r v ie w o f th e w a v e g u id e fla n g e s in to d e p e n d e n c e o f th e fr e q u e n c y a n d th e O D U
O D U -L E X O D U -L M X O D U L O D U -S O D U -N a n te n n a
7 ,5 G H z R 8 4 R 8 4 (R 8 4 )
8 G H z R 8 4 (R 8 4 )
1 1 G H z R 1 2 0 R 1 2 0 (R 1 2 0 )
1 3 G H z R 1 2 0 R 1 2 0 (R 1 2 0 )
1 5 G H z R 1 4 0 R 1 4 0 (R 1 4 0 )
1 8 ,7 G H z R 2 2 0 R 2 2 0 R 2 2 0 R 2 2 0 (R 2 2 0 )
2 3 G H z R 2 2 0 R 2 2 0 R 2 2 0 R 2 2 0 (R 2 2 0 )
2 6 G H z R 2 2 0 R 2 2 0 (R 2 2 0 )
R 2 6 0 R 2 6 0 (R 2 6 0 )
2 8 G H z R 2 6 0 (R 2 6 0 )
R 3 2 0 R 3 2 0 (R 3 2 0 )
3 2 G H z R 3 2 0 R 3 2 0 (R 3 2 0 )
3 8 G H z R 3 2 0 R 3 2 0 (R 3 2 0 )
In s ta lla tio n m a te r ia l fo r w a v e g u id e (g e n e r a l):

1 . S e a lin g p la te a n d s c r e w s / c o n n e c tin g k it fla n g e /d e v ic e
to c o n n e c t th e w a v e g u id e to th e fe e d
2 . F le x . w a v e g u id e ( o p tio n a l)
3 . S e a lin g p la te w ith s c r e w s a n d n u ts / c o n n e c tin g k it fla n g e /fla n g e
4 . T r a n s itio n k it
5 . W a v e g u id e
6 . T r a n s itio n k it
o p tio n a l w ith :
a ir s o c k e t M 5 /M 6 /M 8 fo r h o s e c o u p lin g w ith I.D . = 1 2 ,5 m m
( fo r d e h y d r a tio n o f th e w a v e g u id e ) fix in g o f th e w a v e g u id e
w ith c a b le - c la m p s a n d r u b b e r in s e r t
7 . P r e s s u r e w in d o w a n d s c r e w s
o n
to c o n n e c t th e w a v e g u id e to th e O D U ( p r e s s u r e tig h t) -p ro file r a il 4 0 /2 2
(Id e n t.-n o . s e e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .6 6 -6 7 ) o r
-M o - c la m p ( A N 0 0 2 3 9 4 8 1 ) w ith
s o c k e t h e a d s c re w M 8 x 1 0 (A N 0 0 0 1 3 1 2 5 )
a n d A P M -a d a p te r (A N 0 0 1 1 4 2 9 6 )
s e e m o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n :
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .7 0 2 .0 0 F IM O - c la m p s
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 2 3 .7 0 M o u n tin g o f W G - c la m p s
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
B e a rb .
. . . . 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g
. . . .
D ra w n
G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d
W a v e g u id e - o v e r v ie w
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
B la tt/S h e e t
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .6 5
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
1 8 G H z 2 3 G H z 2 6 G H z 2 8 G H z 3 2 G H z 3 8 G H z
O D U -N x x x
O D U -S x x x x
O D U -L M x x x x x x
O D U -L x x x
d e s c r ip tio n ty p e Id . - n o . R 2 2 0 R 2 2 0 R 2 2 0 R 2 6 0 R 2 6 0 R 3 2 0 R 3 2 0 R 3 2 0
w a v e g u id e A 1 1 0 /1 9 A N 0 0 8 1 6 1 5 4 x
A 1 1 0 /2 3 A N 0 0 8 3 8 5 8 2 x
A 1 8 5 A N 0 0 5 7 4 0 8 3 x x
A 2 3 0 A N 0 0 7 9 7 6 7 7 x
A 2 9 0 A N 0 0 7 9 7 6 7 8 x x x
tr a n s itio n k it A 1 1 0 -1 9 /P B R 2 2 0 A N 0 0 8 1 4 4 1 2 x
A 1 1 0 -2 3 /P B R 2 2 0 A N 0 0 8 3 4 4 4 5 x
A 1 8 5 /P B R 2 2 0 A N 0 0 5 7 8 5 3 0 x
A 1 8 5 -P B R 2 6 0 A N 0 0 2 3 3 2 3 2 x
A 2 3 0 /P B R 2 2 0 A N 0 0 7 9 8 1 0 7 x
A 2 9 0 /P B R 2 2 0 A N 0 0 1 1 8 6 8 3 x
A 2 9 0 /P B R 2 6 0 A N 0 0 1 1 8 6 8 4 x x
A 2 9 0 /P B R 3 2 0 A N 0 0 2 3 7 3 5 9 x
A 2 9 0 /P B R 3 2 0 A N 0 0 2 2 1 4 2 1 x
e a r th in g k it A 4 0 -A 2 9 0 A N 0 0 0 0 8 6 9 3 x x x x x x x
c la m p R F E /1 x Ø 3 8 /A 1 1 0 -A 1 8 5 A N 0 0 1 1 4 2 7 2 x x x
R F E /1 x Ø 2 8 /A 2 3 0 -A 2 9 0 A N 0 0 1 1 4 2 7 1 x x x x
r u b b e r in s e r t Ø 3 8 -A 1 1 0 A N 0 0 3 2 0 4 1 1 x x
Ø 3 8 -A 1 8 5 A N 0 0 3 2 0 4 1 5 x x
Ø 2 8 -A 2 3 0 A N 0 0 8 5 4 0 6 1 x
Ø 2 8 -A 2 9 0 A N 0 0 8 5 4 0 6 2 x x x
p r e s s u r e w in d o w P B R /U B R 2 2 0 A N 0 0 0 1 6 4 1 8 x x
P B R /U B R 2 2 0 0 5 M A F 0 0 0 0 9 A A Y x
P B R /U B R 2 6 0 A N 0 0 0 5 7 3 5 3 x x
P B R /U B R 3 2 0 0 5 M A F 0 0 0 1 4 A A D x
P B R /U B R 3 2 0 A N 0 0 0 5 2 1 3 6 x x
s e a lin g p la te P B R /U B R 2 2 0 A N 0 0 0 0 8 8 8 0 x x x
P B R /U B R 2 6 0 A N 0 0 0 5 7 3 5 4 x x
P B R /U B R 3 2 0 0 5 M A F 0 0 0 0 8 A A W x
P B R /U B R 3 2 0 A N 0 0 0 5 5 6 2 6 x x
fle x . W G P B R 2 2 0 /4 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 2 6 -0 0 1 8 x x x
P B R 2 2 0 /6 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 2 7 -0 0 1 7 x x x
P B R 2 2 0 /9 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 2 5 -0 0 1 9 x x x
P B R 2 6 0 / 4 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 2 2 -0 0 1 2 x x
P B R 2 6 0 / 6 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 2 3 -0 0 1 1 x x
P B R 2 6 0 / 9 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 2 4 -0 0 1 0 x x
P B R 3 2 0 / 4 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 4 4 -0 0 1 6 x x x
P B R 3 2 0 / 6 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 2 0 -0 0 1 4 x x x
P B R 3 2 0 / 9 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 2 1 -0 0 1 3 x x x
s c re w fla n g e /d e v ic e 4 x M 3 x 8 A N 0 0 7 2 0 0 1 1 x x x x x x x x
s c re w fla n g e /fla n g e l 4 x M 3 x 1 2 A N 0 0 7 2 2 5 4 2 x x x x x x x x
n u t fla n g e /fla n g e 4 x M 3 A N 0 0 2 2 1 0 6 6 x x x x x x x x
w a ll fe e d th ro u g h C E S 4 / A 1 1 0 A N 0 0 3 3 2 2 9 5 x x
C E S 3 / A 1 8 5 A N 0 0 3 3 2 2 9 4 x x x
C E S 2 / A 2 9 0 A N 0 0 7 3 7 1 7 8 x x x
s e e a ls o M o - in s tr u c tio n : 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .7 0 1 -d e h y d r a tio n
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .7 0 2 -F IM O - c la m p s
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .7 0 3 -W G fla n g e c o n n e c tio n s
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 2 1 .3 1 - c la m p d is ta n c e fo r fix in g o f w a v e g u id e
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 2 3 .7 0 - M o u n tin g o f W G - c la m p
6 0 .8 8 0 0 .1 1 5 .5 4 - G r o u n d in g c o n n e c tio n fo r A L F O R M - W G
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g W a v e g u id e
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d W a v e g u id e - a c c e s s o r ie s
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
1 8 - 3 8 G H z
B la tt/S h e e t
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .6 6
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
7 ,5 G H z 1 1 G H z 1 3 G H z 1 5 G H z
d e s c r ip tio n ty p e Id . - n o . R 8 4 R 1 2 0 R 1 2 0 R 1 4 0
w a v e g u id e A 7 5 A N 0 0 7 5 6 3 1 0 x
A 8 2 /1 5 A N 0 0 7 7 7 5 7 1 x
A 1 1 0 A N 0 0 5 9 8 8 7 3 x x
A 1 4 0 A N 0 0 1 9 5 0 4 6 x
tr a n s itio n A 7 5 /P D R 8 4 A N 0 0 1 1 6 1 0 5 x
A 7 5 /P D R 7 0 A N 0 0 7 6 5 3 1 1 x
A 8 2 /P B R 1 4 0 A N 0 0 2 3 2 8 2 7 x
A 1 1 0 /P B R 1 2 0 A N 0 0 2 2 7 7 7 4 x x
A 1 1 0 /P D R 1 2 0 A N 0 0 7 3 6 6 9 9 x x
A 1 4 0 /P B R 1 4 0 A N 0 0 0 7 8 5 2 5 x
w a v e g u id e c h a n g e P D R 7 0 -P B R 8 4 A N 0 0 2 3 5 3 8 8 x
e a r th in g k it A 4 0 -A 2 9 0 A N 0 0 0 0 8 6 9 3 x x x x
c la m p R F E /1 x Ø 6 2 A N 0 0 1 1 4 2 7 7 x x
R F E /1 x Ø 3 8 A N 0 0 1 1 4 2 7 2 x x x
c la m p lin in g Ø 6 2 -A 7 5 A N 0 0 7 6 4 5 5 5 x
Ø 6 2 -A 8 2 A N 0 0 5 9 4 8 9 1 x
Ø 3 8 -A 1 1 0 A N 0 0 3 2 0 4 1 1 x x
Ø 3 8 -A 1 4 0 A N 0 0 1 9 6 0 1 6 x
c o n n e c tin g k it P D R 8 4 fl/fl A N 0 0 7 5 8 7 2 1 x
P D R 1 2 0 fl/fl A N 0 0 5 9 5 3 1 9 x x
c o n n e c tin g k it P D R 8 4 fl/d A N 0 0 0 2 0 3 5 0 x
P D R 1 2 0 fl/d A N 0 0 0 2 8 6 5 4 x x
fe e d e r s h im P D R 8 4 A N 0 0 6 8 7 7 4 9 x
P D R 1 2 0 A N 0 0 1 4 8 3 2 3 x x
P B R 1 2 0 A N 0 0 1 6 2 8 2 0 x x
s e a lin g P D R 8 4 A N 0 0 5 8 9 7 3 5 x
P D R 1 2 0 A N 0 0 2 0 2 0 6 2 x x
P B R 1 2 0 A N 0 0 1 4 8 3 9 6 x x
p r e s s u r e w in d o w U B R /P B R 8 4 8 4 0 0 4 8 8 -0 0 1 3 x
U B R /P B R 1 2 0 8 4 0 0 4 8 7 -0 0 1 4 x x
U B R 1 4 0 A N 0 0 0 7 7 0 8 1 x
s e a lin g p la te U B R 1 4 0 A N 0 0 0 8 2 3 6 1 x
fle x . w a v e g u id e P D R 8 4 /4 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 3 5 -0 0 1 7 x
P D R 8 4 /6 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 3 6 -0 0 1 6 x
P D R 1 2 0 /4 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 3 3 -0 0 1 9 x x
P D R 1 2 0 /6 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 3 1 -0 0 1 1 x x
P B R /P D R 8 4 /4 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 7 0 -0 0 6 2 x
P B R /P D R 8 4 /6 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 7 0 -0 0 5 4 x
P B R /P D R 8 4 /9 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 7 0 -0 0 4 7 x
P B R /P D R 1 2 0 / 4 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 7 0 -0 0 1 3 x x
P B R /P D R 1 2 0 / 6 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 3 2 -0 0 2 8 x x
P B R /P D R 1 2 0 / 9 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 3 2 -0 0 1 0 x x
s e e a ls o M o - in s tr u c tio n s :
P B R /P D R 1 4 0 / 4 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 2 8 -0 0 1 6 x
P B R /P D R 1 4 0 / 6 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 2 9 -0 0 1 5 x - 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .7 0 2 - F IM O - c la m p s
P B R /P D R 1 4 0 / 9 0 0 m m 8 4 0 0 4 3 0 -0 0 1 2 x - 6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 2 1 .3 1 -
s c re w 4 x M 4 x 1 0 A N 0 0 7 2 7 6 6 0 x C la m p s - d is ta n c e fo r fix in g o f W G
s c re w 4 x M 4 x 1 6 A N 0 0 7 0 7 3 0 5 x x x x - 6 0 .8 8 0 0 .0 2 3 .7 0 -
M o u n tin g o f W G - c la m p
n u t 4 x M 4 A N 0 0 2 2 1 0 6 7 x
- 6 0 .8 8 0 0 .1 1 5 .5 4 -
w a ll fe e d th r o u g h C E S 5 -Ø 7 0 m m A N 0 0 0 4 1 5 1 1 x x G r o u n d in g c o n n e c tio n
C E S 4 -Ø 4 0 m m A N 0 0 3 3 2 2 9 5 x x x fo r A L F O R M - w a v e g u id e (W G )
- 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .7 0 3 - F la n g e c o n n e c tio n s
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g W a v e g u id e
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d W a v e g u id e - a c c e s s o r ie s
c
. .
N P I/L M 1 9 .0 8 .0 5
. .
M s
N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
7 ,4 - 1 5 G H z
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .6 7
a N P I/L M 2 1 .0 9 .0 4 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
W a v e g u id e - d e h y d r a tio n
T h e fo llo w in g ta b le g iv e s a n o v e r v ie w a b o u t th e le n g th o f th e w a v e g u id e a t w h ic h a d e h y d r a tio n is n e c e s s a r y a fte r th e flu s h a n d
p re s s u re te s t.
C o n d itio n : T h e w a v e g u id e is in s ta lle d o n ly in th e o u ts id e a r e a .
A lfo r m - w a v e g u id e le n g th o f w a v e g u id e A tte n tio n :

A 8 2 > 5 m M a x . le n g th o f th e w a v e g u id e fo r O D U - L E X /L M X : 8 m
A 1 1 0 > 5 m
A 1 4 0 > 5 m
A 1 8 5 > 7 m
A 2 3 0 > 1 0 m
A 2 9 0 > 1 5 m
A flu s h o f th e w a v e g u id e w ith d r y a ir o r N itr o g e n is n e c e s s a r y a fte r e v e r y

in s ta lla tio n o r e v e r y r e b u ild in g .
P u r g in g v o lu m e s o f w a v e g u id e :
p u r g in g -
v o lu m e
A L F O R M v o lu m e
[l/m ]
[l/m ]
A 8 2 0 ,6 1 ,8
A 1 1 0 0 ,2 5 0 ,7 5
A 1 4 0 0 ,2 0 ,6
A 1 8 5 0 ,1 0 ,3
A 2 3 0 0 ,0 8 0 ,2 4
A 2 9 0 0 ,0 4 0 ,1 2
h o s e 1 2 x 2 0 ,1 1 0 ,3 3
h o s e 1 2 ,5 x 3 0 ,1 2 0 ,3 6
S I G N A L IS I E R U N G 2 3 0 V ~ L U F T
0
I
S IC H E R U N G
F E U C H T E IN D IK A T O R L E IT U N G S L Ü F T E R
E S C L L U E 1 1 0
2 0 3 0
S I G N A L IS I E R U N G (L L U E 3 1 0 )
4 0
E N T E R
S T Ö R U N G B E T R IE B
R E G E N E R IE R E N
R S 2 3 2
C o n n e c tio n w ith h o s e - ta il fittin g

to th e tr a n s itio n k it o f th e w a v e g u id e .
6 0 , 6 1 6 2
6 3 6 5 6 0 L L U E 1 1 0 (2 4 V D C ) A N 0 0 2 1 7 1 6 3
6 4
S IG N A L IS IE R U N G 2 3 0 V ~ L U F T
(4 8 /6 0 V D C ) A N 0 0 2 1 7 1 8 1
(2 3 0 V A C ) A N 0 0 2 1 7 1 8 3
0
I
S IC H E R U N G
F E U C H T E IN D IK A T O R L E IT U N G S L Ü F T E R
L L U E 1 1 0
6 1 L L U E 3 1 0 (2 4 V D C ) A N 0 0 2 1 7 2 0 3
E S C
6 6
2 0 3 0
S IG N A L IS IE R U N G (L L U E 3 1 0 )
4 0
(4 8 /6 9 V D C ) A N 0 0 2 1 7 2 1 2
S T Ö R U N G B E T R IE B E N T E R
R E G E N E R IE R E N
R S 2 3 2
(2 3 0 V A C ) A N 0 0 2 1 7 2 1 3
6 2 a ir d is tr ib u to r L U V T 6 A N 0 0 1 2 2 5 9 3
6 3 h o s e , in s id e 1 2 x 2 m m A N 0 0 8 4 4 0 0 2
6 4 h o s e , o u ts id e 1 2 ,5 x 3 m m A N 0 0 7 4 3 1 2 9
s e e m o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n s : 6 5 c la m p A N 0 0 1 1 4 2 7 0
A A S E _ IC S .0 2 1 W a v e g u id e - D e h y d r a tio n A L F O R M + F L E X W E L L 6 6 a d a p te r fo r w a ll- m o u n tin g A N 0 0 1 1 4 2 9 5
A A S E _ IC S .0 2 0 D e h y d ra to r L L U E 1 1 0 _ L L U E 3 1 0
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
B e a rb .
. . . . 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g
. . . .
D ra w n
G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d
W a v e g u id e - d e h y d r a tio n
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
B la tt/S h e e t
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .6 8
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
P o te n tia l e q u a lis a tio n o n b u ild in g s w ith s e p a r a te d e x te r n a l lig h tn in g p r o te c tio n to IE C 6 1 0 2 4
(Illu s tr a tio n o n ly e x a m p le )
N o te :
T h e in t e g r a tio n o f th e r a d io s y s t e m in s it e o f th e b u ild in g lig h tn in g p r o t e c t io n m u s t b e e x e c u te d b y a lig h tn in g p r o te c tio n c o m p a n y .
T h is h a s d ir e c t in flu e n c e o f t h e s e p a r a tio n d is ta n c e s a n d s o a ls o o f th e s ite o f t h e a n te n n a a n d th e c a b le tr a y s .
T h e r e fo r e c o r r e s p o n d in g c o o r d in a tio n s a r e n e c e s s a r y in tim e b e tw e e n th e lig h tn in g p r o te c t io n c o m p a n y a n d c u s t o m e r ,
i.e . a lr e a d y in th e p la n n in g p h a s e a n d b e fo r e th e b e g in n in g o f th e in s ta lla tio n .
T o a v o id th a t lig h tn in g p a r tia l c u r r e n ts r e a c h in t o th e p r o te c te d b u ild in g , is o la te d a r r e s t in g g e a r a r e r e c o m m e n d e d .

S o th e c o a x ia l c a b le s w h ic h m a k e a n e le c tr ic a l c o n n e c t io n b e tw e e n I D U a n d O D U a n d n o r m a lly n o t r e s is te n t a g a in s t lig h tn in g s t r o k e
a r e p r o te c te d s im u lta n e o u s ly w ith th a t.
T h e s e p a r a te d d is ta n c e s h a s to b e k e p t b e t w e e n a ll m e ta llic s e c tio n s c o n n e c t e d to lig h tn in g p r o t e c tio n s y s te m a n d th e r a d io s y s te m

(a n te n n a , s u p p o rt, c a b le tr a y s a n d c a b le ) ,
e .g .:
h e ig h t o f th e b u ild in g 1 0 m --- L = 2 0 m
n u m b e r o f th e a rre s to r 2 ---- n = 2 ; k C = 0 ,6 6
p r o te c t io n c la s s III ---- k i = 0 ,0 5
is o la tio n : a ir --- k m = 1
s e p a r a te d d is ta n c e s = k i x k C /k m x L (m ) = 0 ,6 6 m
r a d iu s 4 5 m
L P Z 0 A :
d ir e c tly lig h tn in g s tr o k e p o s s ib ly ;
u n d a m p e d e le c tr o m a g n e tic lig h tn in g fie ld s
lig h tn in g p r o te c tio n r o d
L P Z 0 B :
lig h tn in g p r o te c tio n r o d d ir e c tly lig h tn in g s tr o k e is n o t p o s s ib ly ;

u n d a m p e d e le c tr o m a g n e tic lig h tn in g fie ld s
s e p a r a tio n
d is ta n c e
s
L P Z 0 1 :
d ir e c tly lig h tn in g s tr o k e is n o t
p o s s ib ly ; O P E R A T I O N
R A D IO U N I T A L A R M S
d a m p e d e le c tr o m . lig h tn . fie ld s P O W E R
1
D C - d is t r ib u to r . P o w e r B o x B 1 6
ID U
5
1 0
1 5
c a b le fo r p o te n tia l e q u a lis a t io n
p o te n tia l (c ro s s -s e c tio n A C u > /= 1 6 m m ² )
2 0
e q u a lis a tio n e .g . c a b le H 0 7 V -R 1 G 1 6 s w
p a n e l (A N 0 0 2 6 1 9 1 1 )
2 5
If th e s e p a ra te d d is ta n c e s to IE C 6 1 0 2 4 c a n b e k e p t fo r th e c o m p le te in s ta lla tio n (a n te n n a , s u p p o r t, O D U a n d c o a x ia l- c a b le w ith

c a b le tr a y s ) , th e s h ie ld in g o f th e c o a x ia l c a b le a ll 2 0 m a n d b e fo r th e e n try o f th e b u ild in g , a s w e ll a s a ll m e ta llic s e c tio n s o f t h e s y s te m a r e
to c
o n n e c te d w ith th e p o te n tia l e q u a lis a tio n p a n e l - b u t n o t w it h th e e x te r n a l lig t h n in g p ro te c tio n .
If th e s e p a ra te d d is ta n c e s c a n n o t b e k e p t, c o r r e s p o n d in g m e a s u re s h a v e to b e c o o r d in a te d w it h th e lig h tn in g p r o te c tio n c o m p a n y a n d
th e c u s to m e r o r th e s y s te m is t o in s ta ll a n a lo g u e s h e e t 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .7 0 .
M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g P o te n tia l e q u a lis a tio n
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d o n b u ild in g s w ith
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
s e p a ra te d e x te rn a l L P S
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .7 0
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
E a r th in g /L ig h tn in g p r o te c tio n o n b u ild in g s w ith n o n -s e p a r a te d e x te r n a l lig h tn in g p r o te c tio n s y s te m (to V D E 0 8 5 5 p a r t 3 0 0 /0 7 .2 0 0 2 )
L ig h tn in g p r o te c tio n r o d N o te :
W h e n e v e r th e O u td o o r U n it is m o u n te d o n to p o f a m a s t o r in a n o th e r e x p o s e d
p o s itio n , a lig h tn in g p r o te c tio n r o d s h o u ld b e p r o v id e d a t th e p e a k o f th e m a s t.
T h e le n g th o f th is lig tn in g r o d m u s t b e s e le c te d s o th a t - m e a s u re d fro m th e p e a k -
4 5 ° a ll in s ta lle d u n it s lie w ith in a n a n g le o f 4 5 ° .
4 5 ° T h is lig h tn in g r o d is p a r t o f th e lig h tn in g p r o te c tio n c o n c e p t o f th e r e s p e c tiv e
b u ild in g /to w e r a n d m u s t b e in te g r a te d in to t h e la tt e r b y a s p e c ia l lig tn in g
p r o te c tio n c o m p a n y .
W a v e g u id e g r o u n d in g e v e r y 2 0 m !
w ith e a r th in g k it ( s e e : 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .6 6 - 6 7 )
a n d b a n d - e a r th in g c la m p ( 8 2 0 2 1 1 1 - 0 0 1 8 ) - fo r tu b e - Ø 2 6 ,9 - 1 6 5 m m
o r
w ith e a r th in g c la m p a t
te n s io n in g b e lt k it ( A N 0 0 1 3 5 5 5 7 ) fo r tu b e - Ø > 1 6 5 m m ( le n g th = 1 m )
o r
a t e x is t in g e a r t h in g p o in ts
e a r th in g o f th e O D U ( s e e a ls o 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .7 2 )
C o a x . c a b le
w ith e a r th in g k it ( 8 1 0 1 9 5 4 - 0 0 1 2 - c a b le Ø 5 - 1 1 m m / 8 1 0 1 9 5 5 - 0 0 1 1 - c a b le Ø 1 2 -3 0 m m )
e .g . O D U -S
O P E R A T IO N
R A D IO U N IT A L A R M S
a n d e a r th in g c la m p fo r fla t s e c tio n o r r o u n d m a te r ia l
h a s to b e c o n n e c t a t e x is tin g p o te n tia l e q u a lis a tio n o r a t th e lig th n in g p r o t e c tio n s y s te m
P O W E R
( e v e r y 2 0 m a t le a s t a n d a t th e w a ll- fe e d - th r o u g h , b u t n o t a t g a s - , w a te r o r h e a tin g p ip e s ) !
T h e s h ie ld o f th e c o a x . c a b le ( L i8 / L C F 1 / 4 " ) is n o t r e s is ta n t a g a in s t lig h tn in g s tr o k e o f 5 0 k A -1 0 /3 5 0 µ s .
S o w e s u g g e s t e ith e r to u s e 1 /2 " - c a b le o r to in s ta ll th e c a b le in m e ta llic c a b le tr a y s c lo s e d w e ll o r m e ta llic
p ip e s , w h ic h a r e c o n n e c te d to th e p o te n tia l e q u a lis a tio n a t b o th e n d s .
T h e in n e r c o n d u c to r o f th e c o a x . c a b le is p r o te c te d o n b o th e n d s b y th e in te g r a te d S P D ( s u r g e p r o te c tiv e
d e v ic e ) in th e O D U a n d ID U .
m a x . 1 m
o p tio n a l / a d d itio n a l
o v e r v o lta g e p r o te c tio n
w a ll fe e d th r o u g h (A N 0 0 0 4 6 6 0 0 );
s e e 1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .7 4 E
F
D
B
C
A ID U A
e a r th in g c a b le H 0 7 V - R 1 G 1 6
(A N 0 0 2 6 1 9 0 9 )
P o te n tia l e q u a lis a tio n
A G ro u n d in g - In d o o r U n it
In c a s e o f la c q u e r e d r a c k u p r ig h ts , s p e c ia l
P r im e p o te n tia l e q u a lis a tio n
c a g e n u ts n o . 7 0 1 9 7 9 m u s t b e u s e d .
B C ro u n d in g - R a c k u p r ig h t
C G ro u n d in g - C a b in e t d o o r
C r o u n d in g c o n n e c tio n s to z in c - p la te d p a r ts - 6 0 .8 8 0 0 .1 1 5 .2 6 D G ro u n d in g - S id e p a n e ls
m o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n - F IM O E a r th in g A A S E _ IC S .0 1 9 E G ro u n d in g - R o o f
e a r th in g o f A lfo r m - W G 6 0 .8 8 0 0 .1 1 5 .5 4 F G ro u n d in g - R e a r p a n e l
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 4 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
. . . . B e a rb .
D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g E a r th in g - p o te n tia l e q u a lis a tio n
. . . . G e p rü ft
C h e c k e d o n b u ild in g s w ith
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. N a m /S T D
A b t./D e p t.
n o n -s e p a ra te d e x te rn a l L P S
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .7 1
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
O D U -L X O D U -S O D U -L
g r o u n d in g c o n n e c tio n
( h o u s in g /M 8 )
g r o u n d in g c o n n e c tio n
( h o u s in g /M 5 )
S e le c tio n o f th e c a b le lu g
if n e c e s s a r y :
- c a b le lu g M 5 - 1 6
(A N 0 0 4 4 1 7 5 5 )
c a b le H O 7 V - R 1 G 1 6 B K - c a b le lu g M 8 - 1 6
(A N 0 0 2 6 1 9 1 1 ) (A N 0 0 1 5 1 4 0 2 )
c a b le le n g th : a p p r o x . 0 ,5 m
- c a b le lu g M 1 0 - 1 6
(A N 0 0 0 1 5 5 8 4 )
n u t M 1 0 e a r th in g c la m p fo r fla t p r o file s
w r e n c h s iz e : S W 1 6 (1 7 ) c la m p in g r a n g e 8 - 1 8 m m ; Ø 7 - 1 0 m m
(A N 0 0 7 2 0 8 0 8 )
h e x a g o n b o lt M 8
w r e n c h s iz : S W 1 3
M u lti- c la m p ( A N 0 0 2 2 4 9 0 6 )
U n iv e r s a l u s e a s
T -, c ro s s -, p a ra lle l- a n d jo in t c la m p
b a n d - e a r th in g - c la m p fo r 8 m m w ir e w ith h e x a g o n s c r e w a n d
(8 2 0 2 1 1 1 -0 0 1 8 ) n u t M 1 0 ; n u t M 1 0
fo r p ip e - Ø 3 3 ,7 - 1 6 5 m m , c o m p le te o f s ta in le s s s te e l
c o n d u c to r c ro s s -s e c tio n 1 6 ; 2 5 ; 5 0 m m ² S W 1 6 (1 7 )
(p ro v e d to E N 5 0 1 6 4 -1 /1 0 0 k A -1 0 /3 5 0 )
(p ro v e d to E N 5 0 1 6 4 -1 / 1 0 0 k A -1 0 /3 5 0 )
M o u n tin g in s tr u c tio n :
C r o u n d in g c o n n e c tio n s to z in c - p la te d p a r ts - 6 0 .8 8 0 0 .1 1 5 .2 6
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
B e a rb .
. . . . D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g
E a r th in g O D U
G e p rü ft
. . . . C h e c k e d
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .7 2
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
A d d itio n a l ( o p p tio n a l) o v e r v o lta g e p r o te c tio n
w ith c a p s u le a n d m o u n tin g m a te r ia l
(A N 0 0 0 4 6 6 0 0 ) L ig h tn in g p r o te c tio n c a p s u le s
(A N 0 0 0 8 9 0 0 0 )
N o te r e g a r d in g v o lta g e a r r e s to r c o m p o n e n ts fille d w ith g a s :

D e p e n d in g o n th e v a lu e o f th e in te r fe r e n c e p u ls e s , s e v e r a l lig h tn in g
s tr ik e s c a n b e d iv e r te d w ith o u t a n y d a m a g e o r m a lfu n c tio n s o f th e
a r r e s to r b e in g v is ib le fr o m th e o u ts id e .
T h e o r e tic a lly , th e s ta tic r e s p o n s e v o lta g e c a n b e m e a s u r e d
to v e r ify th a t th e a r r e s to r is s till fu lly o p e r a tio n a l. H o w e v e r ,
S W 1 9 in p r a c tic a l a p p lic a tio n s , it is r e a s o n a b le a n d r e c o m m e n d e d to
r e p la c e th e a r r e s to r s a t r e g u la r in te r v a ls d e p e n d in g o n th e
n u m b e r o f lig h tn in g s tr ik e s n o r m a lly o c c u r r in g o n th e r e s p e c tiv e
in s ta lla tio n s ite .
2 4 ,9
S W 1 4 O D U
2 3 3 2 ,3
5 5 ,3
N - c o n n e c to r ( m a le )
O v e r v o lta g e p r o te c tio n
c a b le H O 7 V - R 1 G 1 6 B K lu g M 8 - 1 6 (A N 0 0 0 4 6 6 0 0 )
(A N 0 0 2 6 1 9 1 1 ) - o u ts id e (A N 0 0 1 5 1 4 0 2 )
o r T ig h te n h e x n u t S W 1 4
c a b le H O 7 V - R 1 G 1 6 G N Y E u s in g to r q u e > 6 N m
(A N 0 0 2 6 1 9 0 9 ) - in s id e
M o u n tin g h o le
1 6 ,1
T ig h te n h e x n u t S W 1 9
u s in g to r q u e > 6 N m . 1 3 ,7
In s ta lla tio n p la te m a d e
o f s p e c ia l s te e l o r N - c o n n e c to r ( m a le )
g a lv a n iz e d s te e l s h e e t
ID U
o p e r a tin g r o o m
. M D R S 1 5 5 S
. . . . a 0 5 D a tu m /D a te N a m e
B e a rb .
. . . . D ra w n 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M e s s in g
A d d itio n a l lig h tn in g p r o te c tio n

G e p rü ft
. . . . C h e c k e d
. . . . N a m /S T D
. . . . A b t./D e p t.
1 5 .8 5 6 5 .0 1 5 .7 4
a N P I/L M 0 1 .0 3 .0 5 M s 0 1
S V
05PHA00151AAM
Systems
MDRS 155 S
Commissioning Instructions
Release 5.1
05PHA00152AAP CUA
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
D-71520 Backnang
Telefon (07191) 13-0 Telefax (07191) 13-3212


D-71520 Backnang

Redmond.
05PHA00152AAP CUA MDRS 155 S Commissioning Instructions
Contents
Contents................................................................................................... I
Figures ....................................................................................................V
Tables .....................................................................................................IX
Abbreviations ........................................................................................XI
1 Introduction ....................................................................................1-1
1.1 Preface .................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Range of validity - Systems ................................................................................................ 1-1
1.3 System and commissioning documents ........................................................................... 1-2
1.4 List of measuring units ....................................................................................................... 1-3
1.4.1 Minimum requirements regarding the Service PC.......................................................... 1-4
1.5 Commissioning process ..................................................................................................... 1-5
1.6 Acceptance ........................................................................................................................... 1-6
2 Frequency Plans ............................................................................2-1

2.1 7.5 GHz band ........................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 Frequency plan for 7.5 GHz systems acc. to ITU-R F.385-7 ......................................... 2-1
2.1.1.1 128 MLQAM systems - with 161 MHz duplex spacing with ODU L ........................ 2-1
2.1.2 Frequency plan for 7.5 GHz systems acc. to ITU-R F.385-7, Annex 1 (for Germany)... 2-1
2.1.2.1 128 MLQAM systems - with 154 MHz duplex spacing with ODU LX ...................... 2-1
2.1.3 Frequency plan for 7.5 GHz systems acc. to ITU-R F.385-7 (for export)....................... 2-2
2.1.3.1 128 MLQAM systems - with 154 MHz duplex spacing with ODU LX (for export) ... 2-2
2.2 11 GHz band ......................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.2.1 Frequency plan for 11 GHz systems acc. to ITU-R F.387.............................................. 2-6
2.3 13 GHz band ......................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.1 Frequency plan for 13 GHz systems acc. to ITU-R F.497-6 .......................................... 2-9
2.3.1.1 128 MLQAM systems - with 266 MHz duplex spacing with ODU L ........................ 2-9
2.3.1.2 128 MLQAM systems - with 266 MHz duplex spacing with ODU LX ...................... 2-9
2.4 15 GHz band ....................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.4.1 Frequency plan for 15 GHz systems acc. to ITU-R F.636-3 ........................................ 2-10
2.4.1.1 128 MLQAM systems - with 315 MHz duplex spacing with ODU L ...................... 2-10
2.5 18.7 GHz band .................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.5.1 Frequency plan for 18 GHz systems acc. to CEPT ERC/REC 12-03 E ....................... 2-12
2.5.1.1 128 MLQAM systems - 27.5 MHz pattern with ODU S ......................................... 2-12
2.5.1.2 16 MLQAM systems - 55 MHz pattern with ODU S .............................................. 2-13
2.5.2 Frequency plan for 18 GHz systems – Brazil ............................................................... 2-13
Marconi I
MDRS 155 S Commissioning Instructions 05PHA00152AAP CUA
2.6 23 GHz band........................................................................................................................ 2-14

2.6.1 Frequency plan for 23 GHz systems acc. to CEPT T/R 13-02 E Annex A................... 2-14
2.6.1.1 128 MLQAM systems - 28 MHz pattern with ODU S ............................................ 2-14
2.6.2 Frequency plan for 23 GHz systems – Mexico ............................................................. 2-15
2.6.3 Frequency plan for 23 GHz systems acc. to Decree No. 83/92 – Brazil ...................... 2-16
2.6.3.1 16 MLQAM systems - 56/87.5 MHz pattern with ODU S ...................................... 2-16
2.7 26 GHz band........................................................................................................................ 2-17
2.7.1 Frequency plan for 26 GHz systems acc. to CEPT T/R 13-02 E Annex B................... 2-17
2.8 28 GHz band........................................................................................................................ 2-19
2.8.1 Frequency plan for 28 GHz systems acc. to CEPT T/R 13-02 E Annex ...................... 2-19
2.9 38 GHz band........................................................................................................................ 2-21
2.9.1 Frequency plan for 38 GHz systems acc. to ITU-R F.749-1......................................... 2-21
2.9.1.1 128 MLQAM systems - 28 MHz pattern with ODU LX .......................................... 2-21
2.9.1.2 16 MLQAM systems - 56 MHz pattern with ODU LX ............................................ 2-22
3 Test Routines Necessary Before Commissioning ...................... 3-1

3.1 Checking the installation..................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Installation in racks ......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1.1 Rack mounting......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1.2 Grounding the rack .................................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.2 Grounding (acc. to DIN VDE 0855 Part 300).................................................................. 3-3
3.1.2.1 Antenna grounding .................................................................................................. 3-7
3.1.2.2 Outdoor Unit grounding ........................................................................................... 3-8
3.1.2.3 Coaxial cable grounding .......................................................................................... 3-9
3.1.2.4 Indoor Unit grounding .............................................................................................. 3-9
3.2 Cable installation (examples)............................................................................................ 3-10
3.3 Waveguide installation (examples) .................................................................................. 3-12
3.4 Labelling.............................................................................................................................. 3-14
3.4.1 Labelling the Outdoor Unit ............................................................................................ 3-15
3.4.2 Labelling the cable in a 19" or ETSI rack...................................................................... 3-16
3.4.3 Cable labelling .............................................................................................................. 3-16
3.4.4 Indoor Unit labelling ...................................................................................................... 3-17
3.5 Station configuration ......................................................................................................... 3-18
3.5.1 Ordering information for Outdoor Units and Indoor Units ............................................. 3-18
3.5.2 Display of nameplate data by the LMT ......................................................................... 3-20
3.5.3 Polarization ................................................................................................................... 3-21
3.6 Safety instructions............................................................................................................. 3-22
3.6.1 Compliance with safety regulations .............................................................................. 3-22
3.6.2 Protection class............................................................................................................. 3-22
3.6.3 Electrical safety............................................................................................................. 3-22
3.6.4 Service personnel ......................................................................................................... 3-23
3.6.5 Operating voltage.......................................................................................................... 3-24
3.6.6 Electromagnetic environmental compatibility................................................................ 3-25
3.6.6.1 Possible hazards ................................................................................................... 3-25
3.6.6.2 Protection measures.............................................................................................. 3-25
3.6.6.3 Permissible limiting values .................................................................................... 3-26
3.6.6.4 Safety distances in the area in front of antennas .................................................. 3-26
3.6.7 Laser radiation .............................................................................................................. 3-28
II Marconi
3.6.8 ESD protection.............................................................................................................. 3-30
4 Commissioning ..............................................................................4-1
4.1 Work steps to be executed before system startup........................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Indoor Unit ...................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2 System startup ..................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3 Work steps after system startup ........................................................................................ 4-5
4.4 Commissioning procedure ............................................................................................... 4-18
4.4.1 Starting up the LMT operator software - Brief description............................................ 4-18
4.5 Commissioning - Part 1 (before antenna alignment) ..................................................... 4-19
4.6 Aligning the antennas ....................................................................................................... 4-27
4.7 Station measurements ...................................................................................................... 4-30
4.7.1 Measuring the polarization discrimination .................................................................... 4-30
4.7.1.1 Operation with horizontal polarization ................................................................... 4-30
4.7.1.2 Operation with vertical polarization ....................................................................... 4-30
4.7.1.3 Operation of a radio link with orthomode transducer (OMT) ................................. 4-31
4.7.2 Measuring the transmit level......................................................................................... 4-32
4.7.2.1 Measurement using the Service PC (LMT) ........................................................... 4-32
4.7.3 Measuring the receive level .......................................................................................... 4-34
4.7.3.1 Measuring the receive level using the LMT (AGC characteristic) ......................... 4-34
4.7.4 Measuring external interferers ...................................................................................... 4-36
4.7.5 Reflection measurement at the waveguide .................................................................. 4-36
4.7.5.1 Preparing and calibrating the test setup................................................................ 4-37
4.7.5.2 Test setup for calibration ....................................................................................... 4-37
4.7.5.3 Calibrating the test setup....................................................................................... 4-39
4.7.5.4 Description of measurement.................................................................................. 4-39
4.7.6 Measuring the reflection loss and connecting cable length.......................................... 4-40
4.8 Commissioning Process - Part 2 (after antenna alignment) ......................................... 4-42
4.9 Completing the commissioning process ........................................................................ 4-48
4.9.1 Setting the network element date and time .................................................................. 4-49
4.9.2 Setting of Network Element Free ASCII text, Equipment site ...................................... 4-49
4.9.3 Adjusting network element customer data.................................................................... 4-50
4.10 Measuring the optical output power ................................................................................ 4-51
4.11 Adjusting layer-3 addresses for SOA .............................................................................. 4-52
4.11.1 Gateway entry in the OSPF environment ..................................................................... 4-52
4.11.2 SOA via SISA - QD2 SISA-V mode ............................................................................ 4-54
4.11.3 SOA via SISA - QD2 Slave mode................................................................................. 4-55
4.11.4 SOA via SISA - QD2 via SISA-V mode ........................................................................ 4-56
4.11.5 SOA via ECC Gateway - Q3p mode............................................................................ 4-58
4.11.6 SOA via ECC Gateway - QD2-IP mode ....................................................................... 4-59
4.11.7 SOA via ECC Gateway - QD2-SISAV-IP mode........................................................... 4-60
4.12 Complementary settings and tests .................................................................................. 4-61
4.12.1 Operation with ATPC .................................................................................................... 4-61
4.12.2 Switching an RF loop (operating channel).................................................................... 4-62
4.12.3 Switching a baseband loop........................................................................................... 4-63
4.12.4 Configuring the station contacts ................................................................................... 4-64
4.12.5 Configuring service channels (SCU) ............................................................................ 4-68
4.12.6 Checking service channel and wayside channel (WSC) alarms .................................. 4-69
4.12.7 WSC loop function (2Mbit/s recording)......................................................................... 4-69
4.13 EOW configuration............................................................................................................. 4-70
4.13.1 Configuring the EOW module ....................................................................................... 4-70
4.13.2 Configuring SOH modules ............................................................................................ 4-71
Marconi III
4.13.3 EOW module configuration: PABX ............................................................................... 4-73

4.14 XPIC configuration............................................................................................................. 4-74
4.15 Manual switchover in protection switching configurations (1+1)................................. 4-76
4.16 Checking data transmission between the SOA and network element ......................... 4-76
4.16.1 Function test ................................................................................................................. 4-76
4.17 Uploading and saving system data (HID) ........................................................................ 4-77
4.18 Alarm testing ...................................................................................................................... 4-80
4.19 Measuring and recording performance data................................................................... 4-82
4.19.1 Activating and requesting performance data ................................................................ 4-82
4.19.2 BER functional measurement ....................................................................................... 4-85
4.19.3 BER recording............................................................................................................... 4-86
5 Uploads and Downloads ............................................................... 5-1

5.1 Software download .............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 MIB upload .......................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.2.1 Uploading (saving) the MIB to an external storage medium......................................... 5-11
5.3 MIB download ..................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.3.1 Downloading the MIB (database) from an external storage medium ........................... 5-14
5.4 Session upload................................................................................................................... 5-17
5.5 Session download.............................................................................................................. 5-19
6 Replacing Equipment Units .......................................................... 6-1

6.1 Replacing systems without protection switching (1+0).................................................. 6-1
6.2 Replacing systems in protection switching configurations............................................ 6-2
7 Pin Assignment of Connectors .................................................... 7-1

7.1 Connector types used ......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Connector designations ...................................................................................................... 7-2
7.3 Assignment of connectors.................................................................................................. 7-3
8 Service Instructions....................................................................... 8-1
IV Marconi
Figures
Note Some of the systems depicted in this document include options which do
not belong to the normal delivery scope and have to be separately ordered.
Technical contents and characteristics subject to modification.
Fig. 3-1 Installation example (antenna mounting tube and shelter) ......................................... 3-1
Fig. 3-2 Rack mounting.................................................................................................................. 3-2
Fig. 3-3 Rack grounding ................................................................................................................ 3-2
Fig. 3-4 Grounding concept for buildings ................................................................................... 3-5
Fig. 3-5 Grounding concept for towers........................................................................................ 3-6
Fig. 3-6 Antenna grounding .......................................................................................................... 3-7
Fig. 3-7 Outdoor Unit grounding .................................................................................................. 3-8
Fig. 3-8 Coaxial cable grounding.................................................................................................. 3-9
Fig. 3-9 Grounding the Indoor Unit .............................................................................................. 3-9
Fig. 3-10 Cable installation using a strap retainer and rubber inlay (examples) ................. 3-10
Fig. 3-11 Cable installation using mounting clamps (example)............................................. 3-10
Fig. 3-12 Waveguide installation (examples) ........................................................................... 3-12
Fig. 3-13 Waveguide installation (bending and twisting, installation values)...................... 3-13
Fig. 3-14 Labelling the Outdoor Unit housing and coaxial cable .......................................... 3-15
Fig. 3-15 Labelling the cable in a 19" or ETSI rack ................................................................. 3-16
Fig. 3-16 Cable labelling at cabinet feedthrough .................................................................... 3-16
Fig. 3-17 Indoor Unit labelling ................................................................................................... 3-17
Fig. 3-18 "Nameplate data" window.......................................................................................... 3-20
Fig. 3-19 DC port, Sub-D, 3-pin, male ....................................................................................... 3-24
Fig. 3-20 Electromagnetic environmental compatibility......................................................... 3-25
Fig. 3-21 Warning labels - Invisible laser radiation................................................................. 3-28
Fig. 3-22 CMI/OPT interface on IDU front side......................................................................... 3-29
Fig. 3-23 ESD protection - Grounding wristband contacts .................................................... 3-30
Fig. 4-1 Slide switch for "CMI - OPT" interface ........................................................................... 4-1
Fig. 4-2 LMT start icon ................................................................................................................... 4-5
Fig. 4-3 LMT start window ............................................................................................................. 4-6
Fig. 4-4 LMT desktop ..................................................................................................................... 4-6
Fig. 4-5 "LMT version" window..................................................................................................... 4-7
Fig. 4-6 LMT desktop ..................................................................................................................... 4-7
Fig. 4-7 LMT window: Connection setup to MDRS 155 S........................................................... 4-8
Fig. 4-8 LMT window: Connect - serial interface ........................................................................ 4-9
Fig. 4-9 "NE password" window ................................................................................................... 4-9
Fig. 4-10 "Network Element MDRS 155 S (1 + 0)" window ...................................................... 4-10
Fig. 4-11 Equipment Protection with RF coupler .................................................................... 4-10
Fig. 4-12 Equipment Protection with RF switch ...................................................................... 4-11
Fig. 4-13 Equipment Protection with RF switch and line switch ........................................... 4-11
Fig. 4-14 Equipment Protection with RF coupler and line switch ......................................... 4-11
Fig. 4-15 Line Protection............................................................................................................ 4-12
Fig. 4-16 Line Protection with line switch ................................................................................ 4-12
Fig. 4-17 Space diversity ........................................................................................................... 4-12
Fig. 4-18 "Link display - MDRS 155 S (1 + 0)" window ........................................................... 4-13
Fig. 4-19 "Network Element MDRS 155 S - Modules (1+0)" window ..................................... 4-14
Fig. 4-20 "Network Element MDRS 155 S - Modules (1+1)" window ..................................... 4-15
Marconi V
Fig. 4-21 "Network Element MDRS 155 S - Signal Structure“ ................................................ 4-16
Fig. 4-22 "Network Element MDRS 155 S Signal Structure Tree" window ........................... 4-17
Fig. 4-23 "Start of Commissioning - Part 1" window .............................................................. 4-19
Fig. 4-24 "Set hardware" window.............................................................................................. 4-20
Fig. 4-25 "Set hardware" window with reset message ........................................................... 4-20
Fig. 4-26 "Connection interrupted" window ............................................................................ 4-21
Fig. 4-27 "Connection error" window ....................................................................................... 4-21
Fig. 4-28 "SOH Configuration" window“ .................................................................................. 4-21
Fig. 4-29 "Configure RPS behaviour using RF coupler" window .......................................... 4-22
Fig. 4-30 "Configure and check channel" window (channel A) ............................................. 4-22
Fig. 4-31 "Configure and check channel" window .................................................................. 4-23
Fig. 4-32 "Configure and check channel" window (ODU LX)................................................. 4-23
Fig. 4-33 "Channel A" and "Channel B" windows................................................................... 4-24
Fig. 4-34 "Configure and check channel" windows ................................................................ 4-24
Fig. 4-35 "Configure ODU mode" window................................................................................ 4-25
Fig. 4-36 "Part before antenna alignment is complete" window ........................................... 4-25
Fig. 4-37 "Alignment mode" window ........................................................................................ 4-26
Fig. 4-38 AGC test socket on Outdoor Unit ODU S ................................................................. 4-27
Fig. 4-39 AGC test socket on Outdoor Unit ODU L ................................................................. 4-28
Fig. 4-40 AGC test socket on Outdoor Unit ODU LX............................................................... 4-28
Fig. 4-41 Checking and identifying the polarization ............................................................... 4-31
Fig. 4-42 "Signal Structure (TX)" window ................................................................................ 4-32
Fig. 4-43 "Signal Structure (RX)" window ................................................................................ 4-34
Fig. 4-44 Typical AGC voltage characteristic over the Rx level............................................. 4-36
Fig. 4-45 Connections between the spectrum analyzer and tracking generator ................. 4-37
Fig. 4-46 Calibrating a test setup .............................................................................................. 4-37
Fig. 4-47 Adjusting the spectrum analyzer type on the tracking generator ......................... 4-38
Fig. 4-48 Test setup for waveguide reflection measurement ................................................. 4-39
Fig. 4-49 Measuring the return loss and cable length ............................................................ 4-40
Fig. 4-50 "Start Commissioning - Part 2" window................................................................... 4-42
Fig. 4-51 "Radio hop identifier(s)" window .............................................................................. 4-43
Fig. 4-52 "Trace Identifier" window........................................................................................... 4-44
Fig. 4-53 "Synchronization of data streams" window............................................................. 4-44
Fig. 4-54 "Configure ATPC" window......................................................................................... 4-45
Fig. 4-55 "Configure XPIC" window .......................................................................................... 4-46
Fig. 4-56 "Configure XPIC / Clock" window ............................................................................. 4-47
Fig. 4-57 "Part after antenna alignment is complete" window............................................... 4-47
Fig. 4-58 "Network Element Date and Time" window ............................................................. 4-49
Fig. 4-59 "Network Element Free ASCII text, Equipment site" window ................................ 4-49
Fig. 4-60 "Network Element - Customer data" window........................................................... 4-50
Fig. 4-61 Measuring the optical output power (test setup)..................................................... 4-51
Fig. 4-62 "Network element TCP/IP Connection" window ...................................................... 4-52
Fig. 4-63 "Network element - Layer-3 Addresses" window .................................................... 4-53
Fig. 4-64 "QD2-SISA V mode" window...................................................................................... 4-54
Fig. 4-65 "QD2 Slave mode" window ........................................................................................ 4-55
Fig. 4-66 "QD2 via SISA V mode" window ............................................................................... 4-56
Fig. 4-67 "Network element TSAP IDs" window ...................................................................... 4-57
Fig. 4-68 "Network element SISAV Gateway" window............................................................ 4-57
VI Marconi
Fig. 4-69 "NE Q3p mode" window............................................................................................. 4-58

Fig. 4-70 "NE Internet Addresses" window ............................................................................. 4-58
Fig. 4-71 "Network element TSAP-IDs" window...................................................................... 4-58
Fig. 4-72 "NE QD2-IP mode" window........................................................................................ 4-59
Fig. 4-73 " NE Internet Addresses" window ............................................................................ 4-59
Fig. 4-75 "NE QD2-SISAV-IP mode" window ........................................................................... 4-60
Fig. 4-76 "NE Internet Addresses" window ............................................................................. 4-60
Fig. 4-78 "ATPC Module Configuration" window .................................................................... 4-61
Fig. 4-79 "TX Configuration (1+0)" window ............................................................................. 4-62
Fig. 4-80 "TX Configuration (Equipment Protection)" window .............................................. 4-62
Fig. 4-81 "Baseband Loop (Line)" window .............................................................................. 4-63
Fig. 4-82 "XQI Application" window......................................................................................... 4-64
Fig. 4-83 "KOMA Configuration" window................................................................................. 4-65
Fig. 4-84 "ME Configuration" window ...................................................................................... 4-66
Fig. 4-85 "ME Alarms" window.................................................................................................. 4-67
Fig. 4-86 "SCU Configuration" window .................................................................................... 4-68
Fig. 4-87 "SCU Alarms" window ............................................................................................... 4-69
Fig. 4-88 "EOW Module Configuration" window ..................................................................... 4-70
Fig. 4-89 "SOH Module Configuration" window ...................................................................... 4-71
Fig. 4-90 "SCU Configuration" window .................................................................................... 4-72
Fig. 4-91 "EOW Module Configuration: PABX" window ......................................................... 4-73
Fig. 4-92 "XPIC Mode" window ................................................................................................. 4-74
Fig. 4-93 "ODU Module Config. XPIC Tx Level" window ........................................................ 4-75
Fig. 4-94 "Open Database" window .......................................................................................... 4-77
Fig. 4-95 "Menu Selection - HID into Database" window........................................................ 4-78
Fig. 4-96 "HID in Database" window......................................................................................... 4-78
Fig. 4-97 "HID Database Card Table" window ......................................................................... 4-79
Fig. 4-98 RSTTP Performance Data Monitoring ...................................................................... 4-82
Fig. 4-99 RSTTP RF Performance Data Monitoring................................................................. 4-82
Fig. 4-100 "Open database" window .......................................................................................... 4-83
Fig. 4-101 "PDAT32" window ...................................................................................................... 4-83
Fig. 4-102 "Get performance data" window ............................................................................... 4-84
Fig. 4-103 "Activate log" button.................................................................................................. 4-84
Fig. 4-104 Test setup for "BER functional measurement" ....................................................... 4-85
Fig. 4-105 Test setup with MS1/4 in both terminals .................................................................. 4-86
Fig. 4-106 Test setup with one MS1/4......................................................................................... 4-86
Fig. 4-107 Test setup without MS1/4........................................................................................... 4-86
Fig. 5-1 Activation of the Equipment View .................................................................................. 5-1
Fig. 5-2 Downloading the Software .............................................................................................. 5-2
Fig. 5-3 "Module Characteristics" window .................................................................................. 5-2
Fig. 5-4 Selecting the CD-ROM drive............................................................................................ 5-3
Fig. 5-5 "Download" directory window ........................................................................................ 5-3
Fig. 5-6 "File selection" window ................................................................................................... 5-4
Fig. 5-7 "IDU Download" window ................................................................................................. 5-4
Fig. 5-8 "Network Element File Transfer" IDU window............................................................... 5-5
Fig. 5-9 Window displaying the "End of script file" message ................................................... 5-5
Marconi VII
Fig. 5-10 "LMT" window ............................................................................................................... 5-6

Fig. 5-11 "ODU Selection" window ............................................................................................. 5-7
Fig. 5-12 "ODU Download" window ............................................................................................ 5-7
Fig. 5-13 "Network Element File Transfer" ODU window ......................................................... 5-8
Fig. 5-14 "Control file processing terminated" window............................................................ 5-9
Fig. 5-15 "LMT" window ............................................................................................................. 5-10
Fig. 5-16 Activating the Equipment view.................................................................................. 5-11
Fig. 5-17 Uploading the MIB database...................................................................................... 5-12
Fig. 5-18 "Module Characteristics" window............................................................................. 5-12
Fig. 5-19 Window displaying the "Upload MIB CPU" message ............................................. 5-13
Fig. 5-20 Window displaying the "Transmission terminated" message ............................... 5-13
Fig. 5-21 Activating the Equipment view for a MIB download ............................................... 5-14
Fig. 5-22 Downloading the MIB database................................................................................. 5-15
Fig. 5-23 "Module Characteristics" window............................................................................. 5-15
Fig. 5-24 Window displaying the "Download MIB CPU" message ........................................ 5-16
Fig. 5-25 "Layer 2 connection interrupted" window ............................................................... 5-16
Fig. 5-26 Network element signal structure - Top level selected........................................... 5-17
Fig. 5-27 "File->Save" menu item.............................................................................................. 5-18
Fig. 5-28 "Save as ..." window ................................................................................................... 5-18
Fig. 5-29 "File->Open..." menu .................................................................................................. 5-19
Fig. 5-30 File selection in "Open" window ............................................................................... 5-19
Fig. 5-31 "MDRS 6A (offline) MDRS 6A (ONLINE).RSS" window .......................................... 5-20
Fig. 5-32 Starting a new LMT session via the "File->New" menu .......................................... 5-20
Fig. 5-33 Offline and online signal structures displayed side by side .................................. 5-21
Fig. 5-34 Send selected elements ............................................................................................. 5-21
Fig. 5-35 "Send signal structure" display ................................................................................ 5-22
Fig. 5-36 Confirming necessary reset....................................................................................... 5-22
Fig. 5-37 Connection to NE interrupted.................................................................................... 5-22
Fig. 7-1 Connectors on the front panel of the Indoor Unit ......................................................... 7-2
VIII Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 Range of validity – Systems ........................................................................................ 1-1
Table 1-2 System and commissioning documents.................................................................... 1-2
Table 1-3 List of measuring units ................................................................................................ 1-3
Table 2-1 Frequency plan 7.5 GHz/128 MLQAM/161 MHz duplex spacing (ODU L)................ 2-1
Table 2-2 Frequency plan 7.5 GHz/128 MLQAM/28 MHz pattern (LBT/UBT)............................ 2-1
Table 2-3 Frequ. plan 7.5 GHz/128 MLQAM/154 MHz d. sp. (F.385-7 Ann.1, Fb.7) .................. 2-2
Table 2-4 Frequ. plan 7.5 GHz/128 MLQAM/154 MHz d. sp. (F.385-7 Ann.1, Ext. Fb.8) .......... 2-2
Table 2-5 Frequ. plan 7.5 GHz/128 MLQAM/154 MHz d. sp. (F.385-7 Specific, Fb.15) ............ 2-2
Table 2-6 Frequ. plan 7.5 GHz/128 MLQAM/154 MHz d. sp. (ECC/REC (02)06, Fb.16)............ 2-3
Table 2-7 Frequ. plan 7.5 GHz/128 MLQAM/154 MHz d. sp. (ECC/REC (02)06, Fb.17)............ 2-3
Table 2-8 Frequ. plan 7.5 GHz/128 MLQAM/161 MHz d. sp. (F.385-7 Specific, Fb.14) ............ 2-3
Table 2-9 Frequ. plan 7.5 GHz/128 MLQAM/168 MHz d. sp. (F.385-7 Ann 3, Fb.11) ................ 2-4
Table 2-10 Frequ. plan 7.5 GHz/128 MLQAM/196 MHz d. sp. (F.385-7 Ann. 3, Fb.10) ........... 2-4
Table 2-11 Frequ. plan 7.5 GHz/128 MLQAM/254 MHz d. sp. (F.385-7 Ann. 4, Fb.12) ........... 2-5
Table 2-12 Frequ. plan 11 GHz/128 MLQAM/490 MHz d. sp. (F.387-9, Fb.2 and Fb.7)........... 2-6
Table 2-13 Frequ. plan 11 GHz/128 MLQAM/490 MHz d. sp. (F.387-9, Fb.4 and Fb.9)........... 2-6
Table 2-14 Frequ. plan 11 GHz/128 MLQAM/490 MHz d. sp. (F.387-9 a. REC 12-06E, Fb.10) 2-7
Table 2-15 Frequ. plan 11 GHz/128 MLQAM/530 MHz d. sp. (F.387-9, Fb.1 and Ann. 2, Fb.6)2-7
Table 2-16 Frequ. plan 11 GHz/128 MLQAM/530 MHz d. sp. (F.387-9, Fb.3 interl.)................ 2-8
Table 2-17 Frequ.-plan 11 GHz/128 MLQAM/530 MHz d. sp. (F.387-9 a. REC 12-06E, Fb.8) . 2-8
Table 2-18 Frequency plan 13 GHz/128 MLQAM/266 MHz duplex spacing (ODU L) ............. 2-9
Table 2-19 Frequency plan 13 GHz/128 MLQAM/28 MHz pattern (ODU LX)........................... 2-9
Table 2-20 Frequency plan 15 GHz/128 MLQAM/315 MHz duplex spacing.......................... 2-10
Table 2-24 Frequency plan 18 GHz/128 MLQAM/27.5 MHz pattern (lower/upper band) ..... 2-12
Table 2-25 Frequency plan 18 GHz/16 MLQAM/55 MHz pattern (lower/upper band) .......... 2-13
Table 2-26 Frequ. plan 18 GHz/16 MLQAM-Brazil/55 MHz pattern (lower/upper band) ...... 2-13
Table 2-27 Frequency plan 23 GHz/128 MLQAM/28 MHz pattern (lower/upper band) ........ 2-14
Table 2-29 Frequ. plan 23 GHz/128 MLQAM-Mexico/ 28 MHz pattern (lower/upper band) . 2-15
Table 2-30 Frequ. plan 23 GHz/128 MLQAM-Mexico/ 50 MHz pattern (lower/upper band) . 2-15
Table 2-31 Frequ. plan 23 GHz/16 MLQAM-Brazil/56 MHz pattern (lower/upper band) ...... 2-16
Table 3-1 Bending radii of Cellflex coaxial cables ................................................................... 3-11
Table 3-2 Bending radii and torsion of flexible waveguides (installation values) ................ 3-13
Table 3-3 Labelling of system components.............................................................................. 3-14
Table 3-4 Laser data .................................................................................................................... 3-28
Table 4-1 Settings on the spectrum analyser ........................................................................... 4-38
Table 4-2 Alarm testing ............................................................................................................... 4-81
Marconi IX
Tables Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
X Marconi
Abbreviations
10Base-T Ethernet standard for local baseband networks, 10 Mbit/s
ACAP Adjacent-Channel Alternate-Polarized Operation (corresponds to ACDP mode)
ACCP Adjacent-Channel Co-Polarization (adjacent channel operation)
ACDP Adjacent-Channel Dual-Polarized Operation (corresponds to ACAP mode)
ADR Address switch for operating mode
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
ATDE Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer
ATK Antenna Support Construction
ATN Analog Terminal Network
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control
AU-AIS Administrative Unit AIS
BAT Battery, Battery Input (DC input)
BB Baseband
BEI Bit Error Indication
BER Bit Error Ratio
BS Base Station
BU Branching Unit (Channel Filter)
CALL Call
CBN Channel Branching Network
CCDP Co-Channel-Dual-Polarized (co-channel operation on crossed polarization)
CF Channel Filter (only for 18.7 GHz / 16 MLQAM)
CL Clock
CMI Coded Mark Inversion
CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
CR Clock Reference
DCCR DCC of RSOH
DCCM DCC of MSOH
DCN Data Communication Network
DFM Dispersive Fading Margin
DIPL Diplexer
DIV Diversity
DM Demodulator
DPU Data Processing Unit
DRS Digital Microwave Radio System
DSC Digital Service Channel
DTMF Dual Tone Multiple Frequency dialling procedure
EA RU Equipment Alarm RU
EDI External Device Interface
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EOW Engineering Orderwire
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
exp expanded
EXT EOW Connection for external service channel expansion (Extension EOW)
FEC Forward Error Correction
FP Fuse Panel
GBÜ Remote Inventory Data (RID)
GND Ground
HF High Frequency
HSB Hot Standby
Marconi XI
HU Height Unit (1 HU = 44.45 mm)

IDU Indoor Unit
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IF Intermediate Frequency
IM Interface Module
INT-A Internal Fault of the Module - Major alarm (urgent)
INT-B Internal Fault of the Module - Minor alarm (non-urgent)
ITU-R International Telecommunication Union - Radiocommunication
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Standard
KDS No Data Signal
LA/EA RX Line & Equipment Alarm RX
LA RX Line Alarm RX
LA TX Line Alarm TX
LA-TX-BIT Line Alarm TX Bit
LE Line Protection
LED Light Emitting Diode
LEI Line Error Pulse
LFI Line Error Pulse
LMT Local Maintenance Terminal (Service PC)
LO Local Oscillator
LOF Loss Of Frame
LON Local Operating Network
LOP Loss Of Pointer
LOS Loss Of Signal
LSS Loss of Sequence Synchronization
MCU Monitoring & Control Unit
MD Modulator
MDRS Marconi Digital Microwave Radio Systems
MIB Management Information Base
MLQAM Multi-Level QAM
MMIC Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit
MS-AIS Multiplex Section AIS
MSOH Multiplex Section Overhead
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MST Multiplex Section Termination
nc not connected
NC Normally Closed
NFD Net Filter Discrimination
NO Normally Open
NRZ Non-Return to Zero
OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance
ODU Outdoor Unit
OH Overhead
OHA Overhead Access
OMC Operation and Maintenance Center
O&M Operation and Maintenance
OMT OrthoMode Transducer
OOF Out Of Frame
OP Operation Channel
OPT Optical
OSC Oscillator
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OT Occasional Traffic
PABX Private Automatic Branch eXchange
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
XII Marconi
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

Phone Telephone Access for EOW
PI Physical Interface
POH Path Overhead
PR Protection Channel
PS Power Supply
PSTN Public Subscriber Terminating Network
Q3p OSI Standard Interface
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QD2 Q-Interface (German Telekom)
RBER Residual Bit Error Ratio
RC Remote Control
RDI Remote Defect Indication
REI Remote Error Indication
RF Radio Frequency
RFCOH Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
RFU Radio Frequency Unit
ROW Regenerator Order Wire
RPS Radio Protection Switching
RRTF Radio Regenerator Transport Function
RSL Receiver Signal Level
RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead
RST Regenerator Section Termination
RSTTP Repeater Section Trail Termination Point
RTF Regenerator Transport Function
RTFE Regenerator Transport Function - Electrical
RTPC Remote Transmit Power Control
RTTF Radio Terminal Transport Function
RU Radio Unit
RX Receiver
RXD Diversity Receiver
SAW Surface Acoustic Wave
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SERV Service LED
SISA Supervisory and Information System for Local and Remote Areas
SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SOA ServiceOn Access Network Management System
SOHA Section Overhead Access
SPB Synchronous Port Block
SPI EL Synchronous Port Interface - Electrical
SPI OPT Synchronous Port Interface - Optical
STM Synchronous Transport Module
SV Power Supply
TCP/IP Transport Control Protocol
TMN Telecommunication Management Network
TSE Test Sequence Error
TTF Terminal Transport Function
TX Transmitter
UHP Ultra High Performance
USER User Port
WSC Wayside Channel
XIF Cross-Polarization Improvement Factor
XPD Cross-Polarization Discrimination
XPE Cross-Polarization Equalizer
XPI Cross-Polarization Interference
Marconi XIII
XPIC Cross-Polarization Interference Canceller

ZF Intermediate Frequency (IF)
XIV Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Introduction
1 Introduction
1.1 Preface
The present document describes a commissioning and acceptance procedure
binding for both network operators and Marconi Communications GmbH (referred
to as Marconi in this document) for Digital Microwave Radio Systems supplied
and installed by Marconi.
These Commissioning Instructions are based on the contractual agreements of
the "Network Operator / Marconi Communications GmbH Supply Contract" and
the Marconi Commissioning Protocols for the Digital Microwave Radio Systems
to be installed.
The present document covers the current equipment status: Release 5.1 or
higher. The current edition of the present Commissioning Instructions is indicated
on the cover sheet.
1.2 Range of validity - Systems

The Commissioning and Acceptance procedure described in this document is
applicable to the following Marconi Digital Microwave Radio Systems (MDRS)
and system components:
Designation Company Remark

MDRS 155/7500 - 128 MLQAM LS Marconi SDH short haul
MDRS 155/7500 - 128 MLQAM EXS Marconi SDH short haul
MDRS 155/7500 - 128 MLQAM KXS Marconi SDH short haul
MDRS 155/11000 - 128 MLQAM KXS Marconi SDH short haul
MDRS 155/13000 - 128 MLQAM EXS Marconi SDH short haul
MDRS 155/18700 - 128 MLQAM CS and KS Marconi SDH short haul
MDRS 155/18700 - 16 MLQAM CS/BR Marconi SDH short haul
MDRS 155/23000 - 128 MLQAM CS/MX Marconi SDH short haul
MDRS 155/23000 - 16 MLQAM CS/BR Marconi SDH short haul
MDRS 155/38000 - 128 MLQAM MXS Marconi SDH short haul
MDRS 155/38000 - 16 MLQAM MXS Marconi SDH short haul
Table 1-1 Range of validity – Systems
Marconi 1-1
Introduction Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
The measurements and tests to be performed in the scope of the Commissioning

and Acceptance procedure for these systems are ending at the associated
distributor or interfaces to third-party systems.
1.3 System and commissioning documents

The following Marconi documents are required for commissioning the systems
listed in Chapter 1.2:
Designation Type of document Doc. no.

MDRS 155 S Digital Operator Manual 05PHA00145AAF
Microwave Radio Systems
including:
Register 1 Description 05PHA00150AAK
Register 2 Mounting Instructions 05PHA00151AAM
Register 3 Commissioning Instructions 05PHA00152AAP
Register 4 OSPF Functions and 05PHA00153AAR
Commands
Table 1-2 System and commissioning documents
Marconi assumes that this document is known and accessible to all network
operator employees responsible for commissioning Digital Microwave Radio
Systems. If necessary, these Commissioning Instructions refer the reader to the
documents listed in Table 1-2.
1-2 Marconi
1.4 List of measuring units

The following or similar measuring units are used by Marconi Service engineers
for commissioning Digital Microwave Radio Systems operating in the 7-38 GHz
range:
Item Qty Measuring unit Type Manufact. or Type Manufact.

1 1 Power meter 435B HP or 6950 / 60 IFR
1.1 1 Power sensor +20dBm 8487A HP or 6913 IFR
1.2 1 Power sensor - 70dBm 8487D HP or 6923 IFR
2 1 PCM analyzer PFA-35 WG
if required:
1 SDH analyzer 37717C HP or ANT-20 WG
3 2 Multimeter F87 Fluke or comparable any
4 1 Notebook PC with Dell Latitude Dell or TECRA 8000 Toshiba
WINDOWS NT operat. CPx H500GT
4.1* 1 system
Service PC (LMT)
Required software: Vers. 7.0 Marconi ------- ------- -------
Current LMT software or higher
4.2 1 Conncting cable LMT-IDU Marconi ------- AN00232092 -------
5 1 Printer, serial 180+ser Diconix or 150+ser Diconix
6 ** 1 Spectrum analyzer 8565E HP or 8563E HP
6.1 ** 1 Tracking generator 85645A HP ------- ------- -------
6.2 ** 1 Sweeping set 7 / 13 / 15 / 18 / Marconi ------- ------- -------
23 / 26 / 28 / 38 ------- ------- -------
1 each RF coupler & adapter 7 GHz Marconi ------- ------- -------

1 each RF coupler & adapter 11 GHz Marconi ------- ------- -------
1 each RF coupler & adapter 13 GHz Marconi ------- -------- -------
7 1 Site master 113B Anritsu ------- ------- -------
7.1 1 Spectrum analyzer with ------- ------- -------
tracking oscillator 896X HP or 899X HP
Measuring jumper ZRB2 R&S ------- ------- -------
Table 1-3 List of measuring units
* The LMT software is supplied on a CD-ROM and includes the most recent
version both in German and English language.
** Required only for waveguide measurements between the Outdoor Unit and
antenna.
The reflection measurement at the antenna system is necessary only in case of a

waveguide length of at least 10 m for 128 MLQAM systems and at least 6 m for
16 MLQAM systems. (see section 4.7.5: "Reflection measurement at the
waveguide").
Marconi 1-3
1.4.1 Minimum requirements regarding the Service PC
The Local Maintenance Terminal is a Software Application run on a PC which

must meet the following minimum requirements:
Operating system: Windows 98® or higher, Windows NT 4.0®

or higher;
RAM: 64 MB;
Processor clock rate: 233 MHz;
Free space on hard disk: 20 MB;
Monitor: 14 inch with a resolution of 800x600;
Connecting cable: "Serial"; conversion SUB-D9 to RJ-45;
Connecting cable: "LAN"; standard 10 BaseT:
Input devices: Keyboard, mouse or touchpad
Access to the LMT interface is password-protected. The LMT PC is connected to

the serial LMT interface (port X5K) on the front panel of the Indoor Unit by means
of an appropriate connecting cable (conversion SUB-D9 to Western-RJ-45 or
Western-RJ45-RJ45 with adapter).
1-4 Marconi
1.5 Commissioning process

The commissioning process for the Digital Microwave Radio Systems covered by
this document can be performed only on a link by link basis and is not possible
for individual stations. The Digital Microwave Radio Units are installed either
simultaneously or consecutively in two separate stations which will be
interconnected by a radio link.
After terminating all installation works, the commissioning process must be

performed in both stations of the link.
Compare the transmit frequency (channel setting) and the transmit frequency
specified by the network operator.
Align the antennas to achieve a maximum receive level using the AGC voltage.
Note Please note that the directed Tx lobe of a parabolic antenna has one main
maximum and several side maxima.
If you have reached the optimum receive level (maximum AGC voltage) in both
stations, secure the antenna in position. Ensure that the achieved receive level
(maximum AGC voltage) is not reduced!
Now start the commissioning process for the digital microwave radio system by
starting the Commissioning Wizard on the LMT and proceed in accordance with
the relevant commissioning protocol.
The tests and measurements necessary for commissioning are described in

Chapters 2 to 4 of the present document.
The presence of a customer representative during the commissioning process

who will supervise and check the test results is at the customer's discretion.
At the end of the commissioning process, Marconi will work out a "Link
Acceptance Certificate". The latter will be handed over together with the
Commissioning Protocol (signed by the responsible Marconi specialists) to the
network operator for approval and acceptance.
Marconi 1-5
1.6 Acceptance
Acceptance takes place in accordance with the contractually agreed procedure.

The commissioning of a radio link is considered as accepted in both stations if
the Commissioning Protocols of both terminals have been completed and signed
by responsible representatives of both parties (Customer and Marconi).
In the "Link Acceptance Certificate", the acceptance of the link is documented by

check-marking the "Acceptance" box and signing the document by both parties.
If equipment problems that cannot be eliminated immediately occur during the

commissioning process, these are entered in the list of defects on the "Link
Acceptance Certificate". In this case, the "Conditional Acceptance" box on sheet
1 is check-marked.
1-6 Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Frequency Plans
2 Frequency Plans
2.1 7.5 GHz band
2.1.1 Frequency plan for 7.5 GHz systems acc. to ITU-R F.385-7
2.1.1.1 128 MLQAM systems - with 161 MHz duplex spacing with ODU L
26 sub-bands with 63 MHz (28 MHz overlapping)
Lower band Upper band
Channel Frequency (MHz) Channel Frequency (MHz)

LBT- min./max. UBT- min./max.
1L 7114.0 – 7177.0 1L 7275.0 – 7338.0
2L 7149.0 – 7212.0 2L 7310.0 – 7373.0
3L 7184.0 – 7247.0 3L 7345.0 – 7408.0
4L 7219.0 – 7282.0 4L 7380.0 – 7443.0
5L 7239.0 – 7302.0 5L 7400.0 – 7463.0
6L 7274.0 – 7337.0 6L 7435.0 – 7498.0
7L 7309.0 – 7372.0 7L 7470.0 – 7533.0
8L 7344.0 – 7407.0 8L 7505.0 – 7568.0
9L 7414.0 – 7477.0 9L 7575.0 – 7638.0
10L 7449.0 – 7512.0 10L 7610.0 – 7673.0
21L 7484.0 – 7547.0 21L 7645.0 – 7708.0
22L 7519.0 – 7582.0 22L 7680.0 – 7743.0
23L 7539.0 – 7602.0 23L 7700.0 – 7763.0
24L 7574.0 – 7637.0 24L 7735.0 – 7798.0
25L 7609.0 – 7672.0 25L 7770.0 – 7833.0
26L 7644.0 – 7707.0 26L 7805.0 – 7868.0
Table 2-1 Frequency plan 7.5 GHz/128 MLQAM/161 MHz duplex spacing (ODU L)
2.1.2 Frequency plan for 7.5 GHz systems acc. to ITU-R F.385-7, Annex 1
(for Germany)
2.1.2.1 128 MLQAM systems - with 154 MHz duplex spacing with ODU LX
Channel LBT Frequency (MHz) Channel UBT Frequency (MHz)

1a 7 442 1b 7 596
2a 7 470 2b 7 624
3a 7 498 3b 7 652
4a 7 526 4b 7 680
5a 7 554 5b 7 708
Table 2-2 Frequency plan 7.5 GHz/128 MLQAM/28 MHz pattern (LBT/UBT)
Marconi 2-1
Frequency Plans Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
2.1.3 Frequency plan for 7.5 GHz systems acc. to ITU-R F.385-7
(for export)
(for export)
Channel frequencies in systems with 154 MHz duplex spacing

(ITU-R F.385-7 Annex 1, Frequency band 7, interleaved)

1a 7 456 1b 7 610
2a 7 484 2b 7 638
3a 7 512 3b 7 666
4a 7 540 4b 7 694
5a 7 568 5b 7 722
Table 2-3 Frequ. plan 7.5 GHz/128 MLQAM/154 MHz d. sp.
(F.385-7 Ann.1, Fb.7)

(ITU-R F.385-7 Annex 1, Extension frequency band 8)

1a 7 456 1b 7 610
(F.385-7 Ann.1, Ext. Fb.8)

(ITU-R F.385-7 Specific, Frequency band 15)

1a 7 281 1b 7 435
2a 7 309 2b 7 463
3a 7 337 3b 7 491
4a 7 365 4b 7 519
(F.385-7 Specific, Fb.15)
2-2 Marconi

(CEPT ECC/REC (02)06, Frequency band 16)

1a 7 142 1b 7 296
2a 7 170 2b 7 324
3a 7 198 3b 7 352
4a 7 226 4b 7 380
5a 7 254 5b 7 408
(ECC/REC (02)06, Fb.16)

(CEPT ECC/REC (02)06, Frequency band 17)

1a 7 442 1b 7 596
2a 7 470 2b 7 624
3a 7 498 3b 7 652
4a 7 526 4b 7 680
5a 7 554 5b 7 708
(ECC/REC (02)06, Fb.17)
(for export)

(ITU-R F.385-7 Specific, Frequency band 14)

1a 7 522,5 1b 7 683,5
2a 7 550,5 2b 7 711,5
(F.385-7 Specific, Fb.14)
Marconi 2-3
(for export)

(ITU-R F.385-7 Annex 3, Frequency band 11)

1a 7 457 1b 7 625
2a 7 485 2b 7 653
3a 7 513 3b 7 681
4a 7 541 4b 7 709
5a 7 569 5b 7 737
(F.385-7 Ann 3, Fb.11)
(for export)


1a 7 121 1b 7 317
2a 7 149 2b 7 345
3a 7 177 3b 7 373
4a 7 205 4b 7 401
5a 7 233 5b 7 429
(F.385-7 Ann. 3, Fb.10)
2-4 Marconi
(for export)


1a 7 442 1b 7 687
2a 7 470 2b 7 715
3a 7 498 3b 7 743
4a 7 526 4b 7 771
5a 7 554 5b 7 799
6a 7 582 6b 7 827
7a 7 610 7b 7 855
8a 7 638 8b 7 883
(F.385-7 Ann. 4, Fb.12)
Marconi 2-5
2.2 11 GHz band
2.2.1 Frequency plan for 11 GHz systems acc. to ITU-R F.387
(for export)
Channel frequencies in systems with 490 MHz duplex spacing (ITU-R F.387-9,
Frequency band 2 and ITU-R F.387-9 Annex 2, Frequency band 7)

1a 10 755 1b 11245
2a 10 795 2b 11285
3a 10 835 3b 11325
4a 10 875 4b 11365
5a 10 915 5b 11405
6a 10 955 6b 11445
7a 10 995 7b 11485
8a 11 035 8b 11525
9a 11 075 9b 11565
10a 11 115 10b 11605
11a 11 155 11b 11645
Table 2-12 Frequ. plan 11 GHz/128 MLQAM/490 MHz d. sp.
(F.387-9, Fb.2 and Fb.7)
Channel frequencies in systems with 490 MHz duplex spacing (ITU-R F.387-9,
Frequency band 4, interleaved and ITU-R F.387-9 Annex 2, Frequency band 9,
interleaved)

1a 10 735 1b 11 225
2a 10 775 2b 11 265
3a 10 815 3b 11 305
4a 10 855 4b 11 345
5a 10 895 5b 11 385
6a 10 935 6b 11 425
7a 10 975 7b 11 465
8a 11 015 8b 11 505
9a 11 055 9b 11 545
10a 11 095 10b 11 585
11a 11 135 11b 11 625
(F.387-9, Fb.4 and Fb.9)
2-6 Marconi
Channel frequencies in systems with 490 MHz duplex spacing (ITU-R F.387-9
Annex 2, Frequency band 10 und ERC/REC 12-06 E Frequency band 10)

1a 10 735 1b 11 225
2a 10 775 2b 11 265
3a 10 815 3b 11 305
4a 10 855 4b 11 345
5a 10 895 5b 11 385
6a 10 935 6b 11 425
7a 10 975 7b 11 465
8a 11 015 8b 11 505
9a 11 055 9b 11 545
10a 11 095 10b 11 585
11a 11 135 11b 11 625
12a 11 175 12b 11 665
(F.387-9 a. REC 12-06E, Fb.10)
(for export)

(ITU-R F.387-9, Frequency band 1 und Annex 2, Frequency band 6)

LBT UBT
1a 10 715 1b 11 245
2a 10 755 2b 11 285
3a 10 795 3b 11 325
4a 10 835 4b 11 365
5a 10 875 5b 11 405
6a 10 915 6b 11 445
7a 10 955 7b 11 485
8a 10 995 8b 11 525
9a 11 035 9b 11 565
10a 11 075 10b 11 605
11a 11 115 11b 11 645
12a 11 155 12b 11 685
(F.387-9, Fb.1 and Ann. 2, Fb.6)
Marconi 2-7
Kanalfrequenzen bei Systemen mit Duplexabstand 530 MHz

(ITU-R F.387-9, Frequency band 3, interleaved)

LBT UBT
1a 10 695 1b 11 225
2a 10 735 2b 11 265
3a 10 775 3b 11 305
4a 10 815 4b 11 345
5a 10 855 5b 11 385
6a 10 895 6b 11 425
7a 10 935 7b 11 465
8a 10 975 8b 11 505
9a 11 015 9b 11 545
10a 11 055 10b 11 585
11a 11 095 11b 11 625
12a 11 135 12b 11 665
(F.387-9, Fb.3 interl.)
Kanalfrequenzen bei Systemen mit Duplexabstand 530 MHz

(ITU-R F.387-9 Annex 2, Band 8 und ERC/REC 12-06 E, Band 8)

LBT UBT
1a 10 735 1b 11 265
2a 10 775 2b 11 305
3a 10 815 3b 11 345
4a 10 855 4b 11 385
5a 10 895 5b 11 425
6a 10 935 6b 11 465
7a 10 975 7b 11 505
8a 11 015 8b 11 545
9a 11 055 9b 11 585
10a 11 095 10b 11 625
11a 11 135 11b 11 665
Table 2-17 Frequ.-plan 11 GHz/128 MLQAM/530 MHz d. sp.
(F.387-9 a. REC 12-06E, Fb.8)
2-8 Marconi
2.3 13 GHz band
2.3.1 Frequency plan for 13 GHz systems acc. to ITU-R F.497-6

4 sub-bands with 63 MHz (7 MHz overlapping)

1L 12751.0 – 12814.0 1L 13017.0 – 13080.0
2L 12807.0 – 12870.0 2L 13073.0 – 13136.0
3L 12863.0 – 12926.0 3L 13129.0 – 13192.0
4L 12919.0 – 12982.0 4L 13185.0 – 13248.0
Table 2-18 Frequency plan 13 GHz/128 MLQAM/266 MHz duplex spacing (ODU L)
Channel Frequenzcy (MHz) Channel Frequency (MHz)

1a 12 765 1b 13 031
2a 12 793 2b 13 059
3a 12 821 3b 13 087
4a 12 849 4b 13 115
5a 12 877 5b 13 143
6a 12 905 6b 13 171
7a 12 933 7b 13 199
8a 12 961 8b 13 227
Table 2-19 Frequency plan 13 GHz/128 MLQAM/28 MHz pattern (ODU LX)
Marconi 2-9
2.4 15 GHz band

3 sub-bands

1L 14627.0 – 14732.0 1L 14942.0 – 15047.0
2L 14725.0 – 14844.0 2L 15040.0 – 15159.0
3L 14823.0 – 14928.0 3L 15138.0 – 15243.0
Table 2-20 Frequency plan 15 GHz/128 MLQAM/315 MHz duplex spacing
4 sub-bands with 112 MHz

4L 14501.0 – 14613.0 4L 14921.0 – 15033.0
5L 14606.0 – 14725.0 5L 15026.0 – 15145.0
6L 14718.0 – 14837.0 6L 15138.0 – 15257.0
7L 14816.0 – 14928.0 7L 15236.0 – 15348.0
4 sub-bands with 119 MHz

4L 14403.0 – 14522.0 4L 14893.0 – 15012.0
5L 14515.0 – 14634.0 5L 15005.0 – 15124.0
6L 14627.0 – 14746.0 6L 15117.0 – 15236.0
7L 14739.0 – 14858.0 7L 15229.0 – 15348.0
2-10 Marconi
1 sub-band with 115 MHz

1L 14500.0 – 14615.0 1L 15228.0 – 15343.0
Marconi 2-11
2.5 18.7 GHz band
2.5.1 Frequency plan for 18 GHz systems acc. to CEPT ERC/REC 12-03 E
2.5.1.1 128 MLQAM systems - 27.5 MHz pattern with ODU S

Sub-band Channel Frequency Sub-band Channel Frequency
(MHz) (MHz)
1a 17 727.5 1b 18 737.5
2a 17 755.0 2b 18 765.0
3a 17 782.5 3b 18 792.5
4a 17 810.0 4b 18 820.0
5a 17 837.5 5b 18 847.5
6a 17 865.0 6b 18 875.0
7a 17 892.5 7b 18 902.5
A1 8a 17 920.0 B1 8b 18 930.0
9a 17 947.5 9b 18 957.5
10a 17 975.0 10b 18 985.0
11a 18 002.5 11b 19 012.5
12a 18 030.0 12b 19 040.0
13a 18 057.5 13b 19 067.5
14a 18 085.0 14b 19 095.0
15a 18 112.5 15b 19 122.5
16a 18 140.0 16b 19 150.0
17a 18 167.5 17b 19 177.5
18a 18 195.0 18b 19 205.0
19a 18 222.5 19b 19 232.5
20a 18 250.0 20b 19 260.0
21a 18 277.5 21b 19 287.5
22a 18 305.0 22b 19 315.0
23a 18 332.5 23b 19 342.5
24a 18 360.0 24b 19 370.0
25a 18 387.5 25b 19 397.5
A2 26a 18 415.0 B2 26b 19 425.0
27a 18 442.5 27b 19 452.5
28a 18 470.0 28b 19 480.0
29a 18 497.5 29b 19 507.5
30a 18 525.0 30b 19 535.0
31a 18 552.5 31b 19 562.5
32a 18 580.0 32b 19 590.0
33a 18 607.5 33b 19 617.5
34a 18 635.0 34b 19 645.0
35a 18 662.5 35b 19 672.5
Table 2-24 Frequency plan 18 GHz/128 MLQAM/27.5 MHz pattern (lower/upper band)
2-12 Marconi
2.5.1.2 16 MLQAM systems - 55 MHz pattern with ODU S

(MHz) (MHz)
1a 17 755.0 1b 18 765.0
2a 17 810.0 2b 18 820.0
3a 17 865.0 3b 18 875.0
4a 17 920.0 4b 18 930.0
A1 5a 17 975.0 B1 5b 18 985.0
6a 18 030.0 6b 19 040.0
7a 18 085.0 7b 19 095.0
8a 18 140.0 8b 19 150.0
9a 18 195.0 9b 19 205.0
10a 18 250.0 10b 19 260.0
11a 18 305.0 11b 19 315.0
12a 18 360.0 12b 19 370.0
13a 18 415.0 13b 19 425.0
A2 14a 18 470.0 B2 14b 19 480.0
15a 18 525.0 15b 19 535.0
16a 18 580.0 16b 19 590.0
17a 18 635.0 17b 19 645.0
Table 2-25 Frequency plan 18 GHz/16 MLQAM/55 MHz pattern (lower/upper band)
2.5.2 Frequency plan for 18 GHz systems – Brazil

(MHz) (MHz)
1a 17 727.5 1b 19 287.5
2a 17 782.5 2b 19 342.5
3a 17 837.5 3b 19 397.5
4a 17 892.5 4b 19 452.5
A1 5a 17 947.5 B1 5b 19 507.5
6a 18 002.5 6b 19 562.5
7a 18 057.5 7b 19 617.5
8a 18 112.5 8b 19 672.5
Table 2-26 Frequ. plan 18 GHz/16 MLQAM-Brazil/55 MHz pattern (lower/upper band)
Marconi 2-13
2.6 23 GHz band
2.6.1 Frequency plan for 23 GHz systems acc. to CEPT T/R 13-02 E Annex A

(MHz) (MHz)
1a 22 022.0 1b 23 030.0
2a 22 050.0 2b 23 058.0
3a 22 078.0 3b 23 086.0
4a 22 106.0 4b 23 114.0
5a 22 134.0 5b 23 142.0
6a 22 162.0 6b 23 170.0
7a 22 190.0 7b 23 198.0
8a 22 218.0 8b 23 226.0
9a 22 246.0 9b 23 254.0
A1 10a 22 274.0 B1 10b 23 282.0
11a 22 302.0 11b 23 310.0
12a 22 330.0 12b 23 338.0
13a 22 358.0 13b 23 366.0
14a 22 386.0 14b 23 394.0
15a 22 414.0 15b 23 422.0
16a 22 442.0 16b 23 450.0
17a 22 470.0 17b 23 478.0
18a 22 498.0 18b 23 506.0
19a 22 526.0 19b 23 534.0
20a 22 554.0 20b 23 562.0

(MHz) (MHz)
1a 22 078.0 1b 23 086.0
2a 22 134.0 2b 23 142.0
3a 22 190.0 3b 23 198.0
4a 22 246.0 4b 23 254.0
A1 5a 22 302.0 B1 5b 23 310.0
6a 22 358.0 6b 23 366.0
7a 22 414.0 7b 23 422.0
8a 22 470.0 8b 23 478.0
9a 22 526.0 9b 23 534.0
2-14 Marconi
2.6.2 Frequency plan for 23 GHz systems – Mexico

(MHz) (MHz)
1a 21 241.5 1b 22 473.5
2a 21 269.5 2b 22 501.5
3a 21 297.5 3b 22 529.5
4a 21 325.5 4b 22 557.5
5a 21 353.5 5b 22 585.5
6a 21 381.5 6b 22 613.5
7a 21 409.5 7b 22 641.5
A1 8a 21 437.5 B1 8b 22 669.5
9a 21 465.5 9b 22 697.5
10a 21 493.5 10b 22 725.5
11a 21 521.5 11b 22 753.5
12a 21 549.5 12b 22 781.5
13a 21 577.5 13b 22 809.5
14a 21 605.5 14b 22 837.5
15a 21 633.5 15b 22 865.5
Table 2-29 Frequ. plan 23 GHz/128 MLQAM-Mexico/ 28 MHz pattern (lower/upper band)

(MHz) (MHz)
16a 21 825.0 16b 23 025.0
17a 21 875.0 17b 23 075.0
18a 21 925.0 18b 23 125.0
19a 21 975.0 19b 23 175.0
A1 20a 22 025.0 B1 20b 23 225.0
21a 22 075.0 21b 23 275.0
22a 22 125.0 22b 23 325.0
23a 22 175.0 23b 23 375.0
24a 22 225.0 24b 23 425.0
25a 22 275.0 25b 23 475.0
Table 2-30 Frequ. plan 23 GHz/128 MLQAM-Mexico/ 50 MHz pattern (lower/upper band)
Marconi 2-15
2.6.3 Frequency plan for 23 GHz systems acc. to Decree No. 83/92 – Brazil
2.6.3.1 16 MLQAM systems - 56/87.5 MHz pattern with ODU S

(MHz) (MHz)
1a (A1) 21 843.5 1b (A1‘) 23 075.5
2a (A2) 21 899.5 2b (A2‘) 23 131.5
3a (B1) 21 987.0 3b (B1‘) 23 219.0
4a (B2) 22 043.0 4b (B2‘) 23 275.0
A1 5a (C1) 22 130.0 B1 5b (C1‘) 23 362.5
6a (C2) 22 186.0 6b (C2‘) 23 418.5
7a (D1) 22 274.0 7b (D1‘) 23 506.0
8a (D2) 22 330.0 8b (D2‘) 23 562.0
Table 2-31 Frequ. plan 23 GHz/16 MLQAM-Brazil/56 MHz pattern (lower/upper band)
2-16 Marconi
2.7 26 GHz band
2.7.1 Frequency plan for 26 GHz systems acc. to CEPT T/R 13-02 E Annex B

(MHz) (MHz)
1a 24 563.0 1b 25 571.0
2a 24 591.0 2b 25 599.0
3a 24 619.0 3b 25 627.0
4a 24 647.0 4b 25 655.0
5a 24 675.0 5b 25 683.0
6a 24 703.0 6b 25 711.0
7a 24 731.0 7b 25 739.0
A1 8a 24 759.0 B1 8b 25 767.0
9a 24 787.0 9b 25 795.0
10a 24 815.0 10b 25 823.0
11a 24 843.0 11b 25 851.0
12a 24 871.0 12b 25 879.0
13a 24 899.0 13b 25 907.0
14a 24 927.0 14b 25 935.0
15a 24 955.0 15b 25 963.0
16a 24 983.0 16b 25 991.0
17a 25 011.0 17b 26 019.0
18a 25 039.0 18b 26 047.0
19a 25 067.0 19b 26 075.0
20a 25 095.0 20b 26 103.0
21a 25 123.0 21b 26 131.0
22a 25 151.0 22b 26 159.0
23a 25 179.0 23b 26 187.0
A2 24a 25 207.0 B2 24b 26 215.0
25a 25 235.0 25b 26 243.0
26a 25 263.0 26b 26 271.0
27a 25 291.0 27b 26 299.0
28a 25 319.0 28b 26 327.0
29a 25 347.0 29b 26 355.0
30a 25 375.0 30b 26 383.0
31a 25 403.0 31b 26 411.0
32a 25 431.0 32b 26 439.0
Marconi 2-17

(MHz) (MHz)
1a 24 577.0 1b 25 585.0
2a 24 633.0 2b 25 641.0
3a 24 689.0 3b 25 697.0
4a 24 745.0 4b 25 753.0
A1 5a 24 801.0 B1 5b 25 809.0
6a 24 857.0 6b 25 865.0
7a 24 913.0 7b 25 921.0
8a 24 969.0 8b 25 977.0
9a 25 025.0 9b 26 033.0
10a 25 081.0 10b 26 089.0
11a 25 137.0 11b 26 145.0
12a 25 193.0 12b 26 201.0
A2 13a 25 249.0 B2 13b 26 257.0
14a 25 305.0 14b 26 313.0
15a 25 361.0 15b 26 369.0
16a 25 417.0 16b 26 425.0
2-18 Marconi
2.8 28 GHz band
2.8.1 Frequency plan for 28 GHz systems acc. to CEPT T/R 13-02 E Annex

(MHz) (MHz)
1a 27 562.5 1b 28 570.5
2a 27 590.5 2b 28 598.5
3a 27 618.5 3b 28 626.5
4a 27 646.5 4b 28 654.5
5a 27 674.5 5b 28 682.5
6a 27 702.5 6b 28 710.5
7a 27 730.5 7b 28 738.5
A1 8a 27 758.5 B1 8b 28 766.5
9a 27 786.5 9b 28 794.5
10a 27 814.5 10b 28 822.5
11a 27 842.5 11b 28 850.5
12a 27 870.5 12b 28 878.5
13a 27 898.5 13b 28 906.5
14a 27 926.5 14b 28 934.5
15a 27 954.5 15b 28 962.5
16a 27 982.5 16b 28 990.5
17a 28 010.5 17b 29 018.5
18a 28 038.5 18b 29 046.5
19a 28 066.5 19b 29 074.5
20a 28 094.5 20b 29 102.5
21a 28 122.5 21b 29 130.5
22a 28 150.5 22b 29 158.5
23a 28 178.5 23b 29 186.5
A2 24a 28 206.5 B2 24b 29 214.5
25a 28 234.5 25b 29 242.5
26a 28 262.5 26b 29 270.5
27a 28 290.5 27b 29 298.5
28a 28 318.5 28b 29 326.5
29a 28 346.5 29b 29 354.5
30a 28 374.5 30b 29 382.5
31a 28 402.5 31b 29 410.5
32a 28 430.5 32b 29 438.5
Marconi 2-19

(MHz) (MHz)
1a 27 576.5 1b 28 584.5
2a 27 632.5 2b 28 640.5
3a 27 688.5 3b 28 696.5
4a 27 744.5 4b 28 752.5
A1 5a 27 800.5 B1 5b 28 808.5
6a 27 856.5 6b 28 864.5
7a 27 912.5 7b 28 920.5
8a 27 968.5 8b 28 976.5
9a 28 024.5 9b 29 032.5
10a 28 080.5 10b 29 088.5
11a 28 136.5 11b 29 144.5
12a 28 192.5 12b 29 200.5
A2 13a 28 248.5 B2 13b 29 256.5
14a 28 304.5 14b 29 312.5
15a 28 360.5 15b 29 368.5
16a 28 416.5 16b 29 424.5
2-20 Marconi
2.9 38 GHz band
2.9.1.1 128 MLQAM systems - 28 MHz pattern with ODU LX

1a 37 072 1b 38 332
2a 37 100 2b 38 360
3a 37 128 3b 38 388
4a 37 156 4b 38 416
5a 37 184 5b 38 444
6a 37 212 6b 38 472
7a 37 240 7b 38 500
8a 37 268 8b 38 528
9a 37 296 9b 38 556
10a 37 324 10b 38 584
11a 37 352 11b 38 612
12a 37 380 12b 38 640
13a 37 408 13b 38 668
14a 37 436 14b 38 696
15a 37 464 15b 38 724
16a 37 492 16b 38 752
17a 37 520 17b 38 780
18a 37 548 18b 38 808
19a 37 576 19b 38 836
20a 37 604 20b 38 864
21a 37 632 21b 38 892
22a 37 660 22b 38 920
23a 37 688 23b 38 948
24a 37 716 24b 38 976
25a 37 744 25b 39 004
26a 37 772 26b 39 032
27a 37 800 27b 39 060
28a 37 828 28b 39 088
29a 37 856 29b 39 116
30a 37 884 30b 39 144
31a 37 912 31b 39 172
32a 37 940 32b 39 200
33a 37 968 33b 39 228
34a 37 996 34b 39 256
35a 38 024 35b 39 284
36a 38 052 36b 39 312
37a 38 080 37b 39 340
38a 38 108 38b 39 368
39a 38 136 39b 39 396
40a 38 164 40b 39 424
Marconi 2-21
2.9.1.2 16 MLQAM systems - 56 MHz pattern with ODU LX

1a 37 086 1b 38 346
2a 37 142 2b 38 402
3a 37 198 3b 38 458
4a 37 254 4b 38 514
5a 37 310 5b 38 570
6a 37 366 6b 38 626
7a 37 422 7b 38 682
8a 37 478 8b 38 738
9a 37 534 9b 38 794
10a 37 590 10b 38 850
11a 37 646 11b 38 906
12a 37 702 12b 38 962
13a 37 758 13b 39 018
14a 37 814 14b 39 074
15a 37 870 15b 39 130
16a 37 926 16b 39 186
17a 37 982 17b 39 242
18a 38 038 18b 39 298
19a 38 094 19b 39 354
20a 38 150 20b 39 410
2-22 Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Test Routines Necessary Before Commissioning
3 Test Routines Necessary Before Commissioning
3.1 Checking the installation
Color code (red) Antenna

to be attached between mounting
brackets and mast after antenna
mounting tube
alignment!
Parabolic antenna 0.6 m
(see section 3.1.2.1, Fig. 3-6)
Antenna mounting bracket
Mounting brackets for
waveguide Waveguide
(see section 3.3, Fig. 3-12) (outlined)
Label Tie bar
Outdoor Unit (ODU)
(see section 3.4.1, Fig. 3-14) Outdoor Unit
Outdoor Unit (ODU) grounding
(see section 3.1.2.2, Fig. 3-7)
Coaxial cable labelling

(see section 3.4, Fig. 3-14) Strap retainer
with rubber inlay
Cable bracket Coaxial
Mounting clamp
(see section 3.2, Fig. 3-10)
cable
Coaxial cable grounding Mounting bracket

Grounding kit
(see section 3.1.2.3, Fig. 3-8) Grounding
For further mounting options
(e.g. wall mounting), please
refer to Installation Instructions,
Register 2 Operator Manual
Coaxial cable labelling

(see section 3.4, Fig. 3-15 + 16) Cable
feedthrough
Indoor Unit labelling
(see section 3.4.4, Fig. 3-17)
Strap retainer for cable

mounting* or cable clamp
(see section 3.2, Fig. 3-10 + 3-11) Indoor Unit
MDRS 155 S
Grounding Mounting
Indoor Unit bracket
(see section 3.1.2.4, Fig. 3-9) Coaxial
cable
Coaxial cable grounding
Grounding kit
(see sections 3.1.2.3, Fig. 3-8)
Grounding rail
Strap retainer for cable
mounting* or cable clamp
Lightning Cable trough
(see section 3.2, Fig. 3-10 + 3-11)
protection ground
* with rubber insert
Fig. 3-1 Installation example (antenna mounting tube and shelter)
Marconi 3-1
Test Routines Necessary Before Commissioning Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
3.1.1 Installation in racks
3.1.1.1 Rack mounting
System racks (ETSI or 19“) must be protected against tipping over by screwing
the clips to the wall or ceiling using appropriate securing material. For more
detailed information, please refer to the Mounting Instructions in this Operator
Manual, Register 2.
Fig. 3-2 Rack mounting
3.1.1.2 Grounding the rack
The racks must be grounded via the protective grounding point located in the top
section of the rear rack upright using a protective conductor (16 mm²). The
individual Indoor Units are grounded via the metal rails of the subracks and rack.
For more detailed information, please refer to the Mounting Instructions in this
Operator Manual, Register 2.
M8
Fig. 3-3 Rack grounding
3-2 Marconi
3.1.2 Grounding (acc. to DIN VDE 0855 Part 300)
DIN VDE 855 Part 300 for Radio Transmit and Receive Systems is relevant for
antenna grounding in mobile radio stations. The items specified have been
checked and approved by network operators in their planning manuals.
Grounding microwave radio systems is particularly important for the following

parts:
• Outdoor Unit (ODU)
• IF cable (LI 8, CF1/4“, CF1/2“)
• Indoor Unit (IDU)
• Antenna
• Waveguide to antenna
Please observe the following rules:
• All grounding connections must be as straight as possible and routed to the

grounding point on the shortest path (with a slight bend, if necessary).
Approximate cable length to grounding point: 50 cm!
• Groundings must be maintained even after removing IF cable connections,

i.e. sole grounding via N-connectors is not permissible!
• Maximally 1 m in front of entry into building, the potential equalization must

be implemented on the shortest path.
• The cross-section of the potential equalization conductors must be at least

16 mm² (copper), 25 mm² (aluminium) or 50 mm² (steel).
• In case of housings and mains-powered units equipped with an external

grounding point, the grounding cable must be connected to the latter.
• In case of ATKs (roof supports) with a height of up to 10 m, the first

grounding clamp must be fixed to the mast base in front of the horizontal
transit (for IF cables and waveguides, if available). In case of ATKs higher
than 10 m, another grounding clamp must be provided on the antenna side
near the connector (approx. 0.5 m).
• In case of towers, the first grounding clamp must be provided on the antenna
side near the connector (approx. 0.5 m). Further grounding clamps are
required at equal spacings of maximally 20 m. The last grounding clamp
must be provided in front of the entry into the building or Base Station (BS).
Marconi 3-3
• Required number of grounding points:
Cable lengths < 5 m:

In order to avoid an accumulation of potential equalization of antenna cables,
only one grounding point located in front of the entry into the Base Station is
required for short cable lengths (< 5 m).
Grounding point
<5m
BS ODU
Cable lengths up to 20 m:
In case of cable lengths up to 20 m, two grounding points are required.
Grounding point Grounding point
< 20 m
BS ODU
Cable lengths exceeding 20 m:

In case of cable lengths exceeding 20 m, several grounding points are required with
maximum spacings up 20 m.
Grouning points
BS ODU
max. 20 m max. 20 m max. 20 m
• The materials used must not lead to contact corrosion at the grounding
points.
The outer conductor of the RF cable and the potential equalization of the network
operator's antenna system are interconnected by means of a grounding sleeve.
3-4 Marconi
Grounding concept for housings
Lightning rod
45°
IF cable
With a waveguide length
of at least 2 m, >> With a mast height < 10 m, the first
provide grounding clamp grounding is required at the mast base!
IF cable grounding before
in center.
horizontal transitions! >> With a mast height > 10 m, the first grounding
ODU ODU must be near the equipment and additionally
grounding at the mast base!
Grounding protection
for mobile radio system Spacing: 20m
IF cable grounding at
equal intervals (max. 20 m).
With an entire length of 30 m,
the spacings must be 15 m!
IF cable grounding before

entry into BS or building IF cable grounding
before entry into
building
Node B
GSM BS
If the BS is located inside

Grounding protection for a building, the last grounding
mobile radio system point of the IF cable must be
located before entry into the BS!
Node B
GSM BS
Fig. 3-4 Grounding concept for buildings
Marconi 3-5
Grounding concept for towers
Grounding of IF cable before

horizontal transition!
20 m
IF cable grounding at
regular intervals
(max. spacing: 20 m)
20 m
IF cable grounding
max. 1 m before entry into
building
The IF cable must be grounded

in front of the vertical/horizontal
transition!
Fig. 3-5 Grounding concept for towers
3-6 Marconi
3.1.2.1 Antenna grounding
Antenna
mounting tube
Important:
Provide color label (red securing
lacquer) between mounting
bracket and antenna mast after
electrical alignment!
(see Mounting Instructions
15.8564.200.22)
Grounding cable H07V-R16 black

(required if antenna mounting
tube is lacquered).
Antenna
Waveguide (outlined)
Outdoor Unit
(ODU)
Grounding cable H07V-R16
black
Coaxial cable
Grounding of antenna mounting
tube with grounding cable
H07V-R25 (black)
Fig. 3-6 Antenna grounding
Marconi 3-7
3.1.2.2 Outdoor Unit grounding
The Outdoor Unit must always be grounded. Please observe the Safety
instructions in section 3.6.3.
Grounding on shortest
way (< 0.5 m) to potential
equalization rail!
12
Route IF cable
to radio with appropriate
spare length!
6 5 4
2, 3, 13
1
Item Part designation Ident. no.
1 Grounding point FIMO UEK1 AN00 276999
2 CuH 50 Ohms CF 1/4" AN00 080254 8
3 CuH 50 Ohms LCF-1/2" AN00 087586
4 Turnbuckle AN00 412590 IF cable length to ODU <10 m:
5 Steel ribbon AN00 705519 - First cable grounding at vertical/
6 Base plate AN00 412589 horizontal transition of mast base!
7 Tool K6 (crimp pliers) AN00 807533
8 Cable lug M 8x16 AN00 151402
9 Grounding clamp 8 - 17 AN00 720808
10 Lightning protection clamp AN00 443217
11 Clamping sleeve for 16 mm² AN00 078849
12 Grounding ribbon clamp AN00 224901
13 CuH 50 Ohms LI 8 AN00226089
Fig. 3-7 Outdoor Unit grounding
3-8 Marconi
3.1.2.3 Coaxial cable grounding
Replace
original part
by hexagon
Mount FIMO grounding kit screw
FIMO
UEK1 according to instructions 8 M8x30
grounding kit
AASE_ICS.019!
H07V R1G16 sw 9
(included in grounding kit)
max. length: 0.4m
9
Cable lug M8/16 Allen screw M8
Coaxial cable
or 10
hexagon screw M8
Washer
Nut M8 Washer
Round wire
AlMgSi Fixing to angular Fixing to
0.5/F17 8mm profile angular profile
Fig. 3-8 Coaxial cable grounding
3.1.2.4 Indoor Unit grounding
The Indoor Unit is grounded via the screws which are used to secure it in the
rack or frame.
to Outdoor Unit
Overvoltage protection
(optional)
Coaxial cable grounding,

at least every 20 m
(see grounding concept 62.1017.000.50)
Grounding kit
Wall feedthrough
Grounding cable H07V-R1G16

A Indoor Unit grounding
In case of lacquered uprights, special cage
Main grounding point
nuts (Id. no. 701979) must be used.
D E
F
B Grounding of rack upright
B C Grounding of cabinet door
C D Grounding of side panels

A MDRS 155 S A
E Grounding of roof
F Grounding of backplane
Caution!
This grounding concept includes minimum
requirements.
Special customer wishes must be separately agreed.
Fig. 3-9 Grounding the Indoor Unit
Marconi 3-9
3.2 Cable installation (examples)
Rubber inlay
in cable troughs (securing

without rubber inlay
permissible in horizontal
plane)
R min
Clamp
at antenna mounting tube (max. 5 m)
Fig. 3-10 Cable installation using a strap retainer and rubber inlay (examples)
Cross-section
Coaxial
cable
Side views
Mounted to flat iron Mounted to C-rail
Different clamps must be used if mounting rails are available.
Fig. 3-11 Cable installation using mounting clamps (example)
3-10 Marconi
Bending radii Length (max.) Mounting value Bending

ODU S ODU L ODU LX Rmin
1/4" Cellflex (10 mm cross-section) 150 m 100 m 150 m > 120 mm multiple times
1/2" Cellflex (16 mm cross-section) 300 m 200 m 300 m > 125 mm multiple times
LI 8 cable (10 mm cross-section) 150 m 100 m 150 m > 136 mm multiple times
Table 3-1 Bending radii of Cellflex coaxial cables
Note Spacings between cable mounting clamps:
– when mounted to a tube or wall : approx. 1 m horizontally and vertically
– when mounted in a cable trough : approx. 1.5 m to 2 m horizontally
Marconi 3-11
3.3 Waveguide installation (examples)

Antenna
support
Torques
Antenna mount
Screws and nuts:

M8 19 NM
M10 37 NM
Antenna
U-bolts: Waveguide
M10 8 NM (outlined)
Torque
ODU mounting
bracket
at housing
35 NM ±10%
Waveguide
mounting bracket
Torque
ODU bracket
Outdoor Unit on pole
(ODU) 35 NM ±10%
Coaxial
cable
Rubber sleeve for waveguide feedthrough

(rectangular cross-section)
Antenna
support
Lock lying on
pole
Tighten tension
strap only slightly
Fig. 3-12 Waveguide installation (examples)
3-12 Marconi
D ra w in g a D ra w in g b
D ra w in g c R m in
(E -p la n e )
R m in
(H -p la n e ) T o rsio n
(T w ist) E -p la n e
B e n d in g a n d tw is tin g fle x ib le w a v e g u id e s
Frequenc Bending direction Min. bending radius (Rmin) Torsion (twist) Drawing c
y / flange 1x nx 1x nx
7.5 GHz / H-plane (draw. a) 152 mm 810 mm
264° / m 68° / m
R84 E-plane (draw. b) 76 mm 305 mm
11 GHz / H-plane (draw. a) 127 mm 510 mm
310° / m 76° / m
360° / m 92° / m
445° / m 112° / m
18-26 GHz / H-plane (draw. a) 76 mm 255 mm
510° / m 157° / m
28/38 GHz / H-plane (draw. a) 76 mm 205 mm
510° / m 230° / m
Table 3-2 Bending radii and torsion of flexible waveguides (installation values)
Note The waveguide fixing screws should always be of the same type. Allan
screws should be preferred.
Use a sealing plate or

Sealing plate O-ring at each waveguide
flange connection in order
to prevent the penetration
O-ring of humidity. This sealing
plate is appropriate for both
UBR and PBR flanges.
Fig. 3-13 Waveguide installation (bending and twisting, installation values)
Note For additional information about waveguide lengths >10 m please contact
Marconi.
ODU L and ODU LX are appropriate for maximum waveguide lengths of 8 m
only.
Marconi 3-13
3.4 Labelling
The individual components of a terminal station must be labelled as follows:
Labelling
Explication
Station N (A) Station F (B)
A 0001/N1 A 0001/F1 Outdoor Unit (ODU) - operating unit on housing
A 0001/N2 A 0001/F2 Outdoor Unit (ODU) - protection unit on housing
K 0001/N1 K 0001/F1 Coaxial cable - operating unit on Outdoor Unit
K 0001/N1 K 0001/F1 Coaxial cable - operating unit on entry into
equipment cabinet
K 0001/N1 K 0001/F1 Coaxial cable - operating unit in equipment cabinet
K 0001/N2 K 0001/F2 Coaxial cable - protection unit on Outdoor Unit
K 0001/N2 K 0001/F2 Coaxial cable - protection unit on entry into
equipment cabinet
K 0001/N2 K 0001/F2 Coaxial cable - protection unit in equipment cabinet
K Fuse no./N1(2) K Fuse no./F1(2) Power cable on equipment side (IDU) BK or (EK)
K 0001/N1(2) K 0001/F1(2) Power cable on fuse side BK or (EK)
K 0001 QD2 Slave/N1 K 0001 QD2 Slave/F1 QD2 cabling on Indoor Unit BK (Western)
K QD2 Master/N1 K QD2 Master/F1 QD2 cabling in cable end (D-SUB-F 15-pin)
to MS1C or MS1/4 or to Y-cable
I 0001/N1 I 0001/F1 Indoor Unit - Operating unit
I 0001/N2 I 0001/F2 Indoor Unit - Protection unit
Table 3-3 Labelling of system components
Legend: Code Meaning

A Outdoor Unit
NOTE: K Cable
♦ The component inscription is printed on I Indoor Unit
adhesive labels. N Near end (corresponds to Station A)
♦ The area where these labels are attached must F Far end (corresponds to Station B)
be clean and free from grease! 1 Operating Unit (BK)
2 Protection Unit (EK)
0001 Last four digits of link no.
Example:
Link no. 1 3 8 1 0 7 4 3
Station A No. Station B No.
Address: Könneritz Straße 25 Address: Rehfelder Straße 37c
01067 Dresden 01069 Dresden
Labels A0743/N1 A0743/F1
3-14 Marconi
3.4.1 Labelling the Outdoor Unit
Parabolic Radome
antenna 0.6 m
Waveguide
(outlined)
Transport Filter box

handle
Mount for
filter box (with
Outdoor Unit)
Outdoor Unit
Label for
Label for coaxial cable Outdoor Unit
on Outdoor Unit (ODU)
housing
Mast
Fig. 3-14 Labelling the Outdoor Unit housing and coaxial cable
Marconi 3-15
3.4.2 Labelling the cable in a 19" or ETSI rack
I9001/N1
K9001
/N1
/N 1
7 43 I0743/N1
K0
Fig. 3-15 Labelling the cable in a 19" or ETSI rack
3.4.3 Cable labelling
Feedthrough
plate
Cable label at
cabinet feedthrough
Fig. 3-16 Cable labelling at cabinet feedthrough
3-16 Marconi
3.4.4 Indoor Unit labelling
The Indoor Unit can be mounted in a 19" or ETSI cabinet.
I0743/N1
Fig. 3-17 Indoor Unit labelling
Marconi 3-17
3.5 Station configuration

The MDRS 155 S Digital Microwave Radio Systems include the following
components:
• Indoor Unit with fan,
• Coaxial cable,
• Outdoor Unit,
• Antenna.
Possible system configurations from unprotected 1+0 operation via 1+1 HSB to
protected 4+2 operation are depicted and described in this Operator Manual in
Register 1 "Description", Chapter 3 "Configurations“.
Note Before starting the commissioning process, please verify that the complete
station configuration (station A and B) complies with the customer
specifications and ordering data. Pay special attention to optional system
components such as
• Indoor Unit with electrical/optical STM-1 interface,
• Indoor Unit with EOW module,
• Indoor Unit always with fan module,
. . . and customer-specific system configurations such as

• Station contacts (external alarms),
• Service channel OT options,
• SOA (NSÜ) connection,
• SISA / OSI / TCP/IP addressing.
3.5.1 Ordering information for Outdoor Units and Indoor Units
For ordering information of all equipment units available for MDRS 155 S Digital
Microwave Radio Systems, please refer to the Description (Register 1 of the
Operator Manual), Chapter 7.
There you will find all important information such as:
• Designation of the equipment unit or module,
• Drawing no. with version and
3-18 Marconi
• Ident. no.
This ordering information indicates the characteristics of the equipment

configuration, e.g. for Outdoor Units:
• RF frequency (7.5/11/13/15/18 . 7 / 23 / 26/ 28/ 38 GHz)
• Frequency band (LB / UB)
Marconi 3-19
3.5.2 Display of nameplate data by the LMT
Note This LMT function is required for checking the equipment units delivered
and assigning them to the respective stations.
The system configuration data are normally recorded after the successful
execution and completion of the commissioning process!
For details on how to operate the Service PC (LMT), please refer to
section 4.3.
The Service PC is connected to the LMT port located on the front side of the
Indoor Unit.
To record the module numbers as well as software and hardware versions,

choose the Signal Structure button. By clicking the "Equipment/Network
element MDRS 155 S“ menu item, you can request the nameplate data of all
modules mounted (e.g. "CPU Master, Module“) via the "CPU Module Card
Information“ pulldown menu (see Fig. 3-18).
Fig. 3-18 "Nameplate data" window
3-20 Marconi
3.5.3 Polarization
The polarization of a radio link is determined by the way the feedhorn is mounted
in the antenna.
Remote antenna:
horizontal position of waveguide opening at the antenna vertical polarization
vertical position of waveguide opening at the antenna horizontal polarization
Note When the flexible waveguide is mounted, the polarization plane is no longer
visible from the outside. Check the polarization plane before you connect the
waveguide.
Marconi 3-21
3.6 Safety instructions

Digital Microwave Radio Units are designed for environment classes ETS 300
019-1-3 Cl.3.2 (Indoor Unit) and ETS 300 019-1-4 Cl.4.1E (Outdoor Unit ODU S)
and ETS 300 019-1-4 Cl.4.1 (Outdoor Unit ODU L). These classes define the use
of Indoor Units in partly temperature-controlled rooms (-5 °C to +45 °C, max. 95
% relative air humidity) and of Outdoor Units in a temperature range from
-45 °C to +55 °C including insolation for ODU S and -33 °C to +55 °C including
insolation for ODU L at a maximum relative air humidity of 100 %. The units may
be used only under the conditions and for the purpose they have been designed.
For more detailed information, please refer to "Technical Characteristics" in the
Description.
3.6.1 Compliance with safety regulations
Provided that the safety instructions are observed, the units meet the safety
requirements as defined by EN60950 (Safety of Information Technology
Equipment).
Non-observance of these circumstances and the warnings may result in inju-

ry and damage to property. For this reason, only trained and skilled person-
nel (maintenance staff as per EN60950) may install and maintain the system.
3.6.2 Protection class
The protection class of the Indoor Unit complies with IEC IP 20.
The protection class of the Outdoor Unit complies with IEC IP 54.
3.6.3 Electrical safety
The unit meets the safety requirements of EN 60950 standard. To ensure a

sufficient electrical safety, the DC power supply should be provided with a
reinforced isolation towards the mains power supply. In addition to the "Phone“
and "PABX“ ports (TNV3 circuits), all external ports are designed as SELV
(Safety Extra Low Voltage) ports. The only exception is the DC port if the unit is
powered from a 60 V source.
The unit may be taken into operation only after having set up a grounding
connection according to instructions. This grounding must comply with the
relevant national regulations.
3-22 Marconi
Grounding must comply with the relevant national regulations!

The positive pole of the battery must be tied to ground.
In case of grounded racks or cabinets with unlacquered uprights,
use cage nuts for mounting the MDRS 155 S Indoor Units.
When mounting the Indoor Units in a grounded rack or cabinet
with lacquered uprights, cage nuts with grounding claws are
required.
For wall mounting, a grounding connection must be set up at the
rack by means of the grounding screw included in the delivery
scope.
Wall mounting must always be executed horizontally!
3.6.4 Service personnel
Installation and service works may be executed only by technically trained and
experienced staff knowing the hazards that can occur and the measures to be
taken for minimizing any danger to themselves and third parties.
Precautionary measures:
• Please note all warnings and instructions contained in this Operator Manual.
• During operation, only service personnel should have access to the units.
• Installation and operation are permitted only in operating centers with

restricted access.
• Do not use any installation material (screws, nuts etc.) different from that
supplied or recommended by the manufacturer.
• Ensure that the mounting instructions are observed and that only the
specified wrenches and appropriate tools (whenever possible only those
recommended by the manufacturer) are used.
• Use appropriate safety devices (helmet, protective cloves, safety belts etc.)
whenever you are working on or near towers. Always be aware that objects
could be falling down. Use a safety grip for hoisting the antenna and Outdoor
Unit.
When modules or equipment units are brought from a cold to a

warmer environment, this may lead to dew set on the respective
modules or units.
Modules or units with dew must be dried before taking them into
operation.
Marconi 3-23
WARNINGS
for
Commissioning Instructions 05PHA00152AAP
for
Digital Microwave Radio Systems
MDRS 155 S
3.6.5 Operating voltage
MDRS 155 S microwave radio systems work with a -48VDC ± 25% or -60 VDC ±
20% operating voltage. The Outdoor Unit is powered via the coaxial connecting
cable. This connection is electronically protected against short-circuits.
CAUTION: Before switching on the power supply, please verify that the operating
voltage and supply voltage are identical and the polarity is correct.
-48 /-60 V DC
Fig. 3-19 DC port, Sub-D, 3-pin, male
IMPORTANT:
• Indoor Unit connecting cables may be plugged in or pulled out only
with the power supply switched off. Exception: Data lines.
• The system cable between the Outdoor Unit and Indoor Unit may be
plugged in or pulled out only with the Indoor Unit switched off.
Before switching on the operating voltage, please

ensure that the coaxial cable between the Indoor and
Outdoor Unit has been connected to both ends and
that the connector on the ODU has been tightened
with a torque of 100 ± 10 Ncm or secured by means
Caution! of a heat-shrinking tube!
3-24 Marconi
3.6.6 Electromagnetic environmental compatibility
3.6.6.1 Possible hazards
Potential health hazards can occur due to exposure to electromagnetic fields if

the prescribed safety distances to the antenna are not observed in the main
beam direction and if the waveguide interfaces are opened while the Outdoor
Unit is on.
3.6.6.2 Protection measures
• If possible, switch the transmitter off before you disassemble the device or
waveguide interfaces.
• Do not look into open waveguide joints. Do not stand directly in front of
transmit antennas.
• Mind the prescribed safety distances in front of the antennas (specified

below). If the safety distances cannot be maintained, the power supply to the
antenna must be reduced or the transmitter switched off.
∼
Warning: Main beam
Mind the safety distance! direction
of antenna
D/D'
Safety distance
C/C' in front of antenna
∼
Warning:
Do not open waveguide joints without
switching off the transmitters. Electromagnetic
fields can be harmful to the body (particulary
to the eyes) and can also cause rf-interference.
Fig. 3-20 Electromagnetic environmental compatibility
Marconi 3-25
3.6.6.3 Permissible limiting values
In DIN VDE 0848 "Safety in Electromagnetic Fields", a distinction is made

between two exposure areas.
Limiting values Average power flow

density
Exposure area 1 50 W/m2
Exposure area 2 10 W/m2 See also Official Gazette of the
European Communities
(1999/519/EC)
Exposure area 1 includes:
• Controlled areas, e.g. operating areas and areas that can be monitored by
the operator;
• Generally accessible areas where, on account of the method of system

operation or the time spent by persons in these areas, it may be assured
that exposure will occur for short periods of time only (up to 6 hours per
day).
Exposure area 2 includes:
• Residential districts or areas where sports and recreational facilities are

located;
• General areas where long-term exposure (more than 6 hours per day) is
expected.
A sign or other safety precautions, at the access to the antenna system (e.g.
skylight), is not required if it can be assured that unauthorized persons cannot
approach within the safety distance in front of the antennas.
If this cannot be assured, a suitable sign (No unauthorized entry!) must be

located at the access to the antennas.
In addition, the safety precautions stipulated by the site proprietor for access and
presence in the area of transmitter systems shall be observed.
3.6.6.4 Safety distances in the area in front of antennas
The following tables show the maximum power flow densities and safety
distances depending on the operating mode.
The safety distance is calculated as specified in the August 2000 edition of DIN
VDE 0848-1 and in Technical Report MC-AC/WSS2/00/01 Reference No.
65.7790.000.00TR001.
3-26 Marconi
The attenuation of the waveguide is not taken into account in the table below as
the waveguides can have different lengths depending on their design.
Frequency ranges 7.5 /11 /13 /15 /18.7 /23 /26 /28 /38 GHz
Operating Max. transmitter power at the Power flow density [W/m2]

mode antenna interface D/D' [dBm] D=0.15 m* D=0.3 m D=0.6 m D=1.2 m*** D=2 m**
integrated 20.0 22.64 5.66 1.41 0.35 0.13
1+0 19.2 18.83 4.71 1.18 0.29 0.11
2+0 21.9 35.06 8.76 2.19 0.55 0.20
3+0 23.3 48.39 12.10 3.02 0.76 0.27
4+0 24.9 69.95 17.49 4.37 1.09 0.39
6+0 1 26.3 96.56 24.14 6.03 1.51 0.54
*only for 26 and 28 GHz **only for 18.7 GHz and 23 GHz
If the maximum allowable power flow density of 10 W/m2 (50 W/m2 ) is exceeded,
a safety distance needs only be maintained in certain operating modes of the
0.15 m lens antenna
and the
0.3 m parabolic antenna.
Frequencies
Exposure area 1 Exposure area 2
(50 W/m2) (10 W/m2)
1.5 m
26 / 28 / 38 2m
0.15 m safety distance
GHz
lens antenna (only for 4+0 and 6+0 safety distance
configurations) (for all configurations)
0.3 m No 4m
all
parabolic
frequencies safety distance safety distance
antenna
safety distance required (only for 3+0, 4+0, 6+0 configurations)
Note Safety distances for other antennas can be requested from the manufacturer.
1
only with ODU S
Marconi 3-27
3.6.7 Laser radiation
The Indoor Unit can be optionally equipped with an optical module.

The laser used meets LASER Class 1 conditions as defined in EN 60825-1.
Fig. 3-21 Warning labels - Invisible laser radiation
The laser complies with ITU-T G.957 and features the following characteristics:
Parameters Laser data S-1.1

Wavelength 1310 nm
Output power - 15 . . . - 8 dBm
0.032mW nom. / max.0.16 mW
Pulse duration 6.43 ns
Beam divergence approx. 23 °
Table 3-4 Laser data
The module is automatically deactivated by an ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)
circuit as soon as the optical input signal fails (e.g. in case of a cable break). In
case of a loss of signal (LOS) at the SPI input, the laser is alternately activated
for 2 seconds and deactivated for 70 seconds. Besides this automatic testing
routine, it is also possible to switch on the laser manually for 2 seconds or 90
seconds. After expiry of the corresponding period, the system returns to the
previous testing cycle. The laser is maintenance-free.
When operated in a closed system, the unit meets LASER CLASS 1

conditions.
The laser may be taken into operation only after connection of the fiber-
optic cables and having them switched through to the receiver.
For maintenance purposes, it is possible to force on the laser for a limited

period (90 s) even while the system is open. However, in this case, you
must ensure that persons are not exposed to danger.
In case of a fault, the unit cannot supply an optical output power

exceeding that of Class 1.
3-28 Marconi
The laser source emits invisible laser radiation.

CAUTION!
Laser beams can lead to irreparable eye injuries!
Never look into the laser source or onto the

connector surface of fiber-optic cables connected,
ATTENTION!
not even with optical instruments!
The laser is switched on automatically as soon as the unit is taken into operation
or the module is mounted in service.
In order to avoid any danger to persons, the following safety measures have
been provided:
Automatic laser safety shutdown

In case of a failure of the receive signal (faults, fiber-optic cable breaks
etc.), the laser is switched off automatically within 500 ms.
Laser current limiting circuit
The laser current limiting circuit prevents an impermissible increase in the
laser current.
Laser current limiting through passive resistors
As an additional protection, the laser current is limited to harmless values
by means of passive resistors.
Caution!
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION !
Laser output aperture
Fig. 3-22 CMI/OPT interface on IDU front side
Marconi 3-29
3.6.8 ESD protection
The system rack is equipped with two grounding points with a 10 mm snap
fastener for connecting a grounding wristband to avoid electrostatic discharging
(ESD) when touching the Indoor Unit.
For reasons of ESD protection, the Indoor Unit must not be opened!
Retrofitting work (e.g. EOW) may be executed only in the factory!
10 mm
E arth
E a rth
B o n di n g
P oni t
E a rth
B o n di n g
P oni t
B onding
P oint
Fig. 3-23 ESD protection - Grounding wristband contacts
3-30 Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Commissioning
4 Commissioning
Attention: If the Indoor Unit (IDU) or Outdoor Unit (ODU) is opened by non-authorized
personnel, any warranty claims will be rejected!
4.1 Work steps to be executed before system startup

Please verify the items listed in sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 below
before you switch on the operating voltage!
4.1.1 Indoor Unit
Note Before mounting the Indoor Unit in the rack, please set the "CMI – OPT"
switch located on the bottom side of the IDU to the desired interface (see
customer order).
The slide switch for switching over

between the "CMI" and "OPT" interfaces
are arranged on the bottom side of the IDU.
Slide switch
Fig. 4-1 Slide switch for "CMI - OPT" interface
CAUTION: Always use precision tools such as tweezers or adjusting screw drivers (Ø max. 3
mm) for setting the slide switch!
The use of inappropriate tools may lead to irreparable damages of the IDU!
Marconi 4-1
Commissioning Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
After installation of the Indoor Unit in the rack, please check the following:
1. The Indoor Unit must be located in the correct position of the rack.
2. Rack grounding must be in compliance with the relevant regulations.
3. The power supply cable must be correctly routed from the circuit breaker to
the Indoor Unit.
4. The Service PC must be connected to the LMT port located on the front side
of the Indoor Unit.
5. The Indoor Unit is loaded with the current software version. To check this,
the supply voltage must be switched on temporarily (see chap. 4.2, item 1).
The SW version can be requested by means of the LMT Operator Terminal
program. Afterwards the supply voltage must be switched off again.
6. The coaxial cable between the Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit must be
connected to the IF port (coaxial N-connector).
7. For XPIC operation or after the exchange of an IDU, the IDUs must have the
same equipment level. For XPIC operation, connect the XPIC connecting
cables from the Master IDU to the Slave IDU as follows:
XPIC1 (Master-IDU) XPIC1 (Slave-IDU)

XPIC1 O XPIC1 O
XPIC1 O XPIC1 O
XPIC2 (Master-IDU) XPIC2 (Slave-IDU)
Caution: Only for 28 GHz systems
In the XPIC mode of the ODU 155/28-128 S (ENU 001) with a higher ODU
equipment level or with the EDM version, the ODU (ENU 001) must be
configured as Master (clock generator).
8. The RPS cable connections for 1+1 (HSB) configurations must be set up
between the OP-IDU and PR-IDU as follows:
OP1 (Master-IDU) PR (Slave-IDU)

RPS O RPS O
RPS O RPS O
9. The coding switch ADR on the front side of the Indoor Unit must be set to the
correct operating mode, i.e.
• "1+0“ for "no redundancy",
4-2 Marconi
or in "1+1“ configurations (applicable to equipment and line protection)
• to "1+1 OP“ if the Indoor Unit acts as Master (OP-IDU)

(= 1st IDU = operating channel), or
• to "1+1 PR“ if the Indoor Unit acts as Slave (PR-IDU)

(= 2nd IDU = protection channel).
Note In case of equipment protection or line protection configurations, select the

operating mode in the LMT via the "Equipment/Network Element MDRS 155
S/RPS Master/RPS Module Configuration/Operating Mode" menu items
displayed in the "Signal Structure" window. With line protection, the STM-1
synchronization is started in the same window.
10. Set up a bus connection in the 1+1 (equipment and line protection) mode:
BUS 1 (OP1) to BUS 2 (PR).
11. The coaxial cable for the baseband input (STM-1) must be connected to the
"CMI O” port of the Indoor Unit or the FO cable must be optionally
connected to the optical interface "OPT O”.
12. The coaxial cable for the baseband output (STM-1) must be connected to the
"CMI O " port of the Indoor Unit or the FO cable must be optionally
connected to the optical interface "OPT O “.
4.1.2 Outdoor Unit
1. Check the correct installation (see Mounting Instructions Release 5.1

05PHA00152AAP Version: 0001; 07.2005) of the Outdoor Unit and - in 1+1
hot standby configurations - of the RF switch.
2. In case of a 1+1 configuration (equipment protection/hot standby), ensure

that the control lines for the RF switch have been correctly connected to the
Outdoor Units.
3. Verify that the coaxial cable is connected to the (respective) Outdoor Unit.
4. In the XPIC mode, interconnect the "XPIC synchronization“ connectors on

the bottom side of the ODUs by means of a connecting cable.
5. Check the correct grounding of the Outdoor Unit.
Note XPIC operation is not possible with ODU L.
Marconi 4-3
4.2 System startup

1. Switch on the system using the automatic circuit breaker of the rack.
2. Check the front-panel LEDs of the Indoor Unit.
• The STM-1 LED on the front panel of the Indoor Unit lights up red if there
is no baseband signal (STM-1 signal) detected at port CMI O or OPT
O (baseband input of Indoor Unit).
• The ODU LED on the front panel of the Indoor Unit lights up red if there is
no receive signal (e.g. far end out of operation). In addition, the IDU LED
lights up if the coaxial cable between the Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit is
not connected.
The system is fully operational when the following LEDs light up:
Operating mode LEDs on IDU front panel LED

1+0 STM-1 green
ODU green
IDU green
1+1 (HSB)
OP -> active STM-1 green
ODU green
IDU green
RPS-TX green
RPS-RX green
PR ODU green
IDU green
1+1 (HSB)
PR -> active ODU green
IDU green
RPS-TX green
RPS-RX green
OP STM-1 (only displayed in the OP) green

ODU green
IDU green
Space diversity
OP (Tx) -> active ODU green
OP and PR (Rx) -> active IDU green
RPS-TX OP green
RPS-RX OP and PR green
STM-1 (displayed only in the OP) green
Line protection
OP -> active ODU green
PR -> active IDU green
RPS-TX OP u. PR green
RPS-RX OP u. PR green
STM-1 OP u. PR green
4-4 Marconi
Both the Indoor and Outdoor Units of the MDRS 155 S Digital Microwave Radio
Systems are delivered with a basic configuration (default), which permits system
operation immediately after installation and startup.
Note When using a Line Switch, the STM-1 –PR LED also lights up green.
4.3 Work steps after system startup

If you need help for operating the "Local Maintenance Terminal" (LMT) software
program, you can call up the Online Help by pressing the F1 function key or a
"context-sensitive help" by clicking the button.
If you wish to replace a LMT software, e.g. 7.0 (503) by the same version of a
new build, e.g. 7.0 (510), delete the previous version (build) as follows:
Select the Windows <Start><Settings><System

control><Software><Application> you wish to delete>. Then enter <Delete> and
<OK>.
1. Insert the CD-ROM in the appropriate drive of the PC.
2. If the CD starts up automatically, note the instructions displayed on the

screen.
3. If the CD does not start up automatically, double-click the CD drive icon.
4. Then double-click the "Start.exe“ file and observe the instructions displayed
on the screen.
The "Marconi" directory is created on the hard disk of the PC.
5. Open the following directories by double-clicking them in the specified order:
"Marconi“
"LMT“
" V7_0_0“ (or higher)
6. Start up the "LMT" program by double-clicking the following icon:
or
Fig. 4-2 LMT start icon
(LMT_Start icon depends on software version)
Marconi 4-5
7. In the "Local Maintenance Terminal“ start window that appears, enter

the required password (new installation = "lmt“) and activate the read-
and-write access by selecting the corresponding check box (=> ):
NOTE:
Changing the password is
possible only in the LMT
desktop by clicking the
"System/Change Operator
Terminal Password" menu
item!
Fig. 4-3LMT start window
Choose the OK button to call up the LMT desktop.
The PC now displays the empty LMT desktop.
Fig. 4-4 LMT desktop
Using the "Help" "About“ command, you can check the LMT software version
(see Fig. 4-5).
4-6 Marconi
Fig. 4-5 "LMT version" window
Choose the OK button to return to the LMT desktop.
The following empty desktop appears:
Fig. 4-6 LMT desktop
Marconi 4-7
This window permits all operating functions. The menu bar and contents of the
individual menu items change depending on the mask currently active.
The most important functions can be called up via the toolbar. If you just place
the mouse pointer on one of the buttons, the program will display the function of
the corresponding button in a yellow box and in the status line.
8. In this window, click the button

(or select the File/New menu items).
The following window appears:
Fig. 4-7 LMT window: Connection setup to MDRS 155 S
In this window, make the following settings:
Mode : => online (click empty radio button!)
Connection type : => serial“ (click empty radio button!)
NE type : => MDRS155 S (select from pulldown menu!)
Read-and-write access : => (check-mark empty box!)
Load all data : => (check-mark empty box!)
9. In the Connect window (Fig. 4-7), click the OK button.

The following window appears and permits the setting of the serial COM
port of the PC:
4-8 Marconi
Fig. 4-8 LMT window: Connect - serial interface
If connecting parameters different from those indicated in the above example

(Fig. 4-8) appear, change these communication parameters to the values
indicated above via the corresponding pulldown menus.
10. If all connection parameters are correctly adjusted, the NE password will be
requested after clicking the OK button (before connection setup):
Note:
The password can be
changed only in the SOA
(ServiceOn Access)!
Fig. 4-9"NE password" window
The default password (factory setting) is marconi.
Marconi 4-9
11. On entry of the correct password and clicking the OK button, the
connection to the network element (MDRS 155 S) is set up, e.g. for 1+0
operation (Fig. 4-10):
Fig. 4-10 "Network Element MDRS 155 S (1 + 0)" window
In case of systems with Equipment Protection configuration, the corresponding

desktop with the "MDRS 155 S (1+1)“ network element appears:
Fig. 4-11 Equipment Protection with RF coupler
4-10 Marconi
Fig. 4-12 Equipment Protection with RF switch
Fig. 4-13 Equipment Protection with RF switch and line switch
Fig. 4-14 Equipment Protection with RF coupler and line switch
Marconi 4-11
Fig. 4-15 Line Protection
Fig. 4-16 Line Protection with line switch
Fig. 4-17 Space diversity
4-12 Marconi
In the title of the network element window (button bar), online must now be
displayed behind the designation of the network element: => MDRS 155 S
(online)!
The SERV LED on the front panel of the Indoor Unit lights up yellow!
By clicking the "MDRS far-end“ button or selecting the "View/MDRS far-end“

menu items, the complete link can be displayed and edited via the "Modules“ or
"Signal Structure" masks:
Fig. 4-18 "Link display - MDRS 155 S (1 + 0)" window
Marconi 4-13
In the Network Element window, click the Module icon (or select the View /
Modules menu items). The following window appears:
Fig. 4-19 "Network Element MDRS 155 S - Modules (1+0)" window
In systems with Equipment Protection or Line Protection, the following mask

appears:
4-14 Marconi
Fig. 4-20 "Network Element MDRS 155 S - Modules (1+1)" window
Here all active modules are displayed as buttons. By double-clicking the button
for the required module using the left mouse button, further display and
processing windows can be called up.
These windows can also be activated via the "Signal Structure" tree menu
options (Fig. 4-22).
Note The "Equipment Protection with RF Switch" and "Equipment Protection with RF
Switch and Line Switch" modes are possible only in conjunction with ODU S.
Marconi 4-15
or click the Signal Structure icon in the Network Element window...

(or select the View / Signal Structure menu items).
The following window appears:
Fig. 4-21 "Network Element MDRS 155 S - Signal Structure“
By clicking the + icons in the signal structure displayed, the complete signal
structure tree appears (see Fig. 4-22), so that all functional units are displayed.
Via further menus all functions can be called up or modified.
The system signals the "Actual configuration" to the LMT depending on the
equipment with modules. Check the displayed system configuration by checking
the modules listed under "Equipment“.
=> Only modules mounted are displayed in the structure tree!
Note A module of the operating unit is referred to as "Master", whereas a module

of the protection unit is referred to as "Slave"!
4-16 Marconi
Open signal structure tree:
Click here to call

up the selection
options available.
Signal structure (tree) Display or editing window
Fig. 4-22 "Network Element MDRS 155 S Signal Structure Tree" window
The following display and editing windows can be activated via the appropriate
menu items:
• Module Card information
• Module Standard Alarms & Module Alarms
• Module Measuring Values / Thresholds
• Module Configuration
• Network Element Addresses
• NE Control Alarms & SCU Alarms (=> Disable)
Marconi 4-17
4.4 Commissioning procedure

Two different commissioning procedures are available:
a) The Outdoor Units and the Indoor Unit are mounted in their final
destination.
or
b) The Outdoor Units are preliminarily arranged for commissioning purposes

near the Indoor Unit.
After execution of the work steps described in sections 4.3 to 4.5, the system
components must be mounted in their final destination. Then the commissioning
process must be continued with the antenna alignment (see section 4.6).
Procedure a) is described in the following.
After mounting the Outdoor Unit(s) to the mast, align the antenna. The
commissioning process is complete after execution of the station measurements
(section 4.7) and Part 2 of the Commissioning Tool (section 4.8).
In case of a commissioning process with Outdoor Units mounted in their final

destination (procedure a), please note that no signal is received from the far end
while bit-error-free transmission is tested by means of RF loops.
4.4.1 Starting up the LMT operator software - Brief description
1. Connect the Service PC (COM 1) to the Indoor Unit (LMT port, see section
1.4.1).
2. Start up the LMT operator software by double-clicking the LMT icon (Fig.
4-2).
3. Execute the work steps as described in section 4.3 (item 7 and following).
Note To change setting values displayed in the different windows, please note that
"Nominal" must be displayed in the upper left section of the mask (see Fig.
4-22).
If you require help, you can call up the Online help function by means of function
key "F1“ or press the button to activate "context-sensitive help".
4-18 Marconi
4.5 Commissioning - Part 1 (before antenna alignment)

Start up the commissioning procedure by selecting the following menu items:
View/Commissioning or just click the Commissioning Wizard button.
The following window appears.
Start up Part 1 of the

commissioning process by
clicking the "Before antenna
alignment" button!
Fig. 4-23 "Start of Commissioning - Part 1" window
Marconi 4-19
After clicking the "Before antenna alignment“ button, the following window
appears
for systems with redundancy or for systems without redundancy:
Fig. 4-24 "Set hardware" window
Note The "Equipment Protection with RF Switch" and "Equipment Protection

with RF Switch and Line Switch" modes are possible only in conjunction
with ODU S. If an ODU L or ODU LX is connected, the above operating
modes are not offered.
Confirm the execution of the work steps in the window shown in Fig. 4-24 by
check-marking the corresponding boxes . In case of systems with redundancy
configuration, select the required operating mode. Then choose the "Next"
button.
Note If the operating mode is not switched over, the "Configure SOH" window
appears (see Fig. 4-28). If the operating mode is switched over, the
corresponding settings will cause a reset in the network element. A
message signalling this reset is then displayed in the "Set hardware"
window (Fig. 4-25).
Fig. 4-25 "Set hardware" window with reset message

Then choose the "Next" button.
4-20 Marconi
Please wait until the mask depicted in Fig. 4-26 appears. The connection to the
NE is interrupted and the commissioning process terminated. Click the OK button
when the masks shown below are displayed. The LMT operator terminal passes
over to the "offline" mode.
Fig. 4-26 "Connection interrupted" window
Fig. 4-27 "Connection error" window
Set up again a connection to the network element (session , online) and re-start
the Commissioning Wizard. Continue the commissioning process as described in
section 4.5.
Fig. 4-28 "SOH Configuration" window“

In the window displayed, activate the necessary service channels (acc. to
customer specifications) by check-marking the corresponding boxes . Choose
the "Next " button. The window depicted in Fig. 4-30 appears.
Marconi 4-21
In the "Equipment protection with RF coupler" mode, the window shown in Fig.
4-29 appears.
Note With asymmetrical couplers, it must be ensured that transmission takes place via
the low-attenuation path (operating channel) whenever possible. Switchover due
to a fault or failure leads to considerable system losses. For this reason, the
automatic reversion to the operating channel should always be activated (see
mask depicted in Fig. 4-29 or "RPS Module Config. RF Coupler, Line Switch"
configuration menu). (Also see Description, section 3.5.3)
Fig. 4-29 "Configure RPS behaviour using RF coupler" window

Choose the "Next " button.
a) In systems without redundancy, the left window "Configure and check

channel" appears (for channel A). Adjust the required frequency and click
the "Continue" button. The right window appears. The RF loop has been
activated (automatically) with this step.
Fig. 4-30 "Configure and check channel" window (channel A)

Connect the STM-1 measuring unit to the optical/electrical interface and check-
mark the corresponding box (in error-free loop transmission).
Then click the "Next" button.
4-22 Marconi
b) In case of systems with redundancy configurations, the first step activates

the window for "Channel A and Channel B“. Select the required frequencies.
Fig. 4-31 "Configure and check channel" window
c) In case of systems with ODU LX (except 38 GHz), the window appears for
channel A and channel B. Adjust the required duplex spacing and Tx
frequency.
Fig. 4-32 "Configure and check channel" window (ODU LX)
Note Transmission in Line Protection configurations can take place either at the same
frequency (cross-polar connection, identical channel no.) or on two different
channels.
In Equipment Protection and Space Diversity configurations, the channel B

number is adjusted automatically (Channel no. box always greyed).
Click the "Next" button to activate the "Channel A" window. Connect the STM-1
measuring unit to the optical/electrical interface and check-mark the
corresponding box (in case of error-free loop transmission).
Marconi 4-23
Click the "Next" button to activate the "Channel B" window. Connect the STM-1
measuring unit to the optical/electrical interface and check-mark the
corresponding box (in case of error-free loop transmission).
Fig. 4-33 "Channel A" and "Channel B" windows
Important: Please note that no signal is received from the far end while bit-error-free
transmission is tested by means of RF loops.
After having checked the RF frequency and error-free STM-1 transmission via the
RF loop (in systems with redundancy for operating channel/channel A and
protection channel/channel B), click the "Next“ button! The RF loop is disabled!
d) Systems with ODU L and ODU LX offer no possibility of switching an RF

loop. In this case, the following windows appear:
Fig. 4-34 "Configure and check channel" windows
Click the "Next" button.
4-24 Marconi
In the following "Configure ODU mode" window, the ODU(s) can set to the
alignment mode.
Fig. 4-35 "Configure ODU mode" window
Click the "Next" button. The following settings are then performed in the IDU for
the further commissioning process.
1. ATPC off = The Automatic Transmit Level Control function is switched off.
2. Tx level set to maximum value.
The window depicted in Fig. 4-36 appears.
Fig. 4-36 "Part before antenna alignment is complete" window
Marconi 4-25
Click the "Finish" button to quit Part 1 of the commissioning process.

The window displayed in Fig. 4-37 appears (e.g. for Equipment Protection).
Now install the Outdoor Units for antenna alignment on the mast!
Fig. 4-37 "Alignment mode" window
4-26 Marconi
4.6 Aligning the antennas

After completion of the configuration process on both sides of the link, you can
now start to align the antennas. Connect a multimeter (voltmeter) to the test
sockets of Outdoor Unit A and align the antenna in such a way that you are
achieving a maximum receive level (AGC voltage). Make this alignment
alternately with the far end.
Initial situation:
In both stations, the antenna is mechanically, i.e. horizontally and vertically

aligned.
The far end (station B) is active and its functioning has been checked.
In the Commissioning Wizard of the LMT, activate the "Alignment mode" window.
Select the "Alignment" mode (see Fig. 4-37).
Rear view
Transport handle
Green LED > signals error-free

"Operation" transmission (an STM-1
signal is received)
Red LED "PS" > lights up in case of a

power supply fault in the
Outdoor Unit
OPERATION Red LED "EA-RU" > Equipment Alarm Radio Unit

- on if ODU is faulty.
- flashes after power-up during
PS warm-up phase (RF amplifier
off during this time)
Green LED > signals faultless power

EA-RU "Power" supply via connecting cable
"AGC" test scoket for antenna alignment

red /back > (using multimeter, see
POWER on bottom side list of measuring units in
of ODU Commissioning Instructions)
ODU bottom side System

cable port
RF switch
port XPIC
AGC measuring port (connector)
(coaxial) port
Grounding port Filter box

Grounding port
(housing)
AGC meas.
Fig. 4-38 AGC test socket on Outdoor Unit ODU S
Marconi 4-27
Grounding point M5
N-socket BNC-socket
for IF cable for AGC measurement
Fig. 4-39 AGC test socket on Outdoor Unit ODU L
Red "EA-RU" LED - Equipment Alarm Radio Unit

- Lights up whenever an ODU equipment fault/failure
Green "Operation" LED is detected.
Link Status (Signal) - Flashes after "power-up" during quartz warm-up phase
- signals troublefree (RF amplifier remains off during this time).
transmission (correct
Green "No EA-RU" LED
STM-1 signal
received)
AGC
test socket
(BNC) System XPIC
cable port port
(coaxial)
Fig. 4-40 AGC test socket on Outdoor Unit ODU LX
4-28 Marconi
Antenna fine alignment (station A)
Proceed as follows:
1. Determine the AGC voltage to be expected using the attached AGC diagram
(Fig. 4-44).
2. Connect the multimeter to the AGC test sockets (see Fig. 4-38, Fig. 4-39 or
Fig. 4-40) on the bottom side of the ODU.
3. Loosen the screw connections (horizontal) of the antenna mounting bracket.
4. Turn the antenna until the side lobe and the main lobe become clearly visible
and the multimeter displays a clear maximum value.
5. Tighten again the screw connections (horizontal) of the antenna mounting
bracket.
6. Loosen the screw connections (vertical) of the antenna mounting bracket.
7. Turn the antenna until the side lobe and the main lobe become clearly visible
and the multimeter displays a clear maximum value.
8. Tighten again the screw connections (vertical) of the antenna mounting
bracket.
Note When securing the antenna in position, make sure that the adjusted receive level
is not reduced !
When securing the antenna in position, make sure that the adjusted receive level
is not reduced ! If necessary, go to station B in order to align the antenna there in
the same way. The (green) "Operation" LED of the Outdoor Unit displays that
transmission takes place. Check the receive level determined by means of radio
hop calculations.
IMPORTANT The maximum permissible deviation of the measured receive level from the
calculated value must not exceed + 2.5 dB (see radio hop calculation)!
Take the Tx level adjusted in the far end into account!
Marconi 4-29
4.7 Station measurements
4.7.1 Measuring the polarization discrimination
If a radio link is operated in both the vertical and horizontal polarization planes
(OMT required at the antenna), measure the receive levels to determine the
polarization discrimination.
Note Only necessary in conjunction with an orthomode transducer (OMT) used at

the antenna! In order to measure a polarization discrimination of at least 30
dB, the receive level must be > - 45 dBm.
4.7.1.1 Operation with horizontal polarization
Make sure that
- all transmitters of the radio link are active,
- the ATPC function is off,
- and the maximum Tx power assigned is not exceeded.
1. In the local station (near end), measure the receive level in normal operation
(see section 4.7.3).
2. Note down the value measured.
3. If both transmitters are tuned to the same frequency, switch off the
transmitter of the link operated in the horizontal polarization plane in the far
end. (The transmitter of the link operated in the vertical polarization plane
must remain active).
4. If the two transmitters are tuned to different frequencies, change the

waveguide at the OMT of the antenna (near end) from the horizontal to the
vertical position.
5. Measure again the receive level in the near end.
6. The difference between the values measured under item 1 and item 5
corresponds to the horizontal polarization discrimination.
4.7.1.2 Operation with vertical polarization
For measuring the polarization discrimination of a radio link operated in the

vertical polarization plane, proceed as described in section 4.7.1.1.
4-30 Marconi
4.7.1.3 Operation of a radio link with orthomode transducer (OMT)
In case of a radio link operated with an orthomode transducer (OMT), measure

the polarization decoupling.
horizontally
polarized
E-field
H V
H
V V
H H H
V
V
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4
vertically
polarized
The previously vertical gate (Fig. 1) The previously horizontal gate (Fig. 2) E-field
now becomes the horizontal gate (Fig. 2) now becomes the vertical gate (Fig. 3) etc.
Fig. 4-41 Checking and identifying the polarization
1. In the local station (near end), measure the receive level in normal operation
(see section 4.7.3).
2. Note down the value measured.
3. Change the waveguide at the OMT of the antenna (near end) from the
horizontal to the vertical position.
4. Measure again the receive level in the near end.
5. The difference between the values measured under item 1 and 4

corresponds to the horizontal polarization discrimination.
6. Restore the initial system status.
Marconi 4-31
4.7.2 Measuring the transmit level
4.7.2.1 Measurement using the Service PC (LMT)
For measuring the maximum transmit level, use the LMT measuring values
(Service PC displays).
CAUTION ! The Outdoor Unit to be measured must have reached its operating
temperature. Make sure that the ATPC function is off !
To display the transmit level, follow the LMT menu path all the way up to the
display of the transmitter measuring values:
Open the "Signal Structure" window (see Fig. 4-42).
In this window, activate the "Signal Structure" option and select the following
menu items:
Operation/OP, TX/TX Measuring values/ thresholds
Fig. 4-42 "Signal Structure (TX)" window
4-32 Marconi
ODU S
In case of Outdoor Units with synthesizer, the Tx and Rx levels displayed by the
LMT refer to interface A/A‘ between the ODU and filter box.
Maximum nominal Tx levels at A/A‘ (without ATPC) of the Outdoor Units:
MDRS 155/18700 - 128 MLQAM CS and KS +19.5 dBm +2.0/-1.0 dB

MDRS 155/18700 - 16 MLQAM CS and KS +21.5 dBm +2.0/-1.0 dB
MDRS 155/18700 - 16 MLQAM CS/BR +21.5 dBm +2.0/-1.0 dB
MDRS 155/23000 - 128 MLQAM CS and KS2 +19.5 dBm ±2.0 dB
MDRS 155/23000 - 128 MLQAM CS/MX +19.5 dBm ±2.0 dB
MDRS 155/23000 - 16 MLQAM CS and KS +21.5 dBm ±2.0 dB
MDRS 155/23000 - 16 MLQAM CS/BR +21.5 dBm ±2.0 dB
For transmit power values available at C‘, please refer to Operator Manual
05PHA00150AAK, Register 1, Description, Chapter 6.
ODU L
With these Outdoor Units the Tx and Rx levels displayed by the LMT refer to
interface C/C‘.
Maximum nominal Tx levels at C/C‘ (without ATPC) of the Outdoor Units:
MDRS 155/7500 - 128 MLQAM LS +16.0 dBm ±2.0 dB

ODU LX
With these Outdoor Units, the Tx and Rx levels displayed by the LMT refer to
interface C/C‘.
Maximum nominal Tx levels at C/C‘ (without ATPC) of Outdoor Units
MDRS 155/7500 - 128 MLQAM EXS und KXS +20,5 dBm ±2,0 dB
MDRS 155/11000 - 128 MLQAM KXS +18,5 dBm ±2,0 dB
MDRS 155/13000 - 128 MLQAM EXS +18.0 dBm ±2.0 dB
MDRS 155/38000 - 128 MLQAM MXS +15.0 dBm ±2.0 dB
MDRS 155/38000 - 16 MLQAM MXS +18.0 dBm ±2.0 dB
Note The lower and upper threshold values, i.e. MS OH/OL and MS UH/UL
(lower and upper limit) indicated in Fig. 4-42 meet the current test
specification (default settings).
2
Marconi 4-33
4.7.3 Measuring the receive level
CAUTION!!
The Outdoor Unit to be measured must have reached its operating
temperature and the antennas available on the link must have been aligned
to their maximum Rx level. Make sure that the ATPC function is off !
4.7.3.1 Measuring the receive level using the LMT (AGC characteristic)
To measure the Rx level, use the LMT measuring values (tolerance of ± 2.5 dB).
Alternatively, the Rx level can also be determined by means of the AGC
characteristic depicted in Fig. 4-44. Please refer to Fig. 4-38 „AGC measuring
points on the ODU S““, Fig. 4-39 “ODU L“ or Fig. 4-40 “ODU LX” for the position
of the corresponding test sockets.
To display the Rx level, follow the LMT menu path all the way up to the display of
the receiver measuring values.
Open the "Signal Structure" window (see Fig. 4-43).
In this window, activate the "Signal Structure" option and select the following
menu items:
Operation, OP, RX/RX Measuring values/ thresholds
Fig. 4-43 "Signal Structure (RX)" window
4-34 Marconi
ODU S
In case of Outdoor Units with synthesizer, the Tx and Rx levels displayed by the
LMT refer to interface A/A‘ between the ODU and filter box.
ODU L and ODU LX
With these Outdoor Units the Tx and Rx levels displayed by the LMT refer to
interface C/C‘.
The Rx level of the Outdoor Units depends on the radio hop parameters.
In the 1+1 Equipment Protection mode, the protection channel is switched to the
antenna using the RF switch (only ODU S) or via the coupler.
• When using the RF switch (only ODU S), the level for the standby receiver
(Rx level B) is reduced by about 10 to 11 dB.
• With a symmetrical coupler, both receivers are getting an Rx signal reduced

by 3.1 dB.
• With an asymmetrical coupler, the protection channel receives an Rx signal

reduced by 5 dB compared to that of the operating channel.
It is recommended to activate the "automatic reversion to the OP" option, i.e.
the system will switch back to the OP automatically as soon as the latter is
again fully operational. In the "Signal Structure" window, select the "RPS
Master, Module / RPS Module Config. RF Coupler, Line Switch“ menu
options and activate the corresponding function.
Note The lower and upper threshold values, i.e. MS OH/OL and MS UH/UL (lower
and upper limit) indicated in Fig. 4-43 meet the current test specification
(default settings).
In addition to the Rx level of the operating path, also check the level of the
protection path. For this purpose, switch over in both stations between the
operating path and protection path using the Service PC and execute the
measurement.
Marconi 4-35
AGC 4
(V)
ODU L
3,5
2,5
2 ODU S
and
ODU LX
1,5
0,5
PRx
-80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 (dBm)
Fig. 4-44 Typical AGC voltage characteristic over the Rx level
4.7.4 Measuring external interferers
To measure external interferers, proceed as follows:
1. Switch off the transmitter in the far-end station of the selected link using the
LMT.
2. Measure the receive level using the LMT as described in section 4.7.3.1.
3. A measuring result of
<-74 dBm from 7.5 GHz to 38 GHz (minimum Rx level display)
indicates that there are no external interferers.
4.7.5 Reflection measurement at the waveguide
Execute this measurement only if an ALFORM or FLEXWELL waveguide longer

than 10 m with 128 MLQAM and longer than 6 m with 16 MLQAM is used in
addition to the flexible waveguide.
4-36 Marconi
4.7.5.1 Preparing and calibrating the test setup
For a reflection measurement, you require the measuring instruments and

accessories listed under item 6 of the 'List of measuring units' (see section 1.4).
Using coaxial cables, set up the following connections between the spectrum
analyzer and tracking generator:
Connection to Connection to
Spectrum Analyzer Tracking Generator
Front side: Front side:

1ST LO OUTPUT LO OUTPUT
Rear side: Rear side:

LO SWP OUTPUT SWEEP+TUNE IN

10 MHz REF IN/OUT 10 MHz IN

BLANKING OUTPUT BLANK IN
Fig. 4-45 Connections between the spectrum analyzer and tracking generator
4.7.5.2 Test setup for calibration
Test
output
Spectrum
Analyzer
Short-circuit
Directional plate
coupler
Tracking
Printer Gene-
rator
Reference branch
(absorber)
Fig. 4-46 Calibrating a test setup
Marconi 4-37
CAUTION !!
Before executing any measurements, please read the Operating
Instructions of the measuring units carefully.
Both the measuring units and units to be tested must have reached their
operating temperatures. Precisely align the measuring units as described in
the corresponding Operating Instructions before you execute any
measurement! Perform the measurement following the manufacturer's
instructions!
In this test setup, the tracking generator is controlled by the spectrum analyzer.
The settings necessary for calibration and measurements must be performed on
the spectrum analyzer.
On the tracking generator, select the type of spectrum analyzer used (e.g. HP
8562A) as follows:
Press button
Display
"RESET"
"CONFIG" "CONFIG #1"
"ENTER" "HOST SELECT"
"MENU DOWN"
"ENTER"
Spectrum Analyzer
"STEP UP" or
type
"STEP DOWN" to
(e.g "HP 8562A")
"ENTER"
SETTING
SAVED
Fig. 4-47 Adjusting the spectrum analyzer type on the tracking generator
Settings on the spectrum analyzer :

Parameter 7.5 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18.7 GHz
Frequency range – start 7.0 GHz 10.7 GHz 12.5 GHz 14.0 GHz 17.7 GHz
Frequency range – end 8.0 GHz 11.7 GHz 13.5 GHz 15.5 GHz 19.7 GHz
Amplitude 5 dB/Div 5 dB/Div 5 dB/Div 5 dB/Div 5 dB/Div
Reference level 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB
Sweep mode Single sweep Single sweep Single sweep Single sweep Single sweep
Parameter 23 GHz 26 GHz 28 GHz 38 GHz

Frequency range – start 22.0 GHz 24.5 GHz 27.5 GHz 37.0 GHz
Frequency range – end 23.6 GHz 26.5 GHz 29.5 GHz 39.5 GHz
Amplitude 5 dB/Div 5 dB/Div 5 dB/Div 5 dB/Div
Reference level 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB
Sweep mode Single sweep Single sweep Single sweep Single sweep
Table 4-1 Settings on the spectrum analyser
4-38 Marconi
4.7.5.3 Calibrating the test setup
1. Mount a short-circuit plate to the output of the directional coupler.

2. Save the measuring characteristic to channel B of the spectr. analyzer
(TRACE B/CLEAR WRITE B).
3. Remove the short-circuit plate.
4. Set up a connection between the coupler output and the waveguide to be
measured.
5. Set the spectrum analyzer via the MATH A-B menu to A
(TRACE A/CLEAR WRITE A).
4.7.5.4 Description of measurement
Flexible ALFORM or Flexible

waveguide FLEXWELL waveguide waveguide
Spectrum
Analyzer
Directional Antenna
coupler
Tracking
Printer Gene- Test output
rator
Reference branch
(Absorber)
Fig. 4-48 Test setup for waveguide reflection measurement
1. Connect the equipment end of the waveguide to the test output of the
directional coupler (of calibrated test setup!).
2. On the spectrum analyzer, start a "Single sweep" over the calibrated

frequency range (7.0 to 8.0 GHz, 10.7 to 11.7 GHz, 12.5 to 13.5 GHz,
14.0 to 15.5 GHz, 17.7 to 19.7 GHz, 22.0 to 23.6 GHz, 24.5 to 26.5 GHz, 27.5
to 29.5 GHz or 37.0 to 39.5 GHz) and measure the reflection.
If the reflection measured over the entire frequency range at the antenna and
diplexer is
> 20 dB for 128 MLQAM and > 18 dB for 16 MLQAM
the specified return loss of the antenna including the waveguide run has been
achieved.
Print out the graphical test result displayed with the adjusted measuring
parameters on the spectrum analyzer screen. Attach this printout to the
commissioning protocol.
Marconi 4-39
4.7.6 Measuring the reflection loss and connecting cable length

(between Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit)
The following instruction describes the use of the "Site Master" from Anritsu
recommended as measuring unit (see section 1.4). Fig. 4-49 shows the test
setup for this measurement.
CAUTION!!
Before executing any measurements, please read the operating
instructions of the measuring unit carefully.
The measuring unit as well as the units to be tested must have reached
their operating temperature.
Precisely align the measuring unit as described in the corresponding

Operating Instructions before you execute any measurement!
When using the proposed "Site Master" from Anritsu, please observe the
calibrating and measuring instructions supplied with this measuring unit.
Before connecting the absorber (terminator)

CAUTION !
and / or measuring unit to the coaxial cable, both
ends of the connecting cable must be pulled out at
the Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit and the Indoor
Unit must have been switched off!
Danger of destruction of the absorber (terminator /
ATTENTION!
load) by too high DC voltage!
Measuring output Coaxial Absorber

connecting
cable
Site
Master
Fig. 4-49 Measuring the return loss and cable length
4-40 Marconi
Calibrate the measuring unit and measure the return loss in the following
frequency range:
100 MHz (F1 = Start) to 400 MHz (F2 = Stop)
The average limiting value for the reflection loss amounts to r ≥23 dB (-> Show
limit line on measuring unit!). If faults occur during the reflection measurement,
these can be localized by means of a measuring unit (e.g. Site Master) (see
Operating Instructions for measuring unit used).
Note For long cables (> 17 m) a smaller frequency shift must be adjusted and a new
calibration performed. Adjust a frequency shift of - for example - 20 MHz
allowing a cable length measuring range of > 700 m.
(setting example: F1 = 130 MHz and F2 = 150 MHz / 1st IF: 140 MHz).
Marconi 4-41
4.8 Commissioning Process - Part 2 (after antenna alignment)

Start up the commissioning process via the "View/Commissioning" menu items
or by clicking the "Commissioning Wizard" button. The following window
appears:
Start the commissioning

process by clicking the
"After antenna align-
ment" button!
Fig. 4-50 "Start Commissioning - Part 2" window
Click the "After antenna alignment“ button and continue the commissioning
process.
4-42 Marconi
After clicking the "After antenna alignment“ button, the following window
appears for
systems with redundancy * or for systems without redundancy.
Fig. 4-51 "Radio hop identifier(s)" window
* The screenshot depicted on the left-hand side shows the 1+1 Line Protection
window. With Equipment Protection, channel B is always adjusted (automatically)
in analogy to channel A. The "Radio hop ID - Channel B" boxes are greyed.
In this window, the radio hop identifiers for the transmitter (= outgoing) and
receiver (= expected) are adjusted via the menu options in accordance with the
customer's requirements! (=> without customer specs: Radio hop ID = 0).
The radio hop identifier for the transmitter and receiver of a link must be identical,
i.e. the identifier of the transmitter in station A must correspond with the
identifier of the receiver in station B and vice versa.
The radio hop identifiers of the transmitter and receiver of the same
Outdoor Unit (Radio Unit) are normally different!
After adjusting the radio hop identifiers (in systems with redundancy for operating
channel/channel A and protection channel/channel B), click the "Next“ button!
Marconi 4-43
The "Trace Identifier" window appears.
Fig. 4-52 "Trace Identifier" window
In radio links, the "Trace Identifier" (J0-Byte) is always set to "pass

through"! (=> Evaluation in the multiplexer).
Only in Line Protection and Space Diversity configurations, the window for
synchronizing the data streams opens with the next step:
Fig. 4-53 "Synchronization of data streams" window
Click the "Continue" button.
4-44 Marconi
In case of systems with redundancy, the "Configure ATPC" commissioning

window appears as a common window for channel A and channel B. In case of
systems without redundancy and space diversity, this window appears only for
channel A.
With Equipment Protection (1+1), channel B is always set (automatically) in

analogy to channel A. The "ATPC General - Channel B" box is greyed.
With Line Protection (1+1), the relevant setting can be made independently for
both channels.
Fig. 4-54 shows the window for Equipment Protection (1+1). To operate the
system without ATPC function (left screenshot), the required Tx power can be
adjusted in the "Max TX level [dBm]" box or the transmitter can be set to its
maximum Tx power by clicking the "Maximum value" option. If operation with
ATPC function is selected ("ATPC on“ box check-marked), further input fields
(right screenshot) appear for configuring the ATPC function.
Fig. 4-54 "Configure ATPC" window
In this window, adjust the ATPC function (in accordance with the customer's
requirements or station documents) by check-marking the corresponding box:
ATPC enabled ATPC on

or
ATPC disabled ATPC off
Then enter the maximum Tx level or ATPC settings via the menu (in accordance
with the customer's requirements or station documents)!
Marconi 4-45
With the next step, you can configure the XPIC mode, if required. This
configuration is necessary in case of two systems without redundancy (1+0) or
with Line Protection (1+1) configurations, if the connection shall be set up cross-
polarly to a (common) antenna.
Only with the XPIC option active, two STM-1 signals can be transmitted via one
channel.
In Line Protection configurations, channel B is always set (automatically) in

analogy to channel A.
Note Transmission in Line Protection configurations is possible either at the same

frequency (cross-polar connection with XPIC operation, same channel no.) or on
two different channels.
Window for Line Protection (1+1) Window for two systems (1+0)
Fig. 4-55 "Configure XPIC" window
1. XPIC switched off XPIC on
Choose the "Continue" button. The "After antenna alignment" part is complete
(Fig. 4-57).
4-46 Marconi
Fig. 4-56 "Configure XPIC / Clock" window
2. XPIC switched on XPIC on
In the "Clock" field, select between "Clock receiver" and "Clock generator".
Note Never select identical settings for XPIC partners.

Operate both the clock generator and clock receiver with the same
polarization referred to the far end.
Then click the "Next“ button to call up the window depicted in Fig. 4-57.
Fig. 4-57 "Part after antenna alignment is complete" window
Click the Finish button to complete part 2 of the commissioning process.
Marconi 4-47
4.9 Completing the commissioning process

After execution of the work steps described in sections 4.1 to 4.8, the basic
configuration of the system is complete.
Verify that
all transmitters (operation/protection) of the radio link are active;

the RF loops have been switched off in the Outdoor Units;
the ATPC function has been configured according to specifications;
no alarms are displayed;
the required network element addresses have been entered;
the "automatic reversion to OP" function is active whenever an
asymmetrical coupler is used.
In the Signal Structure, call up the following windows for testing and setting
purposes:
1. Click the Equipment/Network element MDRS 155 S, ATPC Master,

Module and ATPC Slave, Module (with HSB) menu items. From the
pulldown menu displayed, select the "ATPC Module Configuration" option.
Configure the ATPC function as specified: "ATPC on" or "ATPC off" .
2. Click the Equipment/Network Element MDRS 155 S, ODU Master, Module

and ODU Slave, Module (with HSB)" menu items. From the pulldown menu
displayed, select the "ODU Module Config. Tx level XPIC and General“
option. Setting: Normal mode
3. Click the Equipment; Network Element MDRS 155 S, SOH Master,

Module menu items. From the pulldown menu displayed, select the SOH
Module Configuration, OSI via DCCR or DCCM depending on the
customer's specifications. Factory setting: DCCR.
In order to be able to address the far end, both partners must use the same
channel.
Further configurations deviating from the default setting can be performed in the
configuration windows available for the individual modules (Signal Structure /
Equipment).
4-48 Marconi
4.9.1 Setting the network element date and time

1. Open the "Signal Structure" window (see Fig. 4-58).
2. In this window, select the following menu items: Network Element
MDRS 155 S and Network Element Date and Time.
3. Set the correct date and time.
4. To activate this setting, click the "Send“ button.
Fig. 4-58 "Network Element Date and Time" window
4.9.2 Setting of Network Element Free ASCII text, Equipment site

2. In this window, select the following menu items: Network element
MDRS 155 S and Network element Free ASCII text, Equipment site.
3. If required enter free ASCII text and the equipment site.
Click this
button to save
your entries
Fig. 4-59 "Network Element Free ASCII text, Equipment site" window
Marconi 4-49
4.9.3 Adjusting network element customer data

2. In this window, select the "Network Element MDRS 155 S" and
"Customer data" menu items.
3. Enter the customer data, if required (max. 1600 characters).
Click this button to

save your entries.
Fig. 4-60 "Network Element - Customer data" window
4-50 Marconi
4.10 Measuring the optical output power
The optical 155 Mbit/s interface (STM-1/Baseband) is optional. If required, this

interface can be activated by means of a micro-switch located on the bottom side
of the IDU (Fig. 4-1).
When performing this measurement, please mind the safety instructions in

section 3.6.7 "Laser radiation".
To measure the optical output power, connect an optical level meter (e.g. OLP-
15A from Acterna) with a short FO measuring cable to the optical output interface
(O) of the IDU.
Measuring the optical output power at STM-1 out (O) :
Nominal level: - 11.0 dBm

Tolerance: + 3.0 / - 4.0 dBm => Range: - 15.0 . . . - 8 dBm
CAUTION !
Laser output aperture
Optical
level meter
FO measuring cable (patch cord)
Fig. 4-61 Measuring the optical output power (test setup)
Marconi 4-51
4.11 Adjusting layer-3 addresses for SOA

The "Connection to network element" settings (Fig. 4-62) are required only if a
TCP/IP and OSI network element must be connected.
Fig. 4-62 "Network element TCP/IP Connection" window
4.11.1 Gateway entry in the OSPF environment
In the networks located in one area, a Gateway is not required. The distribution of
automatic routes in the network and area is assumed by the 'Designated Router'
determined automatically and by the 'Area Border Router'. In this case, '0.0.0.0'
must be entered in the Gateway box.
To define a Gateway in a network, the address must lie in the address range of
the corresponding interface. In this conjunction, it is not important as to whether
the Gateway really exists or not.
In case of a Gateway entry opposed to the conventions described above, the

interface stops sending out OSPF packets and does no longer participate in the
exchange of OSPF packets.
4-52 Marconi
From the signal structure of the MDRS 155 S network element, call up the
"Equipment/Network Element MDRS155 S“ menu item to activate the
"Network Element Layer-3 Addresses" pulldown menu and select the
"automatic“ mode (see Fig. 4-63).
Fig. 4-63 "Network element - Layer-3 Addresses" window
Note This window (Fig. 4-63) is relevant only in the "Q3p" mode.
In the "Automatic Mode", all relevant Layer-3 addresses are automatically

assigned by the system => Prerequisite: All network elements available in
the network must be set to the "Automatic Mode". This mode is appropriate
only for small networks. If the "Manual" mode is adjusted, all layer-3
addresses must be known and manually entered in the corresponding
mask.
The MDRS 155 S Microwave Radio System provides the modes appropriate for
remote monitoring (ServiceOn Access) described in the next sections.
Marconi 4-53
4.11.2 SOA via SISA – QD2 SISA-V mode
If a definite SISA address has not yet been defined, the commissioning process
can also be performed using the default address which can then be modified at a
later date.
Permitted address range (SISA node no.): 1 to 30.
Click this button

to save modifications!
Fig. 4-64 "QD2-SISA V mode" window
CAUTION!!
If an address modification is performed and sent to the network element
(i.e. saved), this will result in a network element reset and thus in a short
interruption of the network connection.
STM-1 transmission will not be affected.
4-54 Marconi
4.11.3 SOA via SISA - QD2 Slave mode
later date.
Click this button

to save
modifications!
Fig. 4-65 "QD2 Slave mode" window
CAUTION!!
If the address is modified and sent to the network element (i.e. saved), this
will result in a network element reset and thus in a short interruption of the
network connection.
STM-1 transmission will not be affected.
Marconi 4-55
4.11.4 SOA via SISA - QD2 via SISA-V mode
later date.
Fig. 4-66 "QD2 via SISA V mode" window
For this operating mode, a SISA -node no. must be assigned in the "Network
element TSAP- ID“ window (Fig. 4-67).
Permitted address range (SISA -node no.): 2 to 254

(SISA-node no. 1 is occupied by the "Gateway" network element").
4-56 Marconi
Click this button

to save
modifications!
Fig. 4-67 "Network element TSAP IDs" window
In the "SISAV-Gateway" network element (Fig. 4-68), enter the address (Serial
no. of the IDU operated in the "QD2-SISAV“ mode).
Fig. 4-68 "Network element SISAV Gateway" window
Marconi 4-57
4.11.5 SOA via ECC Gateway – Q3p mode
later date.
In this mode, the addresses for SOA must be

Fig. 4-69 "NE Q3p mode" window entered in the "NE Internet Addresses“ window.
Fig. 4-70 "NE Internet Addresses" window
In this operating mode, a "SISA node no." and an "NE access no. (SOA)" must
be assigned in the "Network element TSAP ID“ window. In case of systems with
redundancy configuration, a second "NE access no." is required. Permitted
address range: 1 to 254.
Click this button

to save
modifications!
Fig. 4-71 "Network element TSAP-IDs" window
4-58 Marconi
4.11.6 SOA via ECC Gateway - QD2-IP mode
later date.
Fig. 4-72 "NE QD2-IP mode" window In this mode, enter the addresses for SOA
in the "NE Internet Addresses“ window
i d
Fig. 4-73 " NE Internet Addresses" window
In this operating mode, a "SISA node no." and an "NE access no. (SOA)" must
be assigned in the "Network element TSAP ID“ window (Fig. 4-74). In case of
systems with redundancy configuration, a second "NE access no." is required.
Permitted address range: 1 to 254.
Click this button

to save
modifications!
Marconi 4-59
4.11.7 SOA via ECC Gateway – QD2-SISAV-IP mode
later date.
Fig. 4-75 "NE QD2-SISAV-IP mode" window In this mode, enter the addresses for SOA
in the "NE Internet Addresses“ window.
Fig. 4-76
In this "NE
mode Internet
enter Addresses"
the addresses window
for SOA
In the „NE Operating Mode QD2-SISAV-IP“ window (Fig. 4-75), adjust the SISA
node no. for VMP01.
In this operating mode, a "NE access no. (SOA)" must be assigned in the
"Network element TSAP ID“ window (Fig. 4-77). In case of systems with
redundancy configuration, a second "NE access no." is required. Permitted
address range: 1 to 254.
Click this button

to save
modifications!
4-60 Marconi
4.12 Complementary settings and tests
4.12.1 Operation with ATPC
After having activated the ATPC function in both the Outdoor Unit and redundant
Outdoor Unit (if available), perform the following configuration steps:
1. Open the "Equipment / ATPC Master or ATPC Slave / ATPC Module

Configuration" window.
2. In the "Nominal receive level" input box, enter the receive level to be
adjusted by the ATPC function in normal operation, provided that the Tx
power control range is sufficient. Depending on the in individual case of
application and requirements, select:
– for MDRS155 S 128 MLQAM between -30 dBm and -58 dBm
(recommended value: -50 dBm)
and
– for MDRS155 S 16 MLQAM between -30 dBm and -65 dBm
(recommended value: -50 dBm).
3. Define the control range by making appropriate entries in the "Min. Tx level"
and "Max. TX level" input boxes.
4. Save your settings by means of the "Save" button.
Fig. 4-78 "ATPC Module Configuration" window
Marconi 4-61
4.12.2 Switching an RF loop (operating channel)
This test is used to check the transmission in the own station. In the "RF loop
on“ mode, the ATPC function is switched off automatically in the "Internal RF
loop" window.
Fig. 4-79 "TX Configuration (1+0)" window
Fig. 4-80 "TX Configuration (Equipment Protection)" window
Note In systems with ODU L and ODU LX, the RF loopback option is not available.
4-62 Marconi
4.12.3 Switching a baseband loop
For testing purposes, it is possible to apply both the clock and data equipment-
internally from the output of the SDH processor demodulator to the input of the
SDH processor modulator, i.e. to loop back the baseband signals. Using a
baseband loop, it is possible to check bit-error-free transmission via one or
several radio hops without the necessity of a manned far end.
Observe the measuring direction:

Measuring unit connected to near end BB loop in far end!
Fig. 4-81 "Baseband Loop (Line)" window
CAUTION!!
After completion of the commissioning process, all loops must be disconnected.
Marconi 4-63
4.12.4 Configuring the station contacts
MDRS 155 S systems transmit maximally ten external alarms (station contacts =
alarm inputs) and three internal alarms (control lines = alarm outputs), a
switching contact of which can be freely selected.
Alarm outputs 1 and 2 are permanently assigned "INT A“ and "INT B“ and can be
configured and displayed in the signal structure under "Control/EDI,
NEControl/NEControl FE Alarms“.
To configure the station contacts, a separate LMT application "XQI“ must be

activated as follows:
In the window depicted in Fig. 4-82, click this button. The "XQI" menu window
appears.
Fig. 4-82 "XQI Application" window
Configure the XQI contacts according to customer specifications.
4-64 Marconi
Switching contact 1 is activated via the signal structure of XQI.
Fig. 4-83 "KOMA Configuration" window
Marconi 4-65
Click Control/Mainboard, 1, ME, ME. From the pulldown menu that appears,
select "ME Configuration".
The "ME Configuration“ window is then displayed.
Fig. 4-84 "ME Configuration" window
You can activate/deactivate contacts 1 to 10 and adjust the polarity (High/Low

closed/open contact) for the alarms.
If none of the contacts is occupied, execute a functional check.
Restore the initial status or operating status after completion of this check.
4-66 Marconi
Perform a functional check (alarm on/off) for all occupied contacts.
For this purpose, activate the "ME Alarms“ window (see Fig. 4-85).
Fig. 4-85 "ME Alarms" window
Marconi 4-67
4.12.5 Configuring service channels (SCU)
The system provides four service channels (64 kbit/s) and one wayside channel
(2 Mbit/s service channel).
Open the "SC Configuration“ window (see Fig. 4-86).
Activate the desired channels by check-marking the corresponding boxes " “.
Fig. 4-86 "SCU Configuration" window
Connectors X5F and X5E located on the IDU front panel (see Fig. 7-1) are
occupied twice as indicated in the table below. Select the required assignment by
means of the LMT.
Connector no. Assignment

X5F DSC4
F1-R
X5E DSC3
E1-R
4-68 Marconi
4.12.6 Checking service channel and wayside channel (WSC) alarms
If the activated channels are not occupied or in case of faults, the alarms pending
can be requested via the Control / SCU / SCU Alarms menu items:
Fig. 4-87 "SCU Alarms" window
Restore the initial status or operating status after completion of this check.
4.12.7 WSC loop function (2Mbit/s recording)
Activate the WSC channel (see Fig. 4-86) to which the BER measuring unit will
be connected. The WSC channel in the far end must be deactivated.
Activate the internal baseband loop in the far end (see Fig. 4-81).
CAUTION!
After completion of the test, all baseband loops must be
disconnected.
Marconi 4-69
4.13 EOW configuration

4.13.1 Configuring the EOW module
In the LMT desktop window (Fig. 4-21), call up the signal structure. By clicking
the "Equipment / Network Element MDRS 155 S / EOW Master, Module“ / Menu
selection "EOW Module Configuration: General, EOW“, the following window
appears (see Fig. 4-88):
Fig. 4-88 "EOW Module Configuration" window
1. In the "Connected direction" field, select the desired direction (e.g. Radio).
2. In the "General" field, enter the local telephone number.

NOTE: The far ends must have other call numbers.
3. If EOW ext. is required, select or deselect the "Exchange RX <> TX“ option
depending on the individual case of application.
4. Select or deselect the "Comm. interrupt. permitted" option in accordance with

the customer's specifications.
4-70 Marconi
4.13.2 Configuring SOH modules
In the LMT desktop window (Fig. 4-21), call up the signal structure. By clicking
the "Equipment / Network Element MDRS 155 S / SOH Master, Module“ /
Selection menu "SOH Module Configuration“, the following window appears (Fig.
4-89):
Fig. 4-89 "SOH Module Configuration" window
In the "E1-R interface“ and "E1-L interface“ fields, select "E1 external“ or "E1
EOW“ as required.
Marconi 4-71
On selection of "E1 EOW“, both the E1 line side and E1 radio side will be
automatically adjusted in the "SCU Configuration“ window (Fig. 4-90).
On selection of "E1 external“, the E1 line side and E1 radio side must be
activated manually in the "SCU Configuration“ window.
Fig. 4-90 "SCU Configuration" window
4-72 Marconi
4.13.3 EOW module configuration: PABX
In the LMT desktop window (Fig. 4-21), call up the signal structure. By clicking on
the "Equipment / Network Element MDRS 155 S / EOW Master, Module“ /
Selection menu "EOW Module Configuration: PABX“, the window depicted in Fig.
4-91 appears.
If a PSTN line is connected, the IDU is assigned a 3-digit call number. The first
digit is 0 (default system setting). In the "PABX no." field, enter the 2-digit number
of the PABX.
In the "Line attenuation" boxes, enter the values for the "Receiver" and
"Transmitter" attenuation.
The line attenuation setting depends on the PABX type used.
Fig. 4-91 "EOW Module Configuration: PABX" window
Marconi 4-73
4.14 XPIC configuration

If you require help during the configuration process, you can call up the LMT
online help by activating - for example - the "context-sensitive help" function. For
this purpose, click the button. Then click into the window or onto the element
for which you require help. The corresponding explanatory text will then be
displayed.
XPIC mode configuration
On the desktop displayed (Fig. 4-21) open the signal structure. By clicking on the
"Equipment / Network Element MDRS 155 S / DEMOD Master, Module“ /
Selection menu "DM Module Configuration“, the window depicted in (Fig. 4-92)
appears.
Fig. 4-92 "XPIC Mode" window
In the "XPIC Mode" field, check-mark the "XPIC on“ box.
In the "Clock" field, select between "Clock receiver" and "Clock generator".
Note Never select identical settings for XPIC partners set up in the same station.
Operate the clock generator and clock receiver with the same polarization
related to the far end.
In systems with ODU L, the XPIC mode is not available.
4-74 Marconi
The window shown in Fig. 4-93 displays the selected clock type in the "XPIC
Mode" box of the "General" field.
Fig. 4-93 "ODU Module Config. XPIC Tx Level" window
Marconi 4-75
4.15 Manual switchover in protection switching configurations (1+1)

Switch off the transmitter of the active channel via the LMT software (ODU, active
channel "Master“ or "Slave“, Module/ODU Module Config. RF; Transmitter off
= RF amplifier deactivated).
The "RPS "Master“ (transmitter or receiver; see "RPS Module Configuration,

Rx&Tx“ form) must be set to "Automatic" mode.
The system switches over to the other channel ( Transmitter on).
4.16 Checking data transmission between the SOA and network

element
Digital microwave radio systems are monitored and controlled by the Network
Management System SOA (ServiceOn Access). The SISA network is used for
data transmission. For this purpose, the microwave radio unit to be monitored is
connected to the SISA station bus or LAN.
4.16.1 Function test
Prerequisites:
The radio link is fully operational.

The digital microwave radio systems have been correctly configured.
The connection to the station bus (RS 485) or LAN has been set up.
a) Checking alarm transmission from the network element to the OMC
Measure :
Disconnect the baseband input signal (coaxial connector 1.6 / 5.6 on front side of
Indoor Unit).
The SPI functional group displays the LOS (Loss of Signal) alarm.
b) Checking command transmission from the OMC to the network element
Measure:
Change the "Service“ LED status as follows:

Select ON or OFF via the "Configuration/Basic Function/Service LED“ menu
items available for the network element.
The yellow "Service"-LED SERV lights up or not on the front panel of the Indoor
Unit.
Note Make sure the initial status or normal operating status is restored as soon
as the tests are terminated!
4-76 Marconi
4.17 Uploading and saving system data (HID)

Enter the system data in the commissioning protocol. This entry can be
performed using a macro which uploads the system data from the LMT database
and saves them to the "pdat32.mdb" file.
To save the data, proceed as follows:
1. Open the database:
Fig. 4-94 "Open Database" window
After opening the database window (= active window), change over again to the
'Equipment' window!
Marconi 4-77
2. Save the hardware inventory (HID) data by calling up the NE menu item and
selecting the "HID into Database" option:
Fig. 4-95 "Menu Selection - HID into Database" window
Various additional data can be entered in the following window (Fig. 4-96):
Fig. 4-96 "HID in Database" window
After clicking the OK button, the LMT saves all system data in the access
database format to the "pdat32.mdb“ file located in the "Marconi/Lmt / V7.x.x“
directory.
4-78 Marconi
3. Load the previously saved "pdat32.mdb“ file.
The system data are contained in the "Card Table“ of the Access database:
Fig. 4-97 "HID Database Card Table" window
Commissioning protocols for customers can be worked out by taking over the
HID data directly from the card table.
The procedure is described in the corresponding commissioning protocol.
Marconi 4-79
4.18 Alarm testing

Testing alarm signalling by the unit using the Service PC and SOA in the OMC.
Prerequisite:
The radio link operates without bit errors via the operating channel
(ATPC "OFF“).
In protection switching configurations (1+1 HSB), it is set to automatic switchover
(no red alarm LEDs „on“).
LMT software version: V. 7.0 or higher.
The alarm LEDs can be checked by simulating a fault or failure:
1. Disconnect the STM-1 input signal (155 Mbit/s) at the CMI or optical interface.
2. Adjust a receiver radio hop ID that differs from that adjusted for the far-end
transmitter.
3. Remove the connecting cable between the IDU and ODU.
4. Activate service channels 1 to 4 (64 kbit/s) and WSC (2Mbit/s) => see
sections 4.12.5 and 4.12.6.
Note The yellow "SERV" LED of the IDU is on as long as there is a connection
between the Service PC (LMT) and the system. If one of the measures described
under items 2 or 3 above is performed in system configurations with protection
channel, the system switches over from the operating channel to the protection
channel (automatic switchover active). For further alarm tests, switch back to the
operating channel and automatic switchover.
4-80 Marconi
Alarm signalling table for LEDs on the IDU front panel and Service PC
displays
LMT menu path for alarm display:

Signal Structure / Equipment / Network Element MDRS 155 S / Selection
Equipment Module (marked "red“ in case of failure). Check Standard Alarms and
Module Alarms. Alarms are displayed with a certain delay.
Fault/Failure Alarm status

LEDs on Service PC
IDU front panel Module- Standard Alarms Module - Alarms
Disconnect STM-1 input signal STM-1 lights up red SPI display red LOS at input red
at CMI or optical interface. IDU lights up red Module faulty (INT-B) red
Radio hop ID of receiver differs IDU lights up red DPU display red Radio hop ID red
from that adjusted for transmitter Module defective (INT-A) red
(far end).
Attention: Execute this test only
on the local IDU!
Remove connecting cable IDU lights up red CPU display red IDU <> ODU red
between the IDU and ODU (OP). ODU lights up red Module defective (INT-A) red
DPU display red LOS red
Module defective (INT-A) red Signal faulty red
DEMOD display red Clock monitoring - Radio red
Module faulty (INT-B) red Clock monitoring - Line red
Loss of sync of the FEC red
Carrier recovery red
Loss of IF input signal red
Input signal A/D converter red
DM Module - Hardware
alarms:
Equalizer reset red
Activate service channels 1 to 4 No alarm display If service channels are not
and wayside channel. occupied:
SOH display red
SCU display red Service channels and
Module faulty (INT-B) red wayside channel red
Table 4-2 Alarm testing
After completion of these tests, restore the desired operating mode.
Marconi 4-81
4.19 Measuring and recording performance data
4.19.1 Activating and requesting performance data
To activate/deactivate performance data, call up the signal structure via the LMT
by clicking the corresponding button (see Fig. 4-98 and Fig. 4-99).
Fig. 4-98 RSTTP Performance Data Monitoring
Fig. 4-99 RSTTP RF Performance Data Monitoring
4-82 Marconi
1. Deactivate RSTTP and RSTTP RF performance monitoring ( Monitoring

on) if it is still active ( Monitoring on). The equipment-internal performance
memory is thus deleted and permits a defined restart.
If the "PDAT32“ database contains performance data, these can be deleted
before activation.
2. Select the desired number of 15-min. and 24-h measuring intervals.
Activate RSTTP and RSTTP RF performance monitoring (see Fig. 4-98 and
Fig. 4-99).
3. To request the performance data, call up the database (see Fig. 4-100)
Fig. 4-100 "Open database" window
or select the "Open database" command from the "System" menu options.
The "PDAT32“ window appears.
Fig. 4-101 "PDAT32" window
Marconi 4-83
Click the corresponding button to select performance data or alarm messages.
Performance data
The performance data recorded are saved to the network element (NE) and can
be requested at any time.
(Max. 100 x 15-min. measuring values,
max. 30 x 24-h measuring values)
To request performance records, click the corresponding "Get ... performance

data" button. (Current, 15-min. or 24-h).
Fig. 4-102 "Get performance data" window
The values are contained in the "PDAT32“ database.
Alarm log
The alarms are not saved to the NE. In case of an online connection of the LMT,
the alarms are made available by the "PDAT32“ database.
Please ensure that the corresponding button is active in the Alarm Log window.
Fig. 4-103 "Activate log" button
4-84 Marconi
4.19.2 BER functional measurement
For measuring and recording bit errors, you need a 2 Mbit/s test set with timer
function, memory for storing test results as well as a printer (see Table 1-3 List of
measuring units).
The BER functional measurement is performed for a selected link with an SDH
multiplexer connected (MS1/4, if available).
Should the link include a regenerator station, the measurement covers two radio
hops. The transmission check is executed for a short period in all 2 Mbit/s
channels.
Different test setup variants are depicted in Fig. 4-104 to Fig. 4-107.
Note Bit errors must not occur during this measurement!

Number of bit errors = 0
CAUTION!!
Before executing any measurements, please read the Operating
Instructions of the measuring units carefully.
Both the measuring units and units to be tested must have reached their
operating temperatures.
Precisely align the measuring units as described in the corresponding
Operating Instructions before you execute any measurement! Perform the
measurements following the manufacturer's instructions!
Near end Far end
Outdoor Radio hop Outdoor

Unit (ODU) Unit (ODU)
Antenna Antenna
Coaxial Coaxial
cable cable
155 Mbit/s Far-end hardware

loop or
software loop
PCM or multiplexer
analyzer
MS 1/4 (MMU/SMU) MS 1/4
(e.g.
PFA 35) 2 Mbit/s
Fig. 4-104 Test setup for "BER functional measurement"
Marconi 4-85
4.19.3 BER recording
The long-term bit error recording is performed for one of the 2 Mbit/s channels of
the selected link with the SDH multiplexer (MS1/4, if available) connected. For
the complete recording duration, bit errors must not occur!
Number of bit errors = 0
Examples of test setups for BER measurement and BER recording
Radio hop Radio hop
ODU ODU ODU ODU
RST 155 Mbit/s RST 155 Mbit/s

RST 155 Mbit/s
MS 1/4 MS 1/4
2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s
PCM
Ana- Fig. 4-105 Test setup with MS1/4 in both terminals
lyzer
Radio hop
ODU ODU 155 Mbit/s loop
MS 1/4
2 Mbit/s
PCM
Ana- Fig. 4-106 Test setup with one MS1/4
lyzer
Radio hop
ODU ODU
155 Mbit/s
SDH
Ana-
lyzer
Fig. 4-107 Test setup without MS1/4
4-86 Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Uploads and Downloads
5 Uploads and Downloads

Note Software upgrade from Release 5.0 or 5.0SR1 to Release 5.1
In order to ensure that the ATPC/RTPC configuration is maintained after an

upgrade to the new software, the sequence defined below must absolutely be
observed. The ATPC function must have been enabled.
1. ODU-SW: Download and activate
2. IDU-SW: Download and activate
5.1 Software download

Insert the storage medium (disk or CD-ROM) with the equipment software to be
loaded into the Service PC (LMT) and continue as follows:
1. Activate the Equipment view.
Fig. 5-1 Activation of the Equipment View
Marconi 5-1
Uploads and Downloads Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
2. In the Equipment view (see Fig. 5-2), click the "CPU Master“ module using
the right mouse button. From the menu displayed, select the "Software
Download“ option.
Fig. 5-2 Downloading the Software
The "Module Characteristics - Station ...." window with the "Network Element File
Transfer“ line and the "Open" window appear (see Fig. 5-3).
Fig. 5-3 "Module Characteristics" window
5-2 Marconi
3. Select the CD-ROM drive (e.g. see Fig. 5-4).
Double-click
Fig. 5-4 Selecting the CD-ROM drive
4. Double-click the "Download“ directory.
The following window (Fig. 5-5) appears:
Double-click
Fig. 5-5 "Download" directory window
Marconi 5-3
5. Double-click the LMT directory. The window depicted in Fig. 5-6 appears.
Select the required control file.
Fig. 5-6 "File selection" window
6. For the IDU download, click the IDU directory. The IDU Download window
(Fig. 5-7) appears.
Fig. 5-7 "IDU Download" window
5-4 Marconi
7. Select the "idu 155s_440.ctl“ file. Then choose the "Open" button. The
window depicted in Fig. 5-8 appears.
Fig. 5-8 "Network Element File Transfer" IDU window
8. Choose the "Start“ button. The file download process begins.
The software is …
a) saved as SW version 2, if only one software version has been available
up to now or
b) the non-active software is overwritten if two versions have already been
memorized.
On completion of the download process, the corresponding entry

(see arrow, Fig. 5-9) is displayed.
Fig. 5-9 Window displaying the "End of script file" message
Marconi 5-5
9. Activate the new software in the LMT window (Fig. 5-10) as follows:
Fig. 5-10 "LMT" window
a) Click the "Signal structure" button.

b) Click the "Control" button.
c) Click the "EDI, NEControl“ button.
d) Click the scroll bar in the right-hand section of the window and select the
software you want to activate.
e) Click the "Activate software" button.
Note On activation, a (bit-error-free) "soft reset" of the network element takes place.
In 1+1 equipment configurations, the reset is first executed in the PR-IDU and
then in the OP-IDU.
5-6 Marconi
10. For the ODU download, double-click the ODU directory (Fig. 5-6).
The "ODU Selection" window (Fig. 5-11) appears.
Fig. 5-11 "ODU Selection" window
11. Select your ODU type (e.g. ODU_S). Then click the "Open" button.
The "ODU Download" window (Fig. 5-12) appears.
Fig. 5-12 "ODU Download" window
The following selection options are available:
• DOWNLOAD_ONLY The new software is only downloaded, but not yet

activated. The equipment configuration options can
be called up by means of a double-click.
• ACTIVATE_ONLY The already downloaded software is now activated.

The equipment configuration options can be called
up by means of a double-click.
Marconi 5-7
• Download and immediate activation of the new software in accordance with

the equipment configuration displayed.
Selecting the equipment configuration:
With 1+0 equipment configuration:

"odu_s_op_xxx.ctl" - SW download to the ODU-OP with subsequent SW
activation.
With 1+1 equipment configuration:

"odu_s_1+1_ xxx.ctl" - SW download to all ODUs available in the NE with
time-delayed SW activation on the ODU-OP and ODU-PR. (Thus, a service
interruption caused by the necessary ODU reset can be avoided).
"odu_s_op_ xxx.ctl" - SW download only to ODU-OP with SW activation.
"odu_s_pr_ xxx.ctl" - SW download only to ODU-PR with SW activation.
Note In equipment protection configurations set to the "Automatic" mode, the SW

activation on the active ODU (by an ODU reset) leads to a switchover to the other
channel.
12. Select the " odu_s_201.ctl“ file, for example, and click the "Open" button. The
mask depicted in Fig. 5-13 appears.
Fig. 5-13 "Network Element File Transfer" ODU window
5-8 Marconi
13. Choose the "Start" button. The file download process begins.
The software is…

a) stored as active software if only one software version has been available
up to now or
b) the inactive software is overwritten if two software versions are contained
in the memory.
On completion of the transmission process, the entry (see red arrow in Fig.
5-14) is displayed.
Fig. 5-14 "Control file processing terminated" window
After the successful completion of the download process, call up the "Session"
menu and select the "Request" option. The LMT will then display the active
software version.
Marconi 5-9
14. Check the new software in the LMT window (Fig. 5-15) as follows:
Fig. 5-15 "LMT" window
a) Click the "Signal Structure" button.

b) Click the "Equipment" button.
c) Click the "Network Element MDRS155 S" button.
d) Click the "ODU Master, ODU-S, Module" button.
e) Click the scrollbar button on the right-hand side of the window and select the
"ODU-S Module Card Info" option.
Note In case of an IDU download, the protection channel is also downloaded

automatically when the 1+1 mode is adjusted.
In case of an IDU download, the protection channel is also downloaded

automatically when the 1+1 mode is adjusted. In case of an ODU download and
a 1+1 equipment configuration, the "odu_s_1+1_ctl“ control file is used to load
the Master and Slave simultaneously. The software activation is time-delayed.
Thus, a service interruption caused by the necessary ODU reset can be avoided.
If you select another ODU type, proceed in analogy to the ODU S example
described above.
5-10 Marconi
5.2 MIB upload

The Management Information Base (MIB) includes all system-relevant
configuration data of the IDU and XQI. (In 1+1 configurations, only the OP-IDU
and XQI data can be uploaded by means of the 'Session upload' option; see
section 5.4).
5.2.1 Uploading (saving) the MIB to an external storage medium
Insert, for example, a 3.5“ disk in the disk drive of your computer which contains
the LMT software.
Activate the Equipment view (see Fig. 5-16):
Fig. 5-16 Activating the Equipment view
Marconi 5-11
In the Equipment view (see Fig. 5-17), click the "CPU Master“ module using the
right mouse button.
From the menu displayed, select the "Database Upload“ option:
Fig. 5-17 Uploading the MIB database
The LMT window "Module Characteristics - Station ... “ with the "Network
Element File Transfer“ line and the "Save as“ mask appear (see Fig. 5-18):
5-12 Marconi
Enter the desired filename, e.g. "Station A“ and click the "Save“ button. In the
"Network Element File Transfer“ directory, the "Upload MIB CPU“ line appears
(see Fig. 5-19):
Fig. 5-19 Window displaying the "Upload MIB CPU" message
Click the Start button. The file upload (copying) process begins. This process is
complete, when the message "Transmission terminated" is displayed (see Fig.
5-20):
Fig. 5-20 Window displaying the "Transmission terminated" message
Marconi 5-13
5.3 MIB download

The Management Information Base (MIB) includes all system-relevant
configuration data of the IDU and XQI.
Note In 1+1 operation, only the data of the OP-IDU and XQI are downloaded.
The PR-IDU and ODU data are configured manually or by means of the
'Session download' option; see section 5.5).
5.3.1 Downloading the MIB (database) from an external storage medium
Insert the external storage medium with the copied MIB, which is a 3.5“ disk in
this example, into the disk drive of the computer which contains the LMT
software.
Activate the Equipment view (see Fig. 5-21):
Fig. 5-21 Activating the Equipment view for a MIB download
5-14 Marconi
In the Equipment view (see Fig. 5-22), click the "CPU Master“ module using the
right mouse button.
From the menu displayed, select the "Database Download“ option:
Fig. 5-22 Downloading the MIB database
The "Module Characteristics - Station ...." window with the "Network Element
File Transfer“ line and the "Open“ window appear (see Fig. 5-23):
Marconi 5-15
Select the desired filename ("Station A" in this example) and click the "Open“
button.
The "Download MIB CPU“ line (Fig. 5-24) appears in the "Network Element File
Transfer“ directory:
Fig. 5-24 Window displaying the "Download MIB CPU" message
Click the "Start“ button. The file download process begins. In the "Network
Element File Transfer" window, the message "Data transmitted, wait for
confirmation" appears. On completion of the file download, the "Layer-2
connection interrupted“ window (Fig. 5-25) appears:
Fig. 5-25 "Layer 2 connection interrupted" window
The interruption time is about 7 seconds. It is caused by the CPU reset.
Confirm this message by means of the "OK“ button.
From the "Session" menu, select the "Online“ option.
Note The OP-IDU and XQI are configured by means of the MIB download.
The PR-IDU and ODUs must be configured manually.
5-16 Marconi
5.4 Session upload

The 'Session upload/download' is available as further option to configure system
modules (including PR-IDU and ODUs).
In this case, however, the LMT considers the XQI as a standalone network
element, i.e. all steps to be taken must be repeated for XQI.
For saving the configuration data of the microwave radio system (Session
upload), the signal structure of the network element must be called up (also
applicable to XQI) and the top level (SDH_NE) must be selected by means of the
left mouse button (see Fig. 5-26).
Fig. 5-26 Network element signal structure - Top level selected
Using the "File->Save“ or "File->Save as...“ menu item (see Fig. 5-27), the
network element configuration is saved to the "<Name>.rss“ file (".rss" stands for
microwave radio system).
(For the XQI network element, the corresponding "<Name>.xqi“ file is generated.)
Marconi 5-17
Fig. 5-27 "File->Save" menu item
In the window that opens (see Fig. 5-28), select the place you want to save the
corresponding configuration file, e.g. 31/2 floppy disk (A:). Enter a new filename, if
required.
Fig. 5-28 "Save as ..." window
The files saved now include the information required for reconfiguring the system.
They can be used for a "Session download".
5-18 Marconi
5.5 Session download

The session download is used to reconfigure the microwave radio system, e.g.
after a module exchange.
For this purpose, a LMT offline session is started via the "File->Open" menu item
(see Fig. 5-29).
Fig. 5-29 "File->Open..." menu
Select the corresponding file (example: "MDRS 6A (online).rss“; see Fig. 5-30)
and click the "Open" button.
Fig. 5-30 File selection in "Open" window
The LMT offline session is started.
Marconi 5-19
The following screenshot (Fig. 5-31) shows the offline session of the "MDRS 6A“
network element with the memorized configuration data available.
Fig. 5-31 "MDRS 6A (offline) MDRS 6A (ONLINE).RSS" window
Start another LMT session via the "File->New“ menu (see Fig. 5-32). Set up an
online connection to the network element (serial or via a LAN connection).
Fig. 5-32 Starting a new LMT session via the "File->New" menu
Then change over to the signal structure.
5-20 Marconi
Fig. 5-33 shows the signal structures of the two LMT sessions side by side.
In the signal structure displayed by the offline session, select the top level
"SDH_NE“ by means of the left mouse button. Keep the mouse button pressed,
drag the option selected to the online session window and drag it in the same line
(drag&drop).
Fig. 5-33 Offline and online signal structures displayed side by side
Then click the "Send selected elements" button to send the copied data to the
network element (Fig. 5-34).
Fig. 5-34 Send selected elements
Watch the display counting down the number of elements still to be sent
(see Fig. 5-35) to 0.
Marconi 5-21
Fig. 5-35 "Send signal structure" display
Configuration changes included (e.g. operating mode of network management,

network element IP addresses or SISA-V address) require resets in the network
element. Confirm these by means of the OK button (see Fig. 5-36).
Fig. 5-36 Confirming necessary reset
The connection to the network element is interrupted (Fig. 5-37). Confirm this by
clicking the OK button in the message window displayed.
Fig. 5-37 Connection to NE interrupted
Set up a new connection to the network element.

As soon as the system is again online, repeat the Drag&Drop procedure until the
"Send signal structure" display has counted down to 0 elements. The session
download is then complete.
Note The individual configuration settings leading to a network element reset can also
be made in advance by means of the LMT. A subsequent session download is
then no longer interrupted.
A session download is generally recommended for the PR-IDU or ODUs.
The MIB download makes sense if only the OP-IDU shall be (re)configured.
It offers the advantage of a simultaneous update of the OP-IDU and XQI.
5-22 Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Replacing Equipment Units
6 Replacing Equipment Units

With XPIC operation or after replacement of an IDU, the IDUs must have the
same equipment version.
Caution!!
Only for 28 GHz systems
In the XPIC mode of the ODU 155/28-128 S (ENU 001) with a higher ODU
equipment level or EDM version, the ODU (ENU 001) must be configured as
Master (clock generator).
6.1 Replacing systems without protection switching (1+0)

Proceed as follows:
• Switch of the supply voltage of the defective unit.

• Dismount the defective unit.
• Check the equipment version of the replacement unit.
• Check the lateral mounting brackets (flanges) (ETSI or 19“) and ensure that
they are correctly mounted. If not, change them.
• Set the address switch on the replacement unit (ADR) to "1+0“.
• Check the interface switch on the replacement unit (CMI/OPT) (see Fig. 4-1).
• Replace the defective IDU (or ODU).
• Connect the power supply cable.
• Switch on the IDU and check it for its software version. If necessary,
download the appropriate software (see section 5.1).
• Configure the IDU manually or by means of a MIB or Session download (see
section 5.3 or 5.5).
• Switch off the supply voltage of the replacement unit.
• Set up all IDU and ODU connections (coaxial cables).
• Switch on the supply voltage.
After replacement of the defective unit, check the link for error-free transmission
and ensure that there are no alarms!
Marconi 6-1
Replacing Equipment Units Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
6.2 Replacing systems in protection switching configurations

In case of systems with protection switching, a distinction is made between two
different cases:
1. Failure of the operating channel (OP)
In this case, proceed as follows:
• Switch off the supply voltage of the defective unit.

• Check the lateral mounting brackets (flanges) (ETSI or 19“) and
• ensure that they are correctly mounted. If not, change them.
• Set the address switch on the replacement unit (ADR) to "1+1 OP“.
• Replace the defective IDU (or ODU) by a new unit.
• Configure the IDU manually or by means of a MIB or Session download (see
section 5.3 or 5.5).
• Set up all IDU and ODU connections (coaxial cables).
Note In protection configurations with Line Switch, please note that the latter must be
switched back from "Forced LS-PR“ to "Automatic“.
2. Failure of the protection channel (PR)
In this case, proceed as follows:
• Switch off the supply voltage of the defective unit.

• Check the lateral mounting brackets (flanges) (ETSI or 19“) and ensure that
they are correctly mounted. If not, change them.
• Set the address switch (ADR) on the replacement unit to "1+0“ (setting
required to check the software status).
• Replace the defective IDU (or ODU) by a new unit.
6-2 Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Replacing Equipment Units
• Set the address switch (ADR) on the replacement unit to "1+1 PR".
• Set up all IDU and ODU connections (coaxial cable).
• Configure the IDU manually or using a Session download (see section 5.5).
Note regarding a manual configuration of the IDU via the OP Master:
- In the DPU Slave, Module: Adjust radio hop identifiers.

- In the ATPC Slave, Module: Check ATPC on/off and settings.
- In ODU Slave, ODU-S, Module: Check channel number and configuration
settings.
With Line Protection, additionally perform an "STM-1 synchronization“.

In the window depicted in Fig. 4-21 call up the signal structure. Activate the
synchronization window by selecting the "Equipment/Network Element MDRS
155 S/RPS Master, Module“/ "RPS Module Configuration“ menu.
Marconi 6-3
Replacing Equipment Units Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
6-4 Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Pin Assignment of Connectors
7 Pin Assignment of Connectors

All connectors required for Indoor Unit operation are arranged on the front panel
of the equipment.
7.1 Connector types used

The Indoor Unit is equipped with the following connector types:
U CAUTION!
N-connector (coaxial) Danger of damage or destruction of
female measuring instruments! A DC voltage of
-48 V or -60 V is continuously available
on this coaxial connector (IF input/output).
Connect only ODUs of the MDRS 155 S
system family!
Coaxial connector 1.6/5.6

female
Western connector, 8-pin

female, RJ-45
Western connector, 6-pin

female, RJ-11
Sub-D2
connector
+ - -
Optical connectors for monomode fibers
LC duplex,
female
Outdoor Unit waveguide ports PDR... acc. to IEC-154.
Marconi 7-1
Pin Assignment of Connectors Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
X X X X X X X X X X X X
5D 5F 5E 5H 5I 5L 12 13 14 15 16 17
X X X X X X X X X X X XX B X X X
1 3 2 5C 5B 5A 5G 5K 5M 6 7 8 9 3500 10 11 4
Fig. 7-1 Connectors on the front panel of the Indoor Unit
7.2 Connector designations
Conn. Pins Design Application Desig-

no. Female Type nation
(f)
Male
(m)
X1 1 f Coaxial Connecting cable to the Outdoor Unit (ODU) IF
N-connector Modulated Tx signal at IF = 350 MHz
50 Ohms Modulated Rx signal at IF = 140 MHz
Modulated signalling bus at IF = 6 MHz DC
Supply voltage: -48 V / -60 V DC for ODU -48V/60V
X2 1 f Coaxial Input of modulated Rx signal with IF = 140 MHz XPIC 1
1.0/2.3 for XPIC operation
50 Ohms
X3 1 f Coaxial Output of modulated Rx signal with IF = 140 MHz XPIC 1
1.0/2.3 for XPIC operation
50 Ohms
X4 1 f Coaxial Not occupied. XPIC 3
1.0/1.2
50 Ohms
X5A 8 f Western Data channel STM-1 E1, 64 kbit/s, G.703, Line direction E1-L
X5B 8 f Western Data channel STM-1 F1, 64 kbit/s, G.703, Radio direction F1-L
X5C 8 f Western Service channel no. 1, 64 kbit/s, G.703, Radio direction DSC1
X5D 8 f Western Service channel no. 2, 64 kbit/s, G.703, Radio direction DSC2
X5E 8 f Western Data channel STM-1 E1, 64 kbit/s, G.703, Radio direction or DSC3
Service channel no. 3, 64 kbit/s, G.703, Radio direction E1-R
X5F 8 f Western Data channel STM-1 F1, 64 kbit/s, G.703, Radio direction or DSC4
Service channel no. 4, 64 kbit/s, G.703, Radio direction F1-R
X5G 8 f Western Wayside channel 2048 kbit/s, G.703, 120 Ohms, Radio direction WSC
X5H 8 f Western Input/output for exchanging alarm information with a second IDU in XPIC 2
the XPIC mode.
X5I 8 f Western Early Warning (corr.) pulses to DPU STM-4, V.11 LWI
X5K 8 f Western F-interface for LMT connection, RS 232 LMT
X5L 8 f Western Q-interface: QD2 Master/Slave interface, RS 485 QD2
X5M 8 f Western LAN interface, Ethernet 10-Base-T LAN
X6 15 m Mini Sub-D Bus interface for controlling radio protection switching BUS 1
X7 15 f Mini Sub-D Bus interface for controlling radio protection switching BUS 2
X8 1 f Coaxial STM-1 input from a redundant IDU128S for radio protection RPS
1.0/1.2 switching, CMI-encoded acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.
50 Ohms
X9 1 f Coaxial STM-1 output to a redundant IDU128S for radio protection RPS
1.0/1.2 switching, CMI-encoded acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.703
50 Ohms
7-2 Marconi
Conn. Pins Design Application Desig-

no. Female Type nation
(f)
Male (m)
B3500 1 f OPTICAL STM-1 input, optical, acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.957 S-1.1 STM-1
input alternatively to X8A OPT
B3500 1 f OPTICAL STM-1 output, optical, acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.957 S-1.1 STM-1
output alternatively to X8B OPT
X10 1 f Coaxial STM-1 input, electrical, CMI-encoded acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.703, STM-1
1.6/5.6 alternatively to B3500 CMI
75 Ohms
X11 1 f Coaxial STM-1 output, electrical, CMI-encoded acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.703, STM-1
1.6/5.6 alternatively to B3500 CMI
75 Ohms
X12 8 f Western Ext. device interface 1: Station monitoring, 3x input, 4x output, TTL level EDI 1
X13 8 f Western Ext. device interface 2: Station monitoring, 7x input, TTL level EDI 2
X14 6 f Western EOW: External analog branch EXTEOW
X15 6 f Western EOW: 2-wire PSTN, analog PABX
X16 6 f Western EOW: Telephone port PHONE
X17 3 m Sub-D Battery port -48 V / -60 V DC (negative pole tied to ground) BAT
7.3 Assignment of connectors

X1 IF Coaxial connection to the Outdoor Unit
Pin no. Signal Description

1 Supply voltage, signalling, transmit IF, Connecting cable to Outdoor Unit (ODU) occupied by
receive IF from/to ODU modulated Tx signal at IF = 350 MHz
modulated Rx signal at IF = 140 MHz
modulated signalling bus at IF = 6 MHz
supply voltage -48 V / -60 V DC to ODU
S Screen tied to ground 0V
X2 XPIC 1 Input Coaxial 1.0/2.3 Female

X3 XPIC 1 Output Coaxial 1.0/2.3 Female

1 Modulated Rx signal IF = 140 MHz Input/output for the signal received at the same
RF frequency and on the cross-polarization
plane; only with CCDP operation
S Screen tied to ground 0 Volt
Marconi 7-3
X5A E1-L 8-pin Western connector (female)

X5B F1-L 8-pin Western connector (female)
X5C DSC1 8-pin Western connector (female)
X5D DSC2 8-pin Western connector (female)
X5E DSC3 E1-R 8-pin Western connector (female)
X5F DSC4 F1-R 8-pin Western connector (female)

1 Data signal output, "a“-wire 64 kbit/s, 120 Ohms, balanced, acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.703
2 Data signal output, "b“-wire 64 kbit/s, 120 Ohms, balanced, acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.703
3 Ground 0V
4 Data signal input, "a“-wire 64 kbit/s, 120 Ohms, balanced, acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.703
5 Data signal input, "b"-wire 64 kbit/s, 120 Ohms, balanced, acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.703
6 Ground 0V
7 not occupied -
8 not occupied -
X5G WSC 8-pin Western connector (female)

1 Data signal output, "a"-wire 2048 kbit/s, 120 Ohms, bal., acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.703
2 Data signal output, "b“-wire 2048 kbit/s, 120 Ohms, bal., acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.703
3 Ground 0V
4 Data signal input, "a“-wire 2048 kbit/s, 120 Ohms, bal., acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.703
5 Data signal input, "b“-wire 2048 kbit/s, 120 Ohms, bal., acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.703
6 Ground 0V
7 not occupied -
8 not occupied -
X5I LWI 8-pin Western connector (female)

1 Early warning/correction signal to DPU STM-4 V.11, "a“-wire
2 Early warning/correction signal to DPU STM-4 V.11, "b“-wire
3 Ground 0V
4 not occupied -
5 not occupied -
6 not occupied -
7 not occupied -
8 not occupied -
X5K LMT 8-pin Western connector (female)

1 Data output RS232 interface
2 not occupied -
3 Ground 0V
4 not occupied -
5 Data input RS232 interface
6 Ground 0 Volt
7 not occupied -
8 not occupied -
7-4 Marconi
X5L QD2 8-pin Western connector (female)

1 QD2 bus, direction 1, "a“-wire RS485 interface
2 QD2 bus, direction 1, "b“-wire RS485 interface
3 Ground 0V
4 QD2 bus, direction 2, "a“-wire RS485 interface
5 QD2 bus, direction 2, "b“-wire RS485 interface
6 Ground 0V
7 not occupied -
8 not occupied -
X5M LAN 8-pin Western connector (female)

1 TD+ TPOP: Output 100 Ohms, twisted-pair
2 TD- TPON: Output 100 Ohms, twisted-pair
3 RD+ TPIP: Input 100 Ohms, twisted-pair
4 not occupied -
5 not occupied -
6 RD- TPIN: Input 100 Ohms, twisted-pair
7 not occupied -
8 not occupied -
X6 BUS 1 Miniature Sub-D 15-pin male

X7 BUS 2 Miniature Sub-D 15-pin female

1 TD+ HDLC-Tx bus, p-wire, 100 Ohms (half-duplex mode)
2 TD- HDLC-Tx bus, n-wire, 100 Ohms (half-duplex mode)
3 TR+ HDLC-Rx bus, p-wire, 100 Ohms (half-duplex mode)
4 TR- HDLC-Rx bus, n-wire, 100 Ohms (half-duplex mode)
5 LFIa LFI Bus, V.11, "a“-wire
6 LFIb LFI Bus, V.11, "b“-wire
7 FRGB_CMIa CMI OT signal, V.11, "a“-wire
8 FRGB_CMIb CMI OT signal, V.11, "b“-wire
9 I2Ca I2C bus, "a“-wire
10 IICb I2C bus, "b“-wire
11 CANa CAN bus, "a“-wire
12 CANb CAN bus, "b“-wire
13 U+5V +5 V output to the RPS Unit (PSU network 9)
(parallel powering by all IDUs connected)
14 Ground 0V
15 BUS_TERM Control signal for automatic bus termination
X8 RPS Input Coaxial 1.0/1.2 Female

X9 RPS Output Coaxial 1.0/1.2 Female

1 STM-1 input/output, CMI-encoded Input (X8) or output (X9) of STM-1 signals from/to
second IDU for protection switching,
CMI-encoded acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.703
Marconi 7-5
B 3500 STM-1 OPTICAL Data Input

B 3500 STM-1 OPTICAL Data Output
X10 STM-1 CMI Data Input Coaxial 1.6/5.6 Female
X11 STM-1 CMI Data Output Coaxial 1.6/5.6 Female

1 STM-1 input/output, CMI-encoded Input (X10) or output (X11) of STM-1 signal from/to line
interface, CMI-encoded acc. to ITU-T Rec. G.703
X12 EDI 1 8-pin Western connector (female)

1 Output, INT-A alarm TTL level, 0 ≡ fault/failure, 1 ≡ normal operation
2 Output, INT-B alarm TTL level, 0 ≡ normal operation, 1 ≡ fault/failure
3 Ground 0V
4 Output to remote control via TMN TTL level, 0 ≡ off, 1 ≡ on
5 Input 1 to remote control via TMN TTL level, 1 ≡ open, 0 ≡ closed
6 Ground 0V
X13 EDI 2 8-pin Western connector (female)

1 Input 4: Remote control via TMN TTL level, 1 ≡ open, 0 ≡ closed
3 Ground 0V
X14 EXTEOW 6-pin Western connector (female)

1 Output/input, "a“-wire Balanced analog line 0.3 to 3.4 kHz, "a“-wire
2 Output/input, "b"-wire Balanced analog line 0.3 to 3.4 kHz, "b"-wire
3 not occupied -
4 not occupied -
5 Input/output, "a"-wire Balanced analog line 0.3 to 3.4 kHz, "a"-wire
6 Input/output, "b"-wire Balanced analog line 0.3 to 3.4 kHz, "b"-wire
7-6 Marconi
X15 PABX 6-pin Western connector (female)

1 not occupied -
2 Ground 0V
3 Line "La“ to PSTN Analog input/output, 0.3 to 3.4 kHz, 2-wire, "a"-wire
4 Line "Lb“ to PSTN Analog input/output, 0.3 to 3.4 kHz, 2-wire, "b"-wire
5 not occupied -
6 not occupied -
X16 PHONE 6-pin Western connector (female)

1 not occupied -
2 Ground 0V
3 Line "La“ to PSTN Analog input/output, 0.3 to 3.4 kHz, 2-wire, "a"-wire
4 Line "Lb“ to PSTN Analog input/output, 0.3 to 3.4 kHz, 2-wire, "b"-wire
5 not occupied -
6 not occupied -
X17 BAT Sub-D 3-pin male

1 - BAT 2 Battery voltage no. 2, 48 V, negative pole
2 - BAT 1 Battery voltage no. 1, 48 V, negative pole
3 + BAT Battery voltage, common positive pole tied to ground
S Screen Tied to ground via connector housing
Marconi 7-7
7-8 Marconi
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005 Service Instructions
8 Service Instructions
Digital Microwave Radio Systems from Marconi Communications GmbH are
maintenance-free.
If not otherwise contractually agreed, equipment repairs are limited to the

replacement of complete modules.
Provided that there are no other contractual regulations, please send defective
modules to the following address:

Central Europe Repair Management
Robert-Bosch-Str.10
01454 Radeberg
Germany
Repair Management
(during service hours)
Phone: + 49 3528 / 456 - 267 or - 583

Fax: +49 3528 / 456 534
Front Line Support (FLS)
Call Numbers:
(24 hrs/7 days)
Phone: 08000 / 6272664

Fax: 0800 / 1812275
Marconi 8-1
Service Instructions Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
8-2 Marconi
Systems
MDRS 155
OSPF Functions and Commands
Release 5.1
05PHA00153AAR
Version: ENU 001 000 000; 07.2005
D-71520 Backnang
Telefon (07191) 13-0 Telefax (07191) 13-3212


D-71520 Backnang

Windows is a trademark of
OSPF Functions and Commands Contents
Contents
1 OSPF and MDRS .............................................................................................. 1-1

1.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 IP router ................................................................................................................................ 1-1

1.2.1 Brief description .............................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2.2 Router features ............................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.3 Configuration................................................................................................................... 1-2
2 "Telnet" Command Set.................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Commands of all command levels ..................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Commands of the "Telnet" command level ...................................................................... 2-2
2.4 Commands of the "OSPF" command level ....................................................................... 2-3

2.4.1 General commands ........................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.2 OSPF configuration memories........................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.2.1 OSPF Configuration Memory Management ............................................................ 2-3
2.4.3 Commands for editing an area ....................................................................................... 2-4
2.4.4 Commands for editing interfaces .................................................................................... 2-4
2.4.5 Commands for editing static routes ................................................................................ 2-5
2.4.6 Commands for combining IP networks........................................................................... 2-6
2.4.7 Commands for configuring a "virtual link" ....................................................................... 2-6
2.4.8 Commands for changing the "Router ID" ....................................................................... 2-7
2.4.9 Commands for AS statistics............................................................................................ 2-7
3 Router Connections ........................................................................................ 3-1

3.1 "Embedded" Telnet session ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 LMT................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 MSP ................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Telnet session via a Windows PC ...................................................................................... 3-1
3.3 Telnet session via workstation........................................................................................... 3-1
4 Configuration Help .......................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Logging in............................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.3 Static routes ......................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.4 Dynamic OSPF routing........................................................................................................ 4-2
5 Status Tables ................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Configurations in the AS..................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 Interface assignment ...................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Area parameters ............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.3 Static routes .................................................................................................................... 5-2
05PHA00153AAR I
Contents OSPF Functions and Commands
5.1.4 Combined IP networks.................................................................................................... 5-2

5.1.5 Virtual links...................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Requesting statistics data................................................................................................... 5-3

5.2.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.2 Examples of system responses ...................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.2.1 Area overview .......................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.2.2 Overview of external routes..................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.2.3 Overview of the router configuration........................................................................ 5-4
5.2.2.4 Overview of the interface configuration ................................................................... 5-4
5.2.2.5 Overview of the link state database......................................................................... 5-4
5.2.2.6 Analysis of a LSA..................................................................................................... 5-5
5.2.2.7 Overview of OSPF neighbors .................................................................................. 5-5
5.2.2.8 Overview of the routing table ................................................................................... 5-6
6 Complementary Explications.......................................................................... 6-1

6.1 "Virtual link" using the MDRS 155 Digital Microwave Radio System ............................. 6-1
6.1.1 "Unnumbered" interface.................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.2 "Demand circuit" ............................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.3 Router ID......................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Uploading and downloading router data ........................................................................... 6-2

6.2.1 Router data upload ......................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1.1 MDRS 155 S with LMT ............................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.1.2 MDRS 155 E with MSP............................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.1.3 MDRS 155 S with SOA............................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.1.4 MDRS 155 E with SOA............................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.2 Router data download..................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2.1 MDRS 155 S with LMT ............................................................................................ 6-3
6.2.2.2 MDRS 155 E with MSP............................................................................................ 6-3
6.2.2.3 MDRS 155 S with SOA............................................................................................ 6-3
6.2.2.4 MDRS 155 E with SOA............................................................................................ 6-3
II 05PHA00153AAR
OSPF Functions and Commands Figures
Figures
Fig. 1-1 Router interface ................................................................................................................ 1-1
Fig. 2-1 OSPF configuration memory........................................................................................... 2-3
05PHA00153AAR III
Figures OSPF Functions and Commands
IV 05PHA00153AAR
OSPF Functions and Commands Tables
Tables
Table 2-1 Commands of all command levels.............................................................................. 2-1
Table 2-2 Commands of the "Telnet" command level ............................................................... 2-2
Table 2-3 Commands of the OSPF command level ................................................................... 2-3
Table 2-4 Commands for editing an area .................................................................................... 2-4
Table 2-5 Commands for interface editing.................................................................................. 2-4
Table 2-6 Commands for editing static routes ........................................................................... 2-5
Table 2-7 Commands for combining IP networks...................................................................... 2-6
Table 2-8 Commands for configuring a "virtual link" ................................................................ 2-6
Table 2-9 Commands for changing the "Router ID" .................................................................. 2-7
Table 2-10 Commands for AS statistics .................................................................................... 2-7
Table 5-1 Interface assignments.................................................................................................. 5-1
Table 5-2 Area parameters ........................................................................................................... 5-1
Table 5-3 Routing table of static routes ...................................................................................... 5-2
Table 5-4 Net range ....................................................................................................................... 5-2
Table 5-5 Virtual links.................................................................................................................... 5-2
Table 5-6 Area overview ............................................................................................................... 5-3
Table 5-7 AS-external LSAs.......................................................................................................... 5-3
Table 5-8 Interface configuration................................................................................................. 5-4
Table 5-9 Link State Database...................................................................................................... 5-4
Table 5-10 OSPF neighbors ........................................................................................................ 5-5
Table 5-11 OSPF routing table.................................................................................................... 5-6
05PHA00153AAR V
Tables OSPF Functions and Commands
VI 05PHA00153AAR
OSPF Functions and Commands Abbreviations
Abbreviations
10BaseT Ethernet -Standard for local baseband networks, 10 Mbit/s
ABR Autonomous Border Router
AS Autonomous System
ASBR Autonomous System Boundary Router
DCCM Data Communication Channel in the MSOH
DCCR Data Communication Channel in the RSOH
ECC Embedded Control Channel
IDU Indoor Unit
IF Interface
IP Internet Protocol
IR Internal Router
LMT Local MaintenanceTerminal (Service PC)
LSA Link State Advertisement
LSDB Link State Database
MSP Modular Service PC
noadv no advertisement
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
RFC (...) Request for Comment (on Internet Standard)
SOA ServiceOn Access
STM-1 Synchronous Transport Module 155 Mbit/s
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TOS Type of Service
WS Workstation
05PHA00153AAR VII
Abbreviations OSPF Functions and Commands
VIII 05PHA00153AAR
OSPF Functions and Commands OSPF and MDRS
1 OSPF and MDRS

1.1 Introduction
This version of MDRS 155 S and MDRS 155 E Digital Microwave Radio Systems is equipped with a
dynamic IP router. These systems can be monitored and controlled via TCP/IP and are appropriate for
transmitting and routing IP data within TCP/IP networks.
The transmission bandwidth of the IP channel is about 170 kbit/s when using the DCCR and about
360 kbit/s when using the DCCM. The DCCR and DCCM are data channels for transporting management
data in the SOH included in the STM-1 data stream.
The implementation of OSPF is based on OSPF version V2 in compliance with RFC 2328. The IP
protocol is based on IPV4 in compliance with RFC 791.
1.2 IP router
1.2.1 Brief description
In TCP/IP networks, MDRS 155 S and MDRS 155 E Digital Microwave Radio Systems operate as OSPF
routers. Both sides of the Digital Microwave Radio System are working as an IP router each.
The IDU or ECC Gateway of the Digital Microwave Radio System is equipped with a LAN interface and
WAN interface. The LAN interface is made available at a RJ45 port located on the front panel. The WAN
interface is implemented via one of the ECCs over the radio link and is not accessible by the user.
In the OSPF network, the radio link set up via the selected ECC represents a so-called "unnumbered
point-to-point link“ without an own IP address. The static route via the radio link is established
automatically and does not appear in the OSPF routing table. The special feature is that both routers
know the LAN IP address of the far end. Thus, from the logic view a radio link can be considered as one
single router.
LAN LAN
1 10BaseT 10BaseT
2
Radio side
Line side DCCR/DCCM Line side
DCCR/DCC M (ECC) DCCR/DCCM
QD2 QD2
RS-485 RS-485
Fig. 1-1 Router interface
The OSPF router in the MDRS 155 is equipped with
Interface c LAN 10BaseT interface (IDU or ECC Gateway)

Interface d ECC via radio link
The ECC is configured using the LMT or MSP Operator program.
05PHA00153AAR 1-1
OSPF and MDRS OSPF Functions and Commands
1.2.2 Router features
The routers available in the MDRS 155 S and MDRS 155 E are fully functional OSPF routers. They
interact with third-party systems without any problems. Some special features must be taken into
consideration as the MDRS 155 processor executes all management functions for the Digital Microwave
Radio System. The number of possible dynamic routing entries is limited to 2000. Entries exceeding this
maximum will be discarded.
The OSPF router in the MDRS 155 can manage two areas. In addition, static routing entries are possible
which are managed within the AS. The latter permits the OSPF router in the system to be used as
• Internal Router (IR);

• Area Border Router (ABR);
• Autonomous System Boundary Router (ASBR).
When used as ABR, this router also manages a stub area. In stub areas, AS-external LSAs are not
propagated. The OSPF router in the MDRS 155 can also be configured for a so-called "totally stubby“
area. In this case, summary LSAs are no longer imported from the AS.
If static routes are configured despite OSPF, they can be individually assigned attributes determining their
handling and processing in the AS.
1.2.3 Configuration
The OSPF router in the MDRS 155 is configured via the TCP/IP network or serially using a so-called
"embedded" Telnet session in the LMT Operator software or MSP appplication via the serial interface.
Please note that the following parameters can be set both via the LMT and MSP Operator programs:
• IP address of the system;

• Network mask;
• Gateway.
With MDRS 155 S, the passwort can be adjusted only via the SOA Network Management System. The
"User Name" does not have to be set. It is "marconi" in the as-delivered state.
1-2 05PHA00153AAR
OSPF Functions and Commands "Telnet" Command Set
2 "Telnet" Command Set

2.1 Introduction
All "Telnet" commands must be entered in small letters. Confirm each entry by pressing the "Enter" key.
Enter a blank between the command, address and attributes.
Separate the status entry or attribute value by means of a "=" symbol. Do not enter any additional blanks
here.
2.2 Commands of all command levels
Command Command syntax (list of options) Description

help help Shows all available commands
Table 2-1 Commands of all command levels
05PHA00153AAR 2-1
"Telnet" Command Set OSPF Functions and Commands
2.3 Commands of the "Telnet" command level

Command Command syntax Description
(list of options)
arp arp <ip adress> Assignment of the IP address to the MAC address
[-a] [-a] Displays the ARP table;
[-d] [-d] Deletes an entry, e.g. arp -d <ip_addr>;
[-s] [-s] Adds an entry, e.g. arp -s <ip_addr> <eth_addr>;
exit exit Closes a Telnet session (not embedded Telnet session "LMT“).
ifstat ifstat Displays the list of all interfaces.
netstat netstat [-a] [-a] Displays active connections;
[-r] [-r] Displays the Routing table;
[-s] [-s] Displays protocol statistics.
ospf ospf Changes over to the 'ospf' command level.
ping ping <ip address> Sends an ICMP echo request to another IP subscriber.
[timeout] [timeout] Maximum response time
ping -s <ip address> [count] Number of ICMP requests
[count]
route route -a Outputs the Routing table.
uptime uptime Displays as to how long the system has been operating without
a reboot.
traceroute traceroute Outputs the route to a destination address.
[-m <maxhops>] [-m <maxhops>] Sets the "time to live" box (max. number of
hops) in the IP header (1-255);
[-q <nqueries>] [-q <nqueries>] Number of requests (in packets) to be sent;
Prevents fragmentation;
[-f] Set an initial 'time to live' (default: ttl=1);
[-i initial_ttl] Lists ttl values;
[-l] Outputs numeric addresses;
[-n] Maximum number of consecutive ‘timeouts’;
[-Q maxquit] Bypasses normal routing;
[-r] Displays per hop statistics values;
[-S] Verbose mode: delivers more information;
[-v] Delay time between two requests sent to a Cisco router;
[-c stoptime] Specification of a special UDP port for requests;
[-p port] Source IP address;
[-s source_addr] [-t tos] Sets the TOS field in the IP header (0-7);
[-t tos] Sets the waiting time for a response (default: 3 seconds);
[-w waittime] Destination address;
<host> Packet size of ICMP packets to be sent;
[packetsize]
version version Displays the current software version.
reboot reboot now Reboots the ECC Gateway. In consequence, the network
element logs off from the SOA for the duration of the reboot
process. The current Telnet connection is interrupted.
Please note that the OSPF router is also rebooted, i.e. all OSPF
routes will get lost temporarily.
STM-1 signal transmission is not affected.
ipnvconf ipnvconf <cr> Outputs the current setting of the IP address, sub-net mask and
standard Gateway.
[inet <ip-address>] Input of a new IP address, sub-net mask and standard Gateway.
[netmask <netmask>] The parameters can also be applied individually. To activate the
[gw <standard-gateway>] configuration, a "Reboot" must be performed (command: reboot
now).
Table 2-2 Commands of the "Telnet" command level
2-2 05PHA00153AAR
2.4 Commands of the "OSPF" command level

2.4.1 General commands

(list of options)
activate activate Activates all entries and quits the configuration level.
cancel cancel Quits the configuration mode without saving entries made.
config config Changes over to the configuration mode.
load load Downloads the OSPF configuration data to the OSPF kernel.
quit quit Changes over to the OSPF command level.
restart restart Restarts the OSPF process and deletes the LSDB.
save save Saves all current settings.
Table 2-3 Commands of the OSPF command level
2.4.2 OSPF configuration memories

2.4.2.1 OSPF Configuration Memory Management
Three memories are used for storing and managing OSPF configuration data (see Fig. 2-1):
1. The current operating configuration is contained in a volatile RAM.
2. For changing the current operating configuration, an independent configuration memory is available.
The latter is used to intermediately save the new configuration data to the volatile RAM before the
relevant changes are activated.
3. The non-volatile memory stores all configuration data saved and holds these even in case of a power
supply failure.
Command input
Command Line
Interface (CLI)
1 Current RAM
operating configuration
(running config)
activate config
2 Changed
configuration RAM save
(changed config)
load
3
Saved configuration
(saved config)
Non-volatile memory
EEPROM
Fig. 2-1 OSPF configuration memory
The transitions between the different OSPF configuration memories are managed by means of the
appropriate commands of the Command Line Interface (CLI).
05PHA00153AAR 2-3
The configuration data for the current operating configuration are always uploaded from the non-volatile
memory after booting the processor. To ensure that only valid and tested OSPF configuration data are
saved to the non-volatile memory, only data of the currently running operating configuration can be saved
to this memory (command: "Save").
2.4.3 Commands for editing an area

(list of options)
area delete area delete <area address> Deletes an area.
area edit area edit <area Changes an existing area.
attribute address> Configures the selected area as stub area.
[stub=(no|yes)] Summary LSAs can be/must not be imported into the area.
[importsum=(no|yes)] Costs incurring within the stub area.
[stubcost=<integer>]
area add area add <area Adds a new area.
attribute address> Configures the selected area as stub area.
[stub=(no|yes)] Summary LSAs can be/must not be imported into the area.
[importsum=(no|yes)] Costs incurring within the stub area.
[stubcost=<integer>]
area show area show Displays a list of all areas configured.
Table 2-4 Commands for editing an area
2.4.4 Commands for editing interfaces

(list of options)
interface if delete <integer> Deletes the interface at the OSPF level.
delete
interface if edit Edits an existing interface.
edit <integer>
attribute [priority=<integer>] Router priority in the interface network;
[xmt=<integer>] Delay time for sending out LSAs;
[rxmt=<integer>] Interval between the repetition of LSAs;
[hello=<integer>] Hello interval in seconds;
[cost=<integer>] Output-side costs of the interface;
[poll=<integer>] Polling interval between Hello packets after a router has
been identified 'offline';
[dead=<integer>] Dead time interval in seconds;
[passive=(no|yes)] OSPF process at this interface ON/OFF.
interface if add Adds a new interface.

add <integer> <area
attribute address> Router priority in the interface network;
[priority=<integer>] Delay time for sending out LSAs;
[xmt=<integer>] Interval between the repetition of LSAs;
[rxmt=<integer>] Hello interval in seconds;
[hello=<integer>] Output-side costs of the interface;
[cost=<integer>] Polling interval between Hello packets after a router has
[poll=<integer>] been identified 'offline';
Dead time interval in seconds;
[dead=<integer>] OSPF process at this interface ON/OFF.
[passive=(no|yes)]
interface if show Displays a list of all interfaces configured.

show
Table 2-5 Commands for interface editing
2-4 05PHA00153AAR
2.4.5 Commands for editing static routes

(list of options)
route delete route delete Deletes a static route.
route edit route edit Edits an existing static route.

<destination><mask>
attribute [type2=(yes|no)] Fixed costs.
[direct=(yes|no)] If the destination address is part of a locally
attached subnet in which no OSPF runs, use
the „direct=yes“ option. In the local routing
table, the static route is stored as a direct
route, but not distributed over OSPF.
[noadv=(yes|no)] Distributes a static route over OSPF;
no=distributing a static route
yes=not distributing a static route
[cost=<cost>] Route costs
[if=<if>] Interface to be used for routing
(1=LAN; 2=ECC)
route add route add Adds a static route.
<destination><mask><gateway>
attribute [type2=(yes|no)] Assign fixed costs;
[direct=(yes|no)] If the destination address is part of a locally
attached subnet in which no OSPF runs, use
the „direct=yes“ option. In the local routing
table, the static route is stored as a direct
route, but not distributed over OSPF.
[noadv=(yes|no)] Distributes a static route over OSPF;
no=distributing a static route
yes=not distributing a static route
[cost=<cost>] Route costs
[if=<if>] Interface to be used for routing
(1=LAN; 2=ECC)
route show route show Displays a list of all static routes.
Table 2-6 Commands for editing static routes
05PHA00153AAR 2-5
2.4.6 Commands for combining IP networks
Max. 30 entries are possible.

(list of options)
net-range delete net-range delete Deletes IP network combinations
<area address>
<destination><mask>
net-range net-range edit Edits IP network combinations
edit <area address>
<destination>
<mask>
attribute [noadv=(yes|no)] Distributes a IP network combination over OSPF;
no=distributing a IP network combination
yes=not distributing a IP network combination
net-range add net-range add Adds a new IP network combination
<area address>
<destination>
<mask>
attribute [noadv=(yes|no)] Distributes a IP network combination over OSPF;
no=distributing a IP network combination
yes=not distributing a IP network combination
net-range show net-range show Displays a table of all IP network combinations
Table 2-7 Commands for combining IP networks
2.4.7 Commands for configuring a "virtual link"

(list of options)
virtual virtual delete Deletes the virtual link.
delete <area_id><virtual link
neighbor id>
virtual virtual edit Edits an existing virtual link.
edit
attribute <area_id><virtual link
neighbor id>
[xmt=<integer>] Delay time for sending out LSAs
(transmission delay: 1-9999)
[rxmt=<integer>] Interval between the repetition of two LSAs
(retransmit interval: 1-9999)
[hello=<integer>] Hello interval in seconds (1-9999)
[dead=<integer>] Dead time interval in seconds (1-9999)
virtual virtual add Adds a new virtual link.
add (area_id = transit-area)
attribute <area_id><virtual link
neighbor id>
[xmt=<integer>] Delay time for sending out LSAs
(transmission delay: 1-9999)
[rxmt=<integer>] Interval between the repetition of two LSAs
(retransmit interval: 1-9999)
[hello=<integer>] Hello interval in seconds (1-9999)
[dead=<integer>] Dead time interval in seconds(1-9999)
virtual virtual show Displays a list of configured virtual links
show
Table 2-8 Commands for configuring a "virtual link"
2-6 05PHA00153AAR
2.4.8 Commands for changing the "Router ID"

(list of options)
routerid routerid edit Edits the Router ID. The default value is 'auto‘. Thus, the
edit <router id> oder <auto> IP address of the LAN interface is used as Router ID. To
change the Router ID, the appropriate entry must be
made in the IP address format.
routerid routerid show Displays the current value of the Router ID.
show
Table 2-9 Commands for changing the "Router ID"
2.4.9 Commands for AS statistics

(list of options)
stats area stats area Displays a table showing the current status of the area.
stats as- stats as-external Displays LSAs of type 5.
external
stats stats general Displays general router parameters.
general
stats if stats if Displays information on the interfaces.
stata lsa stats lsa <linkstate type> Analyzes a certain LSA.
<linkstate id>
<advertising router>
<area address>
stats lsdb stats lsdb <area address> Displays the LSDB of an area including LSAs of
types 1-4.
stats stats neighbor Displays a table of OSPF neighbors of the interfaces
neighbor available.
stats route stats route Displays the OSPF routing table.
Table 2-10 Commands for AS statistics
05PHA00153AAR 2-7
2-8 05PHA00153AAR
OSPF Functions and Commands Router Connections
3 Router Connections
3.1 "Embedded" Telnet session
3.1.1 LMT
As from version 7.0 onwards, the "LMT“ Operator software supports the "embedded" Telnet session.
Using a serial cable (D-Sub to RJ45), connect your PC to the IDU of the Digital Microwave Radio System.
Start up the LMT and select the "serial" connection type option.
The LMT password is <lmt> (default).

The MDRS 155 S password is <marconi> (default).
In case of an online session, you can press the appropriate menu bar icon for activating the "Embedded"
Telnet session. To access the OSPF router from the LMT, you require no additional password. The main
menu will be displayed immediately.
3.1.2 MSP
From Application 1.23 onwards, the "MSP“ Operator software supports the "embedded" Telnet session.
Using a serial cable (D-Sub to D-Sub), connect your PC to the ECC Gateway in the OHAU of the MDRS
155 E. Start up the SISA network driver and then the Network Manager.
Select the MDRS 155 system and call up the Equipment View. Select the OHAU by mouse-click. In the
ECC Gateway module, call up the "Command input" menu item under "Management - Configuration". To
access the OSPF router from the MSP, you require no additional password. The main menu will be
displayed immediately.
3.2 Telnet session via a Windows PC

The PC is connected to the TCP/IP network via a network port. If the required MDRS system is not
located in the same network as your PC, you must enter a route in the latter which indicates the Gateway
that can be used to address the MDRS.
Execute the following work steps:
1. Click the "Start Æ Programs Æ MS-DOS input” menu items.

2. Type in <telnet [IP address]> Æ The Telnet session starts.
3. Login: admin (default).
3.3 Telnet session via workstation

The workstation (WS) is connected to the TCP/IP network via a network port. If the required MDRS
system is not located in the same network as your workstation, you must enter a route in the latter which
indicates the Gateway that can be used to address the MDRS.
1. Open command shell (dtterm).

2. Telnet < IP address > Æ The Telnet session starts.
3. Login: admin
4. Password: marconi (default).
05PHA00153AAR 3-1
Router Connections OSPF Functions and Commands
3-2 05PHA00153AAR
OSPF Functions and Commands Configuration Help
4 Configuration Help
4.1 Introduction
First of all the following IP configurations must be made using the LMT or MSP Operator software:
• IP address setting
• Network mask setting
• Gateway setting
The information required for these settings is supplied by your network administrator.
Note: In an OSPF network, a Gateway is normally not necessary.

Thus, the Gateway entry is <0.0.0.0>.
4.2 Logging in
Access to the MDRS router is possible serially using the LMT or MSP Operator software, via the TCP/IP
network using a PC (Windows, Linux) or via a workstation.
After setup of a connection to the MDRS router in a "Telnet" session, enter the user name "admin“ and
the password. The user name "admin“ cannot be changed. The default password is "marconi“. This
password can be changed only by the network administrator from the SOA Network Management
System.
After completion of the login process, the prompt appears in the form of the IP address of the system and
the "Telnet" note. You are now in the main menu of the "Command Line Interface“.
4.3 Static routes

Static routes can be entered only via the OSPF level. The MDRS router is an OSPF router. Static routes
also have OSPF attributes.
In the main menu, enter the command
<ospf>
to change over to the OSPF command level.

Here you only have read-only access.
Using the command
<config>
you can activate the configuration mode for the OSPF router.
Note: Do not make any entries if you do not have a network plan or configuration order.
To add a static route, enter the following command:
<route add [destination network] [network mask] [Gateway]>.
05PHA00153AAR 4-1
Configuration Help OSPF Functions and Commands
To activate your entries, enter the
<activate>
command. Then click the
<save>
button to save the changes you have made. After the saving process, you are again at the OSPF
command level with read-only access.
If you want to quit the OSPF configuration mode without saving your entries, click the
<cancel>
button.
4.4 Dynamic OSPF routing

With OSPF routers, dynamic routes are entered and managed automatically. Using the OSPF
configuration parameters, the administrator only defines the way the router shall work in the AS and the
role it shall play.
Note: Do not make any entries if you do not have a network plan or configuration order.
Start out from the OSPF command level as described in the "Static routes" section and activate the
configuration mode.
<ospf>
<config>
Work step 1
With the MDRS router, active OSPF by entering the following command:
<area add [A.B.C.D]>
An area 2 is - for example - described with area ID 0.0.0.2. The specification of one area is sufficient if the
router shall be used as "Internal Router" (IR).
To use the MDRS router as "Area Border Router" (ABR), a second area ID must be entered according to
the same principle.
Enter the
<area show>
command to call up a list of the areas entered.
To assign an area a certain attribute different from the default settings, this attribute can be edited by
means of the following command:
<area edit [A.B.C.D] [attribute]=yes/no>
4-2 05PHA00153AAR
OSPF Functions and Commands Configuration Help
Work step 2
Both interfaces of the MDRS router must now be assigned to the area(s). One IDU of the MDRS serves
two interfaces. Interface 1 is the LAN interface (RJ45), interface 2 the ECC channel. Since the latter is
physically served by the system, it cannot be accessed by the user.
Using the command
<if add 1 [A.B.C.D]>
the LAN interface is assigned to the area with ID <A.B.C.D>.
Using the command
<if add 2 [A.B.C.D]>
the ECC interface is assigned to the area with ID <A.B.C.D>.
Using the command
<if show>
you can request a list of all interfaces entered.
To assign an interface an attribute different from the default settings, this attribute can be changed - for
example - at the LAN interface by entering the following command:
<if edit 1 [attribute]=[value]>.
To activate your entries, use the
<activate>
command. Then click the
<save>
button to save all changes made. After the saving process, you are again at the OSPF command level
with read-only access.
If you want to quit the OSPF configuration mode without saving your entries, click the
<cancel>
button.
05PHA00153AAR 4-3
Configuration Help OSPF Functions and Commands
4-4 05PHA00153AAR
OSPF-Funktioinen und -Befehle Status Tables
5 Status Tables
5.1 Configurations in the AS
5.1.1 Interface assignment
Using the <if show> command, you can request a list of interface assignments. If the table displayed is
empty, the system has not yet been configured for the OSPF environment.
if area_id priority xmt rxmt hello cost dead poll passive

1 0.0.0.2 1 100 100 10 5 40 60 no
2 0.0.0.2 1 100 100 10 1 40 60 no
Table 5-1 Interface assignments
if: Interface number (1=LAN, 2= ECC).

area_id: Number of the areas to which the interface is assigned.
priority: Priority of the router interface in the assigned network.
xmt: Delay time in seconds for sending out LSAs.
rxmt: Interval in seconds between the repetition of LSAs.
hello: Interval in seconds between two "Hello" packets.
cost: Output-side costs of the interface.
dead: Interval until an OSPF network subscriber is deleted from the dynamic routes.
poll: Polling interval in seconds between "Hello" packets after a router has been identified 'offline'
(procedure for restoring communication).
passive: If this parameter is set to "yes”, the configured OSPF interface does not participate
in the information exchange of the routers available in a network.
5.1.2 Area parameters
Using the <area show> command, you can request a list of all areas configured. If the table displayed is
empty, the system has not yet been configured for the OSPF environment. Max. two area entries are
possible.
area_id stub Stubcost Import_summs

0.0.0.2 No 1 No
Table 5-2 Area parameters
area_id: Area number configured in the system.

stub: Stub area (yes/no); area into which AS-external LSAs are not propagated.
stubcost Costs of the default route for substitution of external routes.
import_summs: Import of summary LSAs (yes/no).
05PHA00153AAR 5-1
Status Tables OSPF-Funktionen und -Befehle
5.1.3 Static routes
Using the <route show> command, you can request a list of all static routes configured.
net mask Gateway type2 direct noadv cost if

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 yes no yes 60 0
191.3.0.0 255.255.0.0 172.28.138.4 yes no no 60 1
Table 5-3 Routing table of static routes
net: IP address of the destination network

mask: Network mask of the destination network
gateway: The destination network is addressable via this Gateway.
type2: Fixed costs are charged for the static route (yes/no).
direct: The Gateway belongs to a locally connected sub-network without OSPF.
The static route is listed in the local Routing table, but is not imported in the OSPF.
noadv: This route is propagated in the OSPF; Note: (no= yes, yes=no).
cost: Costs of this static route
if: This route passes interface 1=LAN or 2=ECC or 0=internal.
5.1.4 Combined IP networks
Using the <net-range show> command, you can request a list of existing IP network combinations. If the
table displayed is empty, there are no 'net ranges'.
area_id Net mask noadv

0.0.0.2 191.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 no
Table 5-4 Net range
area_id: Area number of the area in which networks are combined.
net Network address of the IP network combination
mask: Network mask of the IP network combination
noadv: Indicates whether this IP network address is propagated by the router or not.
Please note the following: no= yes, yes=no.
5.1.5 Virtual links
Using the <virtual show> command, you can request a list of existing virtual links. If the table displayed
is empty, there are no virtual links configured.
area_id router_id xmt rxmt hello dead

0.0.0.2 191.1.2.3 100 100 10 40
Table 5-5 Virtual links
area_id: Area number of the transit area

xmt: Delay time in seconds for sending out LSAs
rxmt: Interval in seconds between the repetition of two LSAs
hello: Interval in seconds between two "Hello" packets.
dead: Interval until an "OSPF” network subscriber is deleted from the dynamic routing table.
5-2 05PHA00153AAR
5.2 Requesting statistics data

5.2.1 Overview
The overview supplies a list of all statistics data that can be requested.
stats area <area ID>

stats as-external
stats general
stats if
stats lsa <ls_type> <ls_id> <adv_rtr> <area_id>
stats lsdb <area-id>
stats neighbor
stats route
5.2.2 Examples of system responses

5.2.2.1 Area overview
Using the <stats area> command, you can request information on the area.
Area ID #Ifcs #Routers #LSAs Xsum Comments

0.0.0.2 2 4 10 0x478e7
Table 5-6 Area overview
Area_ID: Area number

#Ifc: Interface of the router in this area
#Router: Number of routers available in an area (a Digital Microwave Radio System also being counted as a
router)
#LSA Number of LSAs of types 1-4 in this area
Xsum: Checksum
5.2.2.2 Overview of external routes
Using the <stats as-external> command, you can request a list of all type 5 LSAs available.
Type LS_ID ADV_RTR Seqno Xsum Age

5 191.50.0.0 191.6.0.8 0x80000087 0x1d78 585
Table 5-7 AS-external LSAs
Type: LSA type; 5= AS-external

LS_ID: Link state ID; destination network of the external static route
ADV_RTR: LSA source
Seqno: Sequence number
Xsum: Checksum
Age: Age of the LSA
05PHA00153AAR 5-3
5.2.2.3 Overview of the router configuration
Using the <stats general> command, you can request the system database of the router.
OSPF Router ID: 191.3.0.4 # AS-external-LSAs: 102

ASE checksum: 0x30df6d # ASEs originated: 0
ASEs allowed: 0 # Dijkstras: 129
# Areas: 1 # Nbrs in Exchange: 0
MOSPF enabled: no Inter-area multicast: no
Inter-AS multicast: no In overflow state: no
ospfd version: 2.16
5.2.2.4 Overview of the interface configuration
Using the <stats if> command, you can request a table showing all interface data.
Phy Addr Area Type State #Nbr #Adj Cost

LAN 191.3.0.4 0.0.0.2 Bcast DR 1 1 1
ECC 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.2 P-P P-P 1 1 1
Table 5-8 Interface configuration
Phy: LAN/LAN interface; ECC/Radio

Addr.: IP address
Area: This interface belongs to the area.
Type: Bcast/Broadcast; P-P/Point-to-Point
State: Router function in this network
#Nbr: Number of neighbors
#Adj: Number of OSPF neighbors
Cost: Costs of this interface
5.2.2.5 Overview of the link state database
Using the <stats lsdb> command, you can request the LSDB (Link State Database) table.
Type LS_ID ADV_RTR Seqno Xsum Age

1 191.3.0.3 191.3.0.3 0x8000056a 0x782f 210
1 191.3.0.4 191.3.0.4 0x80000439 0x4db3 540
1 191.4.0.6 191.4.0.6 0x8000009c 0x7322 1293
1 191.6.0.8 191.6.0.8 0x800005f1 0x4308 850
2 191.3.0.4 191.3.0.4 0x80000096 0x8703 1540
2 191.4.0.8 191.6.0.8 0x8000013a 0x4f7f 850
3 172.28.138.0 191.3.0.3 0x8000008b 0xb4df 210
3 191.1.0.0 191.3.0.3 0x80000087 0x0822 210
3 192.168.2.0 191.3.0.3 0x80000087 0x8019 210
4 191.1.0.2 191.3.0.3 0x8000008a 0xdf44 210
# LSAs: 10*
Table 5-9 Link State Database
5-4 05PHA00153AAR
Type: LSA type; 1=Router LSA, 2=IP network LSA, 3= Network summary LSA, 4=ASBR
Summary LSA; note: LSAs of type 5 are not displayed in the LSDB and can be requested
by means of the <stats as-external> command.
LS_ID: This LSA contains information on ....
ADV_RTR: This LSA has been sent by ...
Seqno: Sequence no. of this LSA
Xsum: Checksum of this LSA
Age: Age of this LSA in seconds
* Number of LSAs stored in the database
5.2.2.6 Analysis of a LSA
Using the <stats lsa [type] [LS_ID] [ADV_RTR] [area_ID]> command, you can request a table
displaying the contents of this LSA.
Note: It is reasonable and recommended to request the overview of the LSDB first, in order
to be able to select a certain LSA.
Link State ID: 191.3.0.3

Advert. Rtr.: 191.3.0.3
LS Seqno: 0x8000056a
LS Xsum: 0x782f
LS Length: 36
// Router-LSA body
Router type: 0x1
# links: 1
// Link #0
Link ID: 191.3.0.4
Link Data: 191.3.0.3
Link type: 2
# TOS metrics: 0
Link cost: 5
5.2.2.7 Overview of OSPF neighbors
Using the <stats neighbor> command, you can request a table giving an overview of the OSPF
neighbors of the interfaces.
Phy Addr ID State #DD #Rq #Rxmt

LAN 191.3.0.3 191.3.0.3 Full 0 0 0
ECC 191.4.0.6 191.4.0.6 Full 0 0 0
Table 5-10 OSPF neighbors
Phy: Physical interface

Addr: IP address of the neighbor of this interface
ID: Router ID
State: Negotiation status with the OSPF neighbor
Full=complete (neighbor has the 'full adjacent' status)
#DD: Number of 'Database Description' LSAs still to be sent to the neighbor
#Rq: Number of 'Link State Requests' still to be sent to the neighbor
#Rxmt: Number of repetitions sent
05PHA00153AAR 5-5
5.2.2.8 Overview of the routing table
Using the <stats route> command, you can call up the OSPF routing table.
Prefix Type Cost Ifc Next-hop Mpaths

172.28.138.0/24 SPFIA 6 LAN 191.3.0.3
191.5.0.0/16 SPF 7 ECC 0.0.0.2
191.50.0.0/16 SPFE2 20 ECC 0.0.0.2
Table 5-11 OSPF routing table
Prefix: IP address of the destination network

Type: Route type; SPFIA = Inter-area; SPF = Intra-area; SPFE = External route
(static route outside the AS)
Cost: Costs of this route
Ifc: Interfaces used for this route
Next-hop: This route can be addressed using IP address ...
Mpaths: Number of routes in this destination network with the same costs.
5-6 05PHA00153AAR
OSPF Functions and Commands Complementary Explications
6 Complementary Explications
6.1 "Virtual link" using the MDRS 155 Digital Microwave Radio
System
6.1.1 "Unnumbered" interface
Each IDU of the MDRS 155 Digital Microwave Radio System operates as an independent router. Only the
LAN interface has an IP address. The WAN connection to the far end contained in the STM-1 data stream
is implemented via an "unnumbered“ IP connection in the ECC (see section 1.2.1).
When planning the "virtual link“ using the MDRS 155 system, please note that the path of the "virtual link"
is not routed via this "unnumbered“ point-to-point connection. This means that a LAN interface of the
MDRS 155 system is always adjacent to the "transit area". This only applies if the Digital Microwave
Radio System assumes the function of an ABR or ASBR.
6.1.2 "Demand circuit"
If a "virtual link" is configured between the MDRS 155 and a Cisco router, it represents a "demand circuit"
in compliance with RFC1793 between the two routers after termination of the negotiation.
Normally, "hello" packets whose frequency depends on the adjusted "hello" interval time are also sent out
on a "virtual link". In case of a "demand circuit", "hello packets" are no longer sent out after termination of
the negotiation of the two ABRs. This means that the setting of the "hello" interval time and "dead time"
interval time are relevant only during the initial negotiations necessary for generating the "virtual link".
This process is initiated automatically by a Cisco router and accepted and processed by the MDRS 155
Digital Microwave Radio System. The MDRS 155 Digital Microwave Radio System does not initiate a
"demand circuit".
6.1.3 Router ID
The router ID can be set in the MDRS 155 Digital Microwave Radio System. In the factory setting
(default), the router ID is "auto", i.e. the adjusted IP address is also used as router ID.
On configuration of the "virtual link", the "virtual link" neighbor is basically addressed with its router ID. If
the router ID is changed after configuration of a "virtual link", the link will not exist any longer.
05PHA00153AAR 6-1
Complementary Explications OSPF Functions and Commands
6.2 Uploading and downloading router data
6.2.1 Router data upload
6.2.1.1 MDRS 155 S with LMT

With MDRS 155 S, the router data are saved to the Master IDU MIB.
After connecting the LMT to MDRS 155 S, call up the Equipment view. Using the right mouse button, click
the CPU. From the menu displayed, select the "Database" and "Upload" menu items.
In the mask that appears, enter a filename and click the "Save" button. The upload window appears.
Choose the "Start" button. At the end of the upload process, the MIB is located in the required
destination.
6.2.1.2 MDRS 155 E with MSP

The upload of the router configuration can also be executed locally using the MSP. In this case, the
backup is performed in the SISA-0 function group. From the list box displayed, select the "Management"
option. Then click the "File transfer" menu item.
In the mask that appears, click the "Upload" button. Then select the directory containing system software
2.3. Here you can find the ECCMDBUP.ctl. control file. Select this file and start up the upload process by
clicking the "Start" buttton. After completion of the upload process, close the window. A file named
mdb.zib is now contained in the system directory.
Note: If it is necessary to create individual filenames, the filename must be either edited directly or
changed already in the ECCMDBUP.ctl. When doing this, please note the convention of older Windows
Systems 8.3 (filename: max. 8 digits, file type: 3 digits). For making a download, an appropriately
changed ECCMDBDN.ctl must be available. We recommend a systematic archiving of router data by
means of SOA.
6.2.1.3 MDRS 155 S with SOA

Uploading the router data from MDRS 155 S is remotely possible via SOA. Please note that the
configuration of the IP router must be included in the microwave radio system MIB.
In the QD2 address list or Topology view, call up the icon for the required MDRS 155 S system. Activate
the "Editing" mode in the "Admin" menu. Then select the "Configuration – Basic functions" option. From
the menu items offered, select "MIB transfer".
In the mask displayed, highlight the "Upload" option and click the "Execute" button. The MIB is saved
automatically by SOA under the Ref-ID of the corresponding network element.
6.2.1.4 MDRS 155 E with SOA

Uploading the router data from MDRS 155 E is possible remotely via SOA. Please note that only the IP
router configuration data are saved and no other system data.
In the QD2 address list or Topology view, call up the icon for the required MDRS 155 E system. Activate
In the mask displayed, highlight the "Upload" option and click the "Execute" button. The MIB is saved
automatically by SOA under the Ref-ID of the corresponding network element.
6-2 05PHA00153AAR
OSPF Functions and Commands Complementary Explications
6.2.2 Router data download
6.2.2.1 MDRS 155 S with LMT

With MDRS 155 S, router data are downloaded using the microwave radio system MIB.
After connecting the LMT to MDRS 155 S, call up the Equipment view. Using the right mouse button, click
the CPU. From the menu displayed, select the "Database" and "Download" menu items.
In the mask that appears, select the required filename and click the "Open" button. The download window
appears. Choose the "Start" button. At the end of the download process, the MIB is loaded in the network
element.
6.2.2.2 MDRS 155 E with MSP

The download of the router configuration can also be executed locally using the MSP. In this case, the
transfer takes place in the SISA-0 function group. From the list box displayed, select the "Management"
option. Then click the "File transfer" menu item.
In the mask that appears, click the "Download" button. Then select the directory containing system
software 2.3. Here you can find the ECCMDBDN.ctl* control file. Select this file and start up the download
process by clicking the "Start" buttton. The download bar displayed shows the progress of the download
process. After completion of the download, close the window.
*or any individual control file
6.2.2.3 MDRS 155 S with SOA

Downloading the router data to MDRS 155 S is possible remotely via SOA. Besides the router data, the
MDRS 155 S MIB also contains all other network element settings.
In the QD2 address list or Topology view, call up the icon for the required MDRS 155 S system. Activate
In the mask displayed, highlight the "Download" option and click the "Execute" button. The MIB is called
up automatically by SOA under the Ref-ID of the corresponding network element. If no file is available, a
"Not available" message appears.
6.2.2.4 MDRS 155 E with SOA
Downloading the router data to MDRS 155 E is possible remotely via SOA. Please note that only the IP
router configuration data are downloaded and no other system data.
In the QD2 address list or Topology view, call up the icon for the required MDRS 155 E system. Activate
In the mask displayed, highlight the "Download" option and click the "Execute" button. The MIB is called
up automatically by SOA under the Ref-ID of the corresponding network element. If no file is available, a
"Not available" message appears.
05PHA00153AAR 6-3
Complementary Explications OSPF Functions and Commands
6-4 05PHA00153AAR

Mdrs 155

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mdrs 155

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mdrs 155

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Digital Microwave Radio

Marconi, Marconi Communications, das Marconi Logo,

Marconi Communications GmbH

Marconi, Marconi Communications, the Marconi logo,

OM version Register Reason for update

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

2 Mounting Instructions 05PHA00151AAM

4 OSPF Functions and 05PHA00153AAR

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

Marconi, Marconi Communications, das Marconi Logo,

Marconi Communications GmbH

Marconi, Marconi Communications, the Marconi logo,

System Family and Equipment Designations...................................XIII

1 New Generation of Microwave Radio Systems ...........................1-1

2 Short Description ...........................................................................2-1

3.1.2 2xSTM-1 features ........................................................................................................... 3-2

4 Local Maintenance Terminal......................................................... 4-1

4.3 Modem link ........................................................................................................................... 4-5

5 MDRS 155 S System in the Data Communication Network ........5-1

6 Technical Characteristics (Typical Values) .................................6-1

6.8.1 Systems with ODU S .................................................................................................... 6-15

7 Ordering Information ..................................................................... 7-1

7.3 Outdoor Units ODU LX and accessories ......................................................................... 7-23

8 Service Instructions .......................................................................8-1

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

Fig. 1-1 Assignment of SOH and POH bytes ............................................................................... 1-2

Fig. 3-6 Filter box BB ..................................................................................................................... 3-8

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

nc. not connected

System Family and Equipment Designations

System MDRS 155 S = System designation

MDRS 155/...... - 128 MLQAM S = Equipment designation (up to Release 3)

MDRS 155/...... - 16 MLQAM CS = Equipment designation (Release 4 and higher)

MDRS 155/...... - 16 MLQAM KS exp. = Equipment designation (Release 4 and higher)

MDRS 155/...... - 16 MLQAM KS = Equipment designation (Release 4 and higher)

MDRS 155/...... - 16 MLQAM MXS = Equipment designation (Release 5 and higher)

MDRS 155/...... - 16 MLQAM EXS = Equipment designation (planned)

In case of special country-specific versions, the equipment designations are

Equipment designation Components

The ODUs of version 3 have an integrated channel filter. Optionally, it is possible

Designation Document type Document number

The MDRS 155 S Digital Microwave Radio System, Release 4 with

Equipment designation Components

MDRS 155/18700-16 MLQAM CS - ODU 155/18700-EDM S with filter box 18BB

xxx = LBT or UBT; y = 1, 2, ...

Equipment designation Components

MDRS 155/18700-16 MLQAM KS exp. - ODU 155/18700-EDM S with filter 18-16BU/xxx

Equipment designation Components

xxx = Channel number, e.g. 12a

Equipment designation Components

MDRS 155/18700-16 MLQAM MXS - ODU 18 xxx-y LMX (planned)

Equipment designation Components

MDRS 155/18700-16 MLQAM EXS 1

This page has been left blank for editorial reasons.

1 New Generation of Microwave Radio Systems

1.1 SDH Digital Microwave Radio Systems from Marconi

Based on many years of experience in microwave radio technology, Marconi

• Long-haul transmission systems

• Short-haul transmission systems